Contents

Introduction
FHEM command types
Device specification
Attributes

FHEM commands
apptime   attr   backup   cancel   cmdalias   configdb   copy   count   createlog   CULflash   define   defmod   delete   deleteattr   deletereading   displayattr   fhemdebug   fheminfo   get   help   HMtemplate   IF   include   inform   JsonList2   KNX_scan   list   modify   MSG   notice   quit   reload   rename   rereadcfg   restore   save   search   set   setdefaultattr   setreading   setstate   setuuid   show   shutdown   sleep   template   trigger   update   uptime   usb   version   XmlList  

Device modules
global
AirUnit   alexa   ALL4027   allergy   AMADCommBridge   AMADDevice   AndroidDB   AndroidDBHost   AptToDate   Aqicn   ArduCounter   Arlo   Aurora   AutomowerConnect   AutoShuttersControl   BDKM   BEOK   BlinkCamera   BOSEST   BOTVAC   BRAVIA   Broadlink   BS   Calendar   CALVIEW   CanOverEthernet   CM11   CO20   COE_Node   ComfoAir   CUL   CUL_EM   CUL_FHTTK   CUL_HM   CUL_HOERMANN   CUL_IR   CUL_MAX   CUL_REDIRECT   CUL_RFR   CUL_TCM97001   CUL_TX   CUL_WS   dash_dhcp   DENON_AVR   DENON_AVR_ZONE   DFPlayerMini   DLNARenderer   DoorBird   Dooya   DUOFERN   DUOFERNSTICK   DWD_OpenData   EC3000   echodevice   ECMD   ECMDDevice   EGPM   EGPM2LAN   EleroDrive   EleroStick   EleroSwitch   ElsnerWS   EM   EMEM   EMGZ   EMT7110   EMWZ   ENECSYSGW   ENECSYSINV   ENIGMA2   EnOcean   EQ3BT   ESA2000   ESCVP21net   EseraAnalogInOut   EseraCount   EseraDigitalInOut   EseraDimmer   EseraIButton   EseraMulti   EseraOneWire   EseraShutter   EseraTemp   ESPEasy   ESPEInk   fakeRoku   FBAHA   FBAHAHTTP   FBDECT   FHT   FHT8V   FHZ   FLAMINGO   FRAMEBUFFER   FReplacer   FRITZBOX   FRM   FRM_AD   FRM_I2C   FRM_IN   FRM_OUT   FRM_PWM   FRM_RGB   FRM_ROTENC   FRM_SERVO   FRM_STEPPER   FS10   FS20   FTUISRV   FULLY   GAEBUS   GardenaSmartBridge   GardenaSmartDevice   gassistant   GFPROBT   GHoma   GOOGLECAST   harmony   HEATRONIC   HEOSGroup   HEOSMaster   HEOSPlayer   Hideki   HMCCU   HMCCUCHN   HMCCUDEV   HMCCURPCPROC   HMLAN   HMS   HMUARTLGW   holiday   HOMBOT   HP1000   HProtocolGateway   HProtocolTank   HTTPAPI   HTTPMOD   HTTPSRV   HUEBridge   HUEDevice   HusqvarnaAutomower   HVAC_DaikinAC   HXB   HXBDevice   HYDRAWISE   Hyperion   I2C_ADS1x1x   I2C_BH1750   I2C_BME280   I2C_BMP180   I2C_DS1307   I2C_EEPROM   I2C_EMC1001   I2C_HDC1008   I2C_K30   I2C_LCD   I2C_LM75A   I2C_MCP23008   I2C_MCP23017   I2C_MCP342x   I2C_MMA845X   I2C_PCA9532   I2C_PCA9685   I2C_PCF8574   I2C_SHT21   I2C_SHT3x   I2C_TSL2561   Iluminize   IOhomecontrol   IOhomecontrolDevice   IPCAM   IPWE   IT   Itach_IR   Itach_IRDevice   Jabber   JawboneUp   JeeLink   JSONMETER   JsonMod   KeyValueProtocol   Klafs   km200   KM273   KNX   KNXIO   KNXTUL   KODI   KOPP_FC   KOSTALPIKO   KS300   LaCrosse   LaCrosseGateway   LaMetric2   Level   LGTV_IP12   LGTV_WebOS   LIGHTIFY   LIRC   livetracking   LuftdatenInfo   LUXTRONIK2   M232   M232Counter   M232Voltage   mailcheck   MAX   MAX_Temperature   MAXLAN   MEDIAPORTAL   MieleAtHome   MilightBridge   MilightDevice   MOBILEALERTS   MOBILEALERTSGW   Modbus   ModbusAttr   ModbusElsnerWS   ModbusSET   ModbusTrovis5576   MPD   MQTT   MQTT2_CLIENT   MQTT2_DEVICE   MQTT2_SERVER   MQTT_DEVICE   MQTT_GENERIC_BRIDGE   MSGFile   MSGMail   MYSENSORS   MYSENSORS_DEVICE   N4HBUS   N4HMODULE   Nello   netatmo   NetIO230B   Netzer   NetzerI2C   Netzfrequenz   Neuron   NeuronPin   NEUTRINO   Nextion   Nmap   NotifyAndroidTV   npmjs   NUKIBridge   NUKIDevice   NUT   OBIS   OctoPrint   OilFox   ONKYO_AVR   ONKYO_AVR_ZONE   OPENWEATHER   OREGON   OW2S0SMSGUARD   OWAD   OWCOUNT   OWDevice   OWID   OWLCD   OWMULTI   OWServer   OWSWITCH   OWTHERM   OWVAR   OWX   OWX_ASYNC   OWX_CCC   OWX_FRM   OWX_SER   OWX_TCP   panStamp   PCA301   PHC   PHILIPS_AUDIO   PHTV   PIFACE   pilight   pilight_contact   pilight_ctrl   pilight_dimmer   pilight_raw   pilight_smoke   pilight_switch   pilight_temp   ping   PIONEERAVR   PIONEERAVRZONE   PiXtendV2   plex   Plugwise   POKEYS   PrecipitationSensor   PROPLANTA   Pushbullet   PushNotifier   Pushover   Pushsafer   PW_Circle   PW_Scan   PW_Sense   PW_Switch   PWM   PWMR   PylonLowVoltage   QRCode   Revolt   RFXCOM   RFXMETER   RFXX10REC   RHASSPY   Robonect   RPI_1Wire   RPI_GPIO   RPII2C   rssFeed   S7   S7_ARead   S7_AWrite   S7_Client   S7_DRead   S7_DWrite   S7_S5Client   S7_S7Client   SamsungAV   Schellenberg   SchellenbergHandle   SCIVT   SD_BELL   SD_GT   SD_RSL   SD_UT   SD_WS   SD_WS07   SD_WS09   SD_WS_Maverick   serviced   ShareMaster   Shares   SHC   SHCdev   Shelly   ShellyMonitor   Signalbot   SIGNALduino   SIGNALduino_un   siri   SIS_PMS   SISPM   SMAEM   SMAEVCharger   SMAInverter   SmartMeterP1   SMARTMON   SmartPi   SMASTP   SML   Snapcast   SolarEdgeAPI   SolarForecast   SOMFY   SONOS   SONOSPLAYER   speedtest   Spotify   SSCal   SSCam   SSCamSTRM   SSChatBot   SSFile   STACKABLE   STACKABLE_CC   STV   SVDRP   SWAP   SWAP_0000002200000003   SWAP_0000002200000008   SYSMON   SYSSTAT   systemd_watchdog   TA_CMI_JSON   tahoma   TBot_List   TCM   TechemHKV   TechemWZ   TEK603   TelegramBot   TellStick   TeslaPowerwall2AC   THINKINGCLEANER   THZ   Timer   todoist   TPLinkHS110   tradfri   TRAFFIC   TRX   TRX_ELSE   TRX_LIGHT   TRX_SECURITY   TRX_WEATHER   TUL   UbiquitiMP   UbiquitiOut   UBUS_CALL   UBUS_CLIENT   Unifi   UnifiClient   UnifiProtect   UnifiSwitch   UnifiVideo   UNIRoll   USBWX   USF1000   UWZ   Vallox   VBUSDEV   VBUSIF   VCLIENT   VCONTROL   Verkehrsinfo   VIERA   vitoconnect   VolumeLink   Weather   WifiLight   WINCONNECT   withings   WMBUS   WS2000   WS300   WS3600   WS980   Wunderground   WWO   X10   XiaomiBTLESens   XiaomiDevice   xs1Bridge   xs1Dev   YAMAHA_AVR   YAMAHA_BD   YAMAHA_MC   YAMAHA_NP   yowsup   ZM_Monitor   ZoneMinder   ZWave   ZWCUL   ZWDongle  

Helper modules
Alarm   alarmclock   allowed   archetype   Astro   at   autocreate   average   Babble   cloneDummy   configDB   CustomReadings   Dashboard   DbLog   DbRep   dewpoint   DOIF   DOIFtools   DSBMobile   dummy   ElectricityCalculator   eventTypes   expandJSON   FB_CALLLIST   FB_CALLMONITOR   feels_like   FHEM2FHEM   FhemTestUtils   FHEMWEB   FileLog   FLOORPLAN   freezemon   GasCalculator   GEOFANCY   GoogleAuth   GSI   GUEST   HCS   Heating_Control   HMinfo   HOMEMODE   HourCounter   InfluxDBLogger   InfoPanel   inotify   Installer   KM271   LightScene   Log2Syslog   logProxy   MaxScanner   MediaList   monitoring   msgConfig   msgDialog   notify   PachLog   PET   PID20   PostMe   powerMap   PRESENCE   rain   RandomTimer   readingsChange   readingsGroup   readingsHistory   readingsProxy   readingsWatcher   remotecontrol   RESIDENTS   ROLLO   ROOMMATE   RSS   sequence   SingleFileLog   SIP   SoftliqCloud   statistics   structure   SUNRISE_EL   SVG   Talk2Fhem   telnet   Text2Speech   THRESHOLD   TrashCal   Twilight   Utils   watchdog   Watches   WaterCalculator   weblink   WeekdayTimer   weekprofile   WOL   WUup   YAAHM  

Perl specials
Regexp
gnuplot file syntax

Introduction

FHEM is mainly used for home automation, but it is suitable for other tasks too, where notification, timers and logging plays an important role.

It supports different hardware devices to interface with certain protocols (e.g. FHZ1000PC to interface FS20 and HMS, CM11 to access X10), and logical devices like FS20 or FHT to digest the messages for a certain device type using this protocol.

FHEM is modular. The different devices are represented through modules which implement certain functions (e.g. define, get, set). Even seemingly integral parts of FHEM like triggers (notify) and timers (at) are implemented this way, giving the possibility to replace/extend this functionality.

FHEM is controlled through readable / ascii commands, which are specified in files (e.g. the configuration file), or issued over a TCP/IP connection, either directly in a telnet session, with a fhem.pl in client mode or from one of the web frontends.

When starting the server you have to specify a configuration file:

perl fhem.pl fhem.cfg

A reasonable minimal configuration file looks like:

    attr global logfile log/fhem.log
    attr global modpath .
    attr global statefile log/fhem.save
    define telnetPort telnet 7072 global
    define WEB FHEMWEB 8083 global

Note: the last two lines are optional and assume you wish to use the builtin telnet and WEB interface.

The web interface can be reached at
http://<fhemhost>:8083

TCP/IP communication with FHEM can either happen in a "session" (via telnet) or single client command (via fhem.pl). Example:
telnet <fhemhost> 7072
<NL> (This newline switches into "prompt" mode)
<command>...
quit

or
fhem.pl <fhemhost>:7072 "<fhem-command>" "..."

If a OS-user called fhem exists, and FHEM is started as root, FHEM will automatically change to to this user via setuid.

If FHEM is started with the -d option (perl fhem.pl -d fhem.cfg), then the verbose level is set to 5 and the logfile is redirected to the STDOUT.

The environment variable FHEM_GLOBALATTR is evaluated: it consists of space separated name=value pairs, where name is a global attribute. Values from this source override values set in the configuration file.

FHEM command types

There are three types of commands: "FHEM" commands (described in this document), shell commands (they must be enclosed in double quotes ") and perl expressions (enclosed in curly brackets {}). shell commands or perl expressions are needed for complex at or notify arguments, but can also issued as a "normal" command.

E.g. the following three commands all do the same when issued from a telnet prompt:

set lamp off
"fhem.pl 7072 "set lamp off""
{fhem("set lamp off")}


Shell commands will be executed in the background, perl expressions and FHEM commands will be executed in the main "thread". In order to make perl expressions easier to write, some special functions and variables are available. See the section Perl special for a description. To trigger FHEM commands from a shell script (this is the "other way round"), use the client form of fhem.pl (described above).

Multiple FHEM commands are separated by semicolon (;). In order to use semicolon in perl code or shell programs, they have to be escaped by the double semicolon (;;). See the Notes section of the notify chapter on command parameters and escape rules.
E.g. the following first command switches Lamp1 off at 07:00 and Lamp2 immediately (at the point of definition), the second one switches both lamps off at 07:00.

define lampoff at 07:00 set Lamp1 off; set Lamp2 off
define lampoff at 07:00 set Lamp1 off;; set Lamp2 off

For every further indirection you need to double the semicolons:, e.g. to switch on every day 2 devices at 7:00 for 10 minutes you have to write:

define onAt at 07:00 set Lamp1 on;;set Lamp2 on;; define offAt at +00:10 set Lamp1 off;;;;set Lamp2 off
Don't dispair, the previous example can also be written as
define onAt at 07:00 set Lamp1,Lamp2 on-for-timer 600

Commands can be either typed in plain, or read from a file (e.g. the configuration file at startup). The commands are either executed directly, or later if they are arguments to the at and notify FHEM commands.

A line ending with \ will be concatenated with the next one, so long lines (e.g. multiple perl commands) can be split in multiple lines. Some web fronteds (e.g. webpgm2) make editing of multiline commands transparent for you (i.e. there is no need for \) .
Note: mixing command types (FHEM/shell/perl) on one line is not supported, even if it might work in some cases.

Device specification (devspec)

The commands attr, deleteattr, displayattr, delete, get, list, set, setreading, setstate, trigger can take a more complex device specification as argument, which will be expanded to a list of devices. A device specification (short devspec) can be:
• a single device name. This is the most common case.
• a list of devices, separated by comma (,)
• a regular expression
• a NAME=VALUE pair, where NAME can be an internal value like TYPE, a Reading-Name or an attribute. VALUE is a regexp. To negate the comparison, use NAME!=VALUE. To restrict the search, use i: as prefix for internal values, r: for readings and a: for attributes. See the example below. Case sensitivity is being ignored using ~ or !~.
• if the spec is followed by the expression :FILTER=NAME=VALUE, then the values found in the first round are filtered by the second expression.
Examples:
set lamp1 on
set lamp1,lamp2,lamp3 on
set lamp.* on
set room=kitchen off
set room=kitchen:FILTER=STATE=on off
set room=kitchen:FILTER=STATE!=off off
list disabled=
list room~office
list TYPE=FS20 STATE
list i:TYPE=FS20 STATE

Notes:
• the spec may not contain space characters.
• if there is a device which exactly corresponds to the spec, then no special processing is done.
• first the spec is separated by comma, then the regular expression and filter operations are executed.
• the returned list can contain the same device more than once, so "set lamp3,lamp3 on" switches lamp3 twice.
• for more complex structuring demands see the structure device.

Attributes

All devices have attributes. These can be set by means of the attr command, displayed with the displayattr command, and deleted by the deleteattr command.

There are global attributes that are used by all devices and local attributes that apply to individual device classes only.

Some devices (like FHEMWEB) automatically define new global attributes on the first definition of a device of such type.

You can use the command

attr global userattr <attributelist>

for the global device to declare new global attributes and

attr <devicespec> userattr <attributelist>

for individual devices according to devspec to declare new local attributes. <attributelist> is a space-separated list which contains the names of the additional attributes. See the documentation of the attr command for examples.

Be careful not to overwrite additional global attributes previously defined by yourself or a device. Use the attr global userattr <attributelist> as early in your configuration as possible.

Device specific attributes

Device specific attributes are documented in the corresponding device section.

Global attributes used by all devices

• alias
  Used by FHEMWEB to display a device with another name e.g. when using special characters/spaces not accepted by device definition.


• comment
  Add an arbitrary comment.


• eventMap
  Replace event names and set arguments. The value of this attribute consists of a list of space separated values, each value is a colon separated pair. The first part specifies the "old" value, the second the new/desired value. If the first character is slash(/) or comma(,) then split not by space but by this character, enabling to embed spaces. You can specify a widgetOverride after an additional colon (e.g. on-for-timer:OnFor:texField), the default widget is :noArg to avoid extra input fields in cmdList. Examples:
  attr store eventMap on:open off:closed
attr store eventMap /on-for-timer 10:open/off:closed/
set store open
  The explicit variant of this attribute has the following syntax:
  attr store eventMap { dev=>{'on'=>'open'}, usr=>{'open'=>'on'} }
attr store eventMap { dev=>{'^on(-for-timer)?(.*)'=>'open$2'}, usr=>{'^open(.*)'=>'on$1'}, fw=>{'^open(.*)'=>'open'} }
  This variant must be used, if the mapping is not symmetrical, the first part (dev) representing the device to user mapping, i.e. if the device reports on 100 or on-for-timer 100, the user will see open 100. The second part (usr) is the other direction, if the user specified open 10, the device will receive on 10. On both occasions the key will be first compared directly with the text, and if it is not equal, then it will be tried to match it as a regexp. When using regexps in the usr part with wildcards, the fw part must be filled with the exact same keys to enable a correct display in the FHEMWEB set dropdown list in the detail view.


• genericDisplayType
  used by some frontends (but not FHEMWEB) to offer a default image or appropriate commands for this device. Currently the following values are supported: switch,outlet,light,blind,speaker,thermostat


• group
  Group devices. Recognized by web-pgm2 (module FHEMWEB), it makes devices in the same group appear in the same box). This is used to further group devices together. A device can appear in more than one group, in this case the groups have to be specified comma-separated.
  If this attribute is not set then the device type is used as the grouping attribute.


• overrideNotifydev
  if set (the argument is a devspec), the optimization for notifications is using this value instead of the module-set NOTIFYDEV internal. Use it only, if you know it better than the module maintainer. In order to be available, the global or the device userattr must be set first, to include it.


• room
  Filter/group devices in frontends. A device can appear in more than one room, in this case the rooms have to be specified comma-separated.
  Devices in the room hidden will not appear in the web output, or set the FHEMWEB attribute hiddenroom to selectively disable rooms for certain FHEMWEB instances. The -> string is considered as a structure separator for rooms, e.g. "1st. floor->Master bedroom".


• suppressReading
  Used to eliminate unwanted readings. The value is a regular expression, with ^ and $ added. Only necessary in exceptional cases.


• showtime
  Used in the webfrontend pgm2 to show the time of last activity instead of the state in the summary view. Useful e.g. for FS20 PIRI devices.


• verbose
  Set the verbosity level. Possible values:
  • 0 - server start/stop
  • 1 - error messages or unknown packets
  • 2 - major events/alarms.
  • 3 - commands sent out will be logged.
  • 4 - you'll see whats received by the different devices.
  • 5 - debugging.
  The value for the global device is a default for other devices without own verbose attribute set.

readingFnAttributes

The following global attributes are honored by the modules that make use of the standardized readings updating mechanism in fhem.pl. Check the module's attribute list if you want to know if a device supports these attributes.

• stateFormat
  Modifies the STATE of the device, shown by the list command or in the room overview in FHEMWEB. If not set, its value is taken from the state reading. If set, then every word in the argument is replaced by the value of the reading if such a reading for the current device exists. If the value of this attribute is enclosed in {}, then it is evaluated. This attribute is evaluated each time a reading is updated.
  The "set magic" described here is also applied.
  Note: some FHEM modules are setting STATE directly (against the guidelines), in this case the attribute may not work as expected.
• event-on-update-reading
  If not set, every update of any reading creates an event, which e.g. is handled by notify or FileLog. The attribute takes a comma-separated list of readings. You may use regular expressions in that list. If set, only updates of the listed readings create events.
• event-on-change-reading
  The attribute takes a comma-separated list of readings. You may use regular expressions in that list. If set, only changes of the listed readings create events. In other words, if a reading listed here is updated with the new value identical to the old value, no event is created. If an optional [:threshold] is given after a reading name events are only generated if the change is >= threshold.
The precedence of event-on-update-reading and event-on-change-reading is as follows:
1. If both attributes are not set, any update of any reading of the device creates an event.
2. If any of the attributes is set, no events occur for updates or changes of readings not listed in any of the attributes.
3. If a reading is listed in event-on-update-reading, an update of the reading creates an event no matter whether the reading is also listed in event-on-change-reading.
• timestamp-on-change-reading
  The attribute takes a comma-separated list of readings. You may use regular expressions in that list. If set, the listed readings will not be changed (or created) if event-on-change-reading is also set and it would not create an event for this reading.
• event-aggregator The primary uses of this attribute are to calculate (time-weighted) averages of readings over time periods and to throttle the update rate of readings and thus the amount of data written to the logs.

  This attribute takes a comma-separated list of reading:interval:method:function:holdTime quintuples. You may use regular expressions for reading. If set, updates for the listed readings are ignored and associated events are suppressed for a black-out period of at least interval seconds (downsampling). After the black-out period has expired, the reading is updated with a value that is calculated from the values and timestamps of the previously ignored updates within the black-out period as follows:

  function	description
  v	the last value encountered
  v0	the first value encountered
  min	the smallest value encountered
  max	the largest value encountered
  mean	the arithmetic mean of all values
  sd	the standard deviation from the mean
  median	the median of all values (requires holdTime and method none)
  integral	the arithmetic sum (if not time-weighted) or integral area (if time-weighted) of all values
  n	number of samples
  t	timestamp of the last value
  t0	timestamp of the first value

  If method is none, then that's all there is. If method is const or linear, the time-weighted series of values is taken into account instead. The weight is the timespan between two subsequent updates. With the const method, the value is the value of the reading at the beginning of the timespan; with the linear method, the value is the arithmetic average of the values at the beginning and the end of the timespan. Rollovers of black-out periods are handled as one would expect it.

  One would typically use the linear method with the mean function for quantities continuously varying over time like electric power consumption, temperature or speed. For cumulative quantities like energy consumed, rain fallen or distance covered, the none method with the v function is used. The constant method is for discrete quantities that stay constant until the corresponding reading is updated, e.g. counters, switches and the like.

  If the holdTime in seconds is defined, the samples will be kept in memory allowing the calculation of floating statistics instead of blocked statistics. With holdTime defined the interval can be kept undefined so that the readings update rate is unchanged or it can be set to a value less then holdTime for downsampling as described above with a full history of the readings in memory. Note that the historic samples are not persistent and will be lost when restarting FHEM.

  The event aggregator only takes into consideration those updates that remain after preprocessing according to the event-on-update-reading and event-on-change-reading directives. Besides which, any update of a reading that occurs within a timespan from the preceding update that is smaller than the resolution of FHEM's time granularity is ditched.

  When more than one function should be calculated for the same reading, the original reading must be multiplied (e.g. by using a notify) before applying the event-aggregator to the derived readings.

  Examples:
  attr myPowerMeter event-aggregator EP_POWER_METER:300:linear:mean,EP_ENERGY_METER:300:none:v
attr myBadSensor event-aggregator TEMP::none:median:300
attr mySunMeter event-aggregator SUN_INTENSITY_24H::const:integral:86400

• event-min-interval
  This attribute takes a comma-separated list of reading:minInterval pairs. You may use regular expressions for reading. Events will only be generated, if at least minInterval seconds elapsed since the last reading of the matched type. If event-on-change-reading is also specified, they are combined with OR: if one of them is true, the event is generated.
• oldreadings
  This attribute takes a comma-separated list of readings. You may use regular expressions in that list. For each reading in the list FHEM will internaly store the previous value if the readings value changes. To access the storead value use the OldReadings.* functions. If the previous value is always to be stored (even if it didn't changed), then set the last value of the comma-separated list to oldreadingsAlways.
• userReadings
  A comma-separated list of definitions of user-defined readings. Each definition has the form:
  <reading>[:<trigger>] [<modifier>] { <perl code> }
  After a single or bulk readings update, the user-defined readings are set by evaluating the perl code { <perl code> } for all definitions and setting the value of the respective user-defined reading <reading> to the result. If <trigger> is given, then all processing for this specific user reading is only done if one of the just updated "reading: value" combinations matches <trigger>, which is treated as a regexp.
  Examples:
  
  attr myEnergyMeter userReadings energy { ReadingsVal("myEnergyMeter","counters.A",0)/1250.0;; }
attr myMultiMeter userReadings energy1:counters.A.* { ReadingsVal("myMultiMeter","counters.A",0)/1250.0;; }, energy2:counters.B.* { ReadingsVal("myMultiMeter","counters.B",0)/1250.0;; }
  <modifier> can take one of these values:
  • none: the same as it would not have been given at all.
  • difference: the reading is set to the difference between the current and the previously evaluated value.
  • differential: the reading is set to the difference between the current and the previously evaluated value divided by the time in seconds between the current and the previous evaluation. Granularity of time is one second. No value is calculated if the time past is below one second. Useful to calculate rates.
  • integral: reverse function of differential. The result is incremented by the product of the time difference between the last two readings and the avarage of the last two readings.
    result += (time - timeold) * (oldval + value) / 2
  • offset: if the current evaluated value is smaler than the previously evaluated value the reading is incremented by the previous value. the reading can then be used as an offset correct for a counter that is reset for example due to a power loss.
  • monotonic: if the difference between the current and the previously evaluated value is positive the reading is incremented by this difference. this allows to derive a monotonic growing counter from an original counter even if the original will be rest by a power loss
  Example:
  
  attr myPowerMeter userReadings power differential { ReadingsVal("myPowerMeter","counters.A",0)/1250.0;; }
  Notes:
  • user readings with modifiers difference and differential store the calculated values internally. The user reading is set earliest at the second evaluation. Beware of stale values when changing definitions!
  • the name of the defined Readings consists of alphanumeric characters with underscore (_) and the minus (-) sign.

Common attributes

The following local attributes are used by a wider range of devices:

• IODev
  Set the IO or physical device which should be used for sending signals for this "logical" device. An example for the physical device is an FHZ or a CUL. Note: Upon startup FHEM assigns each logical device (FS20/HMS/KS300/etc) the last physical device which can receive data for this type of device. The attribute IODev needs to be used only if you attached more than one physical device capable of receiving signals for this logical device.


• disable
  Disables the corresponding device. Note: it can be toggled by issuing the following command:
  
  attr <device> disable toggle


• disabledForIntervals HH:MM-HH:MM HH:MM-HH:MM ...
  Space separated list of HH:MM or D@HH:MM tupels. If the current time is between the two time specifications, the current device is disabled. Instead of HH:MM you can also specify HH or HH:MM:SS. D is the day of the week, with 0 indicating Sunday and 3 indicating Wednesday. Specifying the day for the "from" part does _not_ specify it for the "to" part, i.e. 1@00-24 will disable from monday to the end of the week, but not on sunday (as 1@00 is greater than any time on sunday). To specify an interval spawning midnight, you have to specify two intervals, e.g.:
  23:00-24:00 00:00-01:00
  If parts of the attribute value are enclosed in {}, they are evaluated:
  {sunset_abs()}-24 {sunrise_abs()}-08

attr

attr [-a|-r|-silent] <devspec> <attrname> [<value>]

Set an attribute for a device defined by define. The value is optional, and is set to 1 if missing. You can define your own attributes too to use them in other applications. Use "attr <name> ?" to get a list of possible attributes. See the Device specification section for details on <devspec>. After setting the attribute, the global event "ATTR" will be generated.
If the option -a is specified, append the given value to the currently existing value. Note: if the value does not start with a comma (,), then a space will be added automatically to the old value before appending the new.
With the -r option one can remove a part of an attribute value.
With the -silent option the command is not recorded in the "save -?" list.

Examples:
attr global verbose 3
attr lamp room kitchen
attr lamp group lights
attr lamp loglevel 6
attr weatherstation event-on-update-reading wind,temperature,humidity
attr weatherstation event-on-change-reading israining
attr weatherstation event-on-change-reading israining,state
attr heating stateFormat Temp:measured-temp, Valve:actuator
attr -a TYPE=SVG room ,SvgRoom
attr -r TYPE=SVG room ,SvgRoom


Notes:

• See deleteattr to delete attributes.

cancel

cancel [<id> [quiet]]

List named sleeps or cancel a named sleep.

define

define [option] <name> <type> <type-specific>

Define a device. You need devices if you want to manipulate them (e.g. set on/off), and the logfile is also more readable if it contains e.g. "lamp off" instead of "Device 5673, Button 00, Code 00 (off)".
After definition, the global event "DEFINED" will be generated, see the notify section for details.


Each device takes different additional arguments at definition, see the corresponding device section for details.

Options:

• -temporary
  Add the TEMPORARY flag to the definition, which will prevent saving the device to fhem.cfg.


• -ignoreErr
  Reduce the number of errors displayed when a certain FHEM-module cannot be loaded. Used by fhem.cfg.demo, as using the RSS example requires the installation of several uncommon perl modules.


• -silent
  Do no enter the command in the "save ?" list.

defmod

defmod [option] <name> <type> <type-specific>

Define a device or modify it, if it already exists. E.g. to switch off a lamp 10 Minutes after the last message from the motion detector, you may use
define mdNtfy notify motionDetector defmod mdOff at +00:10 set lamp off
Using define here for the mdOff will generate an error if the motion detector triggers within the 10 minutes after the first event, as the mdOff at definition still exists.
For the options see the define documentation.

delete

delete <devspec>

Delete something created with the define command. See the Device specification section for details on <devspec>.
After deletion, the global event "DELETED" will be generated, see the notify section for details.
Examples:
delete lamp

deleteattr

deleteattr [-silent] <devspec> [<attrname>]

Delete either a single attribute (see the attr command) or all attributes for a device (if no <attrname> is defined). See the Device specification section for details on <devspec>.
<attrname> is in fact a regexp, complemented with ^ and $ as usual, so a range of attributes can be deleted with one command.
After deleting the attribute, the global event "DELETEATTR" will be generated.
Examples:
deleteattr lamp follow-on-for-timer
deleteattr lamp

deletereading

deletereading <devspec> <readingname> [<older-than-seconds>]

Delete the reading <readingname> for a device. <readingname> is a perl regular expression that must match the whole name of the reading. Use with greatest care! FHEM might crash if you delete vital readings of a device. See the Device specification section for details on <devspec>.

Examples:
deletereading mySensor temp1
deletereading mySensor temp\d+

displayattr

displayattr <devspec> [<attrname>]

Display either the value of a single attribute (see the attr command) or all attributes for a device (if no <attrname> is defined). See the Device specification section for details on <devspec>.
If more then one device is specified, then the device name will also included in the output.
Examples:
fhem> di WEB
menuEntries AlarmOn,/fhem?cmd=set%20alarm%20on
room Misc.
fhem> di WEB room
Misc.


get

get <devspec> <type-specific>

Ask a value directly from the device, and wait for an answer. In general, you can get a list of possible parameters by
get <device> ?
See the Device specification section for details on <devspec>.

Each device has different get parameters, see the corresponding device section for details.

include

include <filename>

Read in the file, and process every line as a FHEM command. Note: only experts should use this command.

inform

inform {on|onWithState|off|raw|timer|log|status} [regexp]

Monitor events via a telnet client. This command is the telnet equivalent of the FHEMWEB Event monitor, but can also be used by other programs/modules to receive a notification. Options:

• on
  switch the inform mechanism on
• onWithState
  show the additional state event too
• off
  switch the inform mechanism off (both events and logs, see below)
• raw
  show only raw events from physical devices
• timer
  prepend a timestamp to each event
• log
  show messages written by the FHEM Log interface
• status
  show the current status

list

list [devspec] [value ...]
or
list {-r|-R} devspec


Output a list of all definitions, all notify settings and all at entries. This is one of the few commands which return a string in a normal case. See the Device specification section for details on <devspec>.
If <value> is specified, then output this property (internal, reading or attribute) for all devices from the devspec. <value> can be restricted with prefix i: for internals, r: for readings and a: for attributes.

Example:

  fhem> list

  Type list <name> for detailed info.

  Internal:
    global               (Internal)

  FHZ:
    FHZ                  (fhtbuf: 23)

  FS20:
    Btn4                 (on-old-for-timer)
    Roll1                (on)
    Stehlampe            (off)

  FHT:
    fl                   (measured-temp: 21.1 (Celsius))

  KS300:
    out1                 (T: 2.9  H: 74  W: 2.2  R: 8.2  IR: no)

  at:
    at_rollup            (Next: 07:00:00)

  notify:
    ntfy_btn4            (active)

  FileLog:
    avglog               (active)

  

If specifying name, then a detailed status for name will be displayed, e.g.:

  fhem> list fl

  Internals:
    CODE       5102
    DEF        5102
    NAME       fl
    NR         15
    STATE      measured-temp: 21.1 (Celsius)
    TYPE       FHT
    IODev      FHZ
  Attributes:
    room       Heizung
  Readings:
    2006-11-02 09:45:56   actuator        19%
    [...]
  

With the -r (raw) option output the device definition in a format suitable for inclusion in fhem.cfg and fhem.state. -R returns the definition of the device itself, together with the definition of probably associated devices. Note: the algorithm to select associated devices is known to be imperfect.

modify

modify [-silent] <name> <type-dependent-options>

Used to modify some definitions. Useful for changing some at or notify definitions. If specifying one argument to an at type definition, only the time part will be changed. In case of a notify type definition, only the regex part will be changed. All other values (state, attributes, etc) will remain intact. After modify, the global event "MODIFIED" will be generated.
With the -silent option the command is not recorded in the "save -?" list.

Example:
define lampon at 19:00 set lamp on
modify lampon *19:00
modify lampon 19:00 set lamp on-for-timer 16

quit

quit

If used in a TCP/IP session, terminate the client session.
If used in a script, terminate the parsing of the current script.

Example:
quit

reload

reload <module>

Reload the given module from the module directory. It is a convenient way to test modules whithout restarting the program.

Example:
reload 99_PRIV

rename

rename <oldname> <newname>

Rename a device from the <oldname> to <newname>, together with its attributes. The global event RENAMED will be generated, see the notify section for details.

Example:
rename FHT_1234 fht.kitchen

rereadcfg

rereadcfg [fhem-config-file]

Re-read the active configuration file, or the optionally specified file.
The sequence: the statefile will be saved first, then all devices will be deleted, then the currently active config file (or the specified file) will be read and at last the statefile will be reloaded.
Upon completion it triggers the global:REREADCFG event. All existing connections up to the one issuing the rereadcfg will be closed.

Example:
rereadcfg

save

save [<configfile>]

Save first the statefile, then the configfile information. If a parameter is specified, it will be used instead the global configfile attribute.

Notes:
• save only writes out definitions and attributes, but no (set/get) commands which were previously part of the config file. If you need such commands after the initialization (e.g. FHTcode), you should trigger them via notify, when receiving the INITIALIZED event.
• save tries to preserve comments (lines starting with #) and include structures, but it won't work correctly if some of these files are not writeable.
• before overwriting the files, the old version will be saved, see the restoreDirs global attribute for details.

set

set <devspec> <type-specific>

Set parameters of a device / send signals to a device. You can get a list of possible parameters by
set <name> ?
See the Device specification section for details on <devspec>. The set command returns only a value on error.

Each device has different set parameters, see the corresponding device section for details.


From featurelevel 5.7 on the set and setreading command replaces:
• [device:name] with the reading, internal or attribute of the device, if both device and the reading, internal or attribute exists.
  • You can use the r:, i: or a: prefix to restrict the search to one type, analogue to the devspec filtering.
  • The suffix :d retrieves the first number
  • The suffix :i retrieves the integer part of the first number.
  • The suffix :r<n> retrieves the first number and rounds it to <n> decimal places. If <n> is missing, then rounds it to one decimal place.
  • The suffix :t returns the timestamp (works only for readings)
  • The suffix :sec returns the number of seconds since the reading was set.
  Example:
  set Lamp blink [blinkDummy:number] [r:blinkDummy:duration:d]
• [device:name:d] same as above, but only the number is retrieved
• [device:name:sec] same as above, but only the number is retrieved
• {(perlExpression)} with the result of perlExpression. The $DEV variable is additionally available, designating the set device name.
These replacements are also known as "set magic".

Some modules support a common list of set extensions, and point in their documentation to this section. If the module itself implements one of the following commands, then the module-implementation takes precedence.
• on-for-timer <seconds>
  Issue the on command for the device, and after <seconds> the off command. For issuing the off command an internal timer will be scheduled, which is deleted upon a restart. To delete this internal timer without restart specify 0 as argument.
• off-for-timer <seconds>
  see on-for-timer above.
• on-till <timedet>
  Issue the on command for the device, and create an at definition with <timedet> (in the form HH:MM[:SS]) to set it off. This definition is visible, and its name is deviceName+"_till". To cancel the scheduled off, delete the at definition. Note: on-till is not active, if the specified time is after the current time, in order to make things like
  define morningLight at *06:00 set Lamp on-till {sunrise()}
  easy.
• on-till-overnight <timedet>
  Like on-till, but wont compare the current time with the timespec, so following will work:
  define nightLight at *{sunset()} set Lamp on-till-overnight 01:00
• off-till <timedet>
  see on-till above.
• off-till-overnight <timedet>
  see on-till-overnight above.
• blink <number> <blink-period>
  set the device on for <blink-period> then off for <blink-period> and repeat this <number> times. To stop blinking specify "0 0" as argument.
• intervals <from1>-<till1> <from2>-<till2>...
  set the device on for the specified intervals, which are all timespecs in the form HH:MM[:SS]. The intervals are space separated.
• toggle
  Issue the off command, if the current STATE is on, else the on command. dim XX is also interpreted as on, if XX is not 0.
Examples:
set switch on-for-timer 12.5
set switch on-till {sunset()}
set switch blink 3 1
set switch intervals 08:00-12:00 13:00-18:00



attrTemplate
with this command a set of predefined attributes may be set at once. The template files containing the entries are in FHEM/lib/AttrTemplate directory. Template entries can be module specific, and may require further parameters to be specified.

setdefaultattr

setdefaultattr [<attrname> [<value>]]

Add a default attribute. Each device defined from now on will receive this attribute.
If no attrname is specified, then the default attribute list will be deleted.

Example to set the attribute "room kitchen" and "loglevel 4" to each of the lamps:
setdefaultattr room kitchen
setdefaultattr loglevel 4
define lamp1 FS20 1234 11
define lamp2 FS20 1234 12
define lamp3 FS20 1234 13
setdefaultattr


Notes:

• There is no way to delete a single default-attribute from the list

setreading

setreading <devspec> [YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS] <reading> <value>

Set the reading <reading> for the device <name> to <value> without sending out commands to the device, but triggering events and eventMap/stateFormat transformations as usual. See the set command documentation for replacement description.
If the timespec is omitted (default) the current time will be used.

Examples:
setreading lamp state on
Note: setreading won't generate an event for device X, if it is called from a notify for device X. Use "sleep 0.1; setreading X Y Z" in this case.

setstate

setstate <devspec> <value>

Set the STATE entry for the device specified by <devspec>, which is used for displaying the device state in different frontends. No signals will be sent to the device, no events will be generated, and no eventMap or stateFormat translation will be done either. This command is also used in the statefile. See the Device specification section for details on <devspec>.

Examples:
setstate lamp on
Note: this command is also used to store the readings in the statefile, in this case the timestamp will preceed the value. As a side-effect there is no way to save a state correctly if it starts with a timestamp in the YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS form.

setuuid

setuuid <device> <uuid>

System command, used to set the FUUID internal value. Not intended to be used by an end user.

show

show <devspec>

show a temporary room with devices from <devspec>. The command ist only available through FHEMWEB.
See the Device specification section for details on <devspec>.

Example:
show TYPE=CUL_HM

shutdown

shutdown [restart|exitValue]

Shut down the server (after saving the state information ). It triggers the global:SHUTDOWN event. If the optional restart parameter is specified, FHEM tries to restart itself. exitValue may be important for start scripts.

Example:
shutdown
shutdown restart
shutdown 1

sleep

sleep <sec|timespec|regex> [<id>] [quiet]

sleep followed by another command is comparable to a nameless at or notify, it executes the following commands after waiting for the specified time or an event matching <regex>. The delay can be given
• in seconds, with millisecond accuracy, as you can specify decimal places,
• as a timespec (HH:MM or HH:MM:SS or {perlfunc})
• or as a regex (devicename or devicename:event)

A sleep with an <id> will replace a sleep with the same <id> and can be canceled by cancel. When called in a notify/at/etc, then nonempty return values of the following commands are logged to the global logfile with loglevel 2.
If quiet is specified, then skip this logging.

Example:
define n3 notify btn3.* set lamp on;;sleep 1.5;;set lamp off
define a3 at +*00:05 set Windsensor 1w_measure;; sleep 2 quiet;; get Windsensor 1w_temp

Note: a sleep not followed by any command will block FHEM, is deprecated, and it issues a WARNING in the FHEM log.

trigger

trigger <devspec> <state>

Trigger a notify definition. See the Device specification section for details on <devspec>.

Example:
trigger btn3 on

global

The global device is used to set different global attributes. It will be automatically defined, it cannot be deleted or renamed and has no set or get parameters

Define
N/A

Set
N/A

Get
N/A

Internals
• init_errors
  contains configuration errors and security issues collected at FHEM startup.



Attributes
• altitude
  Specifies the mean sea level in meters. Default is 0.


• archivedir
• archivecmd
• nrarchive
• archivesort
  archivesort may be set to the (default) alphanum or timestamp, and specifies how the last files are computed for the nrarchive attribute.


• autoload_undefined_devices
  If set, automatically load the corresponding module when a message of this type is received. This is used by the autocreate device, to automatically create a FHEM device upon receiving a corresponding message.


• autosave
  enable some modules to automatically trigger save after a configuration change, e.g. after a new device was created. Default is 1 (true), you can deactivate this feature by setting the value to 0. Configration errors at startup automatically deactivate this value.
• backupcmd
  You could pass the backup to your own command / script by using this attribute. If this attribute is specified, then it will be started as a shell command and passes a space separated list of files / directories as one argument to the command, like e.g.:
  
  "/etc/fhem.cfg /var/log/fhem/fhem.save /usr/share/fhem/contrib /usr/share/fhem/FHEM /usr/share/fhem/foo /usr/share/fhem/foobar /usr/share/fhem/www"
  Note: Your command / script has to return the string "backup done" or everything else to report errors, to work properly with update!
  This Attribute is used by the backup command.
  Example:
  
  attr global backupcmd /usr/local/bin/myBackupScript.sh


• backupdir
  A folder to store the compressed backup file. This Attribute is used by the backup command.
  Example:
  
  attr global backupdir /Volumes/BigHD


• backupsymlink
  If this attribute is set to everything else as "no", the archive command tar will support symlinks in your backup. Otherwise, if this attribute is set to "no" symlinks are ignored by tar. This Attribute is used by the backup command.
  Example:
  
  attr global backupsymlink yes


• blockingCallMax
  Limit the number of parallel running processes started by the BlockingCall FHEM helper routine. Useful on limited hardware, default is 32. If the limit is reached, further calls are delayed.


• configfile
  Contains the name of the FHEM configuration file. If save is called without argument, then the output will be written to this file.


• commandref
  If set to "full", then a full commandref will be generated after each update. If set to modular (default since FHEM 6.1), there is only a short description at the beginning, and the module documentation is loaded from FHEM dynamically.


• disableFeatures
  comma separated list of values. Currently following values are recognized:
  • attrTemplate: to avoid loading the AttrTemplates (which currently consumes about 1MB of memory and needs some seconds to load on a slow hardware)
  • securityCheck: to avoid checking if each Server port is secured by password. May make sense to avoid warnings, if you know it better.
  
  
• dnsHostsFile
  If dnsServer is set, check the contents of the file specified as argument. To use the system hosts file, set it to /etc/hosts on Linux/Unix/OSX and C:\windows\system32\drivers\etc\hosts on Windows. Note: only IPv4 is supported.


• dnsServer
  Contains the IP address of the DNS Server. If some of the modules or user code calls the HttpUtils_NonblockingGet function, and this attribute is set, then FHEM specific nonblocking code will be used to resolve the given address. If this attribute is not set, the blocking OS implementation (inet_aton and gethostbyname) will be used.


• encoding
  Set the internal encoding used for storing strings. Possible values: bytestream (default) and unicode.
  Notes:
  • Since not all modules were checked, if they work correctly with the internal unicode encoding, this feature is experimental.
  • Changing the attribute value triggers a save and a shutdown restart


• featurelevel
  Enable/disable old or new features, based on FHEM version. E.g. the $value hash for notify is only set for featurelevel up to 5.6, as it is deprecated, use the Value() function instead.


• holiday2we
  If this attribute is set, then the $we variable will be true, if it is either saturday/sunday, or the value of the holiday variable referenced by this attribute is not none.
  If it is a comma separated list, then it is true, if one of the referenced entities is not none.
  Example:
  
  attr global holiday2we he
  Note: if one of the elements in the list is named weekEnd, then the check for saturday/sunday is skipped If the name is noWeekEnd, and its Value is not none, than $we is 0.


• httpcompress
  the HttpUtils module is used by a lot of FHEM modules, and enables compression by default. Set httpcompress to 0 to disable this feature.


• ignoreRegexp
  Do not log messages matching the value into the FHEM log. Note: the usual ^ and $ will be appended to the regexp, like in notify or FileLog.


• keyFileName
  FHEM modules store passwords and unique IDs in the file FHEM/FhemUtils/uniqueID. In order to start multiple FHEM instances from the same directory, you may set this attribute, whose value will appended to FHEM/FhemUtils/


• latitude
  Used e.g. by SUNRISE_EL to calculate sunset/sunrise.
  Default is Frankfurt am Main, Germany (50.112).


• longitude
  Used e.g. by SUNRISE_EL to calculate sunset/sunrise.
  Default is Frankfurt am Main, Germany (8.686).


• logdir
  If set, the %L attribute in the logfile attribute (or in the FileLog modules file definition) is replaced wth the value of the attribute. Note: changing the value won't result in moving the files and may cause other problems.


• logfile
  Specify the logfile to write. You can use "-" for stdout, in this case the server won't background itself.
  The logfile name can also take wildcards for easier logfile rotation, see the FileLog section. Just apply the archivecmd / archivedir / nrarchive attributes to the global device as you would do for a FileLog device.
  You can access the current name of the logfile with { $currlogfile }.


• maxChangeLog
  FHEM stores the structural change history which is displayed by "save ?" or in FHEMWEB by clicking on the red question mark. By default this list is limited to 10 entries, this attribute changes the limit.


• maxShutdownDelay
  Some modules need some time at shutdown to finish the cleanup, but FHEM restricts the delay to 10 seconds. Use this attribute to modify the maximum delay.


• modpath
  Specify the path to the modules directory FHEM. The path does not contain the directory FHEM. Upon setting the attribute, the directory will be scanned for filenames of the form NN_<NAME>.pm, and make them available for device definition under <NAME>. If the first device of type <NAME> is defined, the module will be loaded, and its function with the name <NAME>_Initialize will be called. Exception to this rule are modules with NN=99, these are considered to be utility modules containing only perl helper functions, they are loaded at startup (i.e. modpath attribute definition time).


• motd
  Message Of The Day. Displayed on the homescreen of the FHEMWEB package, or directly after the telnet logon, before displaying the fhem> prompt. In addition, the content of the internal value init_errors will be displayed. To avoid displaying messages set its value to none.


• mseclog
  If set, the timestamp in the logfile will contain a millisecond part.


• nofork
  If set and the logfile is not "-", do not try to background. Needed on some Fritzbox installations, and it will be set automatically for Windows.


• perlSyntaxCheck
  by setting the global attribute perlSyntaxCheck, a syntax check will be executed upon definition or modification, if the command is perl and FHEM is already started.


• pidfilename
  Write the process id of the perl process to the specified file. The server runs as a daemon, and some distributions would like to check by the pid if we are still running. The file will be deleted upon shutdown.


• proxy
  IP:PORT of the proxy server to be used by HttpUtils.


• proxyAuth
  Base64 encoded username:password


• proxyExclude
  regexp for hosts to exclude when using a proxy


• restoreDirs
  update saves each file before overwriting it with the new version from the Web. For this purpose update creates a directory restoreDir/update in the global modpath directory, then a subdirectory with the current date, where the old version of the currently replaced file is stored. The default value of this attribute is 3, meaning that 3 old versions (i.e. date-directories) are kept, and the older ones are deleted.
  fhem.cfg and fhem.state will be also copied with this method before executing save into restoreDir/save/YYYY-MM-DD. To restore the files, you can use the restore FHEM command.
  
  If the attribute is set to 0, the feature is deactivated.


• sendStatistics
  
• statefile
  Set the filename where the state and certain at information will be saved before shutdown. If it is not specified, then no information will be saved.


• title
  
• useInet6
  try to use IPv6 in HttpUtils for communication. If the server does not have an IPv6 address, fall back to IPv4. Note: IO::Socket::INET6 is required.


• userattr
  A space separated list which contains the names of additional attributes for all devices. Without specifying them you will not be able to set them (in order to prevent typos).
  userattr can also specified for other devices, in this case these additional attribute names are only valid for this device.


• dupTimeout
  Define the timeout for which 2 identical events from two different receiver are considered a duplicate. Default is 0.5 seconds.


• showInternalValues
  Show data used for internal computations. If the name of an internal value, reading or attribute starts with dot (.), then it is normally hidden, and will only be visible, if this attribute is set to 1. The attribute is checked by the list command, by the FHEMWEB room overview and by xmllist.


• sslVersion
  Specifies the accepted cryptography algorithms by all modules using the TcpServices helper module. The current default TLSv12:!SSLv3 is thought to be more secure than the previously used SSLv23:!SSLv3:!SSLv2, but it causes problems with some not updated web services.


• stacktrace
  if set (to 1), dump a stacktrace to the log for each "PERL WARNING".


• restartDelay
  set the delay for shutdown restart, default is 2 (seconds).



Events:
• INITIALIZED
  after initialization is finished.
• REREADCFG
  after the configuration is reread.
• SAVE
  before the configuration is saved.
• SHUTDOWN
  before FHEM is shut down.
• DEFINED <devname>
  after a device is defined.
• DELETED <devname>
  after a device was deleted.
• RENAMED <old> <new>
  after a device was renamed.
• UNDEFINED <defspec>
  upon reception of a message for an undefined device.
• MODIFIED <defspec>
  after a device modification.
• UPDATE
  after an update is completed.
• CANNOT_FORK
  if BlockingCall encounters this problem.

ALL4027

Note: this module needs the HTTP::Request and LWP::UserAgent perl modules.

Define
define <name> ALL4027 <ip-address> <port> <relay_nr> <delay>

Defines an Allnet 4027 device (Box with 8 relays) connected to an ALL4000 via its ip address. The status of the device is also pooled (delay interval), because someone else is able to change the state via the webinterface of the device.

Examples:
define lamp1 ALL4027 192.168.8.200 0 7 60


Set
set <name> <value>

where value is one of:


    off
    on
    on-for-timer <Seconds>
    toggle
    

Examples:
set poolpump on


Notes:
• Toggle is special implemented. List name returns "on" or "off" even after a toggle command

AMADCommBridge

AMAD - Automagic Android Device
AMADCommBridge - Communication bridge for all AMAD devices
This module is the central point for the successful integration of Android devices in FHEM. It also provides a link level between AMAD supported devices and FHEM. All communication between AMAD Android and FHEM runs through this interface.
Therefore, the initial setup of an AMAD device is also performed exactly via this module instance.

In order to successfully establish an Android device in FHEM, an AMADCommBridge device must be created in the first step.

Define

define <name> AMADCommBridge

Example:

define AMADBridge AMADCommBridge


This statement creates a new AMADCommBridge device named AMADBridge.

The APP Automagic or Tasker can be used on the Android device.

For Autoremote:
In the following, only the Flowset has to be installed on the Android device and the Flow 'First Run Assistant' run. (Simply press the Homebutton)
The wizard then guides you through the setup of your AMAD device and ensures that at the end of the installation process the Android device is created as an AMAD device in FHEM.

For Tasker:
When using Tasker, the Tasker-project must be loaded onto the Android device and imported into Tasker via the import function.
For the initial setup on the Android device there is an Tasker input mask (Scene), in which the required parameters (device name, device IP, bridgeport etc.)
can be entered, these fields are filled (if possible) automatically, but can also be adjusted manually.
To do this, run the "AMAD" task.
For quick access, a Tasker shortcut can also be created on the home screen for this task.
Information on the individual settings can be obtained by touching the respective text field.
If all entries are complete, the AMAD Device can be created via the button "create Device".
For control commands from FHEM to Tasker, the APP "Autoremote" or "Tasker Network Event Server (TNES)" is additionally required.

Readings


• JSON_ERROR - JSON Error message reported by Perl
• JSON_ERROR_STRING - The string that caused the JSON error message
• receiveFhemCommand - is set the fhemControlMode attribute to trigger, the reading is set as soon as an FHEM command is sent. A notification can then be triggered.
  If set instead of trigger setControl as value for fhemControlMode, the reading is not executed but the set command executed immediately.
• receiveVoiceCommand - The speech control is activated by AMAD (set DEVICE activateVoiceInput), the last recognized voice command is written into this reading.
• receiveVoiceDevice - Name of the device from where the last recognized voice command was sent
• state - state of the Bridge, open, closed


Attributes


• allowFrom - Regexp the allowed IP addresses or hostnames. If this attribute is set, only connections from these addresses are accepted.
  Attention: If allowfrom is not set, and no kind allowed instance is defined, and the remote has a non-local address, then the connection is rejected. The following addresses are considered local:
  IPV4: 127/8, 10/8, 192.168/16, 172.16/10, 169.254/16
  IPV6: ::1, fe80/10
• debugJSON - If set to 1, JSON error messages are written in readings. See JSON_ERROR * under Readings
• fhemControlMode - Controls the permissible type of control of FHEM devices. You can control the bridge in two ways FHEM devices. Either by direct FHEM command from a flow, or as a voice command by means of voice control (set DEVICE activateVoiceInput)
  • trigger - If the value trigger is set, all FHEM set commands sent to the bridge are written to the reading receiveFhemCommand and can be executed using notify. Voice control is possible; readings receiveVoice * are set. On the Android device several voice commands can be linked by means of "and". Example: turn on the light scene in the evening and turn on the TV
  • setControl - All set commands sent via the flow are automatically executed. The triggering of a reading is not necessary. The control by means of language behaves like the value trigger
  • thirdPartControl - Behaves as triggered, but in the case of voice control, a series of voice commands by means of "and" is not possible. Used for voice control via modules of other module authors ((z.B. 39_TEERKO.pm)


If you have problems with the wizard, an Android device can also be applied manually, you will find in the Commandref to the AMADDevice module.

AMADDevice

AMAD - Automagic Android Device
This module integrates Android devices into FHEM and displays several settings using the Android app "Automagic" or "Tasker". Automagic is comparable to the "Tasker" app for automating tasks and configuration settings. But Automagic is more user-friendly. The "Automagic Premium" app currently costs EUR 2.90.
Any information retrievable by Automagic/Tasker can be displayed in FHEM by this module. Just define your own Automagic-"flow" or Tasker-"task" and send the data to the AMADCommBridge. One even can control several actions on Android devices.
To be able to make use of all these functions the Automagic/Tasker app and additional flows/Tasker-project need to be installed on the Android device. The flows/Tasker-project can be retrieved from the FHEM directory, the app can be bought in Google Play Store.

How to use AMADDevice?
• first, make sure that the AMADCommBridge in FHEM was defined
• Using Automagic
• install the "Automagic Premium" app from the PlayStore
• install the flowset 74_AMADDeviceautomagicFlowset$VERSION.xml file from the $INSTALLFHEM/FHEM/lib/ directory on the Android device
• activate the "installation assistant" Flow in Automagic. If one now sends Automagic into the background, e.g. Homebutton, the assistant starts and creates automatically a FHEM device for the android device
• Using Tasker
• install the "Tasker" app from the PlayStore
• install the Tasker-project 74_AMADtaskerset_$VERSION.prj.xml file from the $INSTALLFHEM/FHEM/lib/ directory on the Android device
• run the "AMAD" task in Tasker and make your initial setup, by pressing the "create Device" button it will automatically create the device in FHEM


Define a AMADDevice device by hand.

Define

define <name> AMADDevice <IP-ADRESSE> <AMAD_ID> <REMOTESERVER>

Example:

define WandTabletWohnzimmer AMADDevice 192.168.0.23 123456 Automagic


In this case, an AMADDevice is created by hand. The AMAD_ID, here 123456, must also be entered exactly as a global variable in Automagic/Tasker.



Readings
• airplanemode - on/off, state of the aeroplane mode
• androidVersion - currently installed version of Android
• automagicState - state of the Automagic or Tasker App (prerequisite Android >4.3). In case you have Android >4.3 and the reading says "not supported", you need to enable Automagic/Tasker inside Android / Settings / Sound & notification / Notification access
• batteryHealth - the health of the battery (1=unknown, 2=good, 3=overheat, 4=dead, 5=over voltage, 6=unspecified failure, 7=cold) (Automagic only)
• powerPercent - state of battery in %
• batterytemperature - the temperature of the battery (Automagic only)
• bluetooth - on/off, bluetooth state
• checkActiveTask - state of an app (needs to be defined beforehand). 0=not active or not active in foreground, 1=active in foreground, see note below (Automagic only)
• connectedBTdevices - list of all devices connected via bluetooth (Automagic only)
• connectedBTdevicesMAC - list of MAC addresses of all devices connected via bluetooth (Automagic only)
• currentMusicAlbum - currently playing album of mediaplayer (Automagic only)
• currentMusicApp - currently playing player app (Amazon Music, Google Play Music, Google Play Video, Spotify, YouTube, TuneIn Player, Aldi Life Music) (Automagic only)
• currentMusicArtist - currently playing artist of mediaplayer (Automagic only)
• currentMusicIcon - cover of currently play album Not yet fully implemented (Automagic only)
• currentMusicState - state of currently/last used mediaplayer (Automagic only)
• currentMusicTrack - currently playing song title of mediaplayer (Automagic only)
• daydream - on/off, daydream currently active
• deviceState - state of Android devices. unknown, online, offline.
• doNotDisturb - state of do not Disturb Mode
• dockingState - undocked/docked, Android device in docking station
• flow_SetCommands - active/inactive, state of SetCommands flow
• flow_informations - active/inactive, state of Informations flow
• flowsetVersionAtDevice - currently installed version of the flowsets on the Android device
• incomingCallerName - Callername from last Call
• incomingCallerNumber - Callernumber from last Call
• incomingWhatsAppMessage - last WhatsApp message
• incomingTelegramMessage - last telegram message
• incomingSmsMessage - last SMS message
• intentRadioName - name of the most-recent streamed intent radio
• intentRadioState - state of intent radio player
• keyguardSet - 0/1 keyguard set, 0=no 1=yes, does not indicate whether it is currently active
• lastSetCommandError - last error message of a set command
• lastSetCommandState - last state of a set command, command send successful/command send unsuccessful
• lastStatusRequestError - last error message of a statusRequest command
• lastStatusRequestState - ast state of a statusRequest command, command send successful/command send unsuccessful
• nextAlarmDay - currently set day of alarm
• nextAlarmState - alert/done, current state of "Clock" stock-app
• nextAlarmTime - currently set time of alarm
• nfc - state of nfc service on/off
• nfcLastTagID - nfc_id of last scan nfc Tag / In order for the ID to be recognized correctly, the trigger NFC TagIDs must be processed in Flow NFC Tag Support and the TagId's Commase-separated must be entered. (Automagic only)
• powerPlugged - 0=no/1,2=yes, power supply connected
• screen - on locked,unlocked/off locked,unlocked, state of display
• screenBrightness - 0-255, level of screen-brightness
• screenBrightnessMode - Adaptive brightness on,off
• screenFullscreen - on/off, full screen mode
• screenOrientation - Landscape/Portrait, screen orientation (horizontal,vertical)
• screenOrientationMode - auto/manual, mode for screen orientation
• state - current state of AMAD device
• userFlowState - current state of a Flow, established under setUserFlowState Attribut (Automagic only)
• volume - media volume setting
• volumeNotification - notification volume setting
• wiredHeadsetPlugged - 0/1 headset plugged out or in

Prerequisite for using the reading checkActivTask the package name of the application to be checked needs to be defined in the attribute checkActiveTask. Example: attr Nexus10Wohnzimmer checkActiveTask com.android.chrome für den Chrome Browser.




Set
• activateVoiceInput - start voice input on Android device
• bluetooth - on/off, switch bluetooth on/off
• clearNotificationBar - All/Automagic, deletes all or only Automagic/Tasker notifications in status bar
• closeCall - hang up a running call
• currentFlowsetUpdate - start flowset/Tasker-project update on Android device
• installFlowSource - install a Automagic flow on device, XML file must be stored in /tmp/ with extension xml. Example: set TabletWohnzimmer installFlowSource WlanUebwerwachen.xml (Automagic only)
• doNotDisturb - sets the do not Disturb Mode, always Disturb, never Disturb, alarmClockOnly alarm Clock only, onlyImportant only important Disturbs
• mediaPlay - play command to media App
• mediaStop - stop command to media App
• mediaNext - skip Forward command to media App
• mediaBack - skip Backward to media App
• nextAlarmTime - sets the alarm time. Only valid for the next 24 hours.
• notifySndFile - plays a media-file which by default needs to be stored in the folder "/storage/emulated/0/Notifications/" of the Android device. You may use the attribute setNotifySndFilePath for defining a different folder.
• openCall - initial a call and hang up after optional time / set DEVICE openCall 0176354 10 call this number and hang up after 10s
• screenBrightness - 0-255, set screen brighness
• screenBrightnessMode - turn Adaptive brightness on,off
• screenMsg - display message on screen of Android device
• sendintent - send intent string Example: set $AMADDEVICE sendIntent org.smblott.intentradio.PLAY url http://stream.klassikradio.de/live/mp3-192/stream.klassikradio.de/play.m3u name Klassikradio, first parameter contains the action, second parameter contains the extra. At most two extras can be used.
• sendSMS - Sends an SMS to a specific phone number. Bsp.: sendSMS Dies ist ein Test|555487263
• startDaydream - start Daydream
• statusRequest - Get a new status report of Android device. Not all readings can be updated using a statusRequest as some readings are only updated if the value of the reading changes.
• timer - set a countdown timer in the "Clock" stock app. Only minutes are allowed as parameter.
• ttsMsg - send a message which will be played as voice message (to change laguage temporary set first character &en; or &de;)
• userFlowState - set Flow/Tasker-profile active or inactive,set Nexus7Wohnzimmer Badezimmer:inactive vorheizen or set Nexus7Wohnzimmer Badezimmer vorheizen,Nachtlicht Steven:inactive
• userFlowRun - executes the specified flow/task
• vibrate - vibrate Android device
• volume - set media volume. Works on internal speaker or, if connected, bluetooth speaker or speaker connected via stereo jack
• volumeNotification - set notifications volume

Set (depending on attribute values)
• changetoBtDevice - switch to another bluetooth device. Attribute setBluetoothDevice needs to be set. See note below! (Automagic only)
• nfc - activate or deactivate the nfc Modul on/off. attribute root
• openApp - start an app. attribute setOpenApp
• openURL - opens a URLS in the standard browser as long as no other browser is set by the attribute setOpenUrlBrowser.Example: attr Tablet setOpenUrlBrowser de.ozerov.fully|de.ozerov.fully.MainActivity, first parameter: package name, second parameter: Class Name
• screen - on/off/lock/unlock, switch screen on/off or lock/unlock screen. In Automagic "Preferences" the "Device admin functions" need to be enabled, otherwise "Screen off" does not work. attribute setScreenOnForTimer changes the time the display remains switched on! (Tasker supports only "on/off" command)
• screenFullscreen - on/off, activates/deactivates full screen mode. attribute setFullscreen
• screenLock - Locks screen with request for PIN. attribute setScreenlockPIN - enter PIN here. Only use numbers, 4-16 numbers required. (Automagic only)
• screenOrientation - Auto,Landscape,Portait, set screen orientation (automatic, horizontal, vertical). attribute setScreenOrientation
• system - issue system command (only with rooted Android devices). reboot,shutdown,airplanemodeON (can only be switched ON) attribute root, in Automagic "Preferences" "Root functions" need to be enabled.
• takePicture - take a camera picture Attribut setTakePictureResolution
• takeScreenshot - take a Screenshot picture Attribut setTakeScreenshotResolution


Attribut
• setAPSSID - set WLAN AccesPoint SSID('s) to prevent WLAN sleeps (Automagic only), more than one ssid can comma seperate
• setNotifySndFilePath - set systempath to notifyfile (default /storage/emulated/0/Notifications/
• setTtsMsgSpeed - set speaking speed for TTS (For Automagic: Value between 0.5 - 4.0, 0.5 Step, default: 1.0)(For Tasker: Value between 1 - 10, 1 Step, default: 5)
• setTtsMsgLang - set speaking language for TTS, de or en (default is de)
• setTtsMsgVol - is set, change automatically the media audio end set it back
• set setTakePictureResolution - set the camera resolution for takePicture action (800x600,1024x768,1280x720,1600x1200,1920x1080)
• setTakePictureCamera - which camera do you use (Back,Front).

To be able to use "openApp" the corresponding attribute "setOpenApp" needs to contain the app package name.

To be able to switch between bluetooth devices the attribute "setBluetoothDevice" needs to contain (a list of) bluetooth devices defined as follows: attr <DEVICE> BTdeviceName1|MAC,BTDeviceName2|MAC No spaces are allowed in any BTdeviceName. Defining MAC please make sure to use the character : (colon) after each second digit/character.
Example: attr Nexus10Wohnzimmer setBluetoothDevice Logitech_BT_Adapter|AB:12:CD:34:EF:32,Anker_A3565|GH:56:IJ:78:KL:76


state
• initialized - shown after initial define.
• active - device is active.
• disabled - device is disabled by the attribute "disable".



Further examples and reading:

Wiki page for AMAD (german only)

AirUnit

AirUnit implements a FHEM device to control Danfoss AirUnits (a1,a2,w1,w2). Tested only with w2 (Feb 2021). With this module it is possible to control the most useful functions of your ventilation system.



possible Readings	units of values
Abluft_Grundstufe_Einstellung	percent
Abluft_Luefterdrehzahl	rpm
Abluft_Stufe	step
Abluft_Temperatur	degree
Aussenluft_Temperatur	degree
Bypass_aktiviert	on/off
Bypass_Dauer	hour
Feuerstaette_aktiviert	on/off
Fortluft_Temperatur	degree
Luefterstufe_manuell	step
Luftfeuchtigkeit	percent
Model	name
Modus	mode of operation
Nachtkuehlung_aktiviert	on/off
Raumluft_Temperatur_AirDail	degree
Seriennummer	number
Stosslueftung_aktiviert	on/off
Stosslueftung_Dauer	hour
Zuluft_Grundstufe_Einstellung	percent
Zuluft_Luefterdrehzahl	rpm
Zuluft_Stufe	step
Zuluft_Temperatur	degree
automatische_Stosslueftung	on/off
automatischer_Bypass	on/off
verbl.Batterielebensdauer_AirDial	percent
verbl.verbl.Filterlebensdaue	percent
Arbeitsstunden	hour



Define
define <name> AirUnit <IP-address[:Port]> [poll-interval]
If the poll interval is omitted, it is set to 300 (seconds). Smallest possible value is 30.
Usually, the port needs not to be defined.
Example: define myAirUnit AirUnit 192.168.0.12 600

Set

set <name> <option> <value>

You can set different values to any of the following options.

Options:
• Modus
  You can choose between
  "Bedarfsmodus", for automatic mode
  "Programm", you can define a programm in your AirDail-Controller and choose one.
  "Manuell", you can set the steps for the fans manually (only in manual mode). Bypass and Boost are in automatic mode.
  "Aus", the system is off for 24 hours, after this time, the system starts in automatic mode with fanstep 1.
• Luefterstufe
  You can set the steps for the fans manually. (only in manual mode)
• Stosslueftung
  You can activate/deactive the Boost-Option of your ventilation system. You can configure this mode in your AirDail-Controller, the standard fanstep 10 for 3 hours.
  It is useful if you need more Air e.g. in case of cooking or a party with more people.
• Stosslueftung_Dauer
  You can set the hours for the duration of Boost-Option manually.
• Bypass
  You can activate/deactive the Bypass-Option of you ventilations systems. Its a cooling function, the heat exchanger will be deactivated.
  You can configure this mode in your AirDail-Controller, the standard time is 3 hours.
  You can't activte it, if the outdoor temperature is under 5°C.
  This option is not available for w1-unit.
• Bypass_Dauer
  You can set the hours for the duration of Bypass-Option manually.
• Nachtkuehlung
  You can activate/deactive the nightcooling option of you ventilations systems. You can configure this in your AirDail-Controller.
  This option is not available for w1-unit.
• automatische_Stosslueftung
  You can activate/deactive the automatic Boost-Option of you ventilations systems. Its automaticly activated, if the humidity increase very strong, then it runs for 30min.
• automatischer_Bypass
  You can activate/deactive the automatic Bypass-Option of you ventilations systems. Its automaticly activated, if the outdoor temperature and room temperature are higher then the configured values.
  You can configure this mode in your AirDail-Controller.
• Intervall
  You can setup the refresh intervall of your readings. Minimum 30 seconds.
• Feuerstaette
  You can activate/deactive the Fireplace-Option.

Get

set <name> <option> <value>

You can set different values to any of the following options.

Options:
• update
  You can refresh all values manually.

Attributes
attr <name> <attribute> <value>

Attributes:
• disable 0|1
  When you set disable to "1", the connection and the refresh intervall will be disabled. (takes a while)
  This feature gives you the possibility to use an external connection (e.g. the Danfoss-Windows-Tool) without deletion of the device.
  

additional information
• PC-Tool
  You can donwload the Danfoss-Windows-Tool HERE.
  You can start this tool with 3 different options: enduser, service or installer.
  You need only to change the "HRVPCTool.exe.config" in the installation directory.
  
  • enduser {47464213-F94A-495e-81A0-486E54CB4F64}
  • service {FC0CB02C-1695-4064-BCD9-FC0A5D77ED3D}
  • installer {E4C3938B-9F3E-427e-85CF-A42FE350326D}

Alarm

FHEM module to set up a house alarm system with 8 different alarm levels

Usage

See German Wiki page


Define

define <name> Alarm
Defines the Alarm system.

Notes:
• This module uses the global attribute language to determine its output data
  (default: EN=english). For German output set attr global language DE.
• This module needs the JSON package.

Set

• set <name> canceled <level>
  cancels an alarm of level <level>, where <level> = 0..7
• set <name> armed <level>
set <name> disarmed <level>
  sets the alarm of level <level> to armed (i.e., active) or disarmed (i.e., inactive), where <level> = 0..7
• set <name> locked
set <name> unlocked
  sets the lockstate of the alarm module to locked (i.e., alarm setups may not be changed) resp. unlocked (i.e., alarm setups may be changed>)
• set <name> save|restore
  Manually save/restore the arm states to/from the external file AlarmFILE (save done automatically at each state modification, restore at FHEM start)

Get

• get <name> version
  Display the version of the module

Attributes

• attr <name> hiddenroom <string>
  Room name for hidden alarm room (containing only the Alarm device), default: AlarmRoom
• attr <name> publicroom <string>
  Room name for public alarm room (containing sensor/actor devices), default: Alarm
• attr <name> lockstate locked|unlocked
  locked means that alarm setups may not be changed, unlocked means that alarm setups may be changed>
• attr <name> testbutton 0|1
  1 means that a test button is displayed for every actor field
• attr <name> statedisplay simple,color,table,none
  defines how the state of all eight alarm levels is shown. Example for the case when alarm no. 0 is disarmed and only alarm no. 2 is raised:
  • simple = OXOOOOO
  • color = 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
  • table = HTML mini table with colored fields for alarms
  • none = no state display
• attr <name> noicons 0|1
  when set to 1, animated icons are suppressed
• attr <name> iconmap list
  comma separated list of alarm levels for which the main icon/widget is set to disarmed/mixed/armed. No default=icon static
• attr <name> disarmcolor|armwaitcolor|armcolor|alarmcolor color
  four color specifications to signal the states disarmed (default lightgray), armwait (default #ffe658), armed (default #53f3c7) and alarmed (default #fd5777)
• attr <name> armdelay mm:ss
  time until the arming of an alarm becomes operative (0:00 - 9:59 allowed)
• attr <name> armwait action
  FHEM action to be carried out immediately after the arm event
• attr <name> armact action
  FHEM action to be carried out at the arm event after the delay time
• attr <name> disarmact action
  FHEM action to be carried out on the disarming of an alarm
• attr <name> cancelact action
  FHEM action to be carried out on the canceling of an alarm
• For each of the 8 alarm levels, several attributes hold the alarm setup. They should not be changed by hand, but through the web interface to avoid confusion: level<level>cond, level<level>start, level<level>end, level<level>autocan, level<level>msg, level<level>onact, level<level>offact
• Standard attributes alias, comment, event-on-update-reading, event-on-change-reading, room, eventMap, loglevel, webCmd

AndroidDB

The module allows to control an Android device by using the Android Debug Bridge (ADB). Before one can define an Android device, an AndroidDBHost I/O device must exist.

Dependencies: 89_AndroidDBHost

Define


define <name> AndroidDB <NameOrIP>[<Port>] The parameter NameOrIP is the hostname or the IP address of the Android device. The parameter Port specifies the TCP port to be used for the device connection. The default port is 5555.

Set

• set <Name> createRemote <Layout>
  Create a remote control device for the Android device. Create a notify device for the remote control to send button events to the AndroidDB device.
br/>
• set <Name> exportPresets <Filename>
  Export the currently loaded presets to file. This file can be modified and assigned again by using attribute 'preset'.


• set <name> reboot
  Reboot the device.


• set <name> remoteControl <MacroName>
  Send key codes associated with 'MacroName' to the Android device. Either attribute 'macros' or 'preset' must be set to make this command available. Macro names defined in attribute 'macros' are overwriting macros with the same name in a preset selected by attribute 'preset'.


• set <name> rollHorz <DeltaX>
  Scroll display horizontally. Not supported on all types of Android devices.


• set <name> rollVert <DeltaY>
  Scroll display vertically. Not supported on all types of Android devices.


• set <name> sendKey [longpress] <KeyCode> [...]
  Send a key code to the Android device. If option 'longpress' is specified, only one KeyCode is allowed.


• set <name> sendNumKeys <Number>
  Send digits of Number to the Android device. Number must be in range 0-9999.


• set <name> sendText <Text>
  Send Text to the Android device.


• set <name> shell <Command> [<Arguments>]
  Execute shell command on Android device.


• set <name> tap <X> <Y>
  Simulate a tap on a touchscreen (only available an devices having a touchscreen).

Get

• set <Name> keyPreset <PresetName>
  List key preset definition.
br/>
• set <Name> cmdPreset <PresetName>
  List command preset definition.
br/>

Attributes

• connect 0|1
  If set to 1, a connection to the Android device will be established during FHEM start. Note: Set this attribute for one Android device only!


• createReadings <command-expression>
  Create readings for shell command-expression. Output must contain lines in format key=value.
  Example: attr myDev createReadings dumpsys


• macros <MacroDef>[;...]
  Define a list of keycode macros to be sent to an Android device with 'remoteControl' command or define shortcuts for remote commands.
  A 'MacroDef' is using the following syntax:
  MacroName:KeyCode[,...]
  or
  MacroName:Command
  
  Parameter Command is a adb command.
  Example, define a command 'set listpackages':
  

  attr myDev macros listpackages:shell pm list packages -f

  
  Several macro definitions can be specified by seperating them using a semicolon.


• preset <PresetName>
  Select a preset of keycode macros.


• presetFile <Filename>
  Load a set of macros from a preset defintion file. If the same macro name is defined in the selected preset and in attribute 'macros', the definition in the 'macros' attribute overwrites the definition in the preset.
  A preset defintion file is using the following format:
  

          # Comment
          PresetName1
          MacroDef1
          MacroDef2
          ...
          PresetName2
          ...
          

  A 'MacroDef' is using the following syntax:
  MacroName:KeyCode[,...]
  or
  MacroName:Command:Parameters
  
  Usually Command is 'shell'.

AndroidDBHost

Provides I/O device for AndroidDB devices.

Dependencies: Perl module IPC::Open3, Android Platform Tools

Android DB Platform Tools installation:

• Debian/Raspbian: apt-get install android-sdk-platform-tools
• Windows/MacOSX/Linux x86: Android Developer Portal

Define


define <name> AndroidDBHost [server=<host>}[:<port>]] [adb=<path>]

The parameter 'host' is the hostname of the system, where the ADB server is running. Default is 'localhost'. Parameter 'adb' can be used to specify the path to the adb command (must include 'adb' or 'adb.exe').
Note: The adb command must be executable by the account under which FHEM is running.

Set

• set <name> command <Command> [<Args>]
  Execute ADB command.


• set <name> disconnectAll
  Disconnect all devices.


• set <name> start
  Start ADB server.


• set <name> stop
  Stop ADB server.

Get

• get <name> status
  Get status of ADB server.

Apt Update Information

AptToDate - Retrieves apt information about Debian update state state
With this module it is possible to read the apt update information from a Debian System.
It's required to insert "fhem ALL=NOPASSWD: /usr/bin/apt-get" via "visudo".

Define

define <name> AptToDate <HOST>

Example:

define fhemServer AptToDate localhost


This statement creates a AptToDate Device with the name fhemServer and the Host localhost.
After the device has been created the Modul is fetch all information about update state. This will need a moment.


Readings
• state - update status about the server
• os-release_ - all information from /etc/os-release
• repoSync - status about last repository sync.
• toUpgrade - status about last upgrade
• updatesAvailable - number of available updates


Set
• repoSync - fetch information about update state
• toUpgrade - to run update process. this will take a moment




Get
• showUpgradeList - list about available updates
• showUpdatedList - list about updated packages, from old version to new version
• showWarningList - list of all last warnings
• showErrorList - list of all last errors




Attributes
• disable - disables the device
• upgradeListReading - add Upgrade List Reading as JSON
• distupgrade - change upgrade prozess to dist-upgrade
• disabledForIntervals - disable device for interval time (13:00-18:30 or 13:00-18:30 22:00-23:00)

Air Quality Index

This modul fetch Air Quality data from http://aqicn.org.

Define

define <name> Aqicn token=<TOKEN-KEY>

Example:

define aqicnMaster Aqicn token=12345678


This statement creates the Aqicn Master Device.
After the device has been created, you can search Aqicn Station by city name and create automatically the station device.


Readings
• APL - Air Pollution Level
• AQI - Air Quality Index (AQI) of the dominant pollutant in city. Values are converted from µg/m³ to AQI level using US EPA standards. For more detailed information: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Air_quality_index and https://www.airnow.gov/index.cfm?action=aqi_brochure.index.
• CO-AQI - AQI of CO (carbon monoxide). An AQI of 100 for carbon monoxide corresponds to a level of 9 parts per million (averaged over 8 hours).
• NO2-AQI - AQI of NO2 (nitrogen dioxide). See also https://www.airnow.gov/index.cfm?action=pubs.aqiguidenox
• PM10-AQI - AQI of PM10 (respirable particulate matter). For particles up to 10 micrometers in diameter: An AQI of 100 corresponds to 150 micrograms per cubic meter (averaged over 24 hours).
• PM2.5-AQI - AQI of PM2.5 (fine particulate matter). For particles up to 2.5 micrometers in diameter: An AQI of 100 corresponds to 35 micrograms per cubic meter (averaged over 24 hours).
• O3-AQI - AQI of O3 (ozone). An AQI of 100 for ozone corresponds to an ozone level of 0.075 parts per million (averaged over 8 hours). See also https://www.airnow.gov/index.cfm?action=pubs.aqiguideozone
• SO2-AQI - AQI of SO2 (sulfur dioxide). An AQI of 100 for sulfur dioxide corresponds to a level of 75 parts per billion (averaged over one hour).
• temperature - Temperature in degrees Celsius
• pressure - Atmospheric pressure in hectopascals (hPa)
• humidity - Relative humidity in percent
• state- Current AQI and air pollution level
• status - condition of the data
• pubDate- Local time of publishing the data
• pubUnixTime - Unix time stamp of local time but converted wrongly, if local time is e.g. 1300 GMT+1, the time stamp shows 1300 UTC.
• pubTimezone - Time zone of the city (UTC)
• windspeed - Wind speed in kilometer per hour
• windDirection - Wind direction
• dominatPoll - Dominant pollutant in city
• dewpoint - Dew in degrees Celsius
• healthImplications - Information about Health Implications
• htmlStyle - can be used to format the STATE and FHEMWEB (Example: stateFormate htmlStyle

get
• stationSearchByCity - search station by city name and open the result in seperate popup window
• update - fetch new data every x times

Attribute
• interval - interval in seconds for automatically fetch data (default 3600)

ArduCounter

This module implements an Interface to an Arduino, ESP8266 or ESP32 based counter for pulses on any input pin of an Arduino Uno, Nano, Jeenode, NodeMCU, Wemos D1, TTGO T-Display or similar device.
The device connects to Fhem either through USB / serial or via Wifi / TCP if an ESP board is used.
ArduCounter does not only count pulses but also measure pulse lenghts and the time between pulses so it can filter noise / bounces and gives better power/flow (Watts or liters/second) readings than systems that just count in fixed time intervals.
The number of pulses per kWh or liter is defineable and counters continue even when Fhem or the device restarts so you don't need additional user readings to make such calculations
The typical use case is an S0-Interface on an energy meter or water meter, but also reflection light barriers to monitor old ferraris counters or analog water meters are supported
Counters are configured with attributes that define which GPIO pins should count pulses and in which intervals the board should report the current counts.
The sketch that works with this module uses pin change interrupts so it can efficiently count pulses on all available input pins. The module has been tested with 14 inputs of an Arduino Uno counting in parallel and pulses as short as 3 milliseconds.
The module creates readings for pulse counts, consumption and optionally also a pin history with pulse lengths and gaps of the last pulses.
If an ESP8266 or ESP32 is used, the device can be flashed and configured over Wifi (it opens its own temporary Hotspot / SSID for configuration so you can set which existing SSID to connect to and which password to use). For TTGO T-Display boards (ESP32 with TFT display) the local display on the device itself can also display Wifi status and current consumption.

Prerequisites


• This module requires an Arduino Uno, Nano, Jeenode, NodeMCU, Wemos D1, TTGO T-Display or similar device based on an Atmel 328p, ESP8266 or ESP32 running the ArduCounter sketch provided with this module
  In order to flash an arduino board with the corresponding ArduCounter firmware from within Fhem, avrdude needs to be installed.
  To flash ESP32 or ESP8266 boards form within Fhem, Python and the scripts esptool.py / espota.py need to be installed.
  For old ferraris counters a reflection light barrier which in the simpest case can consist of a photo transistor (connected to an anlalog input of the Arduino / ESP) and an led or a laser module (connected to a digital output), both with a resistor in line are needed. To drive a laser module with 5V, another transistor is typically needed to switch 5V from a 3.3V GPIO output.

Define

define <name> ArduCounter <device>
or
define <name> ArduCounter <ip:port>

<device> specifies the serial port to communicate with the Arduino.
<ip:port> specifies the ip address and tcp port to communicate with an esp8266 / ESP32 where port is typically 80.
The name of the serial device depends on your distribution and serial adapter.
You can also specify a baudrate for serial connections if the device name contains the @ character, e.g.: /dev/ttyUSB0@115200
The default baudrate of the ArduCounter firmware is 115200 since sketch version 4 and used to be 38400 since sketch version 1.4
The latest version of this module will however try different baudrates automatically if communication with the counting device seems not possible.
Example:


define AC ArduCounter /dev/ttyUSB2@115200
define AC ArduCounter 192.168.1.134:80

Configuration of ArduCounter digital counters


Specify the pins where impulses should be counted e.g. as attr AC pinX falling pullup min 25
The X in pinX can be an Arduino / ESP GPIO pin number with or without the letter D e.g. pin4, pinD5, pin6, pinD7 ...
After the pin you can use the keywords falling or rising to define if a logical one / 5V (rising) or a logical zero / 0V (falling) should be treated as pulse.
The optional keyword pullup activates the pullup resistor for the given Pin.
The last argument is also optional but recommended and specifies a minimal pulse length in milliseconds.
An energy meter with S0 interface is typically connected to GND and an input pin like D4.
The S0 pulse then pulls the input down to 0V.
Since the minimal pulse lenght of an S0 interface is specified to be 30ms, the typical configuration for an s0 interface is
attr AC pinX falling pullup min 25
Specifying a minimal pulse length is recommended since it filters bouncing of reed contacts or other noise. The keyword min before 25 is optional.

Example:


        define AC ArduCounter /dev/ttyUSB2
        attr AC pulsesPerUnit 1000
        attr AC interval 60 300
        attr AC pinD4 falling pullup min 5
        attr AC pinD5 falling pullup min 25
        attr AC pinD6 rising
        

This defines a counter that is connected to Fhem via serial line ttyUSB2 with three counters connected to the GPIO pins D4, D5 and D5.
D4 and D5 have their pullup resistors activated and the impulses draw the pins to zero.
For D4 and D5 the board measures the time in milliseconds between the falling edge and the rising edge. If this time is longer than the specified 5 (or 25 for pin D5) milliseconds then the impulse is counted.
If the time is shorter then this impulse is regarded as noise and added to a separate reject counter.
For pin D6 the board uses a default minimal length of 2ms and counts every time when the signal changes from 1 (rising pulse) back to 0.

Configuration of ArduCounter analog counters


This module and the corresponding ArduCounter sketch can be used to read water meters or old analog ferraris energy counters.
Therefore a reflection light barrier needs to be connected to the board. This might simply consist of an infra red photo transistor (connected to an analog input) and an infra red led (connected to a digital output), both with a resistor in line. The idea comes from Martin Kompf (https://www.kompf.de/tech/emeir.html) and has been adopted for ArduCounter to support old ferraris energy counters or water meters.
The configuration is then similar to the one for digital counters:


        define WaterMeter ArduCounter 192.168.1.110:80
        attr ACF pinA0 rising pullup min 4 analog out 27 threshold 120,220
        attr ACF interval 5,60,2,15,10,3
        attr ACF pulsesPerUnit 35
        attr ACF stateFormat {sprintf("%.3f l/min", ReadingsVal($name,"powerA0",0))}
        

In this case an analog GPIO pin is used as input and the normal configuration parameters are followed by the keyword analog out or simply out, the gpio number of a GPIO output that connects a light source and the thresholds that decide when an analog input value is regarded as "low" or "high". In the example an ESP32 is used via Wifi connection. GPIO pin A0 is used as analog input and is connected to a photo transistor that senses the intensity of light. GPIO 27 is used as LED output and switched on/off in a high frequency. On GPIO A0 the reflected light is measured and the difference in a measurement between when the LED is off and when the LED is on is compared to the thresholds defined in the pinA0-attribute. When the measured light difference is above 220, then a pulse starts (since rising is specified). When the measured difference is below 120 then the pulse ends.

The attribute interval has the following meaning in the above example: The device reports the current counts and the time difference beween the first and the last pulse if at least 2 pulses have been counted and if they are more than 15 milliseconds apart form each other. If not, then the device continues counting. If after 60 seconds these conditions are stil not met, then the device will report the current count anyways and use the current time as the end of the interval.
The last two numbers of the interval attribute define that the device will read the analog input 3 times and then work with the average. Between each analog measurement series there will be a delay of 10 milliseconds.

The attribute pulsesPerUnit 35 defines that 35 pulses correspond to one unit (e.g. liter) and the reading calcCounterA0 is increased by the reported raw counts divided by 35.
To find out the right analog thresholds you can set the attribute enableHistory to 1 which will ask the firmware of your counting board to report the average difference measurements before they are compared to a threshold. The ArduCounter module will count how often each value is reported and you can then query these analog level counts with get levels. After a few measuremets the result of get levels might look like this:


            observed levels from analog input:
            94: 21
            95: 79
            96: 6
            97: 2
            98: 3
            99: 2
            100: 2
            101: 1
            102: 3
            105: 2
            106: 1
            108: 2
            109: 1
            110: 1
            112: 1
            113: 3
            115: 4
            116: 9
            117: 14
            118: 71
            119: 103
            120: 118
            121: 155
            122: 159
            123: 143
            124: 147
            125: 158
            126: 198
            127: 249
            128: 220
            129: 230
            130: 201
            131: 140
            132: 147
            133: 153
            134: 141
            135: 119
            136: 105
            137: 109
            138: 114
            139: 83
            140: 33
            141: 14
            142: 1      
        

This shows the measured values together with the frequency how often the individual value has been measured. It is obvious that most measurements result in values between 120 and 135, very few values are betweem 96 and 115 and another peak is around the value 95.
It means that in the example of a ferraris energy counter, when the red mark of the ferraris disc is under the sensor, the value is around 95 and while when the blank disc is under the sensor, the value is typically between 120 and 135. So a good upper threshold would be 120 and a good lower threshold would be for example 96.

Set-Commands

• raw
send the value to the board so you can directly talk to the sketch using its commands.
This is not needed for normal operation but might be useful sometimes for debugging
• flash [<file>]
flashes the ArduCounter firmware from the subdirectory FHEM/firmware onto the device.
Normally you can just specify set myDevice flash. The parameter <file> is optional and allows specifying an alternative firmware file. The attribute flashCommand can be used to override which command is executed. If the attribute flashCommand is not specified then the module selects an appropriate command depending on the board type (set with the attribute board) and depending on the connection (serial or Wifi).
For an arduino NANO for example the module would execute avrdude (which has to be installed of course) and flash the connected arduino with the updated hex file
(by default it looks for ArduCounter.hex in the FHEM/firmware subdirectory).
For an Arduino UNO for example the default is avrdude -p atmega328P -c arduino -P [PORT] -D -U flash:w:[HEXFILE] 2>[LOGFILE]
For an Arduino Nano based counter -b 57600 is added.
For an ESP32 connected via Wifi, the module would call espota.py which will upload the firmware over the air.
If the attribute flashCommand is not specified for an ESP32 based board connected via serial line, then the module uses the command esptool.py --chip esp32 --port [PORT] --baud 460800 --before default_reset --after hard_reset write_flash -z --flash_mode dio --flash_freq 40m --flash_size detect 0x1000 FHEM/firmware/ArduCounter_ESP32_bootloader_dio_40m.bin 0x8000 FHEM/firmware/ArduCounter_ESP32_partitions.bin 0xe000 FHEM/firmware/ArduCounter_ESP32_boot_app0.bin 0x10000 FHEM/firmware/ArduCounter_ESP32_firmware.bin >[LOGFILE] 2>&1 for example which flashes the whole ESP32 with all the partitions.
For over the air flashing it would use espota.py -i[IP] -p [NETPORT] -f [BINFILE] 2>[LOGFILE].
Of course esptool.py or espota.py as well as python would need to be installed on the system.
• resetWifi
reset Wifi settings of the counting device so the Wifi Manager will come up after the next reset to select a wireless network and enter the Wifi passphrase.
• reset
sends a command to the device which causes a hardware reset or reinitialize and reset of the internal counters of the board.
The module then reopens the counting device and resends the attribute configuration / definition of the pins.
• saveConfig
stores the current interval, analog threshold and pin configuration in the EEPROM of the counter device so it will automatically be retrieved after a reset.
• enable
sets the attribute disable to 0
• disable
sets the attribute disable to 1
• reconnect
closes the tcp connection to an ESP based counter board that is conected via TCP/IP and reopen the connection
• clearLevels
clears the statistics for analog levels. This is only relevant if you use the board to read via a reflective light barrier and you want to set the thresholds according to the statistics.
• clearCounters <pin>
resets all the counter readings for the specified pin to 0
• counter <pin>, <value>
set the calcCounter reading for the specified pin to the given value
• clearHistory
deletes all the cached pin history entries

Get-Commands

• info
send a command to the Arduino board to get current counts.
This is not needed for normal operation but might be useful sometimes for debugging
• levels
show the count for the measured levels if an analog pin is used to measure e.g. the red mark of a ferraris counter disc. This is useful for setting the thresholds for analog measurements.
• history <pin>
shows details regarding all the level changes that the counter device (Arduino or ESP) has detected and how they were used (counted or rejected)
If get history is issued with a pin name (e.g. get history D5) then only the history entries concerning D5 will be shown.
This information is sent from the device to Fhem if the attribute enableHistory is set to 1.
The maximum number of lines that the Arducounter module stores in a ring buffer is defined by the attribute maxHist and defaults to 1000.

Attributes


• do_not_notify
• readingFnAttributes


• pin[AD]?[0-9]+<rising|falling> [<pullup>] [min] <min length> [[analog] out <out pin> [threshold] <min, max>]
  Define a GPIO pin of the Arduino or ESP board as input. This attribute expects for digital inputs either rising or falling, followed by an optional pullup and the optional keyword min and an optional number as minimal length of pulses and gaps between pulses.
  The counter device will track rising and falling edges of each impulse and measure the length of a pulse in milliseconds.
  The minimal length specified here is the minimal duration of a pulse and a pause before a pulse. If one is too small, the pulse is not counted but added to a separate reject counter.
  Example:
  

              attr MyCounter pinD4 falling pullup 25
              

  For analog inputs with connected reflective light barries, you have to add analog out and the GPIO pin number of the pin where the light source (LED or laser) is connected, the keyword threshold followed by the lower and upper threshold separated by a komma.
  Example:
  

              attr MyCounter pinA0 rising pullup min 3 analog out 27 threshold 120,220
              

• interval <normal> <max> [<min> <min count> [<analog interval> <analog samples>]]
  Defines the parameters that affect the way counting and reporting works. This Attribute expects at least two and a maximum of six numbers as value. The first is the normal interval, the second the maximal interval, the third is a minimal interval and the fourth is a minimal pulse count. The last two numbers are only needed for counting with reflective light barriers. They specify the delay between the measurements and the number of samples for each measurement.
  
  In the usual operation mode (when the normal interval is smaller than the maximum interval), the Arduino board just counts and remembers the time between the first impulse and the last impulse for each pin.
  After the normal interval is elapsed the Arduino board reports the count and time for those pins where impulses were encountered.
  This means that even though the normal interval might be 10 seconds, the reported time difference can be something different because it observed impulses as starting and ending point.
  The Power (e.g. for energy meters) is then calculated based of the counted impulses and the time between the first and the last impulse.
  For the next interval, the starting time will be the time of the last impulse in the previous reporting period and the time difference will be taken up to the last impulse before the reporting interval has elapsed.
  
  The second, third and fourth numbers (maximum, minimal interval and minimal count) exist for the special case when the pulse frequency is very low and the reporting time is comparatively short.
  For example if the normal interval (first number) is 60 seconds and the device counts only one impulse in 90 seconds, the the calculated power reading will jump up and down and will give ugly numbers.
  By adjusting the other numbers of this attribute this can be avoided.
  In case in the normal interval the observed impulses are encountered in a time difference that is smaller than the third number (minimal interval) or if the number of impulses counted is smaller than the fourth number (minimal count) then the reporting is delayed until the maximum interval has elapsed or the above conditions have changed after another normal interval.
  This way the counter will report a higher number of pulses counted and a larger time difference back to fhem.
  Example:
  

              attr myCounter interval 60 600 5 2
              

  
  If this is seems too complicated and you prefer a simple and constant reporting interval, then you can set the normal interval and the mximum interval to the same number. This changes the operation mode of the counter to just count during this normal and maximum interval and report the count. In this case the reported time difference is always the reporting interval and not the measured time between the real impulses.
  
  For analog sampling the last two numbers define the delay in milliseconds between analog measurements and the number of samples that will be taken as one mesurement.
• board
  specify the type of the board used for ArduCounter like NANO, UNO, ESP32, ESP8266 or T-Display
  Example:

              attr myCounter board NANO
              

• pulsesPerUnit <number>
  specify the number of pulses that the meter is giving out per unit that sould be displayed (e.g. per kWh energy consumed).
  For many S0 counters this is 1000, for old ferraris counters this is 75 (rounds per kWh).
  This attribute used to be called pulsesPerKWh and this name still works but the new name should be used preferably since the old one could be removed in future versions.
  Example:

              attr myCounter pulsesPerUnit 75
              

• readingPulsesPerUnit[AD]?[0-9]+ <number>
  is the same as pulsesPerUnit but specified per GPIO pin individually in case you have multiple counters with different settings at the same time
  This attribute used to be called readingPulsesPerKWh[AD]?[0-9]+ and this name still works but the new name should be used preferably since the old one could be removed in future versions.
  
  Example:
  

              attr myCounter readingPulsesPerUnitA7 75
  
              attr myCounter readingPulsesPerUnitD4 1000
              

• readingFlowUnitTime[AD]?[0-9]+ <time>
  specified the time period in seconds which is used as the basis for calculating the current flow or power for the given pin.
  If the counter e.g. counts liters and you want to see the flow in liters per minute, then you have to set this attribute to 60.
  If you count kWh and you want to see the current power in kW, then specify 3600 (one hour).
  Since this attribute is just used for multiplying the consumption per second, you can also use it to get watts instead of kW by using 3600000 instead of 3600.
• flowUnitTime <time>
  like readingFlowUnitTimeXX but applies to all pins that have no explicit readingFlowUnitTimeXX attribute.
• readingNameCount[AD]?[0-9]+ <new name>
  Change the name of the counter reading pinX to something more meaningful.
  Example:

              attr myCounter readingNameCountD4 CounterHaus_internal
              

• readingNameLongCount[AD]?[0-9]+ <new name>
  Change the name of the long counter reading longX to something more meaningful.
  Example:

              attr myCounter readingNameLongCountD4 CounterHaus_long
              

• readingNameInterpolatedCount[AD]?[0-9]+ <new name>
  Change the name of the interpolated long counter reading InterpolatedlongX to something more meaningful.
  Example:

              attr myCounter readingNameInterpolatedCountD4 CounterHaus_interpolated
              

• readingNameCalcCount[AD]?[0-9]+ <new name>
  Change the name of the real unit counter reading CalcCounterX to something more meaningful.
  Example:

              attr myCounter readingNameCalcCountD4 CounterHaus_kWh
              

• readingNamePower[AD]?[0-9]+ <new name>
  Change the name of the power reading powerX to something more meaningful.
  Example:

              attr myCounter readingNamePowerD4 PowerHaus_kW
              

• readingStartTime[AD]?[0-9]+ [0|1]
  Allow the reading time stamp to be set to the beginning of measuring intervals. This is a hack where the timestamp of readings is artificially set to a past time and may have side effects so avoid it unless you fully understand how Fhem works with readings and their time.
• verboseReadings[AD]?[0-9]+ [0|1]
  create the additional readings lastMsg and pinHistory for each pin
  if verboseReafings is set to 1 for the specified pin.
  If set to -1 then the internal counter, the long counter and interpolated long counter readings will be hidden.
  Example:

              attr myCounter verboseReadingsD4 1
              

• enableHistory [0|1]
  tells the counting device to record the individual time of each change at each GPIO pin and send it to Fhem. This information is cached on the Fhem side and can be viewed with the command get history The optput of get history will look like this:

                  Seq  12627 2020-03-22 20:39:54 Pin D5   0.080 seconds at 0 -> pulse counted
                  Seq  12628 2020-03-22 20:39:55 Pin D5   1.697 seconds at 1 -> gap
                  Seq  12629 2020-03-22 20:39:56 Pin D5   0.080 seconds at 0 -> pulse counted
                  Seq  12630 2020-03-22 20:39:56 Pin D5   1.694 seconds at 1 -> gap
                  Seq  12631 2020-03-22 20:39:58 Pin D5   0.081 seconds at 0 -> pulse counted
                  Seq  12632 2020-03-22 20:39:58 Pin D5   1.693 seconds at 1 -> gap
                  Seq  12633 2020-03-22 20:40:00 Pin D5   0.081 seconds at 0 -> pulse counted
                  Seq  12634 2020-03-22 20:40:00 Pin D5   1.696 seconds at 1 -> gap
                  Seq  12635 2020-03-22 20:40:02 Pin D5   0.081 seconds at 0 -> pulse counted
                  Seq  12636 2020-03-22 20:40:02 Pin D5   1.699 seconds at 1 -> gap
                  Seq  12637 2020-03-22 20:40:03 Pin D5   0.079 seconds at 0 -> pulse counted
                  Seq  12638 2020-03-22 20:40:03 Pin D5   1.700 seconds at 1 -> gap
                  Seq  12639 2020-03-22 20:40:05 Pin D5   0.080 seconds at 0 -> pulse counted
                  Seq  12642 2020-03-22 20:40:05 Pin D5   1.699 seconds at 1 -> gap
                  Seq  12643 2020-03-22 20:40:07 Pin D5   0.080 seconds at 0 -> pulse counted
                  Seq  12644 2020-03-22 20:40:07 Pin D5   1.698 seconds at 1 -> gap            
              

• enableSerialEcho [0|1]
  tells the counting device to show diagnostic data over the serial line when connected via TCP
• enablePinDebug [0|1]
  tells the counting device to show every level change of the defined input pins over the serial line or via TCP
• enableAnalogDebug [0|1]
  tells the counting device to show every analog measurement of the defined analog input pins over the serial line or via TCP
• enableDevTime [0|1]
  tells the counting device to show its internal millis timer so a drift between the devices time and fhem time can be calculated and logged
• maxHist <max entries>
  specifies how many pin history lines hould be buffered for "get history".
  This attribute defaults to 1000.
• analogThresholds
  this Attribute is outdated. Please specify the analog thresholds for reflective light barrier input with the attribute "pin..."
• flashCommand <new shell command>
  overrides the default command to flash the firmware via Wifi (OTA) or serial line. It is recommended to not define this attribute.
  Example:

              
              attr myCounter flashCommand avrdude -p atmega328P -c arduino -b 57600 -P [PORT] -D -U flash:w:[HEXFILE] 2>[LOGFILE]
              

  [PORT] is automatically replaced with the serial port for this device as it is specified in the define command.
  [HEXFILE] or [BINFILE] are synonyms and are both automatically replaced with the firmware file appropriate for the device. For ESP32 boards [HEXFILE] would be replaced by ArduCounter-8266.bin for example.
  [LOGFILE] is automatically replaced ArduCounterFlash.log in the fhem log subdirectory.
  [NETPORT] is automatically replaced by the tcp port number used for OTA flashing. For ESP32 this usually is 3232 and for 8266 Bords it is 8266.
  
• keepAliveDelay <delay>
  defines an interval in which the module sends keepalive messages to a counter device that is conected via tcp.
  This attribute is ignored if the device is connected via serial port.
  If the device doesn't reply within a defined timeout then the module closes and tries to reopen the connection.
  The module tells the device when to expect the next keepalive message and the device will also close the tcp connection if it doesn't see a keepalive message within the delay multiplied by 3
  The delay defaults to 10 seconds.
  Example:

              attr myCounter keepAliveDelay 30
              

• keepAliveTimeout <seconds>
  defines the timeout when wainting for a keealive reply (see keepAliveDelay) The timeout defaults to 2 seconds.
  Example:

              attr myCounter keepAliveTimeout 3
              

• keepAliveRetries <max number of retries>
  defines how often sending a keepalive is retried before the connection is closed and reopened.
  It defaults to 2.
  Example:

              attr myCounter keepAliveRetries 3
              

• nextOpenDelay <delay>
  defines the time in seconds that the module waits before retrying to open a disconnected tcp connection.
  This defaults to 60 seconds.
  Example:

              attr myCounter nextOpenDelay 20
              

• openTimeout <timeout>
  defines the timeout in seconds after which tcp open gives up trying to establish a connection to the counter device. This timeout defaults to 3 seconds.
  Example:

              attr myCounter openTimeout 5
              

• silentReconnect [0|1]
  if set to 1, then it will set the loglevel for "disconnected" and "reappeared" messages to 4 instead of 3
  Example:

              attr myCounter silentReconnect 1
              

• deviceDisplay <pin> <unit> <flowUnit>
  controls the unit strings that a local display on the counting device will show.
  Example:

              attr myCounter deviceDisplay 36,l,l/m
              attr myCounter deviceDisplay 36,kWh,kW
              

• disable [0|1]
  if set to 1 then the module is disabled and closes the connection to a counter device.
  
• factor
  Define a multiplicator for calculating the power from the impulse count and the time between the first and the last impulse.
  This attribute is outdated and unintuitive so you should avoid it.
  Instead you should specify the attribute pulsesPerUnit or readingPulsesPerUnit[0-9]+ (where [0-9]+ stands for the pin number).
• readingFactor[AD]?[0-9]+
  Override the factor attribute for this individual pin.
  Just like the attribute factor, this is a rather cumbersome way to specify the pulses per kWh.
  Instead it is advised to use the attribute pulsesPerUnit or readingPulsesPerUnit[0-9]+ (where [0-9]+ stands for the pin number).
• runTime[AD]?[0-9]+
  if this attribute is set for a pin, then a new reading will be created which accumulates the run time for this pin while consumption is greater than 0.
  This allows e.g. to check if a water meter shows water consumption for a time longer than X without stop.
• runTimeIgnore[AD]?[0-9]+
  this allows to ignore consumption for the run time attribute while a certain other device is switched on.
• devVerbose
  this attribute is outdated and has been replaced with the attributes enableHistory, enableSerialEcho, enablePinDebug, enableAnalogDebug, enableDevTime
• configDelay
  specify the time to wait for the board to report its configuration before Fhem sends the commands to reconfigure the board
• helloSendDelay
  specify the time to wait for the board to report its type before Fhem sends the commands to ask for it
• helloWaitTime
  specify the time to wait for the board to report its type when Fhem has asked for it before a timeout occurs

Readings / Events

The module creates at least the following readings and events for each defined pin:
• calcCounter.*
This is recommended reading for counting units based on the pulses and the attribute pulsesPerUnit. It is similar to interpolated long count which keeps on counting up after fhem restarts but this counter will take the pulses per Unit attribute into the calculation und thus does not count pulses but real Units (kWh, liters or some other unit that is applicable)
The name of this reading can be changed with the attribute readingNameCalcCount[AD]?[0-9]+ where [AD]?[0-9]+ stands for the pin description e.g. D4.
Another reading with the same name but ending in _i (e.g. calcCounterD4_i) will show how many kWh (or other units) of the above value is interpolated.
• pin.* e.g. pinD4
the current internal count at this pin (internal to the Arduino / ESP device, starts at 0 when the device restarts).
The name of this reading can be changed with the attribute readingNameCount[AD]?[0-9]+ where [AD]?[0-9]+ stands for the pin description e.g. D4
• long.* e.g. longD5
long count which keeps on counting up after fhem restarts whereas the pin.* count is only a temporary internal count that starts at 0 when the arduino board starts.
The name of this reading can be changed with the attribute readingNameLongCount[AD]?[0-9]+ where [AD]?[0-9]+ stands for the pin description e.g. D4
• interpolatedLong.*
like long.* but when the Arduino restarts the potentially missed pulses are interpolated based on the pulse rate before the restart and after the restart.
The name of this reading can be changed with the attribute readingNameInterpolatedCount[AD]?[0-9]+ where [AD]?[0-9]+ stands for the pin description e.g. D4
• reject.*
counts rejected pulses that are shorter than the specified minimal pulse length.
• power.*
the current calculated power / flow at this pin.
The name of this reading can be changed with the attribute readingNamePower[AD]?[0-9]+ where [AD]?[0-9]+ stands for the pin description e.g. D4.
This reading depends on the attributes pulsesPerUnit as well as readingFlowUnitTime or flowUnitTime for calculation
• pinHistory.*
shows detailed information of the last pulses. This is only available when a minimal pulse length is specified for this pin. Also the total number of impulses recorded here is limited to 20 for all pins together. The output looks like -36/7:0C, -29/7:1G, -22/8:0C, -14/7:1G, -7/7:0C, 0/7:1G
The first number is the relative time in milliseconds when the input level changed, followed by the length in milliseconds, the level and the internal action.
-36/7:0C for example means that 36 milliseconds before the reporting started, the input changed to 0V, stayed there for 7 milliseconds and this was counted.

• countDiff.*
delta of the current count to the last reported one. This is used together with timeDiff.* to calculate the power consumption.
• timeDiff.*
time difference between the first pulse in the current observation interval and the last one. Used togehter with countDiff to calculate the power consumption.
• seq.*
internal sequence number of the last report from the board to Fhem.
• runTime.*
this reading will only be created when the attribute runTime[AD]?[0-9]+ is set for a given pin.
It contains the time in seconds that the consumption / flow observed at the specified pin has not ben zero.
If a water meter which outputs 10 impulses per liter on its digital output is for example connected to GPIO pin D6, then if the attribute runTimeD6 is set to 1, the reading runTimeD6 will show for how many seconds the water has been flowing without a stop longer than the observation interval specifie in the interval-attribute. This is helpful when you want to create alerts in case someone forgot to close a water tap.

Arlo

Arlo security cams are connected to the Arlo Cloud via base stations. The base stations and cameras can be controlled with a REST API. Events (like movement and state changes) are delivery by server-sent events (SSE).

Define

define Arlo_Cloud Arlo ACCOUNT <hans.mustermann@xyz.de> <myArloPassword> <myEmailPassword> <myEmailUsername>

Please replace hans.mustermann@xyz.de by the e-mail address you have registered at Arlo and myArloPassword by the password used there. For the 2 factor authentication you also have to set the password of the email account. The email server which receives the Arlo mails has to be set with attr Arlo_Cloud mailServer imap.gmx.net, where imap.gmx.net has to be replaced by the IMAP server of your mail provider. Only IMAP with encryption is supported. You can skip the parameter myEmailUsername if the username matches the email address.

After you have successfully created the account definition, you can call set Arlo_Cloud autocreate. Now the base station(s) and cameras which are assigned to the Arlo account will be created in FHEM. All new devices are created in the room Arlo.

In the background there is a permanent SSE connection to the Arlo server. If you temporary don't use Arlo in FHEM, you can stop this SSE connection by setting the attribute "disable" at the Arlo_Cloud device to 1.

Set

• autocreate (subtype ACCOUNT)
  Reads all devices which are assigned to the Arlo account and creates FHEM devices, if the devices don't exist in FHEM.
• reconnect (subtype ACCOUNT)
  Connect or reconnect to the Arlo server. First FHEM logs in, then a SSE connection is established. This method is only used if the connection to the Arlo server was interrupted.
• readModes (subtype ACCOUNT)
  Reads the modes of the base stations (iincl. custom modes). Is called automatically, normally you don't have to call this manually.
• updateReadings (subtype ACCOUNT)
  The data of all base stations and cameras are retrieved from the Arlo cloud. This is done every hour automatically, if you don't set the attribute disable=1 at the Cloud device. The interval can be changed by setting the attribute updateInterval (in seconds, e.g. 600 for 10 minutes, 7200 for 2 hours).
• arm (subtype BASESTATION, BRIDGE, ARLOQ and BABYCAM)
  Activates the motion detection.
• disarm (subtype BASESTATION, BRIDGE, ARLOQ and BABYCAM)
  Deactivates the motion detection.
• mode (subtype BASESTATION and BRIDGE)
  Set a custom mode (parameter: name of the mode).
• siren (subtype BASESTATION)
  Activates or deactivates the siren of the base station (attention: the siren is loud!).
• subscribe (subtype BASESTATION, ARLOQ and BABYCAM)
  Subscribe base station for the SSE connection. Normally you don't have to do this manually, this is done automatically after login.
• unsubscribe (subtype BASESTATION, ARLOQ and BABYCAM)
  Unsubscribe base station for the current SSE connection.
• brightness (subtype CAMERA, ARLOQ and BABYCAM)
  Adjust brightness of the camera (possible values: -2 to +2).
• on (Subtype CAMERA)
  Switch on camera (deactivate privacy mode).
• off (subtype CAMERA)
  Switch off camera (activate privacy mode).
• snapshot (subtype CAMERA, ARLOQ and BABYCAM)
  Take a snapshot. The snapshot url is written to the reading snapshotUrl. This command only works if the camera has the state on.
• startRecording (subtype CAMERA, ARLOQ and BABYCAM)
  Start recording. This command only works if the camera has the state on.
• stopRecording (subtype CAMERA, ARLOQ and BABYCAM)
  Stops an active recording. The recording url is stored in the reading lastVideoUrl, a frame of the recording in lastVideoImageUrl and a thumbnail of the recording in lastVideoThumbnailUrl.
• nightlight (Subtype BABYCAM)
  Switch nightlight on or off.
• nightlight-brightness (Subtype BABYCAM)
  Set brightness of nightlight.
• nightlight-color (Subtype BABYCAM)
  Set color of nightlight.

Attributes

Common attributes:
DbLogInclude
DbLogExclude
alias
comment
devStateIcon
devStateStyle
event-aggregator
event-min-interval
event-on-change-reading
event-on-update-reading
eventMap
group
icon
room
sortby
stateFormat
userReadings
userattr
verbose
webCmd
widgetOverride



downloadDir

If this attribute is set at the cloud device (subtype ACCOUNT), the files which are stored at the Arlo Cloud (videos / images) will also be downloaded to the given directory. If you want to access these files via FHEM http you have to use a subdirectory of /opt/fhem/www. Attention: the fhem user has to have write access to the directory.

downloadLink

If the attribute downloadDir is set and the files will be downloaded from Arlo Cloud, you can set this attribute to create a correct URL to the last video, last snapshot and so on. A correct value is like http://hostname:8083/fhem/subdirectory-of-www

disable

Subtype ACCOUNT: Deactivates the SSE connection to Arlo Cloud.

Subtype BASESTATION: Deactivates the periodic update of the readings from Arlo Cloud.

expiryTime

Subtype ACCOUNT: If all base stations have the status "disarmed" the connection to the cloud will be closed after this time. A new connection will be established if needed. Unit is seconds, default 600 (10 minutes). If you set the value to 0 the connection will not be closed.

mailServer

Subtype ACCOUNT: Name of the IMAP mail server which receives the Arlo 2FA code mail. The passwort for the mail server has to be set in the define of Arlo_Cloud device.

videoDownloadFix

Subtype ACCOUNT: Set this attribute to 1 if videos are not downloaded automatically. Normally the server sents a notification when there is a new video available but sometimes this doesn't work. Default is 0.

pingInterval

Subtype ACCOUNT: Set the interval in seconds for the heartbeat-ping. Without a heartbeat-ping the session in Arlo Cloud would expire and FHEM wouldn't receive any more events. Default is 90.

updateInterval

Subtype ACCOUNT: Set the interval in seconds how often the readings of base statations and cameras will be updated. Default is 3600 = 1 hour.

ssePollingInterval

Subtype ACCOUNT: Set the interval in seconds how often the SSE events are checked. Default is 2 seconds.

Astro

FHEM module with a collection of various routines for astronomical data

Define

define <name> Astro [global]
Defines the Astro device (only one is needed per FHEM installation).
Optional parameter 'global' will mark this device for global configuration options, see SUNRISE_EL compatibility mode below for details.

Readings with prefix Sun refer to the sun, with prefix Moon refer to the moon. The suffixes for these readings are:

• Age = angle (in degrees) of body along its track
• Az,Alt = azimuth and altitude angle (in degrees) of body above horizon
• Dec,Ra = declination (in degrees) and right ascension (in HH:MM) of body position
• HrsVisible,HrsInvisible = Hours of visiblity and invisiblity of the body
• Lat,Lon = latitude and longituds (in degrees) of body position
• Diameter = virtual diameter (in arc minutes) of body
• Distance,DistanceObserver = distance (in km) of body to center of earth or to observer
• PhaseN,PhaseS = Numerical and string value for phase of body
• Sign,SignN = Circadian sign for body along its track
• Rise,Transit,Set = times (in HH:MM) for rise and set as well as for highest position of body

Readings with prefix Obs refer to the observer. In addition to some of the suffixes gives above, the following may occur:

• Date,Dayofyear = date
• JD = Julian date
• Time,Timezone,TimezoneS = obvious meaning
• IsDST = 1 if running on daylight savings time, 0 otherwise
• GMST,LMST = Greenwich and Local Mean Sidereal Time (in HH:MM)

An SVG image of the current moon phase may be obtained under the link <ip address of fhem>/fhem/Astro_moonwidget?name='<device name>'. Optional web parameters are [&size='<width>x<height>'][&mooncolor=<color>][&moonshadow=<color>]

Notes:

• Calculations are only valid between the years 1900 and 2100
• Attention: Timezone is taken from the local Perl settings, NOT automatically defined for a location
• This module uses the global attribute language to determine its output data
  (default: EN=english). For German output, set attr global language DE.
  If a local attribute on the device was set for language it will take precedence.
• The time zone is determined automatically from the local settings of the
  operating system. If geocordinates from a different time zone are used, the results are
  not corrected automatically.
• Some definitions determining the observer position are used
  from the global device, i.e.
  
  attr global longitude <value>
attr global latitude <value>
attr global altitude <value> (in m above sea level)
  These definitions are only used when there are no corresponding local attribute settings on the device.
• It is not necessary to define an Astro device to use the data provided by this module.
  To use its data in any other module, you just need to put LoadModule("Astro");
  at the start of your own code, and then may call, for example, the function
  
  Astro_Get( SOME_HASH_REFERENCE,"dummy","text", "SunRise","2019-12-24");
  to acquire the sunrise on Christmas Eve 2019. The hash reference may also be undefined or an existing device name of any type. Note that device attributes of the respective device will be respected as long as their name matches those mentioned for an Astro device. attribute=value pairs may be added in text format to enforce settings like language that would otherwise be defined by a real device.
  You may also add parameters to customize your request:
  
  Astro_Get( SOME_HASH_REFERENCE, ["dummy","text"], {html=>1} );
Astro_Get( SOME_HASH_REFERENCE, ["dummy","text","SunRise,SunSet,SunAz,SunDistanceObserver"], {html=>1, long=>2} );
• Functions that can replace those from SUNRISE_EL are available under the same name and adding a as a prefix in front of it (for example, use asunrise() instead of sunrise()). A single Astro device can act as a global configuration device for such functions if it was created using the global define parameter. If you don't want to create any Astro device at all, you may put LoadModule("Astro"); into your 99_myUtils.pm to only load the SUNRISE_EL replacement functions.

Set

• set <name> update
  trigger to recompute values immediately.

Get

Attention: Get-calls are NOT written into the readings of the device. Readings change only through periodic updates.

• get <name> json [<reading>,[<reading>]] [-1|yesterday|+1|tomorrow]
get <name> json [<reading>,[<reading>]] MM-DD [-1|yesterday|+1|tomorrow]
get <name> json [<reading>,[<reading>]] YYYY-MM-DD [-1|yesterday|+1|tomorrow]
get <name> json [<reading>,[<reading>]] HH:MM[:SS] [-1|yesterday|+1|tomorrow]
get <name> json [<reading>,[<reading>]] YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM[:SS] [-1|yesterday|+1|tomorrow]
  returns the complete set of an individual reading of astronomical data either for the current time, or for a day and time given in the argument. yesterday, tomorrow or any other integer number may be given at the end to get data relative to the given day and time.
  Formatted values as described below may be generated in a subtree text by adding text=1 to the request.
• get <name> text [<reading>,[<reading>]] [-1|yesterday|+1|tomorrow]
get <name> text [<reading>,[<reading>]] MM-DD [-1|yesterday|+1|tomorrow]
get <name> text [<reading>,[<reading>]] YYYY-MM-DD [-1|yesterday|+1|tomorrow]
get <name> text [<reading>,[<reading>]] HH:MM[:SS] [-1|yesterday|+1|tomorrow]
get <name> text [<reading>,[<reading>]] YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM[:SS] [-1|yesterday|+1|tomorrow]
  returns the complete set of an individual reading of astronomical data either for the current time, or for a day and time given in the argument. yesterday, tomorrow or any other integer number may be given at the end to get data relative to the given day and time.
  The return value may be formatted and/or labeled by adding one or more of the following key=value pairs to the request:
  • unit=1 = Will add a unit to numerical values. Depending on attribute lc_numeric, the decimal separator will be in regional format as well.
  • long=1 = A describtive label will be added to the value.
  • long=2 = Same as long=1 but the label will be separated from the value by a colon.
  • long=3 = Same as long=2 but Sun or Moon will be added as a prefix.
  • long=4 = Same as long=3 but the separator will be used to separate Sun/Moon instead.
• get <name> version
  Display the version of the module

Attributes

• <interval>
  Update interval in seconds. The default is 3600 seconds, a value of 0 disables the periodic update.
• <language>
  A language may be set to overwrite global attribute settings.
• <lc_numeric>
  Set regional settings to format numerical values in textual output. If not set, it will generate the locale based on the attribute language (if set).
• <lc_time>
  Set regional settings to format time related values in textual output. If not set, it will generate the locale based on the attribute language (if set).
• <recomputeAt>
  Enforce recomputing values at specific event times, independant from update interval. This attribute contains a list of one or many of the following values:
  
  • MoonRise,MoonSet,MoonTransit = for moon rise, set, and transit
  • NewDay = for 00:00:00 hours of the next calendar day
  • SunRise,SunSet,SunTransit = for sun rise, set, and transit
  • *TwilightEvening,*TwilightMorning = for the respective twilight stage begin
• <timezone>
  A timezone may be set to overwrite global and system settings. Format may depend on your local system implementation but is likely in the format similar to Europe/Berlin.
• Some definitions determining the observer position:
  
  attr <name> longitude <value>
attr <name> latitude <value>
attr <name> altitude <value> (in m above sea level)
  attr <name> horizon <value> custom horizon angle in degrees, default 0. Different values for morning/evening may be set as <morning>:<evening>
  These definitions take precedence over global attribute settings.
• <disable>
  When set, this will completely disable any device update.
• Standard attributes alias, comment, event-on-update-reading, event-on-change-reading, room, eventMap, loglevel, webCmd

Aurora

Define
define <name> Aurora <ip> [<interval>]

Defines a device connected to a Aurora.

The device status will be updated every <interval> seconds. 0 means no updates. Groups are updated only on definition and statusRequest

Examples:
define aurora Aurora 10.0.1.xxx 10


Readings
• colormode
  the current colormode
• ct
  the colortemperature in mireds and kelvin
• hue
  the current hue
• pct
  the current brightness in percent
• onoff
  the current on/off state as 0 or 1
• sat
  the current saturation
• state
  the current state

Notes:
• not all readings show the actual device state. all readings not related to the current colormode have to be ignored.



Set
• on [<ramp-time>]
• off [<ramp-time>]
• toggle [<ramp-time>]
• statusRequest
  Request device status update.
• pct <value> [<ramp-time>]
  dim to <value>
  Note: the FS20 compatible dimXX% commands are also accepted.
• color <value>
  set colortemperature to <value> kelvin.
• dimUp [delta]
• dimDown [delta]
• ct <value> [<ramp-time>]
  set colortemperature to <value> in mireds (range is 154-500) or kelvin (rankge is 2000-6493).
• ctUp [delta]
• ctDown [delta]
• hue <value> [<ramp-time>]
  set hue to <value>; range is 0-65535.
• humUp [delta]
• humDown [delta]
• sat <value> [<ramp-time>]
  set saturation to <value>; range is 0-254.
• satUp [delta]
• satDown [delta]
• effect <name>
• previousEffect
• nextEffect
• rgb <rrggbb>
  set the color to (the nearest equivalent of) <rrggbb>


• set extensions are supported.

Note:
• <ramp-time> is given in seconds
• multiple paramters can be set at once separated by :
  Examples:
  set LC on : transitiontime 100
set bulb on : pct 100 : color 4000
  

Get
• rgb
• RGB
• devStateIcon
  returns html code that can be used to create an icon that represents the device color in the room overview.

Attributes
• color-icon
  1 -> use lamp color as icon color and 100% shape as icon shape
  2 -> use lamp color scaled to full brightness as icon color and dim state as icon shape
• transitiontime
  default transitiontime for all set commands if not specified directly in the set.
• delayedUpdate
  1 -> the update of the device status after a set command will be delayed for 1 second. usefull if multiple devices will be switched.
• devStateIcon
  will be initialized to {(Aurora_devStateIcon($name),"toggle")} to show device color as default in room overview.
• webCmd
  will be initialized to a device specific value

AutoShuttersControl

AutoShuttersControl (ASC) provides a complete automation for shutters with comprehensive configuration options, e.g. open or close shutters depending on the sunrise or sunset, by outdoor brightness or randomly for simulate presence.
So that ASC can drive the blinds on the basis of the astronomical times, it is very important to correctly set the location (latitude, longitude) in the device "global".

After telling ASC which shutters should be controlled, several in-depth configuration options are provided. With these and in combination with a resident presence state, complex scenarios are possible: For example, shutters could be opened if a resident awakes from sleep and the sun is already rosen. Or if a closed window with shutters down is tilted, the shutters could be half opened for ventilation. Many more is possible.

Define

define <name> AutoShuttersControl

Usage:
define myASControl AutoShuttersControl


This creates an new AutoShuttersControl device, called myASControl.
Now was the new global attribute ASC added to the FHEM installation. Each shutter that is to be controlled by AutoShuttersControl must now have the attribute ASC set to 1 or 2. The value 1 is to be used with devices whose state is given as position (i.e. ROLLO or Siro, shutters openend is 0, shutters closed is 100), 2 with devices whose state is given as percent closed (i.e. HomeMatic, shutters opened is 100, closed is 0).

After setting the attributes to all devices who should be controlled, the automatic scan at the main device can be started for example with
set myASControl scanForShutters


Readings

Within the ASC device:

• ..._nextAstroTimeEvent - Next astro event: sunrise, sunset or fixed time
• ..._PosValue - current position
• ..._lastPosValue - shutters last position
• ..._lastDelayPosValue - last specified order, will be executed with the next matching event
• partyMode on|off - is working mode set to part?y
• ascEnable on|off - are the associated shutters control by ASC completely?
• controlShading on|off - are the associated shutters controlled for shading by ASC?
• hardLockOut on|off - switch for preventing a global hard lock out
• room_... - list of every found shutter for every room: room_Sleeping: Patio
• selfDefense - state of the self defense mode
• state - state of the ASC device: active, enabled, disabled or other state information
• sunriseTimeWeHoliday on|off - state of the weekend and holiday support
• userAttrList - ASC sets some user defined attributes (userattr) for the shutter devices. This readings shows the current state of the given user attributes to the shutter devices.

Within the shutter devices:

• ASC_Enable on|off - shutter is controlled by ASC or not
• ASC_Time_DriveUp - if the astro mode is used, the next sunrise is shown. If the brightness or time mode is used, the value from ASC_Time_Up_Late is shown.
• ASC_Time_DriveDown - if the astro mode is used, the next sunset is shown. If the brightness or time mode is used, the value from ASC_TASC_Time_Down_Late is shown.
• ASC_ShuttersLastDrive - initiator for the last action


Set
• advDriveDown - execute all moves delayed by ASC_Adv on.
• ascEnable on|off - enable or disable the global control by ASC
• controlShading on|off - enable or disable the global shading control by ASC
• createNewNotifyDev - re-creates the internal structure for NOTIFYDEV. Is only present if the ASC_Expert attribute is set to 1.
• hardLockOut on|off -
• hardLockOut - on/off - Aktiviert den hardwareseitigen Aussperrschutz für die Rollläden, bei denen das Attributs ASC_LockOut entsprechend auf hard gesetzt ist. Mehr Informationen in der Beschreibung bei den Attributen für die Rollladengeräten.
• partyMode on|off - controls the global party mode for shutters. Every shutters whose ASC_Partymode attribute is set to on, is not longer controlled by ASC. The last saved working command send to the device, i.e. by a event, created by a window or presence event, will be executed once the party mode is disabled.
• renewTimer - resets the sunrise and sunset timers for selected shutter device and creates new internal FHEM timers.
• renewAllTimer - resets the sunrise and sunset timers for all shutter device and creates new internal FHEM timers.
• scanForShutters - scans the whole FHEM installation for (new) devices whose ASC attribute is set (to 1 or 2, see above).
• selfDefense on|off - controls the self defense function. This function listens for example on a residents device. If this device is set to absent and a window is still open, ASC will close the shutter for a rudimentary burglary protection.
• shutterASCenableToggle on|off - controls if the ASC controls are shown at a associated shutter device.
• sunriseTimeWeHoliday on|off - controls the weekend and holiday support. If enabled, the ASC_Time_Up_WE_Holiday attribute is considered.
• wiggle - wiggles a device for a given value (default 5%, controlled by ASC_WiggleValue) up or down and back after a minute. Useful as a deterrence in combination with alarm system.


Get
• showNotifyDevsInformations - shows the generated NOTIFYDEV structure. Useful for debugging and only shown if the ASC_expert attribute is set to 1.


Attributes

At the global ASC device:

• ASC_autoAstroModeEvening - REAL, CIVIL, NAUTIC, ASTRONOMIC or HORIZON
• ASC_autoAstroModeEveningHorizon - Height above the horizon. Is only considered if the ASC_autoAstroModeEvening attribute is set to HORIZON. Defaults to 0.
• ASC_autoAstroModeMorning - REAL, CIVIL, NAUTIC, ASTRONOMIC or HORIZON
• ASC_autoAstroModeMorningHorizon - Height above the horizon. Is only considered if the ASC_autoAstroModeMorning attribute is set to HORIZON. Defaults to 0.
• ASC_autoShuttersControlComfort - on|off - Controls the comfort functions: If a three state sensor, like the HmIP-SRH window handle sensor, is installed, ASC will open the window if the sensor signals open position. The ASC_ComfortOpen_Pos attribute has to be set for the shutter to on, defaults to off.
• ASC_autoShuttersControlEvening - on|off - Enables the automatic control by ASC at the evenings.
• ASC_autoShuttersControlMorning - on|off - Enables the automatic control by ASC at the mornings.
• ASC_blockAscDrivesAfterManual 0|1 - If set to 1, ASC will not automatically control a shutter if there was an manual control to the shutter. To be considered, the ASC_ShuttersLastDrive reading has to contain the value manual and the shutter is in an unknown (i.e. not otherwise configured in ASC) position.
• ASC_brightnessDriveUpDown - VALUE-MORNING:VALUE-EVENING - Drive the shutters by brightness. VALUE-MORNING sets the brightness threshold for the morning. If the value is reached in the morning, the shutter will go up. Vice versa in the evening. This is a global setting and can be overwritte per device with the ASC_BrightnessSensor attribute (see below).
• ASC_debug - Extendend logging for debugging purposes
• ASC_expert - Switches the export mode on. Currently, if set to 1, get and set will contain additional functions regarding the NOTIFYDEFs.
• ASC_freezeTemp - Temperature threshold for the freeze protection. The freeze protection prevents the shutter to be operated by ASC. Last operating order will be kept.
• ASC_advStartDate - Begin of Advent Season, selected FirstAdvent or DeadSunday.
• ASC_advEndDate - End of Advent Season, selected CandlemasDay 6. January or EpiphanyDay 2. February.
• ASC_rainSensor DEVICENAME[:READINGNAME] MAXTRIGGER[:HYSTERESE] [CLOSEDPOS] - Contains settings for the rain protection. DEVICNAME specifies a rain sensor, the optional READINGNAME the name of the reading at the DEVICENAME. The READINGNAME should contain the values rain and dry or a numeral rain amount. MAXTRIGGER sets the threshold for the amount of rain for when the shutter is driven to CLOSEDPOS as soon the threshold is reached. HYSTERESE sets a hysteresis for MAXTRIGGER.
• ASC_residentsDev DEVICENAME[:READINGNAME] - DEVICENAME points to a device for presence, e.g. of type RESIDENTS. READINGNAME points to a reading at DEVICENAME which contains a presence state, e.g. rgr_Residents:state. The target should contain values alike the RESIDENTS family.
• ASC_GuestRoom on|off - (not functionality implemented yet?).
• ASC_shuttersDriveDelay - Maximum random drive delay in seconds for calculating the operating time. 0 equals to no delay.
• ASC_TempSensor DEVICENAME[:READINGNAME] - DEVICENAME points to a device with a temperature, READINGNAME to a reading located at the DEVICENAME, for example OUTDOOR_TEMP:measured-temp. READINGNAME defaults to temperature.
• ASC_twilightDevice - points to a DEVICENAME containing values regarding the sun position. Supports currently devices of type Twilight or Astro.
• ASC_windSensor DEVICENAME[:READINGNAME] - DEVICENAME points to a device containing a wind speed. Reads from the wind reading, if not otherwise specified by READINGNAME.



At shutter devices, controlled by ASC:

• ASC - 0|1|2
  • 0 - don't create attributes for ASC at the first scan and don't be controlled by ASC
  • 1 - inverse or venetian type blind mode. Shutter is open equals to 0, shutter is closed equals to 100, is controlled by position values.
  • 2 - HomeMatic mode. Shutter is open equals to 100, shutter is closed equals to 0, is controlled by pct values.
• ASC_Antifreeze - soft|am|pm|hard|off - Freeze protection.
  • soft - see ASC_Antifreeze_Pos.
  • hard / am / pm - freeze protection will be active (everytime, ante meridiem or post meridiem).
  • off - freeze protection is disabled, default value
• ASC_Antifreeze_Pos - Position to be operated if the shutter should be closed, but ASC_Antifreeze is not set to off. (Default: dependent on attributASC 85/15).
• ASC_AutoAstroModeEvening - Can be set to REAL, CIVIL, NAUTIC, ASTRONOMIC or HORIZON. Defaults to none of those.
• ASC_AutoAstroModeEveningHorizon - If this value is reached by the sun, a sunset is presumed. Is used if ASC_autoAstroModeEvening is set to HORIZON. Defaults to none.
• ASC_AutoAstroModeMorning - Can be set to REAL, CIVIL, NAUTIC, ASTRONOMIC or HORIZON. Defaults to none of those.
• ASC_AutoAstroModeMorningHorizon - If this value is reached by the sun, a sunrise is presumed. Is used if ASC_AutoAstroModeMorning is set to HORIZON. Defaults to none.
• ASC_Shutter_IdleDetection - indicates the Reading which gives information about the running status of the roller blind, as well as secondly the value in the Reading which says that the roller blind does not run.
• ASC_BlockingTime_afterManual - Time in which operations by ASC are blocked after the last manual operation in seconds. Defaults to 1200 (20 minutes).
• ASC_BlockingTime_beforDayOpen - Time in which no closing operation is made by ASC after opening at the morning in seconds. Defaults to 3600 (one hour).
• ASC_BlockingTime_beforNightClose - Time in which no closing operation is made by ASC before closing at the evening in seconds. Defaults to 3600 (one hour).
• ASC_BrightnessSensor - DEVICE[:READING] MORNING-VALUE:EVENING-VALUE - Drive this shutter by brightness. MORNING-VALUE sets the brightness threshold for the morning. If the value is reached in the morning, the shutter will go up. Vice versa in the evening, specified by EVENING-VALUE. Gets the brightness from DEVICE, reads by default from the brightness reading, unless READING is specified. Defaults to none.
• ASC_Closed_Pos - The closed position value from 0 to 100 percent in increments of 10. (Default: dependent on attributASC 100/0).
• ASC_ComfortOpen_Pos - The comfort opening position, ranging from 0 to 100 percent in increments of 10. (Default: dependent on attributASC 20/80).
• ASC_Down - astro|time|brightness|roommate - Drive the shutter depending on this setting:
  • astro - drive down at sunset
  • time - drive at ASC_Time_Down_Early
  • brightness - drive between ASC_Time_Down_Early and ASC_Time_Down_Late, depending on the settings of ASC_BrightnessSensor (see above).
  • roommate - no drive by time or brightness, roommate trigger only
  Defaults to astro.
• ASC_DriveUpMaxDuration - Drive up duration of the shutter plus 5 seconds. Defaults to 60 seconds if not set.
• ASC_Drive_Delay - maximum value for a random delay (in seconds) to add to the calculated drive times. (needs also ASC_Drive_DelayStart to be set!)
• ASC_Drive_DelayStart - delay in seconds to add to each calculated drive time.
• ASC_LockOut soft|hard|off - Configures the lock out protection for the current shutter. Values are:
  • soft - works if the global lock out protection lockOut soft is set and a sensor specified by ASC_WindowRec is set. If the sensor is set to open, the shutter will not be closed. Affects only commands issued by ASC.
  • hard - see soft, but ASC tries also to block manual issued commands by a switch.
  • off - lock out protection is disabled. Default.
• ASC_LockOut_Cmd inhibit|blocked|protection - Configures the lock out command for ASC_LockOut if hard is chosen as a value. Defaults to none.
• ASC_Mode_Down always|home|absent|off - When will a shutter be driven down:
  • always - ASC will drive always. Default value.
  • off - don't drive
  • home / absent - considers a residents status set by ASC_residentsDev. If no resident is configured and this attribute is set to absent, ASC will not operate the shutter.
• ASC_Mode_Up always|home|absent|off - When will a shutter be driven up:
  • always - ASC will drive always. Default value.
  • off - don't drive
  • home / absent - considers a residents status set by ASC_residentsDev. If no resident is configured and this attribute is set to absent, ASC will not operate the shutter.
• ASC_Open_Pos - The opening position value from 0 to 100 percent in increments of 10. (Default: dependent on attributASC 0/100).
• ASC_Sleep_Pos - The opening position value from 0 to 100 percent in increments of 10. (Default: dependent on attributASC 75/25).
• ASC_Partymode on|off - Party mode. If configured to on, driving orders for the shutter by ASC will be queued if partyMode is set to on at the global ASC device. Will execute the driving orders after partyMode is disabled. Defaults to off.
• ASC_Pos_Reading - Points to the reading name, which contains the current position for the shutter in percent. Will be used for set at devices of unknown kind.
• ASC_PrivacyDownValue_beforeNightClose - How many seconds is the privacy mode activated before the shutter is closed in the evening. For Brightness, in addition to the time value, the Brightness value must also be specified. 1800:300 means 30 min before night close or above a brightness value of 300. -1 is the default value.
• ASC_PrivacyDown_Pos - Position in percent for privacy mode, defaults to 50.
• ASC_PrivacyUpValue_beforeDayOpen - How many seconds is the privacy mode activated before the shutter is open in the morning. For Brightness, in addition to the time value, the Brightness value must also be specified. 1800:600 means 30 min before day open or above a brightness value of 600. -1 is the default value.
• ASC_PrivacyUp_Pos - Position in percent for privacy mode, defaults to 50.
• ASC_ExternalTrigger - DEVICE:READING VALUEACTIVE:VALUEINACTIVE POSACTIVE:[POSINACTIVE VALUEACTIVE2:POSACTIVE2], example: setting to "WohnzimmerTV:state on:off 66:100" will cause a "state:on" event to drive the shutter to position 66. "state:off" event will set it to position 100. If no POSINACTIVE is set, LastStatus position will be used as target position.
• ASC_WindProtection on|off - Shutter is protected by the wind protection. Defaults to off.
• ASC_RainProtection on|off - Shutter is protected by the rain protection. Defaults to off.
• ASC_Roommate_Device - Comma separated list of ROOMMATE devices, representing the inhabitants of the room to which the shutter belongs. Especially useful for bedrooms. Defaults to none.
• ASC_Roommate_Reading - Specifies a reading name to ASC_Roommate_Device. Defaults to state.
• ASC_GuestRoom on|off - (not functionality implemented yet?).
• ASC_Adv - on/off If on, from 1. advent to 6. January all closing commands will be delayed until set ASCDEVICE advDriveDown is issued.
• ASC_Self_Defense_Mode - absent/gone/off - which Residents status Self Defense should become active without the window being open. (default: gone) off exclude from self defense
• ASC_Self_Defense_AbsentDelay - time in seconds to wait after Residents went gone. (default: 300)
• ASC_ShuttersPlace window|terrace - If set to terrace, and the residents device is set to gone, and selfDefense is activated, the shutter will be closed. If set to window, will not. Defaults to window.
• ASC_Time_Down_Early - Will not drive before time is ASC_Time_Down_Early or later, even the sunset occurs earlier. To be set in military time. Defaults to 16:00.
• ASC_Time_Down_Late - Will not drive after time is ASC_Time_Down_Late or earlier, even the sunset occurs later. To be set in military time. Defaults to 22:00.
• ASC_Time_Up_Early - Will not drive before time is ASC_Time_Up_Early or earlier, even the sunrise occurs earlier. To be set in military time. Defaults to 05:00.
• ASC_Time_Up_Late - Will not drive after time is ASC_Time_Up_Late or earlier, even the sunrise occurs later. To be set in military time. Defaults to 08:30.
• ASC_Time_Up_WE_Holiday - Will not drive before time is ASC_Time_Up_WE_Holiday on weekends and holidays (holiday2we is considered). Defaults to 08:00. Warning! If ASC_Up set to brightness, the time for ASC_Time_Up_WE_Holiday must be earlier then ASC_Time_Up_Late.
• ASC_Up astro|time|brightness|roommate - Drive the shutter depending on this setting:
  • astro - drive up at sunrise
  • time - drive at ASC_Time_Up_Early
  • brightness - drive between ASC_Time_Up_Early and ASC_Time_Up_Late, depending on the settings of ASC_BrightnessSensor (see above).
  • roommate - no drive by time or brightness, roommate trigger only
  Defaults to astro.
• ASC_Ventilate_Pos - The opening position value for ventilation from 0 to 100 percent in increments of 10. (Default: dependent on attributASC 70/30).
• ASC_Ventilate_Window_Open on|off - Drive to ventilation position as window is opened or tilted, even when the current shutter position is lower than the ASC_Ventilate_Pos. Defaults to on.
• ASC_WiggleValue - How many percent should the shutter be driven if a wiggle drive is operated. Defaults to 5.
• ASC_WindParameters THRESHOLD-ON[:THRESHOLD-OFF] [DRIVEPOSITION] - Threshold for when the shutter is driven to the wind protection position. Optional THRESHOLD-OFF sets the complementary value when the wind protection is disabled. Disabled if THRESHOLD-ON is set to -1. Defaults to 50:20 ASC_Closed_Pos.
• ASC_WindowRec - WINDOWREC:[READING], Points to the window contact device, associated with the shutter. Defaults to none. Reading is optional
• ASC_WindowRec_subType - Model type of the used ASC_WindowRec:
  • twostate - optical or magnetical sensors with two states: opened or closed
  • threestate - sensors with three states: opened, tilted, closed
  Defaults to twostate.
• ASC_SlatPosCmd_SlatDevice - If your shutter is "venetian blind" type (with turnable slats, lamellas or similar), this is the place to set additional command and/or device info to control the slat level. Examples: attr ROLLO ASC_SlatPosCmd_SlatDevice slatPct or attr ROLLO ASC_SlatPosCmd_SlatDevice dim:ROLLOSLATDEVICE. Providing a device name for the slat device is only needed in case it's different to the shutter itself. If attribute is set, additional positioning values for the respective slat levels can be set in attributes ASC_Open_Pos, ASC_Closed_Pos, ASC_Ventilate_Pos, ASC_ComfortOpen_Pos, ASC_Shading_Pos and ASC_Sleep_Pos.
• ASC_CommandTemplate - FHEM or Perl command (Perl in braces as usual needs escaping semicolons etc.).
  This optional attribute will override the internally determined command to drive this shutter. Setting it, is only recommended in some rare and special cases,, in most cases there's no need to set this attribute! The parameters $name (name of the shutter device), $pos (target position for the respective drive command), $slatPos (target position for the (turnable) lammellas in venetion blinds) and $cause (internal label for the cause of the driving command) will be replaced by the appropirate values. You may have to take care to avoid unneeded driving commands. Examples:
  • attr ROLLO ASC_CommandTemplate set $name $pos - Address the position command directly to the main switch of the device
  • attr ROLLO ASC_CommandTemplate set $name pct $pos - Address the setter pct for positioning commands
  • attr ROLLO ASC_CommandTemplate set $name datapoint 4.LEVEL_2 $slatPos 4.LEVEL $pos - combined positioning command, e.g. appropriate for HM-IP-venetian blind type actors
  • attr ROLLO ASC_CommandTemplate { fhem("set $name ".($pos+1024)).";set $name 0")} - positioning command with Perl calculation and additional "execute" command, e.g. for an SPS type blind
  • attr ROLLO ASC_CommandTemplate { myPerlFn("$name",$pos,$slatPos,"$cause")} - call own Perl function (e.g. from 99_myUtils.pm)
• ASC_WindowRec_PosAfterDayClosed - open,lastManual / auf welche Position soll das Rollo nach dem schließen am Tag fahren. Open Position oder letzte gespeicherte manuelle Position (default: open)

Shading

Shading is only available if the following prerequests are met:

• The controlShading reading is set to on, and there is a device of type Astro or Twilight configured to ASC_twilightDevice, and ASC_TempSensor is set.
• ASC_BrightnessSensor is configured to any shutter device.
• All other attributes are optional and the default value for them is used, if they are not otherwise configured. Please review the settings carefully, especially the values for StateChange_Cloudy and StateChange_Sunny.

The following attributes are available:

• ASC_Shading_InOutAzimuth - Azimuth value from which shading is to be used when shading is exceeded and shading when undershooting is required. Defaults to 95:265.
• ASC_Shading_MinMax_Elevation - Shading starts as min point of sun elevation is reached and end as max point of sun elevation is reached, depending also on other sensor values. Defaults to 25.0:100.0.
• ASC_Shading_Min_OutsideTemperature - Shading starts at this outdoor temperature, depending also on other sensor values. Defaults to 18.0.
• ASC_Shading_Mode absent|always|off|home - see ASC_Mode_Down above, but for shading. Defaults to off.
• ASC_Shading_Pos - Shading position in percent. (Default: dependent on attribute ASC 85/15)
• ASC_Shading_StateChange_Cloudy - Shading ends at this outdoor brightness, depending also on other sensor values. Defaults to 20000.
• ASC_Shading_StateChange_SunnyCloudy - Shading starts/stops at this outdoor brightness, depending also on other sensor values. An optional parameter specifies how many successive brightness reading values should be used to average the brightness value. Defaults to 35000:20000 [3].
• ASC_Shading_WaitingPeriod - Waiting time in seconds before additional sensor values to ASC_Shading_StateChange_Sunny or ASC_Shading_StateChange_Cloudy are used for shading. Defaults to 120.
• ASC_Shading_BetweenTheTime - Limit the time slots for shading functionality. Example: 09:00-13:00 11:25-15:30

AutoShuttersControl API description

It's possible to access internal data of the ASC module by calling the API function.

Data points of a shutter device, controlled by ASC

{ ascAPIget('Getter','SHUTTERS_DEVICENAME') }

Getter	Description
FreezeStatus	1 = soft, 2 = daytime, 3 = hard
NoDelay	Was the offset handling deactivated (e.g. by operations triggered by a window event)
LastDrive	Reason for the last action caused by ASC
LastPos	Last position of the shutter
LastPosTimestamp	Timestamp of the last position
LastManPos	Last position manually set of the shutter
LastManPosTimestamp	Timestamp of the last position manually set
SunsetUnixTime	Calculated sunset time in seconds since the UNIX epoche
Sunset	1 = operation in the evening was made, 0 = operation in the evening was not yet made
SunriseUnixTime	Calculated sunrise time in seconds since the UNIX epoche
Sunrise	1 = operation in the morning was made, 0 = operation in the morning was not yet made
RoommatesStatus	Current state of the room mate set for this shutter
RoommatesLastStatus	Last state of the room mate set for this shutter
ShadingStatus	Value of the current shading state. Can hold in, out, in reserved or out reserved
ShadingStatusTimestamp	Timestamp of the last shading state
IfInShading	Is the shutter currently in shading (depends on the shading mode)
WindProtectionStatus	Current state of the wind protection. Can hold protection or unprotection
RainProtectionStatus	Current state of the rain protection. Can hold protection or unprotection
DelayCmd	Last operation order in the waiting queue. Set for example by the party mode
Status	Position of the shutter
ASCenable	Does ASC control the shutter?
PrivacyDownStatus	Is the shutter currently in privacyDown mode
outTemp	Current temperature of a configured temperature device, return -100 is no device configured

Übersicht für das Rollladen-Device mit Parameterübergabe
{ ascAPIget('Getter','ROLLODEVICENAME',VALUE) }


Getter	Erläuterung
QueryShuttersPos	Rückgabewert 1 bedeutet das die aktuelle Position des Rollos unterhalb der Valueposition ist. 0 oder nichts bedeutet oberhalb der Valueposition.

Data points of the ASC device

{ ascAPIget('Getter') }


Getter	Description
OutTemp	Current temperature of a configured temperature device, return -100 is no device configured
ResidentsStatus	Current state of a configured resident device
ResidentsLastStatus	Last state of a configured resident device
Azimuth	Current azimuth of the sun
Elevation	Current elevation of the sun
ASCenable	Is ASC globally activated?

AutomowerConnect

FHEM-FORUM: AutomowerConnect
FHEM-Wiki: AutomowerConnect: Wie erstellt man eine Karte des Mähbereiches?

Introduction


• This module allows the communication between the Husqvarna Cloud and FHEM to control Husqvarna Automower equipped with a Connect Module (SIM).
• It acts as Device for one mower. Use this Module for aditional mower registered in the API. Provide a different application key and application secret each mower
• The mower path is shown in the detail view.
• An arbitrary map can be used as background for the mower path.
• The map has to be a raster image in webp, png or jpg format.
• It's possible to control everything the API offers, e.g. schedule, headlight, cutting height and actions like start, pause, park etc.
• Zones are definable.
• Cutting height can be set for each zone differently.
• All API data is stored in the device hash. Use {Dumper $defs{<name>}} in the commandline to find the data and build userReadings out of it.


Requirements


• To get access to the API an application has to be created in the Husqvarna Developer Portal. The application has to be connected with the AutomowerConnect API.
• During registration an application key (client_id) and an application secret (client secret) is provided. Use these for the module.
• The module uses client credentials as grant type for authorization.

Define
define <device name> AutomowerConnect <application key> [<mower number>]
Example:
define myMower AutomowerConnect 123456789012345678901234567890123456 First device: the default mower number is 0.
It has to be set a client_secret. It's the application secret from the Husqvarna Developer Portal.
set myMower <client secret>



Set
• Park
  set <name> Park <number of minutes>
  Parks mower in charging station for <number of minutes>
• ParkUntilFurtherNotice
  set <name> ParkUntilFurtherNotice
  Parks mower in charging station until further notice
• ParkUntilNextSchedule
  set <name> ParkUntilNextSchedule
  Parks mower in charging station and starts with next planned start
• Pause
  set <name> Pause
  Pauses mower immediately at current position
• ResumeSchedule
  set <name> ResumeSchedule
  Starts immediately if in planned intervall, otherwise with next scheduled start>
• Start
  set <name> Start <number of minutes>
  Starts immediately for <number of minutes>
• chargingStationPositionToAttribute
  set <name> chargingStationPositionToAttribute
  Sets the calculated charging station coordinates to the corresponding attributes.
• client_secret
  set <name> client_secret <application secret>
  Sets the mandatory application secret (client secret)
• cuttingHeight
  set <name> cuttingHeight <1..9>
  Sets the cutting height. NOTE: Do not use for 550 EPOS and Ceora.
• getNewAccessToken
  set <name> getNewAccessToken
  For debug purpose only.
• getUpdate
  set <name> getUpdate
  For debug purpose only.
• headlight
  set <name> headlight <ALWAYS_OFF|ALWAYS_ON|EVENIG_ONLY|EVENING_AND_NIGHT>
  
• mowerScheduleToAttribute
  set <name> mowerScheduleToAttribute
  Writes the schedule in to the attribute moverSchedule.
• sendScheduleFromAttributeToMower
  set <name> sendScheduleFromAttributeToMower
  Sends the schedule to the mower. NOTE: Do not use for 550 EPOS and Ceora.
• mapZonesTemplateToAttribute
  set <name> mapZonesTemplateToAttribute
  Load the command reference example into the attribute mapZones.
• defaultDesignAttributesToAttribute
  set <name> mapZonesTemplateToAttribute
  Load default design attributes.




Get
• html
  get <name> html
  Returns the mower area image as html code. For use in uiTable, TabletUI, Floorplan, readingsGroup, weblink etc.
• InternalData
  get <name> InternalData
  Lists some device internal data
• MowerData
  get <name> MowerData
  Lists all mower data with its hash path exept positon array. The hash path can be used for generating userReadings. The trigger is connected.
  Example: created reading serialnumber with hash path $hash->{helper}{mower}{attributes}{system}{serialNumber}

attr <name> userReadings serialnumber:connected {$defs{$name}->{helper}{mower}{attributes}{system}{serialNumber}}
• StatisticsData
  get <name> StatisticsData
  Lists statistics data with its hash path. The hash path can be used for generating userReadings. The trigger is e.g. device_state: connected or mower_wsEvent: <status-event|positions-event|settings-event>.
• errorCodes
  get <name> errorCodes
  Lists API response status codes and mower error codes
• errorStack
  get <name> errorStack
  Lists error stack.




Attributes
• mapImagePath
  attr <name> mapImagePath <path to image>
  Path of a raster image file for an area the mower path has to be drawn to.
  If the image name implies the image size by containing a part which matches /(\d+)x(\d+)/
  the corresponding attribute will be set to mapImageWidthHeight = '$1 $2'
  Image name example: map740x1300.webp
• mapImageWidthHeight
  attr <name> mapImageWidthHeight <width in pixel><separator><height in pixel>
  Width and Height in pixel of a raster image file for an area image the mower path has to be drawn to. <separator> is one space character.
• mapImageZoom
  attr <name> mapImageZoom <zoom factor>
  Zoom of a raster image for an area the mower path has to be drawn to.
• mapBackgroundColor
  attr <name> mapBackgroundColor <background-color>
  The value is used as background-color.
• mapDesignAttributes
  attr <name> mapDesignAttributes <complete list of design-attributes>
  Load the list of attributes by set <name> defaultDesignAttributesToAttribute to change its values. Some default values are
  • mower path for activity MOWING: red
  • path in CS, activity CHARGING,PARKED_IN_CS: grey
  • path for activity LEAVING: green
  • path for activity GOING_HOME: blue
  • path for interval with error (all activities with error): kind of magenta
  • all other activities: grey
• mapImageCoordinatesToRegister
  attr <name> mapImageCoordinatesToRegister <upper left longitude><space><upper left latitude><line feed><lower right longitude><space><lower right latitude>
  Upper left and lower right coordinates to register (or to fit to earth) the image. Format: linewise longitude and latitude values separated by 1 space.
  The lines are splitted by (/\s|\R$/). Use WGS84 (GPS) coordinates in decimal degree notation.
• mapImageCoordinatesUTM
  attr <name> mapImageCoordinatesUTM <upper left longitude><space><upper left latitude><line feed><lower right longitude><space><lower right latitude>
  Upper left and lower right coordinates to register (or to fit to earth) the image. Format: linewise longitude and latitude values separated by 1 space.
  The lines are splitted by (/\s|\R$/). Use UTM coordinates in meter notation.
  This attribute has to be set after the attribute mapImageCoordinatesToRegister. The values are used to calculate the scale factors and the attribute scaleToMeterXY is set accordingly.
• showMap
  attr <name> showMap <1,0>
  Shows Map on (1 default) or not (0).
• chargingStationCoordinates
  attr <name> chargingStationCoordinates <longitude><separator><latitude>
  Longitude and latitude of the charging station. Use WGS84 (GPS) coordinates in decimal degree notation. <separator> is one space character
• chargingStationImagePosition
  attr <name> chargingStationImagePosition <right, bottom, left, top, center>
  Position of the charging station image relative to its coordinates.
• mowerCuttingWidth
  attr <name> mowerCuttingWidth <cutting width>
  mower cutting width in meter to calculate the mowed area. default: 0.24
• mowerSchedule
  attr <name> mowerSchedule <schedule array>
  This attribute provides the possebility to edit the mower schedule in form of an JSON array.
  The actual schedule can be loaded with the command set <name> mowerScheduleToAttribute.
  The command set <name> sendScheduleFromAttributeToMower sends the schedule to the mower. The maximum of array elements is 14 and 2 each day, so every day of a week can have 2 time spans. Each array element consists of 7 unsorted day values (monday to sunday) which can be true or false, a start and duration value in minutes. Start time counts from midnight. NOTE: Do not use for 550 EPOS and Ceora. Delete the attribute after the schedule is successfully uploaded.
• mowingAreaLimits
  attr <name> mowingAreaLimits <positions list>
  List of position describing the area to mow. Format: linewise longitude and latitude values separated by 1 space. The lines are splitted by (/\s|\R$/).
  The position values could be taken from Google Earth KML file, but whithout the altitude values.
• propertyLimits
  attr <name> propertyLimits <positions list>
  List of position describing the property limits. Format: linewise of longitude and latitude values separated by 1 space. The lines are splitted by (/\s|\R$/).The position values could be taken from . For converting UTM32 meter to ETRS89 / WGS84 decimal degree you can use the BKG-Geodatenzentrum BKG-Geodatenzentrum.
• numberOfWayPointsToDisplay
  attr <name> numberOfWayPointsToDisplay <number of way points>
  Set the number of way points stored and displayed, default is 5000 at least 100. The way points are shifted through the dedicated stack.
• weekdaysToResetWayPoints
  attr <name> weekdaysToResetWayPoints <any combination of weekday numbers, space or minus [0123456 -]>
  A combination of weekday numbers when the way point stack will be reset. No reset for space or minus. Default 1.
• scaleToMeterXY
  attr <name> scaleToMeterXY <scale factor longitude><seperator><scale factor latitude>
  The scale factor depends from the Location on earth, so it has to be calculated for short ranges only. <seperator> is one space character.
  Longitude: (LongitudeMeter_1 - LongitudeMeter_2) / (LongitudeDegree_1 - LongitudeDegree _2)
  Latitude: (LatitudeMeter_1 - LatitudeMeter_2) / (LatitudeDegree_1 - LatitudeDegree _2)
• mapZones
  attr <name> mapZones <valid perl condition to separate Zones>
  Provide the zones with conditions as JSON-String:
  The waypoints are accessable by the variables $longitude und $latitude.
  Zones have have to be separated by conditions in alphabetical order of their names.
  The last zone is determined by the remaining waypoints.
  Syntactical example:
  '{
    "<name_1>" : {
      "condition" : "<condition to separate name_1 from other zones>",
      "cuttingHeight" : "<cutting height for the first zone>"
  },
    "<name_2>" : {
      "condition" : "<condition to separate name_2 from other zones, except name_1>",
      "cuttingHeight" : "<cutting height for the second zone>"
  },
    "<name_3>" : {
      "condition" : "<condition to separate name_3 from other zones, except name_1 and name_2>",
      "cuttingHeight" : "<cutting height for the third zone>"
  },
    "<name_n-1>" : {
      "condition" : "<condition to separate name_n-1 from other zones ,except the zones already seperated>",
      "cuttingHeight" : "<cutting height for the nth-1 zone>"
  },
    "<name n>" : {
      "condition" : "Use 'undef' because the last zone remains.",
      "cuttingHeight" : "<cutting height for the nth zone>"
  }
}'

  Example with two Zones and virtual lines defined by latitude 52.6484600648553, 52.64839739580418 (horizontal) and longitude 9.54799477359984 (vertikal). all way points above 52.6484600648553 or all way points above 52.64839739580418 and all way points to the right of 9.54799477359984 belong to zone 01_oben. All other way points belong to zone 02_unten.
  There are different cutting heightts each zone '{
    "01_oben" : {
      "condition" : "$latitude > 52.6484600648553 || $longitude > 9.54799477359984 && $latitude > 52.64839739580418",
      "cuttingHeight" : "7"
  },
    "02_unten" : {
      "condition" : "undef",
      "cuttingHeight" : "3"
  }
}'

• addPollingMinInterval
  attr <name> addPollingMinInterval <interval in seconds>
  Set minimum intervall for additional polling triggered by status-event, default 0 (no polling). Gets periodically statistics data from mower. Make sure to be within API limits (10000 calls per month).
• addPositionPolling
  attr <name> addPositionPolling <[1|0]>
  Set position polling, default 0 (no position polling). Gets periodically position data from mower, instead from websocket. It has no effect without setting attribute addPollingMinInterval.
• disable
• disabledForIntervals




userattr

The following user attributes are taken into account.

• loglevelDevIo
  attr <name> loglevelDevIo <[012345]>
  Set internal deviologlevel, DevIo: Wichtige_Internals_zur_Konfiguration
• timeoutGetMower
  attr <name> timeoutGetMower <[6 to 60]>
  Set timeout for API call, default 5 s.
• timeoutApiAuth
  attr <name> timeoutApiAuth <[6 to 60]>
  Set timeout for API call, default 5 s.
• timeoutCMD
  attr <name> timeoutCMD <[6 to 60]>
  Set timeout for API call, default 5 s.

The response time is meassured and logged if a timeout ist set to 60 s.


Readings
• api_MowerFound - all mower registered under the application key (client_id)
• api_callsThisMonth - counts monthly API calls, if attribute addPollingMinInterval is set.
• api_token_expires - date when session of Husqvarna Cloud expires
• batteryPercent - battery state of charge in percent
• mower_activity - current activity "UNKNOWN" | "NOT_APPLICABLE" | "MOWING" | "GOING_HOME" | "CHARGING" | "LEAVING" | "PARKED_IN_CS" | "STOPPED_IN_GARDEN"
• mower_commandSend - Last successfull sent command
• mower_commandStatus - Status of the last sent command cleared each status update
• mower_currentZone - Zone name with activity MOWING in the last status time stamp interval and number of way points in parenthesis.
• mower_wsEvent - websocket connection events (status-event, positions-event, settings-event)
• mower_errorCode - last error code
• mower_errorCodeTimestamp - last error code time stamp
• mower_errorDescription - error description
• mower_mode - current working mode "MAIN_AREA" | "SECONDARY_AREA" | "HOME" | "DEMO" | "UNKNOWN"
• mower_state - current status "UNKNOWN" | "NOT_APPLICABLE" | "PAUSED" | "IN_OPERATION" | "WAIT_UPDATING" | "WAIT_POWER_UP" | "RESTRICTED" | "OFF" | "STOPPED" | "ERROR" | "FATAL_ERROR" |"ERROR_AT_POWER_UP"
• planner_nextStart - next start time
• planner_restrictedReason - reason for parking NOT_APPLICABLE, NONE, WEEK_SCHEDULE, PARK_OVERRIDE, SENSOR, DAILY_LIMIT, FOTA, FROST
• planner_overrideAction - reason for override a planned action NOT_ACTIVE, FORCE_PARK, FORCE_MOW
• state - state of websocket connection
• device_state - status of connection FHEM to Husqvarna Cloud API and device state(e.g. defined, authorization, authorized, connected, error, update)
• settings_cuttingHeight - actual cutting height from API
• settings_headlight - actual headlight mode from API
• statistics_newGeoDataSets - number of new data sets between the last two different time stamps
• statistics_numberOfCollisions - Number of collisions (current day/last day/all days)
• status_connected - state of connetion between mower and Husqvarna Cloud.
• status_statusTimestamp - local time of last status update
• status_statusTimestampDiff - time difference in seconds between the last and second last status update
• system_name - name of the mower

BDKM

BDKM is a module supporting Buderus Logamatic KM gateways similar to the km200 module. For installation of the gateway see fhem km200 internet wiki
Compared with the km200 module the code of the BDKM module is more compact and has some extra features. It has the ablility to define how often a gateway ID is polled, which FHEM reading (alias) is generated for a gateway ID and which minimum difference to the last reading must exist to generate a new reading (see attributes).
It determines value ranges, allowed values and writeability from the gateway supporting FHEMWEB and readingsGroup when setting Values (drop down value menues).
On definition of a BDKM device the gateway is connected and a full poll collecting all IDs is done. This takes about 20 to 30 seconds. After that the module knows all IDs reported by the gateway. To examine these IDs just type:
get myBDKM INFO
These IDs can be used with the PollIds attribute to define if and how the IDs are read during the poll cycle.
All IDs can be mapped to own short readings.

Define
define <name> BDKM <IP-address|hostname> <GatewayPassword> <PrivatePassword> <MD5-Salt>
or
define <name> BDKM <IP-address|hostname> <AES-Key>


<name> : Name of device
<IP-address> : The IP adress of your Buderus gateway
<GatewayPassword> : The gateway password as printed on case of the gateway s.th. of the form: xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx
<PrivatePassword> : The private password as set with the buderus App
<MD5-Salt> : MD5 salt for the crypt algorithm you want to use (hex string like 867845e9.....). Have a look for km200 salt 86 ...
AES-Key can be generated here:
https://ssl-account.com/km200.andreashahn.info


Set
set <name> <ID> <value> ...

where ID is a valid writeable gateway ID (See list command, or "get myBDKM INFO")
The set command first reads the the ID from the gateway and also triggers a FHEM readings if necessary. After that it is checked if the value is valid. Then the ID and value(s) are transfered to to the gateway. After waiting (attr ReadBackDelay milliseconds) the value is read back and checked against value to be set. If necessary again a FHEM reading may be triggered. The read back value or an error is returned by the command.
Examples:
set myBDKM /heatingCircuits/hc1/temporaryRoomSetpoint 22.0
or the aliased version of it (if /heatingCircuits/hc1/temporaryRoomSetpointee is aliased to RoomTemporaryDesiredTemp):
set myBDKM RoomTemporaryDesiredTemp 22.0
special to set time of gateway to the hosts date:
set myBDKM /gateway/DateTime now
aliased:
set myBDKM DateTime now




Get
get <name> <ID> <[raw|json]>...

where ID is a valid gateway ID or an alias to it. (See list command)
The get command reads the the ID from the gateway, triggeres readings if necessarry, and returns the value or an error if s.th. went wrong. While polling is done asychronously with a non blocking HTTP GET. The set and get functions use a blocking HTTP GET/POST to be able to return a value directly to the user. Normaly get and set are only used by command line or when setting values via web interface.
With the raw option the whole original decoded data of the ID (as read from the gateway) is returned as a string.
With the json option a perl hash reference pointing to the JSON data is returned (take a look into the module if you want to use that)

Examples:
get myBDKM /heatingCircuits/hc1/temporaryRoomGetpoint
or the aliased version of it (see attr below):
get myBDKM RoomTemporaryDesiredTemp
get myBDKM DateTime
get myBDKM /gateway/instAccess
Spacial to get Infos about IDs known by the gateway and own configurations:
get myBDKM INFO
Everything matching /temp/ get myBDKM INFO temp
Everything matching /Heaven/ or /Hell/ get myBDKM INFO Heaven Hell
Everything known: get myBDKM INFO .*
Arguments to INFO are reqular expressions which are matched against all IDs and all aliases.



Attributes
• BaseInterval
  The interval time in seconds between poll cycles. It defaults to 120 seconds. Which means that every 120 seconds a new poll collects values of IDs which turn it is.


• InterPollDelay
  The delay time in milliseconds between reading of two IDs from the gateway. It defaults to 0 (read as fast as possible). Some gateways/heatings seem to stop answering after a while when you are reading a lot of IDs. (verbose 2 "communication ERROR"). To avoid gateway hangups always try to read only as many IDs as really required. If it doesn't help try to increase the InterPollDelay value. E.g. start with 100.


• ReadBackDelay
  Read back delay for the set command in milliseconds. This value defaults to 500 (0.5s). After setting a value, the gateway need some time before the value can be read back. If this delay is too short after writing you will get back the old value and not the expected new one. The default should work in most cases.


• HttpTimeout
  Timeout for all HTTP requests in seconds (polling, set, get). This defaults to 10s. If there is no answer from the gateway for HttpTimeout time an error is returned. If a HTTP request expires while polling an error log (level 2) is generated and the request is automatically restarted after 60 seconds.


• PollIds
  Without this attribute FHEM readings are NOT generated automatically!
  This attribute defines how and when IDs are polled within a base interval (set by atrribute BaseInterval).
  The attribute contains list of space separated IDs and options written as
  GatewayID:Modulo:Delta:Alias
  Where Gateway is the real gateway ID like "/gateway/DateTime".
  Modulo is the value which defines how often the GatewayID is polled from the gateway and checked for FHEM readings update. E.g. a value of 4 means that the ID is polled only every 4th cycle.
  Delta defines the minimum difference a polled value must have to the previous reading, before a FHEM reading with the new value is generated.
  Alias defines a short name for the GatewayID under which the gateway ID can be accessed. Also readings (Logfile entries) are generated with this short alias if set. If not set, the original ID is used.
  In detail:
  ID:1:0:Alias - poll every cycle, when difference >= 0 to previous reading (means always, also for strings) trigger FHEM reading to "Alias"
  ID:1::Alias - poll every cycle, no Delta set => trigger FHEM reading to "Alias" on value change only
  ID:0::Alias - update reading on startup once if reading changed (to the one prevously saved in fhem.save)
  ID:1:0.5:Alias - poll every cycle, when difference => 0.5 trigger a FHEM reading to "Alias"
  ID:15::Alias - poll every 15th cylce, update reading only if changed
  ID:::Alias - update reading on (get/set) only and only if value changed
  ID::0:Alias - update reading on (get/set) only and trigger reading always on get/set
  ID - without colons ":", poll every cycle, update reading allways (same as ID:1:0:)
  Also some usefull defaults can be set by the special keyword RC300DEFAULTS, RC35DEFAULTS, RC30DEFAULTS.
  As I don't know anything about RC35 or RC30 the later keywords are currently empty (please send me some info with "get myBDKM INFO" :-)
  Definitions set by the special keywords (see the module code for it) are overwritten by definitions later set in the attribute definition
  Example:
  attr myBDKM PollIds \
RC300DEFAULTS \
/gateway/DateTime:0::Date \
/system/info:0:0:\
/dhwCircuits/dhw1/actualTemp:1:0.2:WaterTemp
  
  Which means: Use RC300DEFAULTS, trigger FHEM reading "Date" when date has changed on startup only. Trigger FHEM reading "/system/info" (no aliasing) always on startup, poll water temperature every cycle and trigger FHEM reading "WaterTemp" when difference to last reading was at least 0.2 degrees.
  

BEOK

BEOK implements a connection to BEOK / Floureon / Hysen WiFi room thermostat
AES Encyrption is needed. Maybe you must first install extra Perl modules.
E.g. for Debian/Raspian :
sudo apt-get install libcrypt-cbc-perl
sudo apt-get install libcrypt-rijndael-perl
sudo apt-get install libssl-dev
sudo cpan Crypt/OpenSSL/AES.pm

Define
define <name> BEOK <ip> [mac]

Example: define Thermo BEOK 192.168.1.100

Set

• desired-temp <5 - 99>


• mode <auto manual>


• loop <12345.67 123456.7 1234567>
  12345.67 means Saturday and Sunday follow the "weekend" schedule
  1234567 means every day (including Saturday and Sunday) follows the "weekday" schedule


• sensor <external internal both>
  both = internal control temperature, external limit temperature


• time
  sets time and day of week on device to FHEM time & day


• lock <on off>


• power-on-memory <on off>


• fre <open close> Anti-freezing function


• room-temp-adj <-5 +5>


• osv <5 - 99>
  Limit temperature value of external sensor


• svh <5 - 99>
  Set upper limit temperature value


• svl <5 - 99>
  Set lower limit temperature value


• dif <1 - 9>
  difference of limit temperature value of external sensor


• day-profil[1-6]-temp <5 - 99>


• day-profil[1-6]-time <00:00 - 23:59>


• we-profile[7-8]-temp <5 - 99>


• we-profile[7-8]-time <00:00 - 23:59>


• weekprofile
  Set all weekday setpoints and temperatures with values from a weekprofile day.
  Syntax : set weekprofile <weekprofile_device:profil_name[:weekday]>
  see also https://forum.fhem.de/index.php/topic,80703.msg901303.html#msg901303


Attributes

• timeout
  timeout for network device communication, default 5


• interval
  poll time interval in seconds, set to 0 for no polling , default 60


• timesync
  set device time and day of week automatic to FHEM time, default 1 (on)


• language
  set to DE for german names of Room, Floor , etc.


• model
  only for FHEM modul statistics at https://fhem.de/stats/statistics.html

BOSEST

BOSEST is used to control a BOSE SoundTouch system (one or more SoundTouch 10, 20 30, 300 or Portable devices)

Note: The following libraries are required for this module:
• libwww-perl
• libmojolicious-perl
• libxml-simple-perl
• libnet-bonjour-perl
• libev-perl
• liburi-escape-xs-perl
• sox
• libsox-fmt-mp3

Use sudo apt-get install libwww-perl libmojolicious-perl libxml-simple-perl libnet-bonjour-perl libev-perl liburi-escape-xs-perl to install this libraries.
Please note: libmojolicious-perl must be >=5.54
Use sudo apt-get install cpanminus and sudo cpanm Mojolicious to update to the newest version.

TextToSpeach (TTS) can be configured as described in the following thread: Link
Questions and/or feedback can be posted on the FHEM forum: Link


Define
define <name> BOSEST

Example:
define bosesystem BOSEST
Defines BOSE SoundTouch system. All devices/speakers will show up after 60s under "Unsorted" in FHEM.


Set
set <name> <command> [<parameter>]

The following commands are defined for the devices/speakers (except autoAddDLNAServers is for the "main" BOSEST) :


General commands
• on   -   power on the device
• off   -   turn the device off
• power   -   toggle on/off
• volume [0...100] [+x|-x]   -   set the volume level in percentage or change volume by ±x from current level
• channel 0...20   -   select present to play
• saveChannel 07...20   -   save current channel to channel 07 to 20
• play   -   start to play
• pause   -   pause the playback
• playpause   -   toggle play/pause
• stop   -   stop playback
• nextTrack   -   play next track
• prevTrack   -   play previous track
• playTrack name|location|source[|sourceAccount]   -   searches per DNLA for the track title and plays it
  additional information:
  1. You can search for trackTitle, trackAlbum, trackArtist (german FHEM forum post)
  2. You can test it in the SoundTouch APP: Use the search in the APP to see if a playlist is found and played. It yes it will work with playTrack too. (german FHEM forum post)
• mute on|off|toggle   -   control volume mute
• shuffle on|off   -   control shuffle mode
• repeat all|one|off   -   control repeat mode
• bass 0...10   -   set the bass level
• recent 0...15   -   set number of names in the recent list in readings
• source bluetooth,bt-discover,aux mode, airplay   -   select a local source


• addDLNAServer Name1 [Name2] [Namex]   -   add DLNA servers Name1 (and Name2 to Namex) to the BOSE library
• removeDLNAServer Name1 [Name2] [Namex]   -   remove DLNA servers Name1 (and Name2 to Namex) to the BOSE library

Example: set BOSE_1234567890AB volume 25  Set volume on device with the name BOSE_1234567890AB



Timer commands:
• on-for-timer 1...x   -   power on the device for x seconds
• off-for-timer 1...x   -   turn the device off and power on again after x seconds
• on-till hh:mm:ss   -   power on the device until defined time
• off-till hh:mm:ss   -   turn the device off and power on again at defined time
• on-till-overneight hh:mm:ss   -   power on the device until defined time on the next day
• off-till-overneight hh:mm:ss   -   turn the device off at defined time on the next day

Example: set BOSE_1234567890AB on-till 23:00:00  Switches device with the name BOSE_1234567890AB now on and at 23:00:00 off



Multiroom commands:
• createZone deviceID[,deviceID]   -   create multiroom zone and adds device(s) to the multiroom zone
• addToZone deviceID   -   add device to multiroom zone
• removeFromZone deviceID   -   remove device from multiroom zone
• playEverywhere   -   play sound of a device on all others devices
• stopPlayEverywhere   -   stop playing sound on all devices

Example1: set BOSE_1234567890AB playEverywhere  Starts playing the sound of the device BOSE_1234567890AB on allother devices

Example2: set BOSE_1234567890AB createZone AB1234567890,12AB34567890  Defines BOSE_1234567890AB as multiroom master and adds BOSE_AB1234567890 and BOSE_12AB34567890 to the multiroom zone

Note: A "double-tap" (<1s) on a preset button (device or remote control) will toggle playEverywhere/stopPlayEverywhere



Show clock command (only for ST20/30):
• clock enable/disable   -   show or hide clock

Example: set BOSE_1234567890AB clock enable  Show time in the ST20/30 display.



TextToSpeach commands (needs Google Translate):
• speak "message" [0...100] [+x|-x] [en|de|xx]   -   Text to speak, optional with volume adjustment and language to use.
• speakOff "message" [0...100] [+x|-x] [en|de|xx]   -   Text to speak, optional with volume adjustment and language to use. Device is switched off after speak.

Example: set BOSE_1234567890AB speakOff "Music is going to switch off now. Good night." 30 en  Speaks message at volume 30 and then switches off device.



DNLA Server command:
• autoAddDLNAServers 0|1   -   1=automatically add all DLNA servers to BOSE library. This command is only for "main" BOSEST, not for devices/speakers!


Get
n/a

Attributes
• staticIPs IP-Address [,IP-Address]  -   Manually define the used IP address(es) (comma separated) of your BOSE devices. Should be used only, if BOSEST device detection doesn't work in your network (e.g. several subnets on server, subnet not directly connected, ...)
  Example: attr bosesystem staticIPs 192.168.1.52,192.168.1.53
• speakChannel channel(s)  -   speaks channel/present name bevor starting a playback, useful for SoundTouch without display (comma separated or range: e.g. 2,3,5,6 or 1-6 ). TTS must be installed.
• auto-zone on|off   -   automatic start multiroom zone play, if speakers are playing the same, according to "contentItemLocation"; (default: off)
• ttsDirectory "directory"   -   set DLNA TTS directory. FHEM user needs permissions to write to that directory.
• ttsLanguage en|de|xx   -   set default TTS language (default: en)
• ttsSpeakOnError 0|1   -   0=disable to speak "not available" text
• ttsVolume [0...100] [+x|-x]   -   set the TTS volume level in percentage or change volume by ±x from current level
• Channel_07 to Channel_20 name|location|source|[sourceAccount]   -   define present 07 to 20
  When you play something, you can find ContentItemLocationName, ContentItemLocation, etc. in the readings. These data can be used here to define the present.

BOTVAC

This module controls Neato Botvac Connected and Vorwerk Robot Vacuums.
For issuing commands or retrieving Readings it's necessary to fetch the information from the NEATO/VORWERK Server. In this way, it can happen, that it's not possible to send commands to the Robot until the corresponding Values are fetched. This means, it can need some time until your Robot will react on your command.

Define

define <name> BOTVAC <email> [NEATO|VORWERK] [<polling-interval>]

Example: define myNeato BOTVAC myemail@myprovider.com NEATO 300

After defining the Device, it's necessary to log in into your account which is linked to your email address.

• If you have a password, enter it with set <name> password <password>
  It is exactly the same Password as you use on the Website or inside the App.

  Example: set NEATO passwort mySecretPassword

• If authentication without a password is provided, you have to following the registration process.

  1. Ask for an one-time password by set <name> requestVerification
  2. Provide one-time password from email set <name> sendVerification <code>

Get

• get <name> batteryPercent
  requests the state of the battery from Robot
• get <name> securityTokens
  list of all tokens stored by the module. The tokens are relevant for user authentication and to get access to robot data.
• get <name> statistics
  display statistical data, extracted from available maps of recent cleanings

Set

• set <name> findMe
  plays a sound and let the LED light for easier finding of a stuck robot
• set <name> dismissCurrentAlert
  reset an actual Warning (e.g. dustbin full)
• set <name> nextCleaningMode
  Depending on Model, there are Arguments available: eco/turbo
• set <name> nextCleaningModifier
  The modifier is used for next spot cleaning. Depending on Model, there are Arguments available: normal/double
• set <name> nextCleaningNavigationMode
  The navigation mode is used for the next house cleaning. Depending on Model, there are Arguments available: normal/extraCare/deep
• set <name> nextCleaningZone
  Depending on Model, the ID of the zone that will be used for the next zone cleaning can be set.
• set <name> nextCleaningSpotHeight
  Is defined as number between 100 - 400. The unit is cm.
• set <name> nextCleaningSpotWidth
  Is defined as number between 100 - 400. The unit is cm.
• set <name> password <password>
  set the password for the NEATO/VORWERK account
• set <name> pause
  interrupts the cleaning
• set <name> pauseToBase
  stops cleaning and returns to base
• set <name> reloadMaps
  load last map from server into the cache of the module. no file is stored!
• set <name> resume
  resume cleaning after pause
• set <name> requestVerification
  Request one-time password for account verfication.
  One-time password will be sent to the account's email address.
• set <name> schedule
  on and off, switch time control
• set <name> sendToBase
  send roboter back to base
• set <name> sendVerification <code>
  Use one-time password from email as code to log in into your account, see requestVerification.
• set <name> setBoundariesOnFloorplan_<floor plan> <name|{JSON String}>
  Set boundaries/nogo lines in the corresponding floor plan. The paramter can either be a name, which is already defined by attribute "boundaries", or alternatively a JSON string. (A comma-separated list of names is also possible.)
  Description of syntax
  Examples:
  set <name> setBoundariesOnFloorplan_0 Bad
set <name> setBoundariesOnFloorplan_0 Bad,Kueche
set <name> setBoundariesOnFloorplan_0 {"type":"polyline","vertices":[[0.710,0.6217],[0.710,0.6923]], "name":"Bad","color":"#E54B1C","enabled":true}
• set <name> setRobot
  choose robot if more than one is registered at the used account
• set <name> startCleaning ([house|map|zone])
  start the Cleaning from the scratch. If the robot supports boundaries/nogo lines/zones, the additional parameter can be used as:
  • house - cleaning without a persisted map
  • map - cleaning with a persisted map
  • zone - cleaning in a specific zone, set zone with nextCleaningZone
• set <name> startSpot
  start spot-Cleaning from actual position.
• set <name> startManual
  start Manual Cleaning. This cleaning mode opens a direct websocket connection to the robot. Therefore robot and FHEM installation has to reside in the same LAN. Even though an internet connection is necessary as the initialization is triggered by a remote call.
  Note: If the robot does not receive any messages for 30 seconds it will exit Manual Cleaning, but it will not close the websocket connection automaticaly.
• set <name> statusRequest
  pull update of all readings. necessary because NEATO/VORWERK does not send updates at their own.
• set <name> stop
  stop cleaning and in case of manual cleaning mode close also the websocket connection
• set <name> syncRobots
  sync robot data with online account. Useful if one has more then one robot registered
• set <name> pollingMode <on|off>
  set polling on (default) or off like attribut disable.
• set <name> robotSounds <on|off>
  set sounds on or off.
• set <name> dirtbinAlertReminderInterval <30|60|90|120|150>
  set alert intervall in minutes.
• set <name> filterChangeReminderInterval <1|2|3>
  set alert intervall in months.
• set <name> brushChangeReminderInterval <4|5|6|7|8>
  set alert intervall in months.
• set <name> wsCommand
  Commands start or stop cleaning activities.
  • eco-on
  • eco-off
  • turbo-on
  • turbo-off
  • brush-on
  • brush-off
  • vacuum-on
  • vacuum-off
• set <name> wsCombo
  Combos specify a behavior on the robot.
  They need to be sent with less than 1Hz frequency. If the robot doesn't receive a combo with the specified frequency it will stop moving. Also, if the robot does not receive any messages for 30 seconds it will exit Manual Cleaning.
  • forward - issues a continuous forward motion.
  • back - issues a discontinuous backward motion in ~30cm intervals as a safety measure since the robot has no sensors at the back.
  • arc-left - issues a 450 turn counter-clockwise while going forward.
  • arc-right - issues a 450 turn clockwise while going forward.
  • pivot-left - issues a 900 turn counter-clockwise.
  • pivot-right - issues a 900 turn clockwise.
  • stop - issues an immediate stop.

Attributes

• actionInterval
  time in seconds between status requests while Device is working
• boundaries
  Boundary entries separated by space in JSON format, e.g.
  {"type":"polyline","vertices":[[0.710,0.6217],[0.710,0.6923]],"name":"Bad","color":"#E54B1C","enabled":true}
{"type":"polyline","vertices":[[0.7139,0.4101],[0.7135,0.4282],[0.4326,0.3322],[0.4326,0.2533],[0.3931,0.2533],[0.3931,0.3426],[0.7452,0.4637],[0.7617,0.4196]],"name":"Kueche","color":"#000000","enabled":true}
  Description of syntax
  The value of paramter name is used as setListe for setBoundariesOnFloorplan_<floor plan>. It is also possible to save more than one boundary with the same name. The command setBoundariesOnFloorplan_<floor plan> <name> sends all boundary with the same name.

BRAVIA

This module controls a Sony TV device over ethernet. Devices of series starting from 2011 are supported.

Define
define <name> BRAVIA <ip-or-hostname> [<poll-interval>]

With definition of a BRAVIA device an internal task will be scheduled. This task pulls frequently the status and other information from the TV.
The intervall can be defined in seconds by an optional parameter <poll-intervall>. The default value is 45 seconds.

After definition of a device using this module it has to be registered as a remote control (set register).

As long as readings are not among the usual AV readings they are clustered:

s_*	: status
ci_*	: content information



The module contains predefined layouts for remotecontrol using PNG and SVG.


Set
set <name> <option> <value>

Options:
• application
  List of applications. Applications are available with models from 2013 and newer.
• channel
  List of all known channels. The module collects all visited channels. Channels can be loaded automtically with models from 2013 and newer. (number of channels, see channelsMax).
• channelDown
  Switches a channel back.
• channelUp
  Switches a channel forward.
• input
  List of input channels. Imputs are available with models from 2013 and newer.
• mute
  Set mute if Upnp is activated.
• off
  Switches TV to off. State of device will have been set to "set_off" for 60 seconds or until off-status is pulled from TV.
• on
  Switches TV to on, with models from 2013 using WOL. State of device will have been set to "set_on" for 60 seconds or until on-status is pulled from TV.
• openUrl
  Opens an URL on the screen. This Feature is available on models from 2013 and newer.
• pause
  Pauses a playing of a recording, of an internal App, etc.
• play
  Starts playing of a recording, of an internal App, etc.
• record
  Starts recording of current content.
• register
  One-time registration of Fhem as remote control in the TV.
  With requestFormat = "xml" registration works without parameter.
  With requestFormat = "json" registration has to be executed twice.
  The register option offers an additional input field:
  1. Call with empty input. A PIN for registration has to be shown on the TV.
  2. Insert PIN into input field and register again.
• requestFormat
  "xml" for xml based communication (models from 2011 and 2012)
  "json" for communication with models from 2013 and newer
• requestReboot
  Reboots the TV immediately. This Feature is available on models from 2013 and newer.
• remoteControl
  Sends command directly to TV.
• statusRequest
  Retrieves current status information from TV.
• stop
  Stops recording, playing of an internal App, etc.
• text
  Includes the given text into an input field on display.
• toggle
  Toggles power status of TV.
• tvpause
  Activates Timeshift mode.
• upnp
  Activates Upnp service used to control volume.
• volume
  Straight setting of volume. Upnp service has to be activated.
• volumeDown
  Decreases volume.
• volumeUp
  Increases volume.

Attributes
attr <name> <attribute> <value>

Attributes:
• channelsMax
  Maximum amount of channels to be displayed, default is 50.
• macaddr
  Enables power on of TV using Wake-On-Lan.
• wolBroadcast
  Broadcast address for Wake-On-Lan magic packets, default is 255.255.255.255.

BS

The module BS allows to collect data from a brightness sensor through a FHZ device. For details on the brightness sensor see busware wiki. You can have at most nine different brightness sensors in range of your FHZ.

The state contains the brightness in % (reading brightness) and the brightness in lux (reading lux). The flags reading is always zero. The meaning of these readings is explained in more detail on the above mentioned wiki page.

Define
define <name> BS <sensor#> [<RExt>]

<sensor#> is the number of sensor in the brightness sensor address system that runs from 1 to 9.

<RExt> is the value of the resistor on your brightness sensor in Ω (Ohm). The brightness reading in % is proportional to the resistance, the lux reading is proportional to the resistance squared. The value is optional. The default resistance is RExt= 50.000Ω.

Example:

define bs1 BS 1 40000


Set
N/A

Get
N/A

Attributes
• do_not_notify
• showtime
• model (bs)
• ignore
• readingFnAttributes

Babble

FHEM module for speech control of FHEM devices

Usage

See German Wiki page


Define

define <name> Babble
Defines the Babble device.

Notes:
• This module uses the global attribute language to determine its output data
  (default: EN=english). For German output set attr global language DE.
• This module needs the JSON package.
• Only when the chatbot functionality of RiveScript is required, the RiveScript module must be installed as well, see https://github.com/aichaos/rivescript-perl

Usage

To use this module,
1. call the Perl function Babble_DoIt("<name>","<sentence>"[,<parm0>,<parm1>,...]).
2. execute the FHEM command set <name> talk|doit <sentence>[,<parm0>,<parm1>,...].
<name> is the name of the Babble device, <parm0> <parm1> are arbitrary parameters passed to the executed command. The module will analyze the sentence passed an isolate a device to be addressed, a place identifier, a verb, a target and its value from the sentence passed. Attention: in case the FHEM command is used, <sentence> must not contain commas. If a proper command has been stored with device, place, verb and target, it will be subject to substitutions and then will be executed. In these substitutions, a string $VALUE will be replaced by the value for the target reading, a string $DEV will be replaced by the device name identified by Babble, and strings $PARM[0|1|2...] will be replaced by the corresponding parameters passed to the function Babble_DoIt
• If no stored command ist found, the sentence is passed to the local RiveScript interpreter if present
• To have a FHEM register itself as a Babble Device, it must get an attribute value babbleDevice=<name>. The name parameter must either be unique to the Babble system, or it muts be of the form <name>_<digits>
• Devices on remote FHEM installations are defined in the babbleDevices attribute, see below

Set

• set <name> talk|doit <sentence>[,<parm0>,<parm1>,...]
  
  execute the command given in the sentence.
• set <name> locked
set <name> unlocked
  sets the lockstate of the babble module to locked (i.e., babble setups may not be changed) resp. unlocked (i.e., babble setups may be changed>)
• set <name> save|restore
  Manually save/restore the babble to/from the external file babbleFILE (save done automatically at each state modification, restore at FHEM start)
• set <name> rivereload
  Reload data for RiveScript Interpreter
• set <name> test
  Run a few test cases for normalization

Get

• get <name> version
  Display the version of the module
• get <name> tokens
  Obtain fresh csrfToken from remote FHEM installations (needed after restart of remote FHEM)

Attributes

• attr <name> babbleDevices [<babble devname>:<FHEM devname>:1|2|3]*
  space separated list of remote FHEM devices, each as a group separated by ':' consisting of
  • a Babble device name
  • a FHEM Device name
  • an integer 1..3, indication which of the remoteFHEM functions to be called
  The Babble device name may contain a *-character. If this is the case, it will be considered a regular expression, with the star replaced by (.*). When using Babble with a natural language sentence whose device part matches this regular expression, the character group addressed by the star sequence is placed in the variable $STAR, and used to replace this value in the command sequence.
• attr <name> helpFunc <function name&rt;
  name of a help function which is used in case no command is found for a certain device. When this function is called, the strings $DEV, $HELP, $PARM[0|1|2...] will be replaced by the devicename identified by Babble, the help text for this device and parameters passed to the Babble_DoIt function
• attr <name> testParm(0|1|2|3) <string&rt;
  if a command is not really excuted, but only tested, the values of these attributes will be used to substitute the strings $PARM[0|1|2...] in the tested command
• attr <name> dnuFile <filename&rt;
  if this filename is given, every sentence that could not be analyzed is stored in this file
• attr <name> confirmFunc <function name&rt;
  name of a confirmation function which is used in case a command is exceuted. When this function is called, the strings $DEV, $HELP, $PARM[0|1|2...] will be replaced by the devicename identified by Babble, the help text for this device and parameters passed to the Babble_DoIt function
• attr <name> noChatBot 0|1
  if this attribute is set to 1, a local RiveScript interpreter will be ignored even though it is present in the system
• attr <name> remoteFHEM(0|1|2|3) [<user>:<password>@]<IP address:port&rt;
  IP address and port for a remote FHEM installation
• attr <name> remoteFunc(0|1|2|3) <function name&rt;
  name of a Perl function that is called for addressing a certain remote FHEM device
• attr <name> remoteToken(0|1|2|3) <csrfToken&rt;
  csrfToken for addressing a certain remote FHEM device
• attr <name> babbleIds ...
  space separated list of identities by which babble may be addressed
• attr <name> babbleSubs :,:, ...
  space separated list of regular expressions and their replacements - this will be used on the initial sentence submitted to Babble (Note: a space in the regexp must be replaced by \s).
• attr <name> babblePlaces ...
  space separated list of special places to be identified in speech
• attr <name> babbleNoPlaces ...
  space separated list of rooms (in the local FHEM device) that should not appear in the list of place
• attr <name> babbleStatus ...
  space separated list of status identifiers to be identified in speech. Example: Status Value Weather Time
• attr <name> babblePrepos ...
  space separated list of prepositions to be identified in speech. Example: by in at on
• attr <name> babbleTimes ...
  space separated list of temporal adverbs. Example: today tomorrow
• attr <name> babbleQuests ...
  space separated list of questioning adverbs. Example: how when where
• attr <name> babbleArticles ...
  space separated list of articles to be identified in speech. Example: the
• attr <name> babbleVerbs ,...: ,...:
  space separated list of verb groups to be identified in speech. Each group consists of comma separated verb forms (conjugations as well as variations), followed by a ':' and then the infinitive form of the verb. Example: speak,speaks,say,says:speaking
• attr <name> babbleWrites ...
  space separated list of write verbs to be identified in speech. Example: send add remove
• attr <name> babbleVerbParts ...
  space separated list of verb parts to be identified in speech. Example: un re
• attr <name> linkname <string>
  Name for babble web link, default: babbles
• attr <name> hiddenroom <string>
  Room name for hidden babble room (containing only the Babble device), default: babbleRoom
• attr <name> publicroom <string>
  Room name for public babble room (containing sensor/actor devices), default: babble
• attr <name> lockstate locked|unlocked
  locked means that babble setups may not be changed, unlocked means that babble setups may be changed>

BlinkCamera

This module connects remotely to a system of Blink Home Cameras Blink Home Cameras are relatively inexpensive wire-free video home security & monitoring system

Disclaimer: Since there are no official APIs for the blink cameras, there is no guarantee for this module to continue working. Several changes over the years have caused temporary outages due to incompatibe changes done by the provider of the Blink cameras.

The blink device contains the possibility to regular poll for updates (i.e. specifically for notifications/alerts) MOst commands that change configurations are not synchronous, but the result will be returned after polling for status information. This is automatically handled in the device and the result of the cmd is marked in the reading cmdResult with the value "SUCCESS".
Traditional Blink cameras and also the BlinkMini types should work
The blink device also contains a proxy for retrieving videos and thumbnails throug an FHEMweb extension in the form of http://<fhem>:<fhemwebport>/fhem/BlinkCamera/<name of the blink device>/...

Define
define <name> BlinkCamera <email> [ <password> ]

Defines a BlinkCamera device, which connects to the cloud servers with the given user name and password (as provided during registration / setup)

The password will be removed from the define and stored separately (so needs to be given on the initial define)

Example: define blink BlinkCamera ichbins@nicht.de abc123




Set
set <name> <what> [<value>]

where <what> / <value> is one of


• login
  Initiate a login to the blink servers. This is usually done automatically when needed or when the login is expired
• verifyPin
  can be used to verify the pin send from blink via email/sms
• arm or disarm
  All enabled cameras in the system will be armed (i.e. they will be set to a mode where alarms/videos are automatically created based on the current settings) / disarmed (set to inactive mode where no video is recorded.
• camEnable <camera name or number or "all"> or camDisable <camera name or number>
  The specified camera will be enabled (i.e. so that it is included in the arm / disarm commands) / disabled (excluded from arm/disarm).
• reset
  Reset the FHEM device (only used in case of something gets into an unknown or strange state)
• resetUniqueID
  Reset the FHEM device (only used in case of something gets into an unknown or strange state). Additionally the uniqueID that is used in the device loing will be reset in this option.
• videoDelete <video id>
  The video with the given id will be removed (both from the local filesystem and from the blink servers)


Get
get <name> <what> [<value>]

where <what> / <value> is one of


• getNetworks
  Retrieve the networks defined in the blink account. This is needed for further operations and information request to blink. For specifying a specific network (id), the attribute network can be also set
• getInfo
  Get information about the system from the blink servers (including cameras and state) . This is usually done automatically based on the reular interval specified in attribute pollingTimeout
• getInfoCamera <camera name or number or "all">
  Get the information about the specified camera from the blink system. Currently the information about the camera is just stored in raw json format in a single reading cameraConfig<camera id>
• getThumbnail <camera name or number or "all">
  Request a new thumbnail being taken from the specified camera in the blink system. The thumbnail is not automatically retrieved, this can be done using getInfoCamera
• getVideoAlert [ <video id> ]
  Retrieve the video for the corresponding id (or if ommitted as specified in the reading alertID) and store the video in a local file in the directory given in the attribute proxyDir
• liveview <camera name or number or "all">
  Request a link to the live video stream. The live video stream access (URL) will be stored in the reading liveVideo (the associated cam id in liveCam). The link to the video is an rtsp - which can be shown in video players like VLC.
  Note: Live video streaming might have a substantially negative effect on battery life
  


Attributes


• maxRetries <0|1|2...|9>
  Defines the number of retries that are done in case of a failure of a command. Pauses between retries are done with an increasing delay between calls.
• network <network id>
  This attribute is needed if your blink system contains more than one network. If not specified the first netowrk defined in the account is used
• proxyDir <directory path>
  Specify the path where temporary files (videos, thumbnails) are stored to be access via the proxy server built into the device as an fhemweb extension
• pollingTimeout <interval>
  Interval in which the system is checking for status updates from the blink servers (given in seconds - value 0 means no polling). This is the frequency in which new alerts can be received
• imgTemplate <HTML template for reading>
  Give an HTML template for the image reading that shows the thumbnail of a camera. Default is a template which shows the image a link to the image and also the url as text. In the template the string #URL# will be replaced with the actual URL
• imgOriginalFile <1 or 0>
  If set to 1 it will keep the original filename of the thumbnail when storing ti. With setting this new thumbnails will not overwrite existing ones.
  NOTE: No cleanup of thumbnails is done, so over time more and more thumbnails will be stored in the proxydir.
• vidTemplate <HTML template for reading>
  Give an HTML template for the video reading that shows the video of a notification from the camera. Default is a template which shows the video a link to the video and also the url and id as text. In the template the string #URL# will be replaced with the actual URL of the video and #ID# will be replaced by the video ID.
• webname <path to fhem web>
  can be set if fhem is not accessible through the standard url of FHEMWeb /fhem/... (Default value is fhem).
• homeScreenV3 <1 or 0>
  If set to 1 (default) the new version 3 of the blink API will be used. Unfortunately this includes different readings and settings
  NOTE: This attribute is deprecated and not needed anymore, since the old API has been switched off by Blink (default is on = 1)


Readings
• cmd <internal name of the last executed command>
  Used to identify the cmd that was last executed and where the result is given in cmdResult
• cmdResult <error message or SUCCESS>
  Used to identify success or failure of a command


• networks <list of networks>
  Lists the defined networks for the account at blink in the form networkid:networkname
• networkName <name>
  Name of the network that is currently used to fill the readings
• networkArmed <status>
  Network arm status (true or false)
• networkStatus <ok or failure>
  Basic status of the current network
• networkCameras <number>
  Lists the defined cameras in the current network in the form cameraid:cameraname
• networkSyncModule <id and status>
  Information about the syncmodule in the current network in the form syncid:syncmodulestatus


• networkCamera...
  Set of readings specific for each camera (identified by the cameraID in the reading name). Providing status and name of the camera / most recent thumbnail / url for the thumbnail to the proxy
• networkCameraEnabled
  Shows the enabled (active) status of the camera (known values: 0 / 1 / "undef" - last value will be given if this value is not contained in the camerainfo


• alert...
  Set of readings specifying the last alert (movement alert) coming from one of the devices. Especially the ID is relevant here for accessing the corresponding video secifically. Additionally the camera, time and video url are specifed here.

Broadlink

Broadlink implements a connection to Broadlink devices - currently tested with Broadlink RM Pro, which is able to send IR and 433MHz commands. It is also able to record this commands. It can also control rmmini devices and sp3 or sp3s plugs.
It requires AES encryption please install on Windows:
ppm install Crypt-CBC
ppm install Crypt-OpenSSL-AES

or Linux/Raspberry: sudo apt-get install libcrypt-cbc-perl
sudo apt-get install libcrypt-rijndael-perl
sudo cpan Crypt/OpenSSL/AES.pm


Define
define <name> Broadlink <ip/host> <mac> <type=rmpro or rmmini or sp3 or sp3s>

Example: define broadlinkWZ Broadlink 10.23.11.85 34:EA:34:F4:77:7B rmpro

The mac of the device have to be set in format: xx:xx:xx:xx:xx
The type is in current development state optional.

Set for rmpro

• set <name> <commandSend> <command name>
  
  Send a previous recorded command.
• set <name> recordNewCommand <command name>
  
  Records a new command. You have to specify a commandname
• set <name> remove <command name>
  
  Removes a recored command.
• set <name> rename <old command name> <new command name>
  
  Renames a recored command.
• set <name> getTemperature
  
  Get the device current enviroment Temperature
Set for rmmini

• set <name> <commandSend> <command name>
  
  Send a previous recorded command.
• set <name> recordNewCommand <command name>
  
  Records a new command. You have to specify a commandname
• set <name> remove <command name>
  
  Removes a recored command.
• set <name> rename <old command name> <new command name>
  
  Renames a recored command.

Set for sp3

• set <name> on
  
  Set the device on
• set <name> off
  
  Set the device off
• set <name> toggle
  
  Toggle the device on and off
• set <name> getStatus
  
  Get the device on/off status
Set for sp3s

• set <name> on
  
  Set the device on
• set <name> off
  
  Set the device off
• set <name> toggle
  
  Toggle the device on and off
• set <name> getStatus
  
  Get the device on/off status
• set <name> getEnergy
  
  Get the device current energy consumption

Attributes for all Broadlink Devices

• socket_timeout
  
  sets a timeout for the device communication

CALVIEW

This module creates a device with deadlines based on calendar-devices of the 57_Calendar.pm module. You need to install the perl-modul Date::Parse!

Please configure the attribut HideOlderThen in your CALENDAR-Device, that controls if old events from past are shown!

Define

define <Name> CALVIEW <calendarname(s) separate with ','> <next> <updateintervall in sec (default 43200)>

define myView CALVIEW Googlecalendar next

define myView CALVIEW Googlecalendar,holiday next 900

- setting the update interval is not needed normally because every calendar update triggers a caview update

Set

set <Name> update

set myView update

this will manually update all readings from the given CALENDAR Devices

Attribute

datestyle
not set - the default, disables displaying readings bdatetimeiso / edatetimeiso
ISO8601 - enables readings bdatetimeiso / edatetimeiso (start and end time of term ISO8601 formated like 2017-02-27T00:00:00)

disable
0 / not set - internal notify function enabled (default)
1 - disable the internal notify-function of CALVIEW wich is triggered when one of the given CALENDAR devices has updated

filterSummary

filterSummary <filtersouce>:<filtersummary>[,<filtersouce>:<filtersummary>]
not set - displays all terms (default .*:.*)
<filtersouce>:<filtersummary>[,<filtersouce>:<filtersummary>] - CALVIEW will display term where summary matches the <filtersouce>:<filtersummary>, several filters must be separated by comma (,) e.g.: filterSummary Kalender_Abfall:Leichtverpackungen,Kalender_Abfall:Bioabfall filterSummary Kalender_Abfall:Leichtverpackungen,Kalender_Feiertage:.*,Kalender_Christian:.*,Kalender_Geburtstage:.*

fulldaytext [text]
this text will be displayed in _timeshort reading for fullday terms (default ganztägig)

isbirthday
0 / not set - no age calculation (default)
1 - age calculation active. The module calculates the age with year given in description or location (see att yobfield).

maxreadings
defines the number of max term as readings

modes
here the CALENDAR modes can be selected , to be displayed in the view

oldStyledReadings
0 the default style of readings
1 readings look like "2015.06.21-00:00" with value "Start of Summer"

sourcecolor <calendername>:<colorcode>[,<calendername>:<colorcode>]
here you can define the termcolor for terms from your calendars for the calview tabletui widget, several calendar:color pairs must be separated by comma

timeshort
0 time in _timeshort readings formated 00:00:00
1 time in _timeshort readings formated 00:00

yobfield
_description - (default) year of birth will be read from term description
_location - year of birth will be read from term location
_summary - year of birth will be read from summary (uses the first sequence of 4 digits in the string)

weekdayformat
formats the name of the reading weekdayname
- de-long - (default) german, long name like Dienstag
- de-short - german, short name like Di
- en-long - english, long name like Tuesday
- en-short - english, short name like Tue

CM11

Note: this module requires the Device::SerialPort or Win32::SerialPort module.

Define
define <name> CM11 <serial-device>

CM11 is the X10 module to interface X10 devices with the PC.

The current implementation can evaluate incoming data on the powerline of any kind. It can send on, off, dimdown and dimup commands.

The name of the serial-device depends on your distribution. If serial-device is none, then no device will be opened, so you can experiment without hardware attached.
If you experience problems (for verbose 4 you get a lot of "Bad CRC message" in the log), then try to define your device as
define <name> FHZ <serial-device> strangetty

Example:
define x10if CM11 /dev/ttyUSB3



Set
set <name> reopen

Reopens the serial port.

Get
get <name> fwrev

Reads the firmware revision of the CM11 device. Returns error if the serial connection to the device times out. Can be used for error detection.

get <name> time

Reads the internal time of the device which is the total uptime (modulo one year), since fhem sets the time to 0.00:00:00 if the device requests the time to be set after being powered on. Returns error if the serial connection to the device times out. Can be used for error detection.

Attributes
• do_not_notify
• dummy
• model (CM11)

CO20

Module for measuring air quality with usb sticks based on the AppliedSensor iAQ-Engine sensor. Products currently know to work are the VOLTCRAFT CO-20, the Sentinel Haus Institut RaumluftWächter and the VELUX Raumluftfühler.
Probably works with all devices recognized as iAQ Stick (0x03eb:0x2013).

Notes:
• Device::USB hast to be installed on the FHEM host.
  It can be installed with 'cpan install Device::USB'
  or on debian with 'sudo apt-get install libdevice-usb-perl''
• FHEM has to have permissions to open the device. To configure this with udev rules see here: Install_AirSensor_Linux usb-sensors-linux
• Advanced features are only available after setting the attribute advanced.
  Almost all the hidden settings from the Windows application are implemented in this mode.
  Readout of values gathered in standalone mode is not possible yet.

Define
define <name> CO20 [bus:device]

Defines a CO20 device. bus:device hast to be used if more than one sensor is connected to the same host.

Examples:
define CO20 CO20


Readings
• voc
  CO2 equivalents in ppm
• debug
  debug value
• pwm
  pwm value
• r_h
  resistance of heating element in Ohm (?)
• r_s
  resistance of sensor element in Ohm (?)

Get
• update / air_data
  trigger an update
• flag_data
  get internal flag values
• knob_data
  get internal knob values
• stick_data
  get stick information

Set
• KNOB_CO2_VOC_level_warn1
  sets threshold for yellow led
• KNOB_CO2_VOC_level_warn2
  sets threshold for red led
• KNOB_Reg_Set
  internal value, affects voc reading
• KNOB_Reg_P
  internal pid value
• KNOB_Reg_I
  internal pid value
• KNOB_Reg_D
  internal pid value
• KNOB_LogInterval
  log interval for standalone mode
• KNOB_ui16StartupBits
  set to 0 for no automatic calibration on startup
• FLAG_WARMUP
  warmup time left in minutes
• FLAG_BURN_IN
  burn in time left in minutes
• FLAG_RESET_BASELINE
  reset voc baseline value
• FLAG_CALIBRATE_HEATER
  trigger calibration / burn in
• FLAG_LOGGING
  value count from external logging

Attributes
• interval
  the interval in seconds used to read updates [10..]. the default ist 300.
• retries
  number of retries on USB read/write failures [0..20]. the default is 3.
• timeout
  the USB connection timeout in milliseconds [250..10000]. the default is 1000.
• advanced
  1 -> enables most of the advanced settings and readings described here
• disable
  1 -> disconnect and stop polling

COE_Node

Define

define <name> COE_Node <CAN-Node ID>

Defines a CanOverEthernet node. FHEM will automatically create these.
Example:
define COE_Node_coe_2 COE_Node 2
Assigment of readings to incoming values is done in the attribue 'readingsConfig'.

Attributes

• readingsConfigAnalog {index=reading-name}
  This maps received analog values to readings. eg 1=Flowrate_Solar 2=T.Solar_Backflow
• readingsConfigDigital {index=reading-name}
  This maps received digital values to readings. eg 1=Pump_Solar_Power 2=Pump_Water_Power

CUL

The CUL/CUN(O) is a family of RF devices sold by busware.de. With the opensource firmware culfw they are capable to receive and send different 433/868 MHz protocols (FS20/FHT/S300/EM/HMS/MAX!). It is even possible to use these devices as range extenders/routers, see the CUL_RFR module for details. Some protocols (FS20, FHT and KS300) are converted by this module so that the same logical device can be used, irrespective if the radio telegram is received by a CUL or an FHZ device. Other protocols (S300/EM) need their own modules. E.g. S300 devices are processed by the CUL_WS module if the signals are received by the CUL, similarly EMWZ/EMGZ/EMEM is handled by the CUL_EM module. It is possible to attach more than one device in order to get better reception, FHEM will filter out duplicate messages. Note: This module may require the Device::SerialPort or Win32::SerialPort module if you attach the device via USB and the OS sets strange default parameters for serial devices.

Define
define <name> CUL <device> <FHTID>

USB-connected devices (CUL/CUN):

<device> specifies the serial port to communicate with the CUL. The name of the serial-device depends on your distribution, under linux the cdc_acm kernel module is responsible, and usually a /dev/ttyACM0 device will be created. If your distribution does not have a cdc_acm module, you can force usbserial to handle the CUL by the following command:
modprobe usbserial vendor=0x03eb product=0x204b
In this case the device is most probably /dev/ttyUSB0.

You can also specify a baudrate if the device name contains the @ character, e.g.: /dev/ttyACM0@38400

If the baudrate is "directio" (e.g.: /dev/ttyACM0@directio), then the perl module Device::SerialPort is not needed, and FHEM opens the device with simple file io. This might work if the operating system uses sane defaults for the serial parameters, e.g. some Linux distributions and OSX.


Network-connected devices (CUN(O)):

<device> specifies the host:port of the device, e.g. 192.168.0.244:2323

If the device is called none, then no device will be opened, so you can experiment without hardware attached.
The FHTID is a 4 digit hex number, and it is used when the CUL talks to FHT devices or when CUL requests data. Set it to 0000 to avoid answering any FHT80b request by the CUL.

Set
• reopen
  Reopens the connection to the device and reinitializes it.


• raw
  Issue a CUL firmware command. See the this document for details on CUL commands.


• freq / bWidth / rAmpl / sens
  SlowRF mode only.
  Set the CUL frequency / bandwidth / receiver-amplitude / sensitivity
  Use it with care, it may destroy your hardware and it even may be illegal to do so. Note: The parameters used for RFR transmission are not affected.
  
  • freq sets both the reception and transmission frequency. Note: Although the CC1101 can be set to frequencies between 315 and 915 MHz, the antenna interface and the antenna of the CUL is tuned for exactly one frequency. Default is 868.3 MHz (or 433 MHz)
  • bWidth can be set to values between 58 kHz and 812 kHz. Large values are susceptible to interference, but make possible to receive inaccurately calibrated transmitters. It affects tranmission too. Default is 325 kHz.
  • rAmpl is receiver amplification, with values between 24 and 42 dB. Bigger values allow reception of weak signals. Default is 42.
  • sens is the decision boundary between the on and off values, and it is 4, 8, 12 or 16 dB. Smaller values allow reception of less clear signals. Default is 4 dB.


• hmPairForSec
  HomeMatic mode only.
  Set the CUL in Pairing-Mode for the given seconds. Any HM device set into pairing mode in this time will be paired with FHEM.


• hmPairSerial
  HomeMatic mode only.
  Try to pair with the given device. The argument is a 10 character string, usually starting with letters and ending with digits, printed on the backside of the device. It is not necessary to put the given device in learning mode if it is a receiver.


• led
  Set the CUL led off (00), on (01) or blinking (02).


• ITClock
  Set the IT clock for Intertechno V1 protocol. Default 250.


Get
• version
  returns the CUL firmware version


• uptime
  returns the CUL uptime (time since CUL reset)


• raw
  Issues a CUL firmware command, and waits for one line of data returned by the CUL. See the CUL firmware README document for details on CUL commands.


• fhtbuf
  CUL has a message buffer for the FHT. If the buffer is full, then newly issued commands will be dropped, and an "EOB" message is issued to the FHEM log. fhtbuf returns the free memory in this buffer (in hex), an empty buffer in the CUL V2 is 74 bytes, in CUL V3/CUN(O) 200 Bytes. A message occupies 3 + 2x(number of FHT commands) bytes, this is the second reason why sending multiple FHT commands with one set is a good idea. The first reason is, that these FHT commands are sent at once to the FHT.


• ccconf
  Read some CUL radio-chip (cc1101) registers (frequency, bandwidth, etc.), and display them in human readable form.


• cmds
  Depending on the firmware installed, CULs have a different set of possible commands. Please refer to the README of the firmware of your CUL to interpret the response of this command. See also the raw command.


• credit10ms
  One may send for a duration of credit10ms*10 ms before the send limit is reached and a LOVF is generated.


Attributes
• addvaltrigger
  Create triggers for additional device values. Right now these are RSSI and RAWMSG for the CUL family and RAWMSG for the FHZ.


• connectCommand
  raw culfw command sent to the CUL after a (re-)connect of the USB device, and sending the usual initialization needed for the configured rfmode.
• do_not_notify
• dummy
• hmId
  Set the HomeMatic ID of this device. If this attribute is absent, the ID will be F1<FHTID>. Note 1: After setting or changing this attribute you have to relearn all your HomeMatic devices. Note 2: The value must be a 6 digit hex number, and 000000 is not valid. FHEM won't complain if it is not correct, but the communication won't work.


• hmProtocolEvents
  Generate events for HomeMatic protocol messages. These are normally used for debugging, by activating "inform timer" in a telnet session, or looking at the Event Monitor window in the FHEMWEB frontend.
  Example:
  2012-05-17 09:44:22.515 CUL CULHM RCV L:0B N:81 CMD:A258 SRC:...... DST:...... 0000 (TYPE=88,WAKEMEUP,BIDI,RPTEN)


• longids
  Comma separated list of device-types for CUL that should be handled using long IDs. This additional ID allows it to differentiate some weather sensors, if they are sending on the same channel. Therefore a random generated id is added. If you choose to use longids, then you'll have to define a different device after battery change. Default is not to use long IDs.
  Modules which are using this functionality are for e.g. : 14_Hideki, 41_OREGON, 14_CUL_TCM97001, 14_SD_WS07.
  Examples:
  
  # Do not use any long IDs for any devices (this is default):
attr cul longids 0
# Use long IDs for all devices:
attr cul longids 1
# Use longids for SD_WS07 devices.
# Will generate devices names like SD_WS07_TH_3 for channel 3.
attr cul longids SD_WS07


• model (CUL,CUN,etc)


• noRawReadLog
  Do not log RAW read events at verbose 5, as sometimes makes this the log unreadable (Forum #122160).


• sendpool
  If using more than one CUL for covering a large area, sending different events by the different CUL's might disturb each other. This phenomenon is also known as the Palm-Beach-Resort effect. Putting them in a common sendpool will serialize sending the events. E.g. if you have three CUN's, you have to specify following attributes:
  attr CUN1 sendpool CUN1,CUN2,CUN3
attr CUN2 sendpool CUN1,CUN2,CUN3
attr CUN3 sendpool CUN1,CUN2,CUN3
  


• rfmode
  Configure the RF Transceiver of the CUL (the CC1101). Available arguments are:
  • SlowRF
    To communicate with FS20/FHT/HMS/EM1010/S300/Hoermann devices @1 kHz datarate. This is the default.
  • HomeMatic
    To communicate with HomeMatic type of devices @10 kHz datarate.
  • MAX
    To communicate with MAX! type of devices @10 kHz datarate.
  • WMBus_S
  • WMBus_T
  • WMBus_C
    To communicate with Wireless M-Bus devices like water, gas or electrical meters. Wireless M-Bus uses three different communication modes, S-Mode, T-Mode and C-Mode. While in this mode, no reception of other protocols like SlowRF or HomeMatic is possible. See also the WMBUS FHEM Module.


• showtime
• readingFnAttributes

CUL_EM

The CUL_EM module interprets EM type of messages received by the CUL, notably from EMEM, EMWZ or EMGZ devices.

Define
define <name> CUL_EM <code> [corr1 corr2 CostPerUnit BasicFeePerMonth]

<code> is the code which must be set on the EM device. Valid values are 1 through 12. 1-4 denotes EMWZ, 5-8 EMEM and 9-12 EMGZ devices.

corr1 is used to correct the current number, corr2 for the total number.
• for EMWZ devices you should specify the rotation speed (R/kW) of your watt-meter (e.g. 150) for corr1 and 12 times this value for corr2
• for EMEM devices the corr1 value is 0.01, and the corr2 value is 0.001

CostPerUnit and BasicFeePerMonth are used to compute your daily and monthly fees. Your COST will appear in the log, generated once daily (without the basic fee) or month (with the bassic fee included). Your definition should look like e.g.:
define emwz CUL_EM 1 75 900 0.15 12.50

and the Log looks like:
CUM_DAY: 6.849 CUM: 60123.4 COST: 1.02
CUM_MONTH: 212.319 CUM: 60123.4 COST: 44.34

Tip: You can configure your EMWZ device to show in the CUM column of the STATE reading the current reading of your meter. For this purpose: multiply the current reading (from the real device) with the corr1 value (RperKW), and subtract the RAW CUM value from it. Now set the basis reading of your EMWZ device (named emwz) to this value.


Set
N/A

Get
N/A

Attributes
• ignore


• do_not_notify


• showtime


• model (EMEM,EMWZ,EMGZ)


• IODev


• eventMap


• readingFnAttributes


• maxPeak <number>
  Specifies the maximum possible peak value for the EM meter ("TOP:" value in logfile). Peak values greater than this value are considered as EM read errors and are ignored. For example if it's not possible to consume more than 40kW of power set maxPeak to 40 to make the readings of the power meter more robust.


• CounterOffset
  Specifies the difference between true (gas) meter value and value reported by the EMGZ.
  CounterOffset = true Value - Reading "total"
  Example:
  attr Gaszaehler CounterOffset 15427.434
  

CUL_FHTTK

This module handles messages from the FHT80 TF "Fenster-Tür-Kontakt" (Window-Door-Contact) which are normally only acted upon by the FHT80B. With this module, FHT80 TFs are in a limited way (see Wiki for detailed explanation of TF's mode of operation) usable similar to HMS100 TFK. The name of the module was chosen as a) only CUL will spill out the datagrams and b) "TF" designates usually temperature+humidity sensors (no clue, why ELV didn't label this one "TFK" like with FS20 and HMS).

As said before, FHEM can receive FHT80 TF radio (868.35 MHz) messages only through an CUL device, so this must be defined first.

With the latest build on SVN or next official version 1.62 or higher, it is possible to send out FHT80 TF data with a CUL or simular devices. So it can be simulate up to four window sensor with one device (see FHEM Wiki). To setup a window sensor, you have to add and/or change the attribute "model" to virtual. The 6 digit hex number must not equal to FHTID.

Define
define <name> CUL_FHTTK <devicecode>

<devicecode> is a six digit hex number, given to the FHT80 TF during production, i. e. it is not changeable. (Yes, it keeps this code after changing batteries as well.)
Examples:
define TK_TEST CUL_FHTTK 965AB0

Set
Only available, if model is set to virtual.

set <name> <value>

where value is one of:

• Closed
  set window state to Closed


• Open
  set window state to Open


• Pair
  start pairing with FHT80B (activate FHT80B sync mode before) - state after pairing is Closed


• ReSync
  resync virtual sensor with FHT80b after a reset of CUL device. In other words, perform a virtual battery exchange to synchronize the sensor with FHT80b device again. (at the moment, only available with prototype cul fw - see forum 55774)



Special to the "ReSync" of existing FHT80TFs after a CUL firmware reset:
After a reset or restart of a CUL device, the connection between the FHT80B and the virtual FHT80TFs is interrupted. This is equivalent to a battery change. The contacts are still registered at the FHT80B. No new pairing is required. If multiple virtual contacts are used, it is recommended to synchronize them at large intervals!
Calling the CUL_FHTTK_ReSyncAll() function synchronizes all virtual window contacts successively with the FHT80B. The time interval between the individual sensors is 1 hour. This is determined by the 1% rule, since per contact 480 credits are consumed within 64 seconds!

Get
No get implemented yet ...

Attributes
• do_not_notify


• verbose


• model
  Possible values are: FHT80TF, FHT80TF-2, virtual (value, which allow to simulate a window sensor)


• showtime


• IODev


• ignore


• eventMap


• readingFnAttributes

CUL_HM

Support for eQ-3 HomeMatic devices via the CUL or the HMLAN.



Define

define <name> CUL_HM <6-digit-hex-code|8-digit-hex-code>

Correct device definition is the key for HM environment simple maintenance.
Background to define entities:
HM devices has a 3 byte (6 digit hex value) HMid - which is key for addressing. Each device hosts one or more channels. HMid for a channel is the device's HMid plus the channel number (1 byte, 2 digit) in hex. Channels should be defined for all multi-channel devices. Channel entities cannot be defined if the hosting device does not exist
Note: FHEM mappes channel 1 to the device if it is not defined explicitely. Therefore it does not need to be defined for single channel devices.
Note: if a device is deleted all assotiated channels will be removed as well.
An example for a full definition of a 2 channel switch is given below:

define livingRoomSwitch CUL_HM 123456
define LivingroomMainLight CUL_HM 12345601
define LivingroomBackLight CUL_HM 12345602


livingRoomSwitch is the device managing communication. This device is defined prior to channels to be able to setup references.
LivingroomMainLight is channel 01 dealing with status of light, channel peers and channel assotiated register. If not defined channel 01 is covered by the device entity.
LivingRoomBackLight is the second 'channel', channel 02. Its definition is mandatory to operate this function.

Sender specials: HM threats each button of remotes, push buttons and similar as channels. It is possible (not necessary) to define a channel per button. If all channels are defined access to pairing informatin is possible as well as access to channel related register. Furthermore names make the traces better readable.

define may also be invoked by the autocreate module, together with the necessary subType attribute. Usually you issue a hmPairForSec and press the corresponding button on the device to be paired, or issue a hmPairSerial set command if the device is a receiver and you know its serial number. Autocreate will then create a fhem device and set all necessary attributes. Without pairing the device will not accept messages from fhem. fhem may create the device even if the pairing is not successful. Upon a successful pairing you'll see a CommandAccepted entry in the details section of the CUL_HM device.

If you cannot use autocreate, then you have to specify:

• the <6-digit-hex-code>or HMid+ch <8-digit-hex-code>
  It is the unique, hardcoded device-address and cannot be changed (no, you cannot choose it arbitrarily like for FS20 devices). You may detect it by inspecting the fhem log.
• the subType attribute
  which is one of switch dimmer blindActuator remote sensor swi pushButton threeStateSensor motionDetector keyMatic winMatic smokeDetector
Without these attributes fhem won't be able to decode device messages appropriately.

Notes
• If the interface is a CUL device, the rfmode attribute of the corresponding CUL/CUN device must be set to HomeMatic. Note: this mode is BidCos/Homematic only, you will not receive FS20/HMS/EM/S300 messages via this device. Previously defined FS20/HMS etc devices must be assigned to a different input device (CUL/FHZ/etc).
• Currently supported device families: remote, switch, dimmer, blindActuator, motionDetector, smokeDetector, threeStateSensor, THSensor, winmatic. Special devices: KS550, HM-CC-TC and the KFM100.
• Device messages can only be interpreted correctly if the device type is known. fhem will extract the device type from a "pairing request" message, even if it won't respond to it (see hmPairSerial and hmPairForSec to enable pairing).
• The so called "AES-Encryption" is in reality a signing request: if it is enabled, an actor device will only execute a received command, if a correct answer to a request generated by the actor is received. This means:
  • Reaction to commands is noticably slower, as 3 messages are sent instead of one before the action is processed by the actor.
  • Every command and its final ack from the device is sent in clear, so an outside observer will know the status of each device.
  • The firmware implementation is buggy: the "toggle" event is executed before the answer for the signing request is received, at least by some switches (HM-LC-Sw1-Pl and HM-LC-SW2-PB-FM).
  • The HMLAN configurator will answer signing requests by itself, and if it is configured with the 3-byte address of a foreign CCU which is still configurerd with the default password, it is able to answer signing requests correctly.
  • AES-Encryption is useable with a HMLAN or a CUL. When using a CUL, the perl-module Crypt::Rijndael needs to be installed. Due to the issues above I do not recommend using Homematic encryption at all.



Set

Note: devices which are normally send-only (remote/sensor/etc) must be set into pairing/learning mode in order to receive the following commands.

Universal commands (available to most hm devices):
• assignHmKey
  Initiates a key-exchange with the device, exchanging the old AES-key of the device with the key with the highest index defined by the attribute hmKey* in the HMLAN or VCCU. The old key is determined by the reading aesKeyNbr, which specifies the index of the old key when the reading is divided by 2.
• clear <[rssi|readings|register|msgEvents|attack|all]>
  A set of variables or readings can be removed.
  
  readings: all readings are removed. Any new reading will be added usual. Used to eliminate old data.
  register: all captured register-readings in FHEM are removed. NO impact to the device.
  msgEvents: all message event counter are removed. Also commandstack is cleared.
  msgErrors: message-error counter are removed.
  rssi: collected rssi values are cleared.
  attack: information regarding an attack are removed.
  trigger: all trigger readings are removed.
  all: all of the above.
  
• getConfig
  Will read configuration of the physical HM device. Executed on a channel it reads peerings and register information.
  Executed on a device the command will retrieve configuration for ALL associated channels.
• getRegRaw [List0|List1|List2|List3|List4|List5|List6|List7]<peerChannel>
  Read registerset in raw format. Description of the registers is beyond the scope of this documentation.
  Registers are structured in so called lists each containing a set of registers.
  List0: device-level settings e.g. CUL-pairing or dimmer thermal limit settings.
  List1: per channel settings e.g. time to drive the blind up and down.
  List3: per 'link' settings - means per peer-channel. This is a lot of data!. It controlls actions taken upon receive of a trigger from the peer.
  List4: settings for channel (button) of a remote
  
  <PeerChannel> paired HMid+ch, i.e. 4 byte (8 digit) value like '12345601'. It is mendatory for List 3 and 4 and can be left out for List 0 and 1.
  'all' can be used to get data of each paired link of the channel.
  'selfxx' can be used to address data for internal channels (associated with the build-in switches if any). xx is the number of the channel in decimal.
  Note1: execution depends on the entity. If List1 is requested on a device rather then a channel the command will retrieve List1 for all channels assotiated. List3 with peerChannel = all will get all link for all channel if executed on a device.
  Note2: for 'sender' see remote
  Note3: the information retrieval may take a while - especially for devices with a lot of channels and links. It may be necessary to refresh the web interface manually to view the results
  Note4: the direct buttons on a HM device are hidden by default. Nevertheless those are implemented as links as well. To get access to the 'internal links' it is necessary to issue
  'set <name> regSet intKeyVisib visib'
  or
  'set <name> regBulk RegL_0. 2:81'
  Reset it by replacing '81' with '01'
  example:
  
  set mydimmer getRegRaw List1
set mydimmer getRegRaw List3 all

• getSerial
  Read serial number from device and write it to attribute serialNr.
• inhibit [on|off]
  Block / unblock all changes to the actor channel, i.e. actor state is frozen until inhibit is set off again. Inhibit can be executed on any actor channel but obviously not on sensors - would not make any sense.
  Practically it can be used to suspend any notifies as well as peered channel action temporarily without the need to delete them.
  Examples:
  # Block operation
set keymatic inhibit on


• pair
  Pair the device with a known serialNumber (e.g. after a device reset) to FHEM Central unit. FHEM Central is usualy represented by CUL/CUNO, HMLAN,... If paired, devices will report status information to FHEM. If not paired, the device won't respond to some requests, and certain status information is also not reported. Paring is on device level. Channels cannot be paired to central separate from the device. See also getPair and unpair.
  Don't confuse pair (to a central) with peer (channel to channel) with peerChan.
  
• peerBulk <peerch1,peerch2,...> [set|unset]
  peerBulk will add peer channels to the channel. All peers in the list will be added.
  with unset option the peers in the list will be subtracted from the device's peerList.
  peering sets the configuration of this link to its defaults. As peers are not added in pairs default will be as defined for 'single' by HM for this device.
  More suffisticated funktionality is provided by peerChan.
  peerBulk will not delete existing peers, just handle the given peerlist. Other already installed peers will not be touched.
  peerBulk may be used to remove peers using unset option while default ist set.
  Main purpose of this command is to re-store data to a device. It is recommended to restore register configuration utilising regBulk subsequent.
  Example:
  
  set myChannel peerBulk 12345601,
set myChannel peerBulk self01,self02,FB_Btn_04,FB_Btn_03,
set myChannel peerBulk 12345601 unset # remove peer 123456 channel 01

• regBulk <reg List>.<peer> <addr1:data1> <addr2:data2>...
  This command will replace the former regRaw. It allows to set register in raw format. Its main purpose is to restore a complete register list to values secured before.
  Values may be read by getConfig. The resulting readings can be used directly for this command.
  <reg List> is the list data should be written to. Format could be '00', 'RegL_00', '01'...
  <peer> is an optional adder in case the list requires a peer. The peer can be given as channel name or the 4 byte (8 chars) HM channel ID.
  <addr1:data1> is the list of register to be written in hex format.
  Example:
  
  set myChannel regBulk RegL_00. 02:01 0A:17 0B:43 0C:BF 15:FF 00:00
RegL_03.FB_Btn_07 01:00 02:00 03:00 04:32 05:64 06:00 07:FF 08:00 09:FF 0A:01 0B:44 0C:54 0D:93 0E:00 0F:00 11:C8 12:00 13:00 14:00 15:00 16:00 17:00 18:00 19:00 1A:00 1B:00 1C:00 1D:FF 1E:93 1F:00 81:00 82:00 83:00 84:32 85:64 86:00 87:FF 88:00 89:FF 8A:21 8B:44 8C:54 8D:93 8E:00 8F:00 91:C8 92:00 93:00 94:00 95:00 96:00 97:00 98:00 99:00 9A:00 9B:00 9C:00 9D:05 9E:93 9F:00 00:00
set myblind regBulk 01 0B:10
set myblind regBulk 01 0C:00

  myblind will set the max drive time up for a blind actor to 25,6sec
• regSet [prep|exec] <regName> <value> <peerChannel>
  For some major register a readable version is implemented supporting register names <regName> and value conversionsing. Only a subset of register can be supproted.
  Optional parameter [prep|exec] allowes to pack the messages and therefore greatly improve data transmission. Usage is to send the commands with paramenter "prep". The data will be accumulated for send. The last command must have the parameter "exec" in order to transmitt the information.
  <value> is the data in human readable manner that will be written to the register.
  <peerChannel> is required if this register is defined on a per 'peerChan' base. It can be set to '0' other wise.See getRegRaw for full description
  Supported register for a device can be explored using
  
  set regSet ? 0 0
  Condensed register description will be printed using
  
  set regSet <regname> ? 0
• reset
  Factory reset the device. You need to pair it again to use it with fhem.
• sign [on|off]
  Activate or deactivate signing (also called AES encryption, see the note above). Warning: if the device is attached via a CUL, you need to install the perl-module Crypt::Rijndael to be able to switch it (or deactivate signing) from fhem.
• statusRequest
  Update device status. For multichannel devices it should be issued on an per channel base
• unpair
  "Unpair" the device, i.e. make it available to pair with other master devices. See pair for description.
• virtual <number of buttons>
  configures a defined curcuit as virtual remote controll. Then number of button being added is 1 to 255. If the command is issued a second time for the same entity additional buttons will be added.
  Example for usage:
  define vRemote CUL_HM 100000 # the selected HMid must not be in use
set vRemote virtual 20 # define 20 button remote controll
set vRemote_Btn4 peerChan 0 <actorchannel> # peers Button 4 and 5 to the given channel
set vRemote_Btn4 press
set vRemote_Btn5 press long

  see also press
• deviceRename <newName>
  rename the device and all its channels.
• fwUpdate [onlyEnterBootLoader] <filename> [<waitTime>]
  update Fw of the device. User must provide the appropriate file. waitTime can be given optionally. In case the device needs to be set to FW update mode manually this is the time the system will wait.
  "onlyEnterBootLoader" tells the device to enter the boot loader so it can be flashed using the eq3 firmware update tool. Mainly useful for flush-mounted devices in FHEM environments solely using HM-LAN adapters.
• assignIO <IOname> <set|unset>
  Add or remove an IO device to the list of available IO's. Changes attribute IOList accordingly.

subType dependent commands:


• switch
  • on - set level to 100%
  • off - set level to 0%
  • on-for-timer <sec> - set the switch on for the given seconds [0-85825945].
    Note: off-for-timer like FS20 is not supported. It may to be programmed thru channel register.
  • on-till <time> - set the switch on for the given end time.
    
    set <name> on-till 20:32:10

    Currently a max of 24h is supported with endtime.
    
  • pressL <peer> [<repCount>] [<repDelay>]
    simulate a press of the local button or direct connected switch of the actor.
    <peer> allows to stimulate button-press of any peer of the actor. i.e. if the actor is peered to any remote, virtual or io (HMLAN/CUL) press can trigger the action defined.
    <repCount> number of automatic repetitions.
    <repDelay> timer between automatic repetitions.
    Example: set actor pressL FB_Btn01 # trigger long peer FB button 01
set actor pressL FB_chn-8 # trigger long peer FB button 08
set actor pressL self01 # trigger short of internal peer 01
set actor pressL fhem02 # trigger short of FHEM channel 2

  • pressS <peer>
    simulates a short press similar to long press
  • eventL <peer> <condition> [<repCount>] [<repDelay>]
    simulate an event of an peer and stimulates the actor.
    <peer> allows to stimulate button-press of any peer of the actor. i.e. if the actor is peered to any remote, virtual or io (HMLAN/CUL) press can trigger the action defined.
    <codition> the level of the condition
    Example: set actor eventL md 30 # trigger from motion detector with level 30

  • eventS <peer> <condition>
    simulates a short event from a peer of the actor. Typically sensor do not send long events.
  • toggle - toggle the Actor. It will switch from any current level to off or from off to 100%
  
  
• dimmer, blindActuator
  Dimmer may support virtual channels. Those are autocrated if applicable. Usually there are 2 virtual channels in addition to the primary channel. Virtual dimmer channels are inactive by default but can be used in in parallel to the primay channel to control light.
  Virtual channels have default naming SW<channel>_V<no>. e.g. Dimmer_SW1_V1 and Dimmer_SW1_V2.
  Dimmer virtual channels are completely different from FHEM virtual buttons and actors but are part of the HM device. Documentation and capabilities for virtual channels is out of scope.
  
  • 0 - 100 [on-time] [ramp-time]
    set the actuator to the given value (in percent) with a resolution of 0.5.
    Optional for dimmer on-time and ramp time can be choosen, both in seconds with 0.1s granularity.
    On-time is analog "on-for-timer".
    Ramp-time default is 2.5s, 0 means instantanous
    
  • on
  • off
  • press <[short|long]><[on|off]>
  • toggle
  • toggleDir - toggled drive direction between up/stop/down/stop
  • on-for-timer <sec> - Dimmer only!
    
  • on-till <time> - Dimmer only!
    
  • stop - stop motion (blind) or dim ramp
  • old - switch back to old value after a change. Dimmer only.
  • pct <level> [<ontime>] [<ramptime>] - set actor to a desired absolut level.
    Optional ontime and ramptime could be given for dimmer.
    ontime may be time in seconds. It may also be entered as end-time in format hh:mm:ss
  • up [changeValue] [<ontime>] [<ramptime>] dim up one step
  • down [changeValue] [<ontime>] [<ramptime>] dim up one step
    changeValue is optional an gives the level to be changed up or down in percent. Granularity is 0.5%, default is 10%.
    ontime is optional an gives the duration of the level to be kept. '0' means forever and is default.
    ramptime is optional an defines the change speed to reach the new level. It is meaningful only for dimmer.
    
  
  
• remotes, pushButton
  This class of devices does not react on requests unless they are put to learn mode. FHEM obeys this behavior by stacking all requests until learn mode is detected. Manual interaction of the user is necessary to activate learn mode. Whether commands are pending is reported on device level with parameter 'protCmdPend'.
• trgEventS [all|<peer>] <condition>
  Issue eventS on the peer entity. If all is selected each of the peers will be triggered. See also eventS
  <condition>: is the condition being transmitted with the event. E.g. the brightness in case of a motion detector.
• trgEventL [all|<peer>] <condition>
  Issue eventL on the peer entity. If all is selected each of the peers will be triggered. a normal device will not sent event long. See also eventL
  <condition>: is the condition being transmitted with the event. E.g. the brightness in case of a motion detector.
• trgPressS [all|<peer>]
  Issue pressS on the peer entity. If all is selected each of the peers will be triggered. See also pressS
  
• trgPressL [all|<peer>]
  Issue pressL on the peer entity. If all is selected each of the peers will be triggered. See also pressL
  
• peerIODev [IO] <btn_no> [set|unset]
  The command is similar to peerChan. While peerChan is executed on a remote and peers any remote to any actor channel peerIODev is executed on an actor channel and peer this to an channel of an FHEM IO device.
  An IO device according to eQ3 supports up to 50 virtual buttons. Those will be peered/unpeerd to the actor. press can be used to stimulate the related actions as defined in the actor register.
• peerSmart [<peer>]
  The command is similar to peerChan with reduced options for peer and unpeer.
  peerSmart peers in single mode (see peerChan) while funktionallity should be defined by setting register (not much difference to peerChan).
  Smart register setting could be done using hmTemplate.
• peerChan <btn_no> <actChan> [single|dual|reverse][set|unset] [both|actor|remote]
  peerChan will establish a connection between a sender- channel and an actuator-channel called link in HM nomenclatur. Peering must not be confused with pairing.
  Pairing refers to assign a device to the central.
  Peering refers to virtally connect two channels.
  Peering allowes direkt interaction between sender and aktor without the necessity of a CCU
  Peering a sender-channel causes the sender to expect an ack from -each- of its peers after sending a trigger. It will give positive feedback (e.g. LED green) only if all peers acknowledged.
  Peering an aktor-channel will setup a parameter set which defines the action to be taken once a trigger from -this- peer arrived. In other words an aktor will
  - process trigger from peers only
  - define the action to be taken dedicated for each peer's trigger
  An actor channel will setup a default action upon peering - which is actor dependant. It may also depend whether one or 2 buttons are peered in one command. A swich may setup oen button for 'on' and the other for 'off' if 2 button are peered. If only one button is peered the funktion will likely be 'toggle'.
  The funtion can be modified by programming the register (aktor dependant).
  Even though the command is executed on a remote or push-button it will as well take effect on the actuator directly. Both sides' peering is virtually independant and has different impact on sender and receiver side.
  Peering of one actuator-channel to multiple sender-channel as well as one sender-channel to multiple Actuator-channel is possible.
  <actChan> is the actuator-channel to be peered.
  <btn_no> is the sender-channel (button) to be peered. If 'single' is choosen buttons are counted from 1. For 'dual' btn_no is the number of the Button-pair to be used. I.e. '3' in dual is the 3rd button pair correcponding to button 5 and 6 in single mode.
  If the command is executed on a channel the btn_no is ignored. It needs to be set, should be 0
  [single|dual]: this mode impacts the default behavior of the Actuator upon using this button. E.g. a dimmer can be learned to a single button or to a button pair.
  Defaults to dual.
  'dual' (default) Button pairs two buttons to one actuator. With a dimmer this means one button for dim-up and one for dim-down.
  'reverse' identical to dual - but button order is reverse.
  'single' uses only one button of the sender. It is useful for e.g. for simple switch actuator to toggle on/off. Nevertheless also dimmer can be learned to only one button.
  [set|unset]: selects either enter a peering or remove it.
  Defaults to set.
  'set' will setup peering for the channels
  'unset' will remove the peering for the channels
  [actor|remote|both] limits the execution to only actor or only remote. This gives the user the option to redo the peering on the remote channel while the settings in the actor will not be removed.
  Defaults to both.
  Example:
  set myRemote peerChan 2 mySwActChn single set #peer second button to an actuator channel
set myRmtBtn peerChan 0 mySwActChn single set #myRmtBtn is a button of the remote. '0' is not processed here
set myRemote peerChan 2 mySwActChn dual set #peer button 3 and 4
set myRemote peerChan 3 mySwActChn dual unset #remove peering for button 5 and 6
set myRemote peerChan 3 mySwActChn dual unset aktor #remove peering for button 5 and 6 in actor only
set myRemote peerChan 3 mySwActChn dual set remote #peer button 5 and 6 on remote only. Link settings il mySwActChn will be maintained

• virtual
  
  • peerChan see remote
  • press [long|short] [<peer>] [<repCount>] [<repDelay>]
    simulates button press for an actor from a peered sensor. will be sent of type "long".
    • [long|short] defines whether long or short press shall be simulated. Defaults to short
    • [<peer>] define which peer's trigger shall be simulated.Defaults to self(channelNo).
    • [<repCount>] Valid for long press only. How long shall the button be pressed? Number of repetition of the messages is defined. Defaults to 1
    • [<repDelay>] Valid for long press only. defines wait time between the single messages.
  • virtTemp <[off -10..50]> simulates a thermostat. If peered to a device it periodically sends the temperature until "off" is given. See also virtHum
    
  • virtHum <[off -10..50]> simulates the humidity part of a thermostat. If peered to a device it periodically sends the temperature and humidity until both are "off". See also virtTemp
    
  • valvePos <[off 0..100]> stimulates a VD
    
• smokeDetector
  Note: All these commands work right now only if you have more then one smoekDetector, and you peered them to form a group. For issuing the commands you have to use the master of this group, and currently you have to guess which of the detectors is the master.
  smokeDetector can be setup to teams using peerChan. You need to peer all team-members to the master. Don't forget to also peerChan the master itself to the team - i.e. peer it to itself! doing that you have full controll over the team and don't need to guess.
  
  • teamCall - execute a network test to all team members
  • teamCallBat - execute a network test simulate bat low
  • alarmOn - initiate an alarm
  • alarmOff - switch off the alarm
• 4Dis (HM-PB-4DIS-WM|HM-RC-DIS-H-X-EU|ROTO_ZEL-STG-RM-DWT-10)
  • text <btn_no> [on|off] <text1> <text2>
    Set the text on the display of the device. To this purpose issue this set command first (or a number of them), and then choose from the teach-in menu of the 4Dis the "Central" to transmit the data.
    If used on a channel btn_no and on|off must not be given but only pure text.
    \_ will be replaced by blank character.
    Example:
    set 4Dis text 1 on On Lamp
set 4Dis text 1 off Kitchen Off

set 4Dis_chn4 text Kitchen Off

  
  
• Climate-Control (HM-CC-TC)
  • desired-temp <temp>
    Set different temperatures. <temp> must be between 6 and 30 Celsius, and precision is half a degree.
  • tempListSat [prep|exec] HH:MM temp ... 24:00 temp
    
  • tempListSun [prep|exec] HH:MM temp ... 24:00 temp
    
  • tempListMon [prep|exec] HH:MM temp ... 24:00 temp
    
  • tempListTue [prep|exec] HH:MM temp ... 24:00 temp
    
  • tempListThu [prep|exec] HH:MM temp ... 24:00 temp
    
  • tempListWed [prep|exec] HH:MM temp ... 24:00 temp
    
  • tempListFri [prep|exec] HH:MM temp ... 24:00 temp
    Specify a list of temperature intervals. Up to 24 intervals can be specified for each week day, the resolution is 10 Minutes. The last time spec must always be 24:00.
    Example: until 6:00 temperature shall be 19, from then until 23:00 temperature shall be 22.5, thereafter until midnight, 19 degrees celsius is desired.
    set th tempListSat 06:00 19 23:00 22.5 24:00 19

  
  
  • tempListTmpl =>"[verify|restore] [[ <file> :]templateName] ...
    The tempList for one or more devices can be stored in a file. User can compare the tempList in the file with the data read from the device.
    Restore will write the tempList to the device.
    Default opeartion is verify.
    Default file is tempList.cfg.
    Default templateName is the name of the actor
    Default for file and templateName can be set with attribut tempListTmpl
    Example for templist file. room1 and room2 are the names of the template:
    entities:room1 tempListSat>08:00 16.0 15:00 18.0 21:30 19.0 24:00 14.0 tempListSun>08:00 16.0 15:00 18.0 21:30 19.0 24:00 14.0 tempListMon>07:00 16.0 16:00 18.0 21:00 19.0 24:00 14.0 tempListTue>07:00 16.0 13:00 16.0 16:00 18.0 21:00 19.0 24:00 15.0 tempListWed>07:00 16.0 16:00 18.0 21:00 19.0 24:00 14.0 tempListThu>07:00 16.0 16:00 18.0 21:00 19.0 24:00 14.0 tempListFri>07:00 16.0 13:00 16.0 16:00 18.0 21:00 19.0 24:00 14.0 entities:room2 tempListSat>08:00 14.0 15:00 18.0 21:30 19.0 24:00 14.0 tempListSun>08:00 14.0 15:00 18.0 21:30 19.0 24:00 14.0 tempListMon>07:00 14.0 16:00 18.0 21:00 19.0 24:00 14.0 tempListTue>07:00 14.0 13:00 16.0 16:00 18.0 21:00 19.0 24:00 15.0 tempListWed>07:00 14.0 16:00 18.0 21:00 19.0 24:00 14.0 tempListThu>07:00 14.0 16:00 18.0 21:00 19.0 24:00 14.0 tempListFri>07:00 14.0 13:00 16.0 16:00 18.0 21:00 19.0 24:00 14.0 Specials:
    
  • none: template will be ignored
  • defaultWeekplan: as default each day is set to 18.0 degree. useful if peered to a TC controller. Implicitely teh weekplan of TC will be used.
  • tempTmplSet =>"[[ <file> :]templateName]
    Set the attribut and apply the change to the device
  • tplDel =>" <template>
    Delete template entry for this entity
  • tplSet_<peer> =>" <template>
    Set a template for a peer of the entity. Possible parameter will be set to the current register value of the device - i.e. no change to the register. Parameter may be changed after assigning the template by using the tplPara command.
    The command is avalilable if HMinfo is defined and a tamplate fitting the combination is available. Note that the register of the device need to be available (see getConfig command).
    In case of dedicated template for long and short trigger separat commands will be available.
  • tplParaxxx_<peer>_<tpl>_<param> =>" <template>
    A parameter of an assigned template can be modified. A command s available for each parameter of each assigned template.
  • partyMode <HH:MM><durationDays>
    set control mode to party and device ending time. Add the time it ends and the number of days it shall last. If it shall end next day '1' must be entered
    
  • sysTime
    set time in climate channel to system time
  
  
• Climate-Control (HM-CC-RT-DN|HM-CC-RT-DN-BOM)
  • controlMode <auto|boost|day|night>
    
  • controlManu <temp>
    
  • controlParty <temp><startDate><startTime><endDate><endTime>
    set control mode to party, define temp and timeframe.
    example:
    set controlParty 15 03-8-13 20:30 5-8-13 11:30
  • sysTime
    set time in climate channel to system time
  • desired-temp <temp>
    Set different temperatures. <temp> must be between 6 and 30 Celsius, and precision is half a degree.
  • tempListSat [prep|exec] HH:MM temp ... 24:00 temp
    
  • tempListSun [prep|exec] HH:MM temp ... 24:00 temp
    
  • tempListMon [prep|exec] HH:MM temp ... 24:00 temp
    
  • tempListTue [prep|exec] HH:MM temp ... 24:00 temp
    
  • tempListThu [prep|exec] HH:MM temp ... 24:00 temp
    
  • tempListWed [prep|exec] HH:MM temp ... 24:00 temp
    
  • tempListFri [prep|exec] HH:MM temp ... 24:00 temp
    Specify a list of temperature intervals. Up to 24 intervals can be specified for each week day, the resolution is 10 Minutes. The last time spec must always be 24:00.
    Optional parameter [prep|exec] allowes to pack the messages and therefore greatly improve data transmission. This is especially helpful if device is operated in wakeup mode. Usage is to send the commands with paramenter "prep". The data will be accumulated for send. The last command must have the parameter "exec" in order to transmitt the information.
    Example: until 6:00 temperature shall be 19, from then until 23:00 temperature shall be 22.5, thereafter until midnight, 19 degrees celsius is desired.
    set th tempListSat 06:00 19 23:00 22.5 24:00 19

set th tempListSat prep 06:00 19 23:00 22.5 24:00 19
set th tempListSun prep 06:00 19 23:00 22.5 24:00 19
set th tempListMon prep 06:00 19 23:00 22.5 24:00 19
set th tempListTue exec 06:00 19 23:00 22.5 24:00 19

  
  
• OutputUnit (HM-OU-LED16)
  • led [off|red|green|yellow]
    switches the LED of the channel to the color. If the command is executed on a device it will set all LEDs to the specified color.
    For Expert all LEDs can be set individual by providing a 8-digit hex number to the device.
    
  • ilum <brightness><duration>
    <brightness> [0-15] of backlight.
    <duration> [0-127] in sec. 0 is permanent 'on'.
    
  
  
• OutputUnit (HM-OU-CFM-PL)
  • led <color>[,<color>..] [<repeat>..]
    Possible colors are [redL|greenL|yellowL|redS|greenS|yellowS|pause]. A sequence of colors can be given separating the color entries by ','. White spaces must not be used in the list. 'S' indicates short and 'L' long ilumination.
    repeat defines how often the sequence shall be executed. Defaults to 1.
    
  • playTone <MP3No>[,<MP3No>..] [<repeat>] [<volume>]
    Play a series of tones. List is to be entered separated by ','. White spaces must not be used in the list.
    replay can be entered to repeat the last sound played once more.
    repeat defines how often the sequence shall be played. Defaults to 1.
    volume is defined between 0 and 10. 0 stops any sound currently playing. Defaults to 10 (100%).
    Example:
    # "hello" in display, symb bulb on, backlight, beep
set cfm_Mp3 playTone 3 # MP3 title 3 once
set cfm_Mp3 playTone 3 3 # MP3 title 3 3 times
set cfm_Mp3 playTone 3,6,8,3,4 # MP3 title list 3,6,8,3,4 once
set cfm_Mp3 playTone 3,6,8,3,4 255# MP3 title list 3,6,8,3,4 255 times
set cfm_Mp3 playTone replay # repeat last sequence

set cfm_Led led redL 4 # led red blink 3 times long
set cfm_Led led redS,redS,redS,redL,redL,redL,redS,redS,redS 255 # SOS 255 times

  
  
• HM-RC-19xxx
  • alarm <count>
    issue an alarm message to the remote
    
  • service <count>
    issue an service message to the remote
    
  • symbol <symbol> [set|unset]
    activate a symbol as available on the remote.
    
  • beep [off|1|2|3]
    activate tone
    
  • backlight [off|on|slow|fast]
    activate backlight
    
  • display <text> comma unit tone backlight <symbol(s)>
    control display of the remote
    <text> : up to 5 chars
    comma : 'comma' activates the comma, 'no' leaves it off
    [unit] : set the unit symbols. [off|Proz|Watt|x3|C|x5|x6|x7|F|x9|x10|x11|x12|x13|x14|x15]. Currently the x3..x15 display is not tested.
    tone : activate one of the 3 tones [off|1|2|3]
    backlight: activate backlight flash mode [off|on|slow|fast]
    <symbol(s)> activate symbol display. Multople symbols can be acticated at the same time, concatinating them comma separated. Don't use spaces here. Possiblesymbols are [bulb|switch|window|door|blind|scene|phone|bell|clock|arrowUp|arrowDown]
    
    Example:
    # "hello" in display, symb bulb on, backlight, beep
set FB1 display Hello no off 1 on bulb
# "1234,5" in display with unit 'W'. Symbols scene,phone,bell and # clock are active. Backlight flashing fast, Beep is second tone
set FB1 display 12345 comma Watt 2 fast scene,phone,bell,clock
  
  
• HM-DIS-WM55
  • displayWM help
    displayWM [long|short] <text1> <color1> <icon1> ... <text6> <color6> <icon6>
    displayWM [long|short] <lineX> <text> <color> <icon>
    up to 6 lines can be addressed.
    lineX line number that shall be changed. If this is set the 3 parameter of a line can be adapted.
    textNo is the text to be dispalyed in line No. The text is assotiated with the text defined for the buttons. txt<BtnNo>_<lineNo> references channel 1 to 10 and their lines 1 or 2. Alternaly a free text of up to 12 char can be used
    color is one white, red, orange, yellow, green, blue
    icon is one off, on, open, closed, error, ok, noIcon
    Example:
    set disp01 displayWM short txt02_2 green noIcon txt10_1 red error txt05_2 yellow closed txt02_2 orange open
set disp01 displayWM long line3 txt02_2 green noIcon
set disp01 displayWM long line2 nc yellow noIcon
set disp01 displayWM long line6 txt02_2
set disp01 displayWM long line1 nc nc closed

  
  
• HM-DIS-EP-WM55
  • displayEP help
    displayEP <text1,icon1:text2,icon2:text3,icon3> <sound> <repetition> <pause> <signal>
    up to 3 lines can be addressed.
    If help is given a help on the command is given. Options for all parameter will be given.
    textx 12 char text for the given line. If empty the value as per reading will be transmittet - i.e. typically no change. text0-9 will display predefined text of channels 4 to 8. 0xHH allows to display a single char in hex format.
    iconx Icon for this line. If empty the value as per reading will be transmittet - i.e. typically no change.
    sound sound to be played
    repetition 0..15
    pause 1..160
    signal signal color to be displayed
    
    Note: param reWriteDisplayxx
    
  • upon button press the device will overwrite the 3 middles lines. When set
    attr chan param reWriteDisplayxx
    the 3 lines will be rewritten to the latest value after xx seconds. xx is between 01 and 99
    
  
  
• keyMatic
  
  
  The Keymatic uses the AES signed communication. Control of the Keymatic is possible with the HM-LAN adapter and the CUL. To control the KeyMatic with a CUL, the perl-module Crypt::Rijndael needs to be installed.
  
  
  • lock
    The lock bolt moves to the locking position
    
  • unlock [sec]
    The lock bolt moves to the unlocking position.
    [sec]: Sets the delay in seconds after the lock automatically locked again.
    0 - 65535 seconds
  • open [sec]
    Unlocked the door so that the door can be opened.
    [sec]: Sets the delay in seconds after the lock automatically locked again.
    0 - 65535 seconds
• winMatic
  
  
  winMatic provides 2 channels, one for the window control and a second for the accumulator.
  
  
  • level <level> <relockDelay> <speed>
    set the level.
    <level>: range is 0 to 100%
    <relockDelay>: range 0 to 65535 sec. 'ignore' can be used to igneore the value alternaly
    <speed>: range is 0 to 100%
    
  • stop
    stop movement
    
• CCU_FHEM
  
  • defIgnUnknown
    define unknown devices which are present in the readings. set attr ignore and remove the readingfrom the list.
    
• HM-SYS-SRP-PL
  
  setup the repeater's entries. Up to 36entries can be applied.
  • setRepeat <entry> <sender> <receiver> <broadcast>
    <entry> [1..36] entry number in repeater table. The repeater can handle up to 36 entries.
    <sender> name or HMID of the sender or source which shall be repeated
    <receiver> name or HMID of the receiver or destination which shall be repeated
    <broadcast> [yes|no] determines whether broadcast from this ID shall be repeated
    
    short application:
    setRepeat setAll 0 0 0
will rewrite the complete list to the deivce. Data will be taken from attribut repPeers.
    attribut repPeers is formated:
    src1:dst1:[y/n],src2:dst2:[y/n],src2:dst2:[y/n],...
    
    Reading repPeer is formated:
    
    Number src dst broadcast verify
    number: entry sequence number
    src: message source device - read from repeater
    dst: message destination device - assembled from attributes
    broadcast: shall broadcast be repeated for this source - read from repeater
    verify: do attributes and readings match?
    

Debugging:
• raw <data> ...
  Only needed for experimentation. send a "raw" command. The length will be computed automatically, and the message counter will be incremented if the first two charcters are ++. Example (enable AES):

               set hm1 raw ++A001F100001234560105000000001




Get



• configSave <filename>
  Saves the configuration of an entity into a file. Data is stored in a format to be executed from fhem command prompt.
  The file is located in the fhem home directory aside of fhem.cfg. Data will be stored cumulative - i.e. new data will be appended to the file. It is up to the user to avoid duplicate storage of the same entity.
  Target of the data is ONLY the HM-device information which is located IN the HM device. Explicitely this is the peer-list and the register. With the register also the peering is included.
  The file is readable and editable by the user. Additionaly timestamps are stored to help user to validate.
  Restrictions:
  Even though all data of the entity will be secured to the file FHEM stores the data that is avalilable to FHEM at time of save!. It is up to the user to read the data from the HM-hardware prior to execution. See recommended flow below.
  This command will not store any FHEM attributes o device definitions. This continues to remain in fhem.cfg.
  Furthermore the secured data will not automatically be reloaded to the HM-hardware. It is up to the user to perform a restore.
  
  As with other commands also 'configSave' is best executed on a device rather then on a channel. If executed on a device also the assotiated channel data will be secured.
  
  Recommended work-order for device 'HMdev':
set HMdev clear msgEvents # clear old events to better check flow
set HMdev getConfig # read device & channel inforamtion
# wait until operation is complete
# protState should be CMDs_done
# there shall be no warnings amongst prot... variables
get configSave myActorFile

• param <paramName>
  returns the content of the relevant parameter for the entity.
  Note: if this command is executed on a channel and 'model' is requested the content hosting device's 'model' will be returned.
• reg <addr> <list> <peerID>
  returns the value of a register. The data is taken from the storage in FHEM and not read directly outof the device. If register content is not present please use getConfig, getReg in advance.
  <addr> address in hex of the register. Registername can be used alternaly if decoded by FHEM. "all" will return all decoded register for this entity in one list.
  <list> list from which the register is taken. If rgistername is used list is ignored and can be set to 0.
  <peerID> identifies the registerbank in case of list3 and list4. It an be set to dummy if not used.
  
• regVal <addr> <list> <peerID>
  returns the value of a register. It does the same as reg but strips off units
  
• regList
  returns a list of register that are decoded by FHEM for this device.
  Note that there could be more register implemented for a device.
  
• saveConfig <file>
  stores peers and register to the file.
  Stored will be the data as available in fhem. It is necessary to read the information from the device prior to the save.
  The command supports device-level action. I.e. if executed on a device also all related channel entities will be stored implicitely.
  Storage to the file will be cumulative. If an entity is stored multiple times to the same file data will be appended. User can identify time of storage in the file if necessary.
  Content of the file can be used to restore device configuration. It will restore all peers and all register to the entity.
  Constrains/Restrictions:
  prior to rewrite data to an entity it is necessary to pair the device with FHEM.
  restore will not delete any peered channels, it will just add peer channels.
  
• list (normal|hidden);
  issue list command for the fiven entity normal or including the hidden parameter
• listDevice
  
  • when used with ccu it returns a list of Devices using the ccu service to assign an IO.
    
  • when used with ActionDetector user will get a comma separated list of entities being assigned to the action detector
    get ActionDetector listDevice # returns all assigned entities
    get ActionDetector listDevice notActive# returns entities which habe not status alive
    get ActionDetector listDevice alive # returns entities with status alive
    get ActionDetector listDevice unknown # returns entities with status unknown
    get ActionDetector listDevice dead # returns entities with status dead
    
• info
  
  • provides information about entities using ActionDetector
    



Attributes

• eventMap
• do_not_notify
• ignore
• dummy
• showtime
• readingFnAttributes
• actAutoTry
  actAutoTry 0_off,1_on
  setting this option enables Action Detector to send a statusrequest in case of a device is going to be marked dead. The attribut may be useful in case a device is being checked that does not send messages regularely - e.g. an ordinary switch.
• actCycle <[hhh:mm]|off>
  Supports 'alive' or better 'not alive' detection for devices. [hhh:mm] is the maximum silent time for the device. Upon no message received in this period an event will be raised "<device> is dead". If the device sends again another notification is posted "<device> is alive".
  This actiondetect will be autocreated for each device with build in cyclic status report.
  Controlling entity is a pseudo device "ActionDetector" with HMId "000000".
  Due to performance considerations the report latency is set to 600sec (10min). It can be controlled by the attribute "actCycle" of "ActionDetector".
  Once entered to the supervision the HM device has 2 attributes:
  
  actStatus: activity status of the device
  actCycle: detection period [hhh:mm]
  
  The overall function can be viewed checking out the "ActionDetector" entity. The status of all entities is present in the READING section.
  Note: This function can be enabled for devices with non-cyclic messages as well. It is up to the user to enter a reasonable cycletime.
• actStatus
  readonly
  This attribut is set by ActionDetector. It cannot be set manually
• aesCommReq
  if set IO is forced to request AES signature before sending ACK to the device.
  Defautls to 0
  
• aesKey
  specifies which aes key is to be used if aesCommReq is active
  
• autoReadReg
  '0' autoReadReg will be ignored.
  '1' will execute a getConfig for the device automatically after each reboot of FHEM.
  '2' like '1' plus execute after power_on.
  '3' includes '2' plus updates on writes to the device
  '4' includes '3' plus tries to request status if it seems to be missing
  '5' checks reglist and peerlist. If reading seems incomplete getConfig will be scheduled
  '8_stateOnly' will only update status information but not configuration data like register and peer
  Execution will be delayed in order to prevent congestion at startup. Therefore the update of the readings and the display will be delayed depending on the size of the database.
  Recommendations and constrains upon usage:
  
  usage on devices which only react to 'config' mode is not recommended since executen will not start until config is triggered by the user
  usage on devices which support wakeup-mode is usefull. But consider that execution is delayed until the device "wakes up".
  
• burstAccess
  can be set for the device entity if the model allowes conditionalBurst. The attribut will switch off burst operations (0_off) which causes less message load on HMLAN and therefore reduces the chance of HMLAN overload.
  Setting it on (1_auto) allowes shorter reaction time of the device. User does not need to wait for the device to wake up.
  Note that also the register burstRx needs to be set in the device.
• expert <option1[[,option2],...]>
  This attribut controls the visibility of the register readings. This attibute controls the presentation of device parameter in readings.
  Options are:
  
  defReg : default register
  allReg : all register
  rawReg : raw reading
  templ : template assiciation
  none : no register
  
  If expert is applied to the device it is used for assotiated channels if not overwritten by it.
  
• communication status copied to channel reading
  on: device communication status not visible in channel entities
  off: device communication status commState is visiblein channel entities
  
• firmware <FWversion>
  Firmware version of the device. Should not be overwritten.
• hmKey <key>
  AES key to be used
• hmProtocolEvents
  parses and logs the device messages. This is performance consuming and may disturb the timing. Use with care.
  Options:
  
  0_off : no parsing - default
  1_dump : log all messages
  2_dumpFull : log with extended parsing
  3_dumpTrigger : log full and include trigger events
  
• readOnly
  1: restricts commands to read od observ only.
• readingOnDead
  defines how readings shall be treated upon device is marked 'dead'.
  The attribute is applicable for devices only. It will modify the readings upon entering dead of the device. Upon leaving state 'dead' the selected readings will be set to 'notDead'. It is expected that useful values will be filled by the normally operating device.
  Options are:
  noChange: no readings will be changed upon entering 'dead' except Actvity. Other valvues will be ignored
  state: set the entites 'state' readings to dead
  periodValues: set periodic numeric readings of the device to '0'
  periodString: set periodic string readings of the device to 'dead'
  channels: if set the device's channels will be effected identical to the device entity
  custom readings: customer may add a list of other readings that will be set to 'dead'
  
  Example:
  
  attr myDevice readingOnDead noChange,state # no dead marking - noChange has priority
attr myDevice readingOnDead state,periodValues,channels # Recommended. reading state of the device and all its channels will be set to 'dead'. Periodic numerical readings will be set to 0 which influences graphics
attr myDevice readingOnDead state,channels # reading state of the device and all its channels will be set to 'dead'.
attr myDevice readingOnDead periodValues,channels # numeric periodic readings of device and channels will be set to '0'
attr myDevice readingOnDead state,deviceMsg,CommandAccepted # upon entering dead state,deviceMsg and CommandAccepted of the device will be set to 'dead' if available.

• rssiLog
  can be given to devices, denied for channels. If switched '1' each RSSI entry will be written to a reading. User may use this to log and generate a graph of RSSI level.
  Due to amount of readings and events it is NOT RECOMMENDED to switch it on by default.
• IOgrp
  can be given to devices and shall point to a virtual CCU. Setting the attribut will remove attr IODev since it mutual exclusiv. As a consequence the VCCU will take care of the assignment to the best suitable IO. It is necessary that a virtual VCCU is defined and all relevant IO devices are assigned to it. Upon sending the CCU will check which IO is operational and has the best RSSI performance for this device.
  Optional a prefered IO - perfIO can be given. In case this IO is operational it will be selected regardless of rssi values.
  If none is detected in the VCCU's IOList the mechanism is stopped.
  Example:
  
  attr myDevice1 IOgrp vccu
attr myDevice2 IOgrp vccu:prefIO
attr myDevice2 IOgrp vccu:prefIO1,prefIO2,prefIO3
attr myDevice2 IOgrp vccu:prefIO1,prefIO2,none

• levelRange <min,max>
  It defines the usable dimm-range. Can be used for e.g. LED light starting at 10% and reach maxbrightness at 40%. levelRange will normalize the level to this range. I.e. set to 100% will physically set the dimmer to 40%, 1% will set to 10% physically. 0% still switches physially off.
  Applies to all level commands as on, up, down, toggle and pct. off and level 0 still sets to physically 0%.
  LevelRage does not impact register controlled level and direct peering.
  The attribut needs to be set for each virtual channel of a device.
  Example:
  
  attr myChannel levelRange 10,80

• levelMap <=[:=[:...]]>
  the level value valX will be replaced by keyX. Multiple values can be mapped.
• modelForce
  modelForce overwrites the model attribute. Doing that it converts the device and its channel to the new model.
  Reason for this attribute is an eQ3 bug as some devices are delivered with wrong Module IDs.
  ATTENTION: changing model id automatically starts reconfiguration of the device and its channels! channels may be deleted or incarnated
  
• model
  showes model. This is read only.
• subType
  showes models subType. This is read only.
• serialNr
  device serial number. Should not be set manually
• msgRepeat
  defines number of repetitions if a device doesn't answer in time.
  Devices which donly support config mode no repeat ist allowed.
  For devices with wakeup mode the device will wait for next wakeup. Lonng delay might be considered in this case.
  Repeat for burst devices will impact HMLAN transmission capacity.
• peerIDs
  will be filled automatically by getConfig and shows the direct peerings of the channel. Should not be changed by user.
• rawToReadable
  Used to convert raw KFM100 values to readable data, based on measured values. E.g. fill slowly your container, while monitoring the values reported with inform. You'll see:
  10 (at 0%)
  50 (at 20%)
  79 (at 40%)
  270 (at 100%)
  
  Apply these values with: "attr KFM100 rawToReadable 10:0 50:20 79:40 270:100". fhem will do a linear interpolation for values between the bounderies.
• tempListTmpl
  Sets the default template for a heating controller. If not given the detault template is taken from file tempList.cfg using the enitity name as template name (e.g. ./tempLict.cfg:RT1_Clima
  To avoid template usage set this attribut to 'none' or '0'.
  Format is <file>:<templatename>. lt
• unit
  set the reported unit by the KFM100 if rawToReadable is active. E.g.
  attr KFM100 unit Liter
• cyclicMsgOffset
  when calculating the timestamp for sending the next cyclic message (e.g. weather or valve data) then the value of this attribute
  in milliseconds is added to the result. So adjusting this might fix problems for example when weather messages of virtual devices are not received reliably


• param defines model specific behavior or functions. Available parameters are (model dependand):
  • HM-SEN-RD-O
    offAtPon heat channel only: force heating off after powerOn
    onAtRain heat channel only: force heating on while status changes to 'rain' and off when it changes to 'dry'
    
  • virtuals
    noOnOff virtual entity will not toggle state when trigger is received. If this parameter is not given the entity will toggle its state between On and Off with each trigger
    msgReduce:<No> if channel is used for valvePos it skips every No message in order to reduce transmit load. Numbers from 0 (no skip) up to 9 can be given. VD will lose connection with more then 5 skips
    
  • blind
    levelInverse while HM considers 100% as open and 0% as closed this may not be intuitive to all user. Ny default 100% is open and will be dislayed as 'on'. Setting this param the display will be inverted - 0% will be open and 100% is closed.
    NOTE: This will apply to readings and set commands. It does not apply to any register.
    ponRestoreSmart upon powerup of the device the Blind will drive to expected closest endposition followed by driving to the pre-PON level
    ponRestoreForce upon powerup of the device the Blind will drive to level 0, then to level 100 followed by driving to the pre-PON level
    
  • switch
    levelInverse siehe blind above.
  • sensRain
    siren
    powerMeter
    switch
    dimmer
    rgb
    showTimed if timmed is running -till will be added to state. This results eventually in state on-till which allowes better icon handling.
    



Generated events:

• general
  recentStateType:[ack|info] # cannot be used ti trigger notifies
  
  • ack indicates that some statusinfo is derived from an acknowledge
  • info indicates an autonomous message from the device
  • sabotageAttackId
    Alarming configuration access to the device from a unknown source
    
  • sabotageAttack
    Alarming configuration access to the device that was not issued by our system
    
  • trigDst_<name>: noConfig
    A sensor triggered a Device which is not present in its peerList. Obviously the peerList is not up to date
    
• HM-CC-TC,ROTO_ZEL-STG-RM-FWT
  T: $t H: $h
  battery:[low|ok]
  measured-temp $t
  humidity $h
  actuator $vp %
  desired-temp $dTemp
  desired-temp-manu $dTemp #temperature if switchen to manual mode
  desired-temp-cent $dTemp #temperature if switchen to central mode
  windowopen-temp-%d %.1f (sensor:%s)
  tempList$wd hh:mm $t hh:mm $t ...
  displayMode temp-[hum|only]
  displayTemp [setpoint|actual]
  displayTempUnit [fahrenheit|celsius]
  controlMode [auto|manual|central|party]
  tempValveMode [Auto|Closed|Open|unknown]
  param-change offset=$o1, value=$v1
  ValveErrorPosition_for_$dname $vep %
  ValveOffset_for_$dname : $of %
  ValveErrorPosition $vep %
  ValveOffset $of %
  time-request
  trig_<src> <value> #channel was triggered by <src> channel. This event relies on complete reading of channels configuration, otherwise Data can be incomplete or incorrect.
  trigLast <channel> #last receiced trigger
  
• HM-CC-RT-DN and HM-CC-RT-DN-BOM
  state:T: $actTemp desired: $setTemp valve: $vp %
  motorErr: [ok|ValveTight|adjustRangeTooLarge|adjustRangeTooSmall|communicationERR|unknown|lowBat|ValveErrorPosition] measured-temp $actTemp
  desired-temp $setTemp
  ValvePosition $vp %
  mode [auto|manual|party|boost]
  battery [low|ok]
  batteryLevel $bat V
  measured-temp $actTemp
  desired-temp $setTemp
  actuator $vp %
  time-request
  trig_<src> <value> #channel was triggered by <src> channel.
• HM-CC-VD,ROTO_ZEL-STG-RM-FSA
  $vp %
  battery:[critical|low|ok]
  motorErr:[ok|blocked|loose|adjusting range too small|opening|closing|stop]
  ValvePosition:$vp %
  ValveErrorPosition:$vep %
  ValveOffset:$of %
  ValveDesired:$vp % # set by TC
  operState:[errorTargetNotMet|onTarget|adjusting|changed] # operational condition
  operStateErrCnt:$cnt # number of failed settings
  
• HM-CC-SCD
  [normal|added|addedStrong]
  battery [low|ok]
  
• HM-SEC-SFA-SM
  powerError [on|off]
  sabotageError [on|off]
  battery: [critical|low|ok]
  
• HM-LC-BL1-PB-FM
  motor: [opening|closing]
  
• HM-LC-SW1-BA-PCB
  battery: [low|ok]
  
• HM-OU-LED16
  color $value # hex - for device only
  $value # hex - for device only
  color [off|red|green|orange] # for channel
  [off|red|green|orange] # for channel
  
• HM-OU-CFM-PL
  [on|off|$val]
  
• HM-SEN-WA-OD
  $level%
  level $level%
  
• KFM100
  $v
  $cv,$unit
  rawValue:$v
  Sequence:$seq
  content:$cv,$unit
  
• KS550/HM-WDS100-C6-O
  T: $t H: $h W: $w R: $r IR: $ir WD: $wd WDR: $wdr S: $s B: $b
  temperature $t
  humidity $h
  windSpeed $w
  windDirection $wd
  windDirRange $wdr
  rain $r
  isRaining $ir
  sunshine $s
  brightness $b
  unknown $p
  
• HM-SEN-RD-O
  lastRain: timestamp # no trigger generated. Begin of previous Rain - timestamp of the reading is the end of rain.
  
• THSensor and HM-WDC7000
  T: $t H: $h AP: $ap
  temperature $t
  humidity $h
  airpress $ap #HM-WDC7000 only
  
• dimmer
  overload [on|off]
  overheat [on|off]
  reduced [on|off]
  dim: [up|down|stop]
  
• motionDetector
  brightness:$b
  alive
  motion on (to $dest)
  motionCount $cnt _next:$nextTr"-"[0x0|0x1|0x2|0x3|15|30|60|120|240|0x9|0xa|0xb|0xc|0xd|0xe|0xf]
  cover [closed|open] # not for HM-SEC-MDIR
  sabotageError [on|off] # only HM-SEC-MDIR
  battery [low|ok]
  devState_raw.$d1 $d2
  
• remote/pushButton/outputUnit
  
  (to $dest) is added if the button is peered and does not send to broadcast
  Release is provided for peered channels only
  Btn$x onShort
  Btn$x offShort
  Btn$x onLong $counter
  Btn$x offLong $counter
  Btn$x onLongRelease $counter
  Btn$x offLongRelease $counter
  Btn$x onShort (to $dest)
  Btn$x offShort (to $dest)
  Btn$x onLong $counter (to $dest)
  Btn$x offLong $counter (to $dest)
  Btn$x onLongRelease $counter (to $dest)
  Btn$x offLongRelease $counter (to $dest)
  
• remote/pushButton
  battery [low|ok]
  trigger [Long|Short]_$no trigger event from channel
  
• swi
  Btn$x Short
  Btn$x Short (to $dest)
  battery: [low|ok]
  
• switch/dimmer/blindActuator
  $val
  powerOn [on|off|$val]
  [unknown|motor|dim] [up|down|stop]:$val
  timedOn [running|off]
  # on is temporary - e.g. started with on-for-timer
• sensRain
  $val
  powerOn
  level <val≥
  timedOn [running|off]
  # on is temporary - e.g. started with on-for-timer trigger [Long|Short]_$no trigger event from channel
  
• smokeDetector
  [off|smoke-Alarm|alive] # for team leader
  [off|smoke-forward|smoke-alarm] # for team members
  [normal|added|addedStrong] #HM-CC-SCD
  SDteam [add|remove]_$dname
  battery [low|ok]
  smoke_detect [none|<src>]
  teamCall:from $src
  
• threeStateSensor
  [open|tilted|closed]
  [wet|damp|dry] #HM-SEC-WDS only
  cover [open|closed] #HM-SEC-WDS and HM-SEC-RHS
  alive yes
  battery [low|ok]
  contact [open|tilted|closed]
  contact [wet|damp|dry] #HM-SEC-WDS only
  sabotageError [on|off] #HM-SEC-SC only
  
• winMatic
  [locked|$value]
  motorErr [ok|TurnError|TiltError]
  direction [no|up|down|undefined]
  charge [trickleCharge|charge|dischange|unknown]
  airing [inactiv|$air]
  course [tilt|close]
  airing [inactiv|$value]
  contact tesed
  
• keyMatic
  unknown:40
  battery [low|ok]
  uncertain [yes|no]
  error [unknown|motor aborted|clutch failure|none']
  lock [unlocked|locked]
  [unlocked|locked|uncertain]
  

Internals

• aesCommToDev
  gives information about success or fail of AES communication between IO-device and HM-Device
  

CUL_HOERMANN

The CUL_HOERMANN module registers the 868MHz Hoermann Garage-Door-Opener signals received by the CUL. Note: As the structure of this signal is not understood, no checksum is verified, so it is likely to receive bogus messages.

Define
define <name> CUL_HOERMANN <10-digit-hex-code>


Set
• toggle
  Send a signal, which, depending on the status of the door, opens it, closes it or stops the current movement. NOTE: needs culfw 1.67+

Get
N/A

Attributes
• do_not_notify
• showtime
• IODev
• disable
• disabledForIntervals

CUL_IR

The CUL_IR module interprets Infrared messages received by the CUN/CUNO/CUNOv2/TuxRadio. Those devices can receive Infrared Signals from basically any Remote controller and will transform that information in a so called Button-Code

Define
define <name> CUL_IR <IODev>

<IODev> is the devicename of the IR-receivung device, e.g. CUNO1.

Your definition should look like E.g.:

    define IR-Dev CUL_IR CUNO1

Set
• irLearnForSec
  Sets the CUL_IR device in an IR-Code Learning mode for the given seconds. Any received IR-Code will be stored as a Button attribute for this devices. The name of these attributes is dependent on the two attributes learncount and learnprefix.
  Attention: Before learning IR-Codes the CUL_IR device needs to be set in IR-Receiving mode by modifying the irReceive attribute.
• irSend
  Sends out IR-commands via the connected IODev. The IR-command can be specified as buttonname according to Button.* or as IR-Code directly. If a buttonname is specified, the corresponding IR-Code will be sent out.
  Example:
  

  set IR-Dev irSend ButtonA001 

  If defining an IR-Code directly the following Code-Syntax needs to be followed:
  

  IRCode: <PP><AAAA><CCCC><FF> 

  with P = Protocol; A = Address; C = Command; F = Flags
  With the Flags you can modify IR-Repetition. Flags between 00-0E will produce 0-15 IR-Repetitions. You can type the IR-Code as plain as above, or with a heading "I" as learnt for the buttons.
  Example:
  set IR-Dev irSend 0A07070F0F02
set IR-Dev irSend I0A07070F0F00
Get
N/A
Attributes
• do_not_notify


• showtime


• loglevel


• irReceive
  Configure the IR Transceiver of the <IODev> (the CUNO1). Available arguments are:
  • OFF
    Switching off the reception of IR signals. This is the default.
  • ON
    Switching on the reception of IR signals. This is WITHOUT filtering repetitions. This is not recommended as many remote controls do repeat their signals.
  • ON_NR
    Switching on the reception of IR signals with filtering of repetitions. This is the recommended modus operandi.


• Button.*
  Button.* is the wildcard for all learnt IR-Codes. IR-Codes are learnt as Button-Attributes. The name for a learnt Button - IR-Code is compiled out of three elements:
  

          Button<learnprefix><learncount>
          

  When the CUL_IR device is set into learning mode it will generate a new button-attribute for each new IR-Code received.This is done according to the following syntax:
  

          <Button-Attribute-Name> <IR-Code>

  Examples of learnt button-attributes with EMPTY <learnprefix> and <learncount> starting from 1:
  

          Button001   I02029A000000
          Button002   I02029A000001

  To make sure that something happens when this IR-code is received later on one has to modify the attribute and to add commands as attribute values. Examples:

          Button001   I02029A000000   set WZ_Lamp on
          Button002   I02029A000001   set Switch on

  The syntax for this is:

          attr <device-name> <attribute-name> <IR-Code> <command>
          

• Group.*
  Group.* is the wildcard for IR-Code groups. With these attributes one can define IR-Code parts, which may match to several Button-IR-Codes.
  This is done by defining group-attributes that contain only parts of the IR-Code. The syntax is:

          <Group-Attribute-Name> <IR-Code>

  Examples of a group-attribute is:
  

          Group001   I02029A

  With this all IR-Codes starting with I02029A will match the Group001.


• learncount
  learncount is used to store the next button-code-number that needs to be learned. By manually modifying this attribute new button sequences can be arranged.


• learnprefix
  learnprefix is a string which will be added to the button-attribute-name.
  A button-attribute-name is constructed by:

          Button<learnprefix><learncount>    

  If learnprefix is empty the button-attribute-name only contains the term "Button" and the actual number of learncount.

CUL_MAX

The CUL_MAX module interprets MAX! messages received by the CUL. It will be automatically created by autocreate, just make sure that you set the right rfmode like attr CUL0 rfmode MAX.


Define
define <name> CUL_MAX <addr>

Defines an CUL_MAX device of type <type> and rf address <addr>. The rf address must not be in use by any other MAX device.

Set
• pairmode
  Sets the CUL_MAX into pairing mode for 60 seconds where it can be paired with other devices (Thermostats, Buttons, etc.). You also have to set the other device into pairing mode manually. (For Thermostats, this is pressing the "Boost" button for 3 seconds, for example).
• fakeSC <device> <open>
  Sends a fake ShutterContactState message <open> must be 0 or 1 for "window closed" or "window opened". If the <device> has a non-zero groupId, the fake ShutterContactState message affects all devices with that groupId. Make sure you associate the target device(s) with fakeShutterContact beforehand.
• fakeWT <device> <desiredTemperature> <measuredTemperature>
  Sends a fake WallThermostatControl message (parameters both may have one digit after the decimal point, for desiredTemperature it may only by 0 or 5). If the <device> has a non-zero groupId, the fake WallThermostatControl message affects all devices with that groupId. Make sure you associate the target device with fakeWallThermostat beforehand.

Get
N/A

Attributes
• dummy


• debug


• do_not_notify


• ignore


• showtime


• readingFnAttributes

Generated events:
N/A

CUL_REDIRECT

The CUL_REDIRECT modul receive additional protocols from CUL
and redirect them to other modules.

CUL_RFR

The CUL_RFR module is used to "attach" a second CUL to your base CUL, and use it as a repeater / range extender. RFR is shorthand for RF_ROUTER. Transmission of the data uses the CC1101 packet capabilities with GFSK modulation at 250kBaud after pinging the base CUL at the usual 1kBaud. After configured, the RFR device can be used like another CUL connected directly to FHEM. In theory every SlowRF protocol should work, as the hook is implemented in the culfw output routine: instead of sending the data to the USB-Interface it is transmitted via radio to the base CUL. There are still some restrictions: due to the ping both CULs have to be in SlowRF mode, and use the same parameters (freq, bwidth, etc). the logical module handling the protocol is not allowed to access the routines of the IODev (i.e. CUL) directly. Tested protocols are FHT, FS20, EM, HMS, S300. Since there is no ack or a resend mechanism, it should be primarily used to forward "unimportant" data, it was developed for forwading KS300 packets. Before you can use this feature in fhem, you have to enable/configure RF ROUTING in both CUL's: First give your base CUL (which remains connected to the PC) an RFR ID by issuing the fhem command "set MyCUL raw ui0100". With this command the base CUL will get the ID 01, and it will not relay messages to other CUL's (as the second number is 00). Now replace the base CUL with the RFR CUL, and set its id by issuing the fhem command "set MyCUL raw ui0201". Now remove this CUL and attach the original, base CUL again. The RFR CUL got the id 02, and will relay every message to the base CUL with id 01. Take the RFR CUL, and attach it to an USB power supply, as seen on the image. As the configured base id is not 00, it will activate RF reception on boot, and will start sending messages to the base CUL. Now you have to define this RFR cul as a fhem device:


Define
define <name> CUL_RFR <own-id> <base-id>

<own-id> is the id of the RFR CUL not connected to the PC, <base-id> is the id of the CUL connected to the PC. Both parameters have two characters, each representing a one byte hex number.
Example:
set MyCUL raw ui0100
# Now replace the base CUL with the RFR CUL
set MyCUL raw ui0201
# Reattach the base CUL to the PC and attach the RFR CUL to a USB power supply
define MyRFR CUL_RFR 02 01


Set
Same as for the CUL.

Get
Same as for the CUL.

Attributes
• ignore


• IODev

The rest of the attributes is the same as for the CUL.

CUL_TCM97001

The CUL_TCM97001 module interprets temperature sensor messages received by a Device like CUL, CUN, SIGNALduino etc.

Supported models:
• ABS700
• AURIOL (older Sensors with only Temperature)
• Auriol_IAN (NC-3982, ADE WS 1503, Tchibo 65 722)
• Auriol_Z31743B
• Eurochron
• GT_WT_02
• KW9010
• KW9015 (TFA 30.3161)
• Mebus
• Mebus7312
• NC_WS (PEARL NC7159)
• TCM21....
• TCM218943
• TCM97...
• Type1
• PFR-130 (rain)
• Prologue (GT-WT-01)
• Rubicson
• Ventus W155(Auriol): W044(temp/hum) W132(wind) W174(rain)

New received device packages are add in fhem category CUL_TCM97001 with autocreate.

Define
The received devices created automatically.
The ID of the defive are the first two Hex values of the package as dezimal.


Generated events:
• temperature: The temperature
• humidity: The humidity (if available)
• battery: The battery state: low or ok (if available)
• channel: The Channelnumber (if available)
• trend: The temperature trend (if available)
• israining: Statement rain between two measurements (if available)
• rain: The rain value, a consecutive number until the battery is changed (if available)
• winddir: The current wind direction
• windgrad: The current wind direction in degrees
• windspeed: The current wind speed
• windgust: windguest

Attributes
• IODev Note: by setting this attribute you can define different sets of 8 devices in FHEM, each set belonging to a Device which is capable of receiving the signals. It is important, however, that a device is only received by the defined IO Device, e.g. by using different Frquencies (433MHz vs 868MHz)
• disableCreateUndefDevice
  this can be used to deactivate the creation of new devices
  the new devices (Modell + ID, ioname, number) are saved in the device Unknown in the readings "undefModel_a" and "undefModel_b"
• disableUnknownEvents
  with this, the events can be deactivated for unknown messages
• do_not_notify
• ignore
• model (ABS700, AURIOL, Auriol_IAN, GT_WT_02, KW9010, NC_WS, PFR-130, Prologue, Rubicson, TCM21...., TCM218943, TCM97…, Unknown, W044, W132, W174)
• max-deviation-temp: (default:1, allowed values: 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,15,20,25,30,35,40,45,50)
  Maximum permissible deviation of the measured temperature from the previous value in Kelvin.
• max-diff-rain: Default:0 (deactive)
  Maximum permissible deviation of the rainfall to the previous value in l/qm.
• negation-batt: invert Battery reading
• showtime
• readingFnAttributes
• windDirectionInverse: If the anemometer has been mounted upside down, the wind direction can be turned around

CUL_TX

The CUL_TX module interprets TX2/TX3 type of messages received by the CUL, see also http://www.f6fbb.org/domo/sensors/tx3_th.php. This protocol is used by the La Crosse TX3-TH thermo/hygro sensor and other wireless themperature sensors. Please report the manufacturer/model of other working devices.

Define
define <name> CUL_TX <code> [corr] [minsecs]

<code> is the code of the autogenerated address of the TX device (0 to 127)
corr is a correction factor, which will be added to the value received from the device.
minsecs are the minimum seconds between two log entries or notifications from this device.
E.g. if set to 300, logs of the same type will occure with a minimum rate of one per 5 minutes even if the device sends a message every minute. (Reduces the log file size and reduces the time to display the plots)

Set
N/A

Get
N/A

Attributes
• ignore


• do_not_notify


• showtime


• readingFnAttributes

Generated events:
• temperature: $temp
• humidity: $hum

CUL_WS

The CUL_WS module interprets S300 type of messages received by the CUL.

Define
define <name> CUL_WS <code> [corr1...corr4]

<code> is the code which must be set on the S300 device. Valid values are 1 through 8.
corr1..corr4 are up to 4 numerical correction factors, which will be added to the respective value to calibrate the device. Note: rain-values will be multiplied and not added to the correction factor.

Set
N/A

Get
N/A

Attributes
• IODev Note: by setting this attribute you can define different sets of 8 devices in FHEM, each set belonging to a CUL. It is important, however, that a device is only received by the CUL defined, e.g. by using different Frquencies (433MHz vs 868MHz)
• do_not_notify
• eventMap
• ignore
• model (S300,KS300,ASH2200)
• showtime
• readingFnAttributes
• strangeTempDiff DIFFVAL
  If set, the module will only accept temperature values when the difference between the reported temperature and the last recorded value is less than DIFFVAL.

CULflash

CULflash [fhem-device|none]; <TYPE>

Download the firmware from a nightly SVN chekout and flash the hardware. Currently the CUL is supported with its versions: CUL_V2, CUL_V2_HM, CUL_V3, CUL_V3_ZWAVE, CUL_V4.
If the fhem-device is none, than the inserted device must already be in the flash-mode.
Note:for flashing the CUL dfu-programmer has to be installed in the path, this is already the case with the Fritz!Box 7390 image from fhem.de
Example:
CULflash CUL CUL_V3
CULflash none CUL_V3
Note: the message "dfu-programmer: failed to release interface 0." is normal on the FB7390.

Calendar

Define


define <name> Calendar ical url <URL> [<interval>]
define <name> Calendar ical file <FILENAME> [<interval>]

Defines a calendar device.

A calendar device periodically gathers calendar events from the source calendar at the given URL or from a file. The file must be in ICal format.

If the URL starts with https://, the perl module IO::Socket::SSL must be installed (use cpan -i IO::Socket::SSL).

<URL> may contain %-wildcards of the POSIX strftime function of the underlying OS (see your strftime manual). Common used wildcards are:
• %d day of month (01..31)
• %m month (01..12)
• %Y year (1970...)
• %w day of week (0..6); 0 represents Sunday
• %j day of year (001..366)
• %U week number of year with Sunday as first day of week (00..53)
• %W week number of year with Monday as first day of week (00..53)

- Wildcards in url will be evaluated on every calendar update.
- The evaluation of wildcards maybe disabled by adding literal 'noWildcards' to attribute 'quirks'. This may be useful in url containing % without marking a wildcard.

Note for users of Google Calendar:
• Wildcards must not be used in Google Calendar url!
• You can literally use the private ICal URL from your Google Calendar.
• If your Google Calendar URL starts with https:// and the perl module IO::Socket::SSL is not installed on your system, you can replace it by http:// if and only if there is no redirection to the https:// URL. Check with your browser first if unsure.

Note for users of Netxtcloud Calendar: you can use an URL of the form https://admin:admin@demo.nextcloud.com/wid0ohgh/remote.php/dav/calendars/admin/personal/?export.

The optional parameter interval is the time between subsequent updates in seconds. It defaults to 3600 (1 hour).
An interval = 0 will not be allowed and replaced by 3600 automatically. A corresponding log entry will be created.

Examples:

      define MyCalendar Calendar ical url https://www.google.com­/calendar/ical/john.doe%40example.com­/private-foo4711/basic.ics
      define YourCalendar Calendar ical url http://www.google.com­/calendar/ical/jane.doe%40example.com­/private-bar0815/basic.ics 86400
      define SomeCalendar Calendar ical file /home/johndoe/calendar.ics
    

Note on cutoff of event creation:
• Events that are more than 400 days in the past or in the future from their time of creation are omitted. This time window can be further reduced by the cutoffOlderThan and cutoffLaterThan attributes. This would have the following consequence: as long as the calendar is not re-initialized (set ... reload or restart of FHEM) and the VEVENT record is not modified, events beyond the horizon never get created. Thus, a forced reload should be scheduled every now and then.

Set


• set <name> update
  Forces the retrieval of the calendar from the URL. The next automatic retrieval is scheduled to occur interval seconds later.
  
  
• set <name> reload
  Same as update but all calendar events are removed first.
  
  

Get


• get <name> update
  Same as set <name> update
  
  
• get <name> reload
  Same as set <name> update
  
  
• get <name> events [format:<formatSpec>] [timeFormat:<timeFormatSpec>] [filter:<filterSpecs>] [series:next[=<max>]] [limit:<limitSpecs>] [include:<names>] [returnType:<returnTypeSpec>]
  
  The swiss army knife for displaying calendar events. Returns, line by line, information on the calendar events in the calendar <name> according to formatting and filtering rules. You can give none, one or several of the format, timeFormat, filter, series and limit parameters and it makes even sense to give the filter parameter several times.
  
  The format parameter determines the overall formatting of the calendar event. The following format specifications are available:
  
  

  <formatSpec>	content
  default	the default format (see below)
  full	same as custom="$U $M $A $T1-$T2 $S $CA $L"
  text	same as custom="$T1 $S"
  custom="<formatString>"	a custom format (see below)
  custom="{ <perl-code> }"	a custom format (see below)

  
  Single quotes (') can be used instead of double quotes (") in the custom format.
  
  You can use the following variables in the <formatString> and in the <perl-code>:
  
  

  variable	meaning
  $t1	the start time in seconds since the epoch
  $T1	the start time according to the time format
  $t2	the end time in seconds since the epoch
  $T2	the end time according to the time format
  $a	the alarm time in seconds since the epoch
  $A	the alarm time according to the time format
  $d	the duration in seconds
  $D	the duration in human-readable form
  $S	the summary
  $L	the location
  $CA	the categories
  $CL	the classification
  $DS	the description
  $U	the UID
  $M	the mode

  
  \, (masked comma) in summary, location and description is replaced by a comma but \n (indicates newline) is untouched.
  
  If the format parameter is omitted, the custom format string from the defaultFormat attribute is used. If this attribute is not set, "$T1 $D $S" is used as default custom format string. The last occurance wins if the format parameter is given several times.
  
  Examples:
  get MyCalendar events format:full
get MyCalendar events format:custom="$T1-$T2 $S \@ $L"
get MyCalendar events format:custom={ sprintf("%20s %8s", $S, $D) }
  
  The timeFormat parameter determines the formatting of start, end and alarm times.
  
  You use the POSIX conversion specifications in the <timeFormatSpec>. The web page strftime.net has a nice builder for <timeFormatSpec>.
  
  If the timeFormat parameter is omitted, the time format specification from the defaultTimeFormat attribute is used. If this attribute is not set, "%d.%m.%Y %H:%M" is used as default time format specification. Single quotes (') or double quotes (") can be used to enclose the format specification.
  
  The last occurance wins if the parameter is given several times.
  
  Example:
  get MyCalendar events timeFormat:"%e-%b-%Y" format:full
  
  The filter parameter restricts the calendar events displayed to a subset. <filterSpecs> is a comma-separated list of <filterSpec> specifications. All filters must apply for a calendar event to be displayed. The parameter is cumulative: all separate occurances of the parameter add to the list of filters.
  
  

  <filterSpec>	description
  uid=="<uid>"	UID is <uid> same as field(uid)=="<uid>"
  uid=~"<regex>"	UID matches regular expression <regex> same as field(uid)=~"<regex>"
  mode=="<mode>"	mode is <mode> same as field(mode)=="<mode>"
  mode=~"<regex>"	mode matches regular expression <regex> same as field(mode)=~"<regex>"
  field(<field>)=="<value>"	content of the field <field> is <value> <field> is one of uid, mode, summary, location, description, categories, classification
  field(<field>)=~"<regex>"	content of the field <field> matches <regex> <field> is one of uid, mode, summary, location, description, categories, classification

  
  The double quotes (") on the right hand side of a <filterSpec> are not part of the value or regular expression. Single quotes (') can be used instead.
  
  Examples:
  get MyCalendar events filter:uid=="432dsafweq64yehdbwqhkd"
get MyCalendar events filter:uid=~"^7"
get MyCalendar events filter:mode=="alarm"
get MyCalendar events filter:mode=~"alarm|upcoming"
get MyCalendar events filter:field(summary)=~"Mama"
get MyCalendar events filter:field(classification)=="PUBLIC"
get MyCalendar events filter:field(summary)=~"Gelber Sack",mode=~"upcoming|start"
get MyCalendar events filter:field(summary)=~"Gelber Sack" filter:mode=~"upcoming|start"
  
  The series parameter determines the display of recurring events. series:next limits the display to the next calendar event out of all calendar events in the series that have not yet ended. series:next=<max> shows at most the <max> next calendar events in the series. This applies per series. To limit the total amount of events displayed see the limit parameter below.
  
  The limit parameter limits the number of events displayed. <limitSpecs> is a comma-separated list of <limitSpec> specifications.
  
  

  <limitSpec>	description
  count=<n>	shows at most <n> events, <n> is a positive integer
  from=[+|-]<timespec>	shows only events that end after a timespan <timespec> from now; use a minus sign for events in the past; <timespec> is described below in the Attributes section
  to=[+|-]<timespec>	shows only events that start before a timespan <timespec> from now; use a minus sign for events in the past; <timespec> is described below in the Attributes section
  when=today|tomorrow	shows events for today or tomorrow
  when=<D1>	shows events for day <D1> from now, <D1>= 0 stands for today, negative values allowed
  when=<D1>..<D2>	shows events for the day range from day <D1> to day <D2> from now

  
  Examples:
  get MyCalendar events limit:count=10
get MyCalendar events limit:from=-2d
get MyCalendar events limit:when=today
get MyCalendar events limit:count=10,from=0,to=+10d
  
  
  The include parameter includes events from other calendars. This is useful for displaying events from several calendars in one combined output. <names> is a comma-separated list of names of calendar devices. The name of the device itself as well as any duplicates are silently ignored. Names of non-existant devices or of devices that are not Calendar devices are ignored and an error is written to the log.
  
  Example:
  get MyCalendar events include:HolidayCalendar,GarbageCollection
  
  
  The returnType parameter is used to return the events in a particular type. This is useful for Perl scripts.
  
  

  <returnTypeSpec>	description
  $text	a multiline string in human-readable format (default)
  @texts	an array of strings in human-readable format
  @events	an array of Calendar::Event hashes

  
  
  
• get <name> find <regexp>
  Returns, line by line, the UIDs of all calendar events whose summary matches the regular expression <regexp>.
  
  
• get <name> vcalendar
  Returns the calendar in ICal format as retrieved from the source.
  
  
• get <name> vevents
  Returns a list of all VEVENT entries in the calendar with additional information for debugging. Only properties that have been kept during processing of the source are shown. The list of calendar events created from each VEVENT entry is shown as well as the list of calendar events that have been omitted.


Attributes


• defaultFormat <formatSpec>
  Sets the default format for the get <name> events command. The specification is explained there. You must enclose the <formatSpec> in double quotes (") like input in attr myCalendar defaultFormat "$T1 $D $S".
• defaultTimeFormat <timeFormatSpec>
  Sets the default time format for the get <name>events command. The specification is explained there. Do not enclose the <timeFormatSpec> in quotes.
• synchronousUpdate 0|1
  If this attribute is not set or if it is set to 0, the processing is done in the background and FHEM will not block during updates.
  If this attribute is set to 1, the processing of the calendar is done in the foreground. Large calendars will block FHEM on slow systems.
  
  Attribute value will be ignored if FHEM is running on a Windows platform.
  On Windows platforms the processing will always be done synchronously
  
• update onUrlChanged|none
  If this attribute is set to onUrlChanged, the processing is done only if url to calendar has changed since last calendar update.
  If this attribute is set to none, the calendar will not be updated at all.
• delay <time>
  The waiting time in seconds after the initialization of FHEM or a configuration change before actually retrieving the calendar from its source. If not set, a random time between 10 and 29 seconds is chosen. When several calendar devices are defined, staggered delays reduce load error rates.
• timeout <time>
  The timeout in seconds for retrieving the calendar from its source. The default is 30. Increase for very large calendars that take time to be assembled and retrieved from their sources.
• removevcalendar 0|1
  If this attribute is set to 1, the vCalendar will be discarded after the processing to reduce the memory consumption of the module. A retrieval via get <name> vcalendar is then no longer possible.
• hideOlderThan <timespec>
hideLaterThan <timespec>
  

  These attributes limit the list of events shown by get <name> full|debug|text|summary|location|alarm|start|end ....

  The time is specified relative to the current time t. If hideOlderThan is set, calendar events that ended before t-hideOlderThan are not shown. If hideLaterThan is set, calendar events that will start after t+hideLaterThan are not shown.

  Please note that an action triggered by a change to mode "end" cannot access the calendar event if you set hideOlderThan to 0 because the calendar event will already be hidden at that time. Better set hideOlderThan to 10.

  <timespec> must have one of the following formats:
  

  format	description	example
  SSS	seconds	3600
  SSSs	seconds	3600s
  HH:MM	hours:minutes	02:30
  HH:MM:SS	hours:minutes:seconds	00:01:30
  D:HH:MM:SS	days:hours:minutes:seconds	122:10:00:00
  DDDd	days	100d

• cutoffOlderThan <timespec>
cutoffLaterThan <timespec>
  These attributes cut off all calendar events that end a timespan cutoffOlderThan before or a timespan cutoffLaterThan after the last update of the calendar. The purpose of setting this attribute is to save memory and processing time. Such calendar events cannot be accessed at all from FHEM.
• onCreateEvent <perl-code>
  This attribute allows to run the Perl code <perl-code> for every calendar event that is created. See section Plug-ins below.
• SSLVerify
  This attribute sets the verification mode for the peer certificate for connections secured by SSL. Set attribute either to 0 for SSL_VERIFY_NONE (no certificate verification) or to 1 for SSL_VERIFY_PEER (certificate verification). Disabling verification is useful for local calendar installations (e.g. OwnCloud, NextCloud) without valid SSL certificate.
• ignoreCancelled
  Set to 1 to ignore events with status "CANCELLED". Set this attribute to 1 if calanedar events of a series are returned although they are cancelled.
• hasModeReadings
  Set to 1 to use the obsolete mode readings.
• quirks <values>
  Parameters to handle special situations. <values> is a comma-separated list of the following keywords:
  • ignoreDtStamp: if present, a modified DTSTAMP attribute of a calendar event does not signify that the calendar event was modified.
  • noWildcards: if present, wildcards in the calendar's URL will not be expanded.
• readingFnAttributes


Description

A calendar is a set of calendar events. The calendar events are fetched from the source calendar at the given URL on a regular basis.

A calendar event has a summary (usually the title shown in a visual representation of the source calendar), a start time, an end time, and zero, one or more alarm times. In case of multiple alarm times for a calendar event, only the earliest alarm time is kept.

Recurring calendar events (series) are currently supported to an extent: FREQ INTERVAL UNTIL COUNT are interpreted, BYMONTHDAY BYMONTH WKST are recognized but not interpreted. BYDAY is correctly interpreted for weekly and monthly events. The module will get it most likely wrong if you have recurring calendar events with unrecognized or uninterpreted keywords. Out-of-order events and events excluded from a series (EXDATE) are handled. Calendar events are only created within ±400 days around the time of the last update.

Calendar events are created when FHEM is started or when the respective entry in the source calendar has changed and the calendar is updated or when the calendar is reloaded with get <name> reload. Only calendar events within ±400 days around the event creation time are created. Consider reloading the calendar from time to time to avoid running out of upcoming events. You can use something like define reloadCalendar at +*240:00:00 set MyCalendar reload for that purpose.

Some dumb calendars do not use LAST-MODIFIED. This may result in modifications in the source calendar go unnoticed. Reload the calendar if you experience this issue.

A calendar event is identified by its UID. The UID is taken from the source calendar. All events in a series including out-of-order events habe the same UID. All non-alphanumerical characters are stripped off the original UID to make your life easier.

A calendar event can be in one of the following modes:

upcoming	Neither the alarm time nor the start time of the calendar event is reached.
alarm	The alarm time has passed but the start time of the calendar event is not yet reached.
start	The start time has passed but the end time of the calendar event is not yet reached.
end	The end time of the calendar event has passed.


A calendar event transitions from one mode to another immediately when the time for the change has come. This is done by waiting for the earliest future time among all alarm, start or end times of all calendar events.

For backward compatibility, mode readings are filled when the hasModeReadings attribute is set. The remainder of this description applies to the obsolete mode readings.

Each mode reading is a semicolon-separated list of UIDs of calendar events that satisfy certain conditions:

calname	name of the calendar
modeAlarm	events in alarm mode
modeAlarmOrStart	events in alarm or start mode
modeAlarmed	events that have just transitioned from upcoming to alarm mode
modeChanged	events that have just changed their mode somehow
modeEnd	events in end mode
modeEnded	events that have just transitioned from start to end mode
modeStart	events in start mode
modeStarted	events that have just transitioned to start mode
modeUpcoming	events in upcoming mode

For recurring events, usually several calendar events exists with the same UID. In such a case, the UID is only shown in the mode reading for the most interesting mode. The most interesting mode is the first applicable of start, alarm, upcoming, end.

In particular, you will never see the UID of a series in modeEnd or modeEnded as long as the series has not yet ended - the UID will be in one of the other mode... readings. This means that you better do not trigger FHEM events for series based on mode... readings. See below for a recommendation.


Events


When the calendar was reloaded or updated or when an alarm, start or end time was reached, one FHEM event is created:

triggered

When you receive this event, you can rely on the calendar's readings being in a consistent and most recent state.

When a calendar event has changed, two FHEM events are created:

changed: UID <mode>
<mode>: UID

<mode> is the current mode of the calendar event after the change. Note: there is a colon followed by a single space in the FHEM event specification.

The recommended way of reacting on mode changes of calendar events is to get notified on the aforementioned FHEM events and do not check for the FHEM events triggered by a change of a mode reading.



Plug-ins

A plug-in is a piece of Perl code that modifies a calendar event on the fly. The Perl code operates on the hash reference $e. The most important elements are as follows:

code	description
$e->{start}	the start time of the calendar event, in seconds since the epoch
$e->{end}	the end time of the calendar event, in seconds since the epoch
$e->{alarm}	the alarm time of the calendar event, in seconds since the epoch
$e->{summary}	the summary (caption, title) of the calendar event
$e->{location}	the location of the calendar event


To add or change the alarm time of a calendar event for all events with the string "Tonne" in the summary, the following plug-in can be used:

attr MyCalendar onCreateEvent { $e->{alarm}= $e->{start}-86400 if($e->{summary} =~ /Tonne/);; }

The double semicolon masks the semicolon. Perl specials cannot be used.

To add a missing end time, the following plug-in can be used:

attr MyCalendar onCreateEvent { $e->{end}= $e->{start}+86400 unless(defined($e->{end})) }



Usage scenarios

Show all calendar events with details


get MyCalendar events format:full
2767324dsfretfvds7dsfn3e4­dsa234r234sdfds6bh874­googlecom alarm 31.05.2012 17:00:00 07.06.2012 16:30:00-07.06.2012 18:00:00 Erna for coffee
992hydf4y44awer5466lhfdsr­gl7tin6b6mckf8glmhui4­googlecom upcoming 08.06.2012 00:00:00-09.06.2012 00:00:00 Vacation


Show calendar events in your photo frame


Put a line in the layout description to show calendar events in alarm or start mode:

text 20 60 { fhem("get MyCalendar events timeFormat:'%d.%m.%Y %H:%M' format:custom='$T1 $S' filter:mode=~'alarm|start') }

This may look like:

07.06.12 16:30 Erna for coffee
08.06.12 00:00 Vacation


Switch the light on when Erna comes


First find the UID of the calendar event:

get MyCalendar find .*Erna.*
2767324dsfretfvds7dsfn3e4­dsa234r234sdfds6bh874­googlecom

Then define a notify (the dot after the second colon matches the space):

define ErnaComes notify MyCalendar:start:.2767324dsfretfvds7dsfn3e4­dsa234r234sdfds6bh874­googlecom set MyLight on

You can also do some logging:

define LogErna notify MyCalendar:alarm:.2767324dsfretfvds7dsfn3e4­dsa234r234sdfds6bh874­googlecom { Log3 $NAME, 1, "ALARM name=$NAME event=$EVENT part1=$EVTPART0 part2=$EVTPART1" }


Switch actors on and off


Think about a calendar with calendar events whose summaries (subjects, titles) are the names of devices in your fhem installation. You want the respective devices to switch on when the calendar event starts and to switch off when the calendar event ends.

define SwitchActorOn notify MyCalendar:start:.* { \
my $reading="$EVTPART0";; \
my $uid= "$EVTPART1";; \
my $actor= fhem('get MyCalendar events filter:uid=="'.$uid.'" format:custom="$S"');; \
if(defined $actor) { fhem("set $actor on") } \
}

define SwitchActorOff notify MyCalendar:end:.* { \
my $reading="$EVTPART0";; \
my $uid= "$EVTPART1";; \
my $actor= fhem('get MyCalendar events filter:uid=="'.$uid.'" format:custom="$S"');; \
if(defined $actor) { fhem("set $actor off") } \
}

You can also do some logging:

define LogActors notify MyCalendar:(start|end):.* { my $reading= "$EVTPART0";; my $uid= "$EVTPART1";; \
my $actor= fhem('get MyCalendar events filter:uid=="'.$uid.'" format:custom="$S"');; \
Log3 $NAME, 1, "Actor: $actor, Reading $reading" }


Inform about garbage collection


We assume the GarbageCalendar has all the dates of the garbage collection with the type of garbage collected in the summary. The following notify can be used to inform about the garbage collection:

define GarbageCollectionNotifier notify GarbageCalendar:alarm:.* { \
my $uid= "$EVTPART1";; \
my $summary= fhem('get MyCalendar events filter:uid=="'.$uid.'" format:custom="$S"');; \
# e.g. mail $summary to someone \
}

If the garbage calendar has no reminders, you can set these to one day before the date of the collection:

attr GarbageCalendar onCreateEvent { $e->{alarm}= $e->{start}-86400 }

The following code realizes a HTML display of the upcoming collection dates (see below):

{ CalendarEventsAsHtml('GarbageCalendar','format:text filter:mode=~"alarm|start"') }


Embedded HTML

The module provides two functions which return HTML code.

CalendarAsHtml(<name>,<options>) returns the HTML code for a list of calendar events. <name> is the name of the Calendar device and <options> is what you would write after get <name> text .... This function is deprecated.

Example: define MyCalendarWeblink weblink htmlCode { CalendarAsHtml("MyCalendar","next 3") }

CalendarEventsAsHtml(<name>,<parameters>) returns the HTML code for a list of calendar events. <name> is the name of the Calendar device and <parameters> is what you would write in get <name> events <parameters>.

Example: define MyCalendarWeblink weblink htmlCode { CalendarEventsAsHtml('F','format:custom="$T1 $D $S" timeFormat:"%d.%m" series:next=3') }

Tip: use single quotes as outer quotes.

CanOverEthernet

Define

define <name> CanOverEthernet

Defines a CanOverEthernet device. FHEM will start listening to UDP broadcasts on port 5441.
Example:
define coe CanOverEthernet
Actual readings for the incoming data will be written to COE_Node devices, which are created on-the-fly.

Set

• sendDataAnalog
  Publishes analog values.
  Example: set sendDataAnalog <Target-IP> <CAN-Channel> <Index>=<Value>;<Type>
set coe sendDataAnalog 192.168.1.1 3 1=22.7;1 2=18.0;1
• sendDataDigital
  Publishes digital values. This can be 0 or 1.
  Example: set sendDataDigital <Target-IP> <CAN-Channel> <Index>=<Value>
set coe sendDataDigital 192.168.1.1 3 1=1 2=0

ComfoAir

ComfoAir provides a way to communicate with ComfoAir ventilation systems from Zehnder, especially the ComfoAir 350 (CA350). It seems that many other ventilation systems use the same communication device and protocol, e.g. WHR930 from StorkAir, G90-380 from Wernig and Santos 370 DC from Paul. They are connected via serial line to the fhem computer. This module is based on the protocol description at http://www.see-solutions.de/sonstiges/Protokollbeschreibung_ComfoAir.pdf and copies some ideas from earlier modules for the same devices that were posted in the fhem forum from danhauck(Santos) and Joachim (WHR962).
The module can be used in two ways depending on how fhem and / or a vendor supplied remote control device like CC Ease or CC Luxe are connected to the system. If a remote control device is connected it is strongly advised that fhem does not send data to the ventilation system as well and only listens to the communication betweem the vendor equipment. The RS232 interface used is not made to support more than two parties communicating and connecting fhem in parallel to a CC Ease or similar device can lead to collisions when sending data which can corrupt the ventilation system. If connected in parallel fhem should only passively listen and <Interval> is to be set to 0.
If no remote control device is connected to the ventilation systems then fhem has to take control and actively request data in the interval to be defined. Otherwiese fhem will not see any data. In this case fhem can also send commands to modify settings.

Prerequisites


• This module requires the Device::SerialPort or Win32::SerialPort module.

Define

define <name> ComfoAir <device> <Interval>

The module connects to the ventialation system through the given Device and either passively listens to data that is communicated between the ventialation system and its remote control device (e.g. CC Luxe) or it actively requests data from the ventilation system every <Interval> seconds
If <Interval> is set to 0 then no polling will be done and the module only listens to messages on the line.

Example:


define ZL ComfoAir /dev/ttyUSB1@9600 60

Configuration of the module


apart from the serial connection and the interval which both are specified in the define command there are several attributes that can optionally be used to modify the behavior of the module.

The module internally gives names to all the protocol messages that are defined in the module and these names can be used in attributes to define which requests are periodically sent to the ventilation device. The same nams can also be used with set commands to manually send a request. Since all messages and readings are generically defined in a data structure in the module, it should be quite easy to add more protocol details if needed without programming.
The names currently defined are:

        Bootloader-Version
        Firmware-Version
        RS232-Modus
        Sensordaten
        KonPlatine-Version
        Verzoegerungen
        Ventilation-Levels
        Temperaturen
        Betriebsstunden
        Status-Bypass
        Status-Vorheizung
        

The attributes that control which messages are sent / which data is requested every <Interval> seconds are:

        poll-Bootloader-Version
        poll-Firmware-Version
        poll-RS232-Modus
        poll-Sensordaten
        poll-KonPlatine-Version
        poll-Verzoegerungen
        poll-Ventilation-Levels
        poll-Temperaturen
        poll-Betriebsstunden
        poll-Status-Bypass
        poll-Status-Vorheizung
        

if the attribute is set to 1, the corresponding data is requested every <Interval> seconds. If it is set to 0, then the data is not requested. by default Ventilation-Levels, Temperaturen and Status-Bypass are requested if no attributes are set.

Example:



        define ZL ComfoAir /dev/ttyUSB1@9600 60
        attr ZL poll-Status-Bypass 0
        define FileLog_Lueftung FileLog ./log/Lueftung-%Y.log ZL
        

Set-Commands

like with the attributes mentioned above, set commands can be used to send a request for data manually. The following set options are available for this:

        request-Status-Bypass 
        request-Bootloader-Version 
        request-Sensordaten
        request-Temperaturen 
        request-Firmware-Version 
        request-KonPlatine-Version 
        request-Ventilation-Levels 
        request-Verzoegerungen 
        request-Betriebsstunden 
        request-Status-Vorheizung 
        

additionally important fields can be set:

        Temp_Komfort (target temperature for comfort)
        Stufe (ventilation level)
        

Get-Commands

All readings that are derived from the responses to protocol requests are also available as Get commands. Internally a Get command triggers the corresponding request to the device and then interprets the data and returns the right field value. To avoid huge option lists in FHEMWEB, only the most important Get options are visible in FHEMWEB. However this can easily be changed since all the readings and protocol messages are internally defined in the modue in a data structure and to make a Reading visible as Get option only a little option (e.g. showget => 1 has to be added to this data structure
Attributes


• do_not_notify
• readingFnAttributes


• poll-Bootloader-Version
• poll-Firmware-Version
• poll-RS232-Modus
• poll-Sensordaten
• poll-KonPlatine-Version
• poll-Verzoegerungen
• poll-Ventilation-Levels
• poll-Temperaturen
• poll-Betriebsstunden
• poll-Status-Bypass
• poll-Status-Vorheizung
include a request for the data belonging to the named group when sending requests every interval seconds

• hide-Bootloader-Version
• hide-Firmware-Version
• hide-RS232-Modus
• hide-Sensordaten
• hide-KonPlatine-Version
• hide-Verzoegerungen
• hide-Ventilation-Levels
• hide-Temperaturen
• hide-Betriebsstunden
• hide-Status-Bypass
• hide-Status-Vorheizung
prevent readings of the named group from being created even if used passively without polling and an external remote control requests this data. please note that this attribute doesn't delete already existing readings.

• queueDelay
modify the delay used when sending requests to the device from the internal queue, defaults to 1 second

• queueMax
max length of the send queue, defaults to 50

• timeout
set the timeout for reads, defaults to 2 seconds

• alignTime
Aligns each periodic read request for the defined interval to this base time. This is typcally something like 00:00 (see the Fhem at command)

CustomReadings

FHEM module to define own readings.

This module allows to define own readings. The readings can be defined in an attribute so that they can get changed without changing the code of the module.
To use this module you should have some perl and linux knowledge
The examples presuppose that you run FHEM on a linux machine like a Raspberry Pi or a Cubietruck.
Note: the "bullshit" definition is an example to show what happens if you define bullshit :-)

Example (definition in fhem.cfg)
define myReadings CustomReadings
attr myReadings room 0-Test
attr myReadings group Readings
attr myReadings interval 2
attr myReadings readingDefinitions hdd_temperature:qx(hddtemp /dev/sda 2>&1),
ac_powersupply_voltage:qx(cat /sys/class/power_supply/ac/voltage_now 2>&1) / 1000000,
ac_powersupply_current:qx(cat /sys/class/power_supply/ac/current_now 2>&1) / 1000000,
perl_version:$],
timezone:qx(cat /etc/timezone 2>&1),
kernel:qx(uname -r 2>&1),
device_name:$hash->{NAME},
bullshit: $hash->{bullshit},
fhem_backup_folder_size:qx(du -ch /opt/fhem/backup | grep total | cut -d 't' -f1 2>&1)


Optionally, to display the readings:
define myReadingsDisplay weblink htmlCode {CustomReadings_GetHTML('myReadings')}
attr myReadingsDisplay group Readings
attr myReadingsDisplay room 0-Test

Resulting readings:


ac_powersupply_current	0.236	2014-08-09 15:40:21
ac_powersupply_voltage	5.028	2014-08-09 15:40:21
bullshit	ERROR	2014-08-09 15:40:21
device_name	myReadings	2014-08-09 15:40:21
fhem_backup_folder_size	20M	2014-08-09 15:40:21
hdd_temperature	/dev/sda: TS128GSSD320: 47°C	2014-08-09 15:40:21
kernel	3.4.103-sun7i+	2014-08-09 15:40:21
perl_version	5.014002	2014-08-09 15:40:21
timezone	Europe/Berlin	2014-08-09 15:40:21


Define
define <name> CustomReadings

Readings
As defined

Attributes
• interval
  Refresh interval in seconds


• readingDefinitions
  The definitions are separated by a comma. A definition consists of two parts, separated by a colon.
  The first part is the name of the reading and the second part the function.
  The function gets evaluated and must return a result.
  
  Example: kernel:qx(uname -r 2>&1)
  Defines a reading with the name "kernel" and evaluates the linux function uname -r
  Multiline output from commands, systemcall, scripts etc. can be use for more than one reading with
  the keyword COMBINED as reading (which wont appear itself) while its command output
  will be put line by line in the following readings defined (so they don't need a function defined
  after the colon (it would be ignored)).But the lines given must match the number and order of the
  following readings.
  
  COMBINED can be used together or lets say after or even in between normal expressions if the
  number of lines of the output matches exactly. Example: COMBINED:qx(cat /proc/sys/vm/dirty_background*),dirty_bytes:,dirty_ration:
  Defines two readings (dirty_bytes and dirty_ratio) which will get set by the lines of those
  two files the cat command will find in the kernel proc directory.
  In some cases this can give an noticeable performance boost as the readings are filled up all at once.

DENON_AVR

Define
define <name> DENON_AVR <ip-address-or-hostname[:PORT]>
define <name> DENON_AVR <devicename[@baudrate]>

This module controls DENON (Marantz) A/V receivers in real-time via network connection.

Instead of IP address or hostname you may set a serial connection format for direct connectivity.

Example:


define avr DENON_AVR 192.168.0.10

# With explicit port
define avr DENON_AVR 192.168.0.10:23

# With serial connection
define avr DENON_AVR /dev/ttyUSB0@9600


Set
set <name> <command> [<parameter>]

Currently, the following commands are defined:

• allZoneStereo   -   set allZoneStereo on/off
• audioRestorer   -   set audioRestorer off/low/medium/high
• audysseyLFC   -   set audysseyLFC on/off
• audysseyLFCAmount   -   set audysseyLFCAmount (1 - 7)
• autoStandby   -   set auto standby (off, 15,30,60 min)
• bass   -   adjust bass level
• channelVolume   -   adjust channel volume level for active speakers (up/down),
   to reset all channel level use FactoryDefaults
   Example to adjust volume level via command line: set avr channelVolume FrontLeft -1
   (possible values -12 to 12)
• cinemaEQ   -   set cinemaEQ on/off
• display   -   controls display dim state
• dynamicEQ   -   set dynamicEQ on/off
• dynamicEQRefLevelOffset   -   set dynamicEQRefLevelOffset (0, 5, 10, 15)
• dynamicVolume   -   set dynamicEQ off/light/medium/heavy
• eco   -   controls eco state
• favorite   -   switches between favorite (only older models)
• favoriteList   -   select entries in favorite list (workaround for new models >= 2014),
   it is recommended to use set stream in combination with module 98_DLNARenderer!
• input   -   switches between inputs
• loudness   -   set loudness on/off
• lowFrequencyEffect   -   adjust LFE level (-10 to 0)
• multiEQ   -   set multiEQ off/reference/bypassLR...
• mute on,off   -   controls volume mute
• muteT   -   toggle mute state
• off   -   turns the device in standby mode
• on   -   powers on the device
• preset   -   switches between presets (1-3, only older models)
• presetCall   -   switches between presets (00-35, 00-55 older models)
• presetMemory   -   save presets (00-35, 00-55 older models, for alphanumeric mode A1-G8 set attribute "presetMode" to "alphanumeric")
• quickselect   -   switches between quick select modes (1-5, only new models)
• rawCommand   -   send raw command to AV receiver
• reconnect   -   reconnect AV receiver
• remoteControl   -   remote commands (play, stop, pause,...)
• setup   -   onscreen setup on/off
• sleep   -   set sleep timer (off/10 to 120 min)
• smartselect   -   switches between smart select modes (1-5, only Marantz, to activate set attribute brand to Marantz)
• stream   -   send stream adress via module 98_DLNARenderer to reciever; the user has to create a file "Denon.streams" in folder "fhem/FHEM"
  
  list format:
  Rockantenne<>http://mp3channels.webradio.antenne.de/rockantenne
Bayern3<>http://streams.br.de/bayern3_2.m3u
JamFM<>http://www.jam.fm/streams/jam-nmr-mp3.m3u

  The attribut "dlnaName" must be set to the name of the reciever in DLNARenderer module.
  
• surroundMode   -   set surround mode
• toggle   -   switch between on and off
• treble   -   adjust treble level
• trigger1   -   set trigger1 on/off
• trigger2   -   set trigger2 on/off
• tuner   -   switch between AM and FM
• tunerPreset   -   switches between tuner presets (1-56)
• tunerPresetMemory   -   save tuner presets (1-56)
• usedInputs   -   set used inputs manually if needed (e.g. us model)
• volume 0...98   -   set the volume level in percentage
• volumeStraight -80...18   -   set the volume level in dB
• volumeUp   -   increases the volume level
• volumeDown   -   decreases the volume level


Get
get <name> <what>

Currently, the following commands are defined:

• disconnect   -   disconnect AV receiver
• mediaInfo   -   refresh current media infos
• reconnect   -   reconnect AV receiver
• remoteControl   -   autocreate remote ccontrol
• statusRequest   -   refresh status
• some readings   -   see list below
• zone   -   autocreate zones

Generated Readings/Events:

The AV reciever sends some readings only if settings (e.g. ampAssign) have changed
or the reciever has been disconnected (power supply) for more than 5 min and connected again.


• ampAssign   -   amplifier settings for AV receiver (5.1, 7.1, 9.1,...)
• audioRestorer   -   audioRestorer Level (off, low, medium, high)
• autoStandby   -   auto standby state
• bass   -   bass level in dB
• currentAlbum   -   current album (mediaplayer, online music,...)
• currentArtist   -   current artist (mediaplayer, online music,...)
• currentBitrate   -   current bitrate (mediaplayer, online music,...)
• currentMedia   -   current media (mediaplayer, online music,...)
• currentStation   -   current station (online radio)
• currentTitle   -   current title (mediaplayer, online music,...)
• display   -   dim state of display
• dynamicCompression   -   dynamic compression state
• eco   -   eco state
• input   -   selected input
• level[speaker]   -   [speaker] level in dB (e.g. levelFrontRight)
• lowFrequencyEffects   -   low frequency effects (LFE) state
• mute   -   mute state
• playStatus   -   current playStatus (playing/paused/stopped)
• power   -   power state
• samplingRate   -   sampling rate
• signal   -   input signal sound
• sound   -   actual sound type
• state   -   state of AV reciever (on,off,disconnected)
• stateAV   -   state of AV reciever (on,off,absent,mute)
• surroundMode   -   actual surround mode (Auto, Stereo, Music,...)
• toneControl   -   tone control state
• treble   -   treble level in dB
• tuner[Information]   -   tuner settings [Band, Frequency, Mode, Preset]
• videoSelect   -   actual video select mode
• volume   -   actual volume
• volumeMax   -   actual maximum volume
• volumeStraight   -   actual volume straight
• zone   -   state of aviable zones (on/off)

Attributes


• brand   -   brand of AV receiver (Denon/Marantz) - to activate smartselect set attribute brand to Marantz
• connectionCheck   -   time to next connection check
• disable   -   defined device on/off
• dlnaName   -   name of Reciever in DLNARenderer module
• favorites   -   max entries for favorites
• maxFavorites   -   max entries in favorite list for "set favoriteList"
• maxPreset   -   max entries in preset list
• playTime   -   timespan to next playtime check (off, 1-60 sec)
• presetMode   -   preset list mode (numeric [00-55] or alphanumeric [A1-G8])
• sleep   -   break between commands for use with "set favoriteList"
• timeout   -   number of connection attempts
• type   -   reciever type (AVR oder Ceol), steps for volumeslider (0.5 or 1)
• unit   -   de-/activate units for readings (on or off)

DENON_AVR_ZONE

Define
define <name> DENON_AVR_ZONE <zonenumber>

This module controls DENON A/V receivers zones.


Example:


define avr_zone2 DENON_AVR_ZONE 2

define avr_zone2 DENON_AVR_ZONE 3




Set
set <name> <command> [<parameter>]

Currently, the following commands are defined:

• autoStandby   -   set auto standby time
• favorite   -   switches between favorite (only older models)
• input   -   switches between inputs
• mute on,off   -   controls volume mute
• muteT   -   toggle mute state
• off   -   turns the device in standby mode
• on   -   powers on the device
• quickselect   -   switches between quick select modes (1-5, only new models)
• rawCommand   -   send raw command to AV receiver
• remote   -   remote commands (play, stop, pause,...)
• surroundMode   -   set surround mode
• toggle   -   switch between on and off
• volume 0...98   -   set the volume level in percentage
• volumeStraight -80...18   -   set the volume level in dB
• volumeUp   -   increases the volume level
• volumeDown   -   decreases the volume level

Get
get <name> <what>

Currently, the following commands are defined:

• remoteControl   -   autocreate remote ccontrol
• some readings   -   see list below


Generated Readings/Events:


• autoStandby   -   auto standby state
• input   -   selected input
• mute   -   mute state
• power   -   power state
• state   -   state of AV reciever (on,off,disconnected)
• stateAV   -   state of AV reciever (on,off,absent,mute)
• treble   -   treble level in dB
• videoSelect   -   actual video select mode
• volume   -   actual volume
• volumeMax   -   actual maximum volume
• volumeStraight   -   actual volume straight

Attributes


• IODev   -   Input/Output Device

DFPlayerMini - FN-M16P Embedded MP3 Audio Module

This module integrates the DFPlayerMini - FN-M16P Embedded MP3 Audio Module device into fhem. See the datasheet of the module for technical details.
The MP3 player can be connected directly to a serial interface or via ethernet/WiFi by using a hardware with offers a transparent serial bridge over TCP/IP like ESPEasy Ser2Net.

It is also possible to use other fhem transport devices like MYSENSORS.

The module supports all commands of the DFPlayer and offers additional convenience functions like

• integration of Text2Speech for easy download of speech mp3 files
• easier control of which file to play by
• keeping a reference of all files the DFPlayer can play
• playing several files in succession (playlist)
• creating and playing files for speaking numbers

Define
define <name> DFPlayerMini {none | devicename[\@baudrate] | devicename\@directio | hostname:port}

• If directly connected <devicename> specifies the serial port to communicate with the DFPlayer Mini. The name of the serial-device depends on your distribution, under linux the cdc_acm kernel module is responsible, and usually a /dev/ttyACM0 or /dev/ttyUSB0 device will be created. You can also specify a baudrate if the device name contains the @ character, e.g.: /dev/ttyACM0@9600
  
  This is also the default baudrate and normally shouldn't be changed as the DFPlayer uses a fixed baudrate of 9600. If the baudrate is "directio" (e.g.: /dev/ttyACM0@directio), then the perl module Device::SerialPort is not needed, and fhem opens the device with simple file io. This might work if the operating system uses sane defaults for the serial parameters, e.g. some Linux distributions and OSX.
  
• If connected via TCP/IP <hostname:port> specifies the IP address and port of the device that provides the transparent serial bridge to the DFP, e.g. 192.168.2.28:23
• for other types of transport none can be specified as the device. In that case the attribute sendCmd should be specified and responses from the DFP should be given to this module with set response.

Attributes

• TTSDev
  The name of a Text2Speech device. This has to be defined beforehand with none as the <alsadevice> as a server device. It should be used for no other purposes than use by this module.
• requestAck
  The DFPlayer can send a response to any command sent to it to acknowledge that is has received the command. As this increases the communication overhead it can be switched off if the communication integrity is ensured by other means. If set the next command is only sent if the last one was acknowledged by the DFPlayer. This ensures that no command is lost if the the DFPlayer is busy/sleeping.
• sendCmd
  A fhem command that is used to send the command data generated by this module to the DFPlayer hardware. If this is set, no other way of communication with the DFP is used. This can be used integrate other transport devices than those supported natively.
  E. g. to communicate via a MySensors device named mys_dfp with an appropriate sketch use
  attr <dfp> sendCmd set mys_dfp value11 $msg
  The module will then send a command to the DFP replacing $msg with the actual payload using the fhem command set mys_dfp value11 <payload>
  See set response for a way to get the response of the DFPlayer received via a different device back into this module.
• uploadPath
  The DFPlayer plays files from an SD card or USB stick connected to it. The mp3/wav files have to be copied to this storage device by the user. The device expects the files with specific names and in specific folders, see the datasheet for details. Copying the files can also be done by this module if the storage device is accessible by the computer fhem is running on. It has to be mounted in a specific path with is specified with this attribute.
  See uploadTTS, uploadTTScache and readFiles commands where this is used.
• rememberMissingTTS
  If set tts commands without a matching file create a special reading. See set tts and set uploadTTScache.
• keepAliveInterval
  Specifies the interval in seconds for sending a keep alive message to the DFP. Can be used to check if the DFP is still working and to keep connections open.
  After three missing answers the status of the devices is set to disconnected.
  Set the interval to 0 to disable the keep alive feature. Default is 60 seconds.

Get

All query commands supported by the DFP have a corresponding get command:

get	DFP cmd byte	parameters	comment
storage	0x3F
status	0x42
volume	0x43
equalizer	0x44
noTracksRootUsb	0x47
noTracksRootSd	0x48
currentTrackUsb	0x4B
currentTrackSd	0x4C
noTracksInFolder	0x4E	folder number	1-99
noFolders	0x4F

Set

All commands supported by the DFP have a corresponding set command:

set	DFP cmd byte	parameters	comment
next	0x01	-
prev	0x02	-
trackNum	0x03	number of track in root directory	between 1 and 3000 (uses the order in which the files where created!)
volumeUp	0x04	-
volumeDown	0x05	-
volumeStraight	0x06	volume	0-30
equalizer	0x07	name of the equalizer mode	Normal, Pop, Rock, Jazz, Classic, Bass
repeatSingle	0x08	-
storage	0x09	SD or USB
sleep	0x0A	-	not supported by DFP, DFP needs power cycle to work again
wake	0x0B	-	not supported by DFP, but probably by FN-M22P
reset	0x0C	-
play	0x0D	-	plays the current track
play	0x0F, 0x12, 0x13, 0x14	a space separated list of files to play successively	the correct DFP command is used automatically. Files can be specified with either their reading name, reading value or folder name/track number. See set readFiles
pause	0x0E	-
amplification	0x10	level of amplification	0-31
repeatRoot	0x11	on, off
MP3TrackNum	0x12	tracknumber	1-3000, from folder MP3
intercutAdvert	0x13	tracknumber	1-3000, from folder ADVERT
folderTrackNum	0x0F	foldernumber tracknumber	folder: 1-99, track: 1-255
folderTrackNum3000	0x14	foldernumber tracknumber	folder: 1-15, track: 1-3000
stopAdvert	0x15	-
stop	0x16	-
repeatFolder	0x17	number of folder	1-99
shuffle	0x18	-
repeatCurrentTrack	0x19	on, off
DAC	0x1A	on, off

All other set commands are not sent to the DFP but offer convenience functions:

• close
• raw
  sends a command encoded in hex directly to the DFP without any validation
• reopen
• readFiles
  reads all files from the storage medium mounted at uploadPath. If these files are accessible by the DFP (i.e. they conform to the naming convention) a reading is created for the file. The reading name is File_<folder>/<tracknumber>. Folder can be ., MP3, ADVERT, 00 to 99. The reading value is the filename without the tracknumber and suffix.
  Example:
  For the file MP3/0003SongTitle.mp3 the reading File_MP3/0003 with value SongTitle is created.
  The set <dfp> play command can make use of these readings, i.e. it is possible to use either set <dfp> play File_MP3/0003, set <dfp> play MP3/3 or set <dfp> play SongTitle to play the same track.
• uploadTTS <destination path> <Text to translate to speech>
  The text specified is converted to a speech mp3 file using the Text2Speech device specified with attr TTSDev. The mp3 file is then copied into the given destination path within uploadPath.
  Examples:
  set <dfp> 01/0001Test Dies ist ein Test
set <dfp> ADVERT/0099Hinweis Achtung
• uploadTTScache
  upload all files from the cache directory of the TTSDev to uploadPath. Uploading starts with folder 01. After 3000 files the next folder is used. The MD5 hash is used as the filename. When the upload is finished set readFiles is executed. The command set tts makes use of the readings created by this.
• tts <text to translate to speech>
  TTSDev is used to calculate the MD5 hash of <text to translate to speech>. It then tries to play the file with this hash value. If no reading for such a file exists and if the attribute rememberMissingTTS is set, a new reading Missing_MD5<md5> with <text to translate to speech> as its value is created.
  Prerequisites:
  This only works if this text had been translated earlier and the resulting mp3 file was stored in the cache directory of TTSDev. The files in the cache have to be uploaded to the storage card with set uploadTTScache.
• uploadNumbers destinationFolder
  creates mp3 files for all tokens required to speak arbitrary german numbers.
  Example:
  set <dfp> uploadNumbers 99
  creates the 31 mp3 files required in folder 99.
• sayNumber number
  translates a number into speech and plays the required tracks. Requires that uploadNumbers command was used to create the speech files.
  Example:
  sayNumber -34.7
  is equivalent to
  play minus vier und dreissig komma sieben
• response
  10 bytes response message from DFP encoded as hex

DLNARenderer

DLNARenderer automatically discovers all your MediaRenderer devices in your local network and allows you to fully control them.
It also supports multiroom audio for Caskeid and Bluetooth Caskeid speakers (e.g. MUNET).

Note: The followig libraries are required for this module:
• SOAP::Lite
• LWP::Simple
• XML::Simple
• XML::Parser::Lite
• LWP::UserAgent


Define
define <name> DLNARenderer

Example:
define dlnadevices DLNARenderer
After about 2 minutes you can find all automatically created DLNA devices under "Unsorted".


Set

set <name> stream <value>
Set any URL to play.

set <name> on
Starts playing the last stream (reading stream).

set <name> off
Sends stop command to device.

set <name> stop
Stop playback.

set <name> volume 0-100
set <name> volume +/-0-100
Set volume of the device.

set <name> channel 1-10
Start playing channel X which must be configured as channel_X attribute first.
You can specify your channel also in DIDL-Lite XML format if your player doesn't support plain URIs.

set <name> mute on/off
Mute the device.

set <name> pause
Pause playback of the device. No toggle.

set <name> pauseToggle
Toggle pause/play for the device.

set <name> play
Initiate play command. Only makes your player play if a stream was loaded (currentTrackURI is set).

set <name> next
Play next track.

set <name> previous
Play previous track.

set <name> seek <seconds>
Seek to position of track in seconds.

set <name> speak "This is a test. 1 2 3."
Speak the text followed after speak within quotes. Works with Google Translate.

set <name> playEverywhere
Only available for Caskeid players.
Play current track on all available Caskeid players in sync.

set <name> stopPlayEverywhere
Only available for Caskeid players.
Stops multiroom audio.

set <name> addUnit <unitName>
Only available for Caskeid players.
Adds unit to multiroom audio session.

set <name> removeUnit <unitName>
Only available for Caskeid players.
Removes unit from multiroom audio session.

set <name> multiRoomVolume 0-100
set <name> multiRoomVolume +/-0-100
Only available for Caskeid players.
Set volume of all devices within this session.

set <name> enableBTCaskeid
Only available for Caskeid players.
Activates Bluetooth Caskeid for this device.

set <name> disableBTCaskeid
Only available for Caskeid players.
Deactivates Bluetooth Caskeid for this device.

set <name> stereo <left> <right> <pairName>
Only available for Caskeid players.
Sets stereo mode for left/right speaker and defines the name of the stereo pair.

set <name> standalone
Only available for Caskeid players.
Puts the speaker into standalone mode if it was member of a stereo pair before.

set <name> saveGroupAs <groupName>
Only available for Caskeid players.
Saves the current group configuration (e.g. saveGroupAs LivingRoom).

set <name> loadGroup <groupName>
Only available for Caskeid players.
Loads the configuration previously saved (e.g. loadGroup LivingRoom).

Attributes

ignoreUDNs
Define list (comma or blank separated) of UDNs which should prevent automatic device creation.
It is important that uuid: is also part of the UDN and must be included.

DOIF

DOIF is a universal module. It works event- and time-controlled.

It combines the functionality of a notify, at-, watchdog command with logical queries.

Complex problems can be solved with this module, which would otherwise be solved only with several modules at different locations in FHEM. This leads to clear solutions and simplifies their maintenance.

Logical queries are created in conditions using Perl operators. These are combined with information from states, readings, internals of devices or times in square brackets. Arbitrary Perl functions can also be specified that are defined in FHEM. The module is triggered by time or by events information through the Devices specified in the condition. If a condition is true, the associated FHEM- or Perl commands are executed.

Syntax FHEM-Mode:


define <name> DOIF (<condition>) (<commands>) DOELSEIF (<condition>) (<commands>) DOELSEIF ... DOELSE (<commands>)

Syntax Perl-Mode:


define <name> DOIF <Blockname> {<Perl with DOIF-Syntax>} <Blockname> {<Perl with DOIF-Syntax>} ...

The commands are always processed from left to right. There is only one command executed, namely the first, for which the corresponding condition in the processed sequence is true. In addition, only the conditions are checked, which include a matching device of the trigger (in square brackets).

Features


+ intuitive syntax, as used in branches (if - elseif-....elseif - else) in higher-level languages
+ in the condition of any logical queries can be made as well as perl functions are used (full perl support)
+ it can be any FHEM commands and perl commands are executed
+ syntax checking at the time of definition are identified missing brackets
+ status is specified with [<devicename>], readings with [<devicename>:<readingname>] or internals with [<devicename>:&<internal>]
+ time information on the condition: [HH:MM:SS] or [HH:MM] or [<seconds>]
+ indirect time on the condition: [[<devicename>]] or [[<devicename>:<readingname>]] or [{<perl-function>}]
+ time calculation on the condition: [(<time calculation in Perl with time syntax specified above>)]
+ time intervals: [<begin>-<end>] for <begin> and <end>, the above time format can be selected.
+ relative times preceded by a plus sign [+<time>] or [+<begin>-+<end>] combined with Perl functions
+ weekday control: [<time>|0123456789] or [<begin>-<end>|0123456789] (0-6 corresponds to Sunday through Saturday) such as 7 for $we, 8 for !$we, 9 for $we tomorrow ($twe)
+ statuses, readings, internals und time intervals for only queries without trigger with [?...]
+ DOELSEIF cases and DOELSE at the end are optional
+ delay specification with resetting is possible (watchdog function)
+ the execution part can be left out in each case. So that the module can be used for pure status display.
+ definition of the status display with use of any readings or statuses



Many examples with english identifiers - see german section.

DOIFtools

DOIFtools contains tools to support DOIF.


• create readingsGroup definitions for labeling frontend widgets.
• create a debug logfile for some DOIF and quoted devices with optional device listing each state or wait timer update.
• optional device listing in debug logfile each state or wait timer update.
• navigation between device listings in logfile if opened via DOIFtools.
• create userReadings in DOIF devices displaying real dates for weekday restricted timer.
• delete user defined readings in DOIF devices with multiple choice.
• delete visible readings in other devices with multiple choice, but not state.
• record statistics data about events.
• limitting recordig duration.
• generate a statistics report.
• lists every DOIF definition in probably associated with.
• access to DOIFtools from any DOIF device via probably associated with
• access from DOIFtools to existing DOIFtoolsLog logfiles
• show event monitor in device detail view and optionally in DOIFs detail view
• convert events to DOIF operands, a selected operand is copied to clipboard and the DEF editor will open
• check definitions and offer recommendations for DOIF MODEL FHEM
• create shortcuts
• optionally create a menu entry
• show a list of running wait timer
• scale values to color numbers and RGB values for coloration
• list subs declared by user in package DOIF

Just one definition per FHEM-installation is allowed. More in the german section.

DUOFERN

Support for DuoFern devices via the DuoFern USB Stick.


Define
define <name> DUOFERN <code>

<code> specifies the radio code of the DuoFern device

Example:

define myDuoFern DUOFERN 49ABCD


Set
Universal commands (available to most actors):


• remotePair
  Activates the pairing mode of the actor.
  Some actors accept this command in unpaired mode up to two hours afte power up.


• remoteUnpair
  Activates the unpairing mode of the actor.


• getStatus
  Sends a status request message to the DuoFern device.


• manualMode [on|off]
  Activates the manual mode. If manual mode is active all automatic functions will be ignored.


• timeAutomatic [on|off]
  Activates the timer automatic.


• sunAutomatic [on|off]
  Activates the sun automatic.


• dawnAutomatic [on|off]
  Activates the dawn automatic.


• duskAutomatic [on|off]
  Activates the dusk automatic.


• dusk
  Move roller shutter downwards or switch on switch/dimming actor if duskAutomatic is activated.


• dawn
  Move roller shutter upwards or switch off switch/dimming actor if dawnAutomatic is activated.


• sunMode [on|off]
  Activates the sun mode. If sun automatic is activated, the roller shutter will move to the sunPosition or a switch/dimming actor will shut off.


• reset [settings|full]
  settings: Clear all settings and endpoints of the actor.
  full: Complete reset of the actor including pairs.


Roller shutter actor commands:


• up [timer]
  Move the roller shutter upwards. If parameter timer is used the command will only be executed if timeAutomatic is activated.


• down [timer]
  Move the roller shutter downwards. If parameter timer is used the command will only be executed if timeAutomatic is activated.


• stop
  Stop motion.


• position <value> [timer]
  Set roller shutter to a desired absolut level. If parameter timer is used the command will only be executed if timeAutomatic is activated.


• toggle
  Switch the roller shutter through the sequence up/stop/down/stop.


• rainAutomatic [on|off]
  Activates the rain automatic.


• windAutomatic [on|off]
  Activates the wind automatic.


• sunPosition <value>
  Set the sun position.


• ventilatingMode [on|off]
  Activates the ventilating mode. If activated, the roller shutter will stop on ventilatingPosition when moving down.


• ventilatingPosition <value>
  Set the ventilating position.


• windMode [on|off]
  Activates the wind mode. If wind automatic and wind mode is activated, the roller shutter moves in windDirection and ignore any automatic or manual command.
  The wind mode ends 15 minutes after last activation automatically.


• windDirection [up|down]
  Movemet direction for wind mode.


• rainMode [on|off]
  Activates the rain mode. If rain automatic and rain mode is activated, the roller shutter moves in rainDirection and ignore any automatic command.
  The rain mode ends 15 minutes after last activation automatically.


• rainDirection [up|down]
  Movemet direction for rain mode.


• runningTime <sec>
  Set the motor running time.


• motorDeadTime [off|short|long]
  Set the motor dead time.


• reversal [on|off]
  Reversal of direction of rotation.


Switch/dimming actor commands:


• on [timer]
  Switch on the actor. If parameter timer is used the command will only be executed if timeAutomatic is activated.


• off [timer]
  Switch off the actor. If parameter timer is used the command will only be executed if timeAutomatic is activated.


• set extensions are supported.


• level <value> [timer]
  Set actor to a desired absolut level. If parameter timer is used the command will only be executed if timeAutomatic is activated.


• modeChange [on|off]
  Inverts the on/off state of a switch actor or change then modus of a dimming actor.


• stairwellFunction [on|off]
  Activates the stairwell function of a switch/dimming actor.


• stairwellTime <sec>
  Set the stairwell time.


Blind actor commands:


• blindsMode [on|off]
  Activates the blinds mode.


• slatPosition <value>
  Set the slat to a desired absolut level.


• defaultSlatPos <value>
  Set the default slat position.


• slatRunTime <msec>
  Set the slat running time.


• tiltInSunPos [on|off]
  Tilt slat after blind moved to sun position.


• tiltInVentPos [on|off]
  Tilt slat after blind moved to ventilation position.


• tiltAfterMoveLevel [on|off]
  Tilt slat after blind moved to an absolute position.


• tiltAfterStopDown [on|off]
  Tilt slat after stopping blind while moving down.


Thermostat commands:


• desired-temp <temp> [timer]
  Set desired temperature. <temp> must be between -40 and 80 Celsius, and precision is half a degree. If parameter timer is used the command will only be executed if timeAutomatic is activated.


• tempUp [timer]
  Increases the desired temperature by half a degree. If parameter timer is used the command will only be executed if timeAutomatic is activated.


• tempDown [timer]
  Decrease the desired temperature by half a degree. If parameter timer is used the command will only be executed if timeAutomatic is activated.


• temperatureThreshold[1|2|3|4] <temp>
  Set temperature threshold 1 to 4. <temp> must be between -40 and 80 Celsius, and precision is half a degree.


• actTempLimit [timer]
  Set desired temperature to the selected temperatureThreshold. If parameter timer is used the command will only be executed if timeAutomatic is activated.


Radiator Actuator commands:


• desired-temp <temp> [timer]
  Set desired temperature. <temp> must be between 4 and 35.5 Celsius, and precision is half a degree. If parameter timer is used the command will only be executed if timeAutomatic is activated.


• sendingInterval <minutes>
  Sets the transmission interval of the status responds.


SX5 commands:


• 10minuteAlarm [on|off]
  Activates the alarm sound of the SX5 when the door is left open for longer than 10 minutes.


• 2000cycleAlarm [on|off]
  Activates the alarm sounds of the SX5 when the SX5 has run 2000 cycles.


• automaticClosing [off|30|60|90|120|150|180|210|240]
  Set the automatic closing time of the SX5 (sec).


• openSpeed [11|15|19]
  Set the open speed of the SX5 (cm/sec).


• backJump [on|off]
  If activated the SX5 moves briefly in the respective opposite direction after reaching the end point.


• getConfig
  Sends a config request message to the weather sensor.


Weather sensor commands:


• getConfig
  Sends a configuration request message.


• getTime
  Sends a time request message.


• getWeather
  Sends a weather data request message.


• writeConfig
  Write the configuration back to the weather sensor.


• DCF [on|off]
  Switch the DCF receiver on or off.


• time
  Set the current system time to the weather sensor.


• interval <value>
  Set the interval time for automatic transmittion of the weather data.
  <value>: off or 1 to 100 minutes


• latitude <value>
  Set the latitude of the weather sensor position
  <value>: 0 to 90


• longitude <value>
  Set the longitude of the weather sensor position
  <value>: -90 to 90


• timezone <value>
  Set the time zone of the weather sensor
  <value>: 0 to 23


• triggerDawn <value1> ... [<value5>]
  Sets up to 5 trigger values for a dawn event.
  <value[n]>: off or 1 to 100 lux


• triggerDusk <value1> ... [<value5>]
  Sets up to 5 trigger values for a dusk event.
  <value[n]>: off or 1 to 100 Lux


• triggerRain [on|off]
  Switch the trigger of the rain event on or off.


• triggerSun <value1>:<sun1>:<shadow1>[:<temperature1>] ... [<value5>:<sun5>:<shadow5>[:<temperature5>]]
  Sets up to 5 trigger values for a sun event.
  <value[n]>: off or 1 to 100 kLux
  <sun[n]>: time to detect sun, 1 to 30 minutes
  <shadow[n]>: time to detect shadow, 1 to 30 minutes
  <temperature[n]>: optional minimum temperature, -5 to 26 °C


• triggerSunDirction <startangle1>:<width1> ... [<startangle5>:<width5>]
  If enabled, the respective sun event will only be triggered, if sunDirection is in the specified range.
  <startangle[n]>: off or 0 to 292.5 degrees (stepsize 22.5°)
  <width[n]>: 45 to 180 degrees (stepsize 45°)
  


• triggerSunHeight <startangle1>:<width1> ... [<startangle5>:<width5>]
  If enabled, the respective sun event will only be triggered, if sunHeight is in the specified range.
  <startangle[n]>: off or 0 to 65 degrees (stepsize 13°)
  <width[n]>: 26 or 52 degrees
  


• triggerTemperature <value1> ... [<value5>]
  Sets up to 5 trigger values for a temperature event.
  <value[n]>: off or -40 to 80 °C


• triggerWind <value1> ... [<value5>]
  Sets up to 5 trigger values for a wind event.
  <value[n]>: off or 1 to 31 m/s





Get
N/A

Attributes
• IODev


• timeout <sec>
  After sending a command to an actor, the actor must respond with its status within this time. If no status message is received, up to two getStatus commands are resend.
  Default 60s.


• toggleUpDown
  If attribute is set, a stop command is send instead of the up or down command if the roller shutter is moving.


• positionInverse
  If attribute is set, the position value of the roller shutter is inverted.


• positionDeviation
  Maximum deviation for displaying the desired position instead of the reported position.

DUOFERNSTICK

The DUOFERNSTICK is the fhem module for the Rademacher DuoFern USB stick.


Define
define <name> DUOFERNSTICK <device> <code>

<device> specifies the serial port to communicate with the DuoFern stick.
<code> specifies the radio code of the DuoFern stick.

The baud rate must be 115200 baud.
The code of the DuoFern stick must start with 6F.

Example:

define myDuoFernStick DUOFERNSTICK COM5@115200 6FEDCB
define myDuoFernStick DUOFERNSTICK /dev/serial/by-id/usb-Rademacher_DuoFern_USB-Stick_WR0455TN-if00-port0@115200 6FEDCB




Set

• pair
  Set the DuoFern stick in pairing mode for 60 seconds. Any DouFern device set into pairing mode in this time will be paired with the DuoFern stick.


• unpair
  Set the DuoFern stick in unpairing mode for 60 seconds. Any DouFern device set into unpairing mode in this time will be unpaired from the DuoFern stick.


• reopen
  Reopens the connection to the device and reinitializes it.


• statusBroadcast
  Sends a status request message to all DuoFern devices.


• remotePair <code>
  Activates the pairing mode on the device specified by the code.
  Some actors accept this command in unpaired mode up to two hours afte power up.


• raw <rawmsg>
  Sends a raw message.



Get
N/A

Attributes
N/A

DWD_OpenData

The Deutsche Wetterdienst (DWD) provides public weather related data via its Open Data Server. Any usage of the service and the data provided by the DWD is subject to the usage conditions on the Open Data Server webpage. An overview of the available content can be found at OpenData_weather_content.xls.

This module provides two elements of the available data:


• weather forecasts: Total lists of local forecasts of WMO, national and interpolated stations, all variables, 3, 9, 15, 21 UTC. More than 70 properties are available for worldwide POIs and the German DWD network. This data typically spans 10 days and is updated by the DWD every 6 hours.
  
  You can request forecasts for different stations in sequence using the command get forecast <station code> or for one station continuously using the attribute forecastStation. To get continuous mode for more than one station you need to create separate DWD_OpenData devices.
  
  In continuous mode the forecast data will be shifted by one day at midnight without requiring new data from the DWD.
  
  


• weather alerts: Warning status for Germany as union of referenced community/district warnings. This data is updated by the DWD as required.
  
  After updating the alerts cache using the command get updateAlertsCache <mode> you can request alerts for different warncells in sequence using the command get alerts <warncell id>. Setting the attribute alertArea will enable continuous mode. To get continuous mode for more than one station you need to create separate DWD_OpenData devices.
  
  Notes: This function is not suitable to rely on to ensure your safety! It will cause significant download traffic if used in continuous mode (more than 1 GB per day are possible). The device needs to keep all alerts for Germany in memory at all times to comply with the requirements of the common alerting protocol (CAP), even if only one warn cell is monitored. Depending on the weather activity this requires noticeable amounts of memory and CPU.

Installation notes:


• This module requires the additional Perl module XML::LibXML for weather alerts. It can be installed depending on your OS and your preferences (e.g. sudo apt-get install libxml-libxml-perl or using CPAN).


• Data is fetched from the DWD Open Data Server using the FHEM module HttpUtils. If you use a proxy for internet access you need to set the global attribute proxy to a suitable value in the format myProxyHost:myProxyPort.


• Verify that your FHEM time is correct by entering {localtime()} into the FHEM command line. If not, check the system time and timezone of your FHEM server and adjust appropriately. It may be necessary to add export TZ=`cat /etc/timezone` or something similar to your FHEM start script /etc/init.d/fhem or your system configuration file /etc/profile. If /etc/timezone does not exists or is undefined execute tzselect to find your timezone and write the result into this file. After making changes restart FHEM and enter {$ENV{TZ}} into the FHEM command line to verify. To fix the timezone temporarily without restarting FHEM enter {$ENV{TZ}='Europe/Berlin'} or something similar into the FHEM command line. Again use tzselect to fine a valid timezone name.


• The weekday of the forecast will be in the language of your FHEM system. Enter {$ENV{LANG}} into the FHEM command line to verify. If nothing is displayed or you see an unexpected language setting, add export LANG=de_DE.UTF-8 or something similar to your FHEM start script, restart FHEM and check again. If you get a locale warning when starting FHEM the required language pack might be missing. It can be installed depending on your OS and your preferences (e.g. dpkg-reconfigure locales, apt-get install language-pack-de or something similar).


• The digits in a warncell id of a communeunion or a district are mostly identical to an Amtliche Gemeindekennziffer if you strip of the 1st digit from the warncell id. You can lookup an Amtliche Gemeindekennziffer using the name of a communeunion or district e.g. at Statistische Ämter des Bundes und der Länder. Then add 8 for a communeunion or 1 or 9 for a district at the beginning and try to find an exact or near match in the Warncell-IDs for CAP alerts catalogue. This approach is an alternative to guessing the right warncell id by the name of a communeunion or district.


• Like some other Perl modules this module temporarily modifies the TZ environment variable for timezone conversions. This may cause unexpected results in multi threaded environments.


• The forecast reading names do not contain absolute days or hours to keep them independent of summertime adjustments. Forecast days are counted relative to "today" of the timezone defined by the attribute of the same name or the timezone specified by the Perl TZ environment variable if undefined.


• Starting on 17.09.2018 the forecast data from the DWD is no longer available in CSV format and is based on the KML format instead. While most of the properties of the CSV format are still available in KML format, their names have changed and you will have to adjust your existing installation accordingly.


• This module provides sun position related information that is not available from the DWD. The properties for sunrise, sunset and sun up are calculated for the upper solar limb at given altitude and typical atmospheric refraction.



Define

define <name> DWD_OpenData


Get


• get forecast [<station code>]
  Fetch forecast for a station from DWD and update readings. The station code is either a 5 digit WMO station code or an alphanumeric DWD station code from the MOSMIX station catalogue. If the attribute forecastStation is set, no station code must be provided.
  The operation is performed non-blocking.


• get alerts [<warncell id>]
  Set alert readings for given warncell id. A warncell id is a 9 digit numeric value from the Warncell-IDs for CAP alerts catalogue. Supported ids start with 8 (communeunion), 1 and 9 (district) or 5 (coast). If the attribute alertArea is set, no warncell id must be provided.
  If the alerts cache is empty or older than 15 minutes the cache is updated first and the operation is non-blocking. If the cache is valid the operation is blocking. If a cache update is already in progress the operation fails.
  To verify that alerts are provided for the warncell id you selected you should consult another source, wait for an alert situation and compare.


• get updateAlertsCache { communeUnions|districts|all }
  Fetch alerts to update the alerts cache. Note that 'coast' alerts are part of the 'communeUnion' cache data.
  The operation is performed non-blocking because it typically requires several seconds. If a cache update is already in progress the operation fails.
  This command can be used before querying several warncells in sequence or to force a higher update frequency than the built-in 15 minutes. Note that all DWD_OpenData devices share a single alerts cache so updating the cache via one of the devices is sufficient.


Attributes



• disable {0|1}, default: 0
  Disable fetching data.


• timezone <tz>, default: OS dependent
  IANA TZ string for date and time readings (e.g. "Europe/Berlin"), can be used to assume the perspective of a station that is in a different timezone or if your OS timezone settings do not match your local timezone. Alternatively you may use tzselect on the Linux command line to find a valid timezone string.


forecast related:


• forecastStation <station code>, default: none
  Setting forecastStation enables automatic updates every hour. The station code is either a 5 digit WMO station code or an alphanumeric DWD station code from the id column of the MOSMIX station catalogue.
  Note: When value is changed all existing forecast readings will be deleted.


• forecastDays <n>, default: 6
  Limits number of forecast days. Setting 0 will still provide forecast data for today. The maximum value is 9 (for today and 9 future days).


• forecastResolution {1|3|6}, default: 6 h
  Time resolution (number of hours between 2 samples).
  Note: When value is changed all existing forecast readings will be deleted.


• forecastProperties [<p1>[,<p2>]...], default: Tx, Tn, Tg, TTT, DD, FX1, Neff, RR6c, RRhc, Rh00, ww
  See the DWD forecast property defintions for more details.
  Notes:
  - Not all properties are available for all stations and for all hours.
  - If you remove a property from the list then already existing readings must be deleted manually in continuous mode.
  


• forecastWW2Text {0|1}, default: 0
  Create additional wwd readings containing the weather code as a descriptive text in German language.


• forecastPruning {0|1}, default: 0
  Search for and delete forecast readings that are more then one day older then other forecast readings of the same day. Pruning will be performed after a successful forecast update.
  Notes:
  - Intended to maintain data consistency e.g. when a forecast station changes the reporting hour of a forecast property.
  - Requires noticable extra computing resources and may cause side effects if your FHEM configuration depends on a reading that is deleted.
  


alert related:


• alertArea <warncell id>, default: none
  Setting alertArea enables automatic updates of the alerts cache every 15 minutes.
  A warncell id is a 9 digit numeric value from the Warncell-IDs for CAP alerts catalogue. Supported ids start with 7 and 8 (communeunion), 1 and 9 (district) or 5 (coast). To verify that alerts are provided for the warncell id you selected you should consult another source, wait for an alert situation and compare.
• alertLanguage [DE|EN], default: DE
  Language of descriptive alert properties.
• alertExcludeEvents <event code>, default: none
  Comma separated list of numeric events codes for which no alerts should be created.
  Only minor alerts may be suppressed. Use at your own risk!


Readings

The forecast readings are build like this:

fc<day>_[<sample>_]<property>

A description of the more than 70 properties available and their units of measurement can be found here. The units of measurement for temperatures and wind speeds are converted to °C and km/h respectively. Only a few choice properties are listed in the following paragraphs:


• day - relative day (0 .. 9) based on the timezone attribute where 0 is today


• sample - relative time (0 .. 3, 7 or 23) equivalent to multiples of 6, 3 or 1 hours UTC depending on the forecastResolution attribute


• day properties (typically for 06:00 station time, see raw data of station for actual time relation)
  • date - date based on the timezone attribute
  • weekday - abbreviated weekday based on the timezone attribute in the language of your FHEM system
  • Tn [°C] - minimum temperature of previous 12 hours
  • Tx [°C] - maximum temperature of previous 12 hours (typically at 18:00 station time)
  • Tm [°C] - average temperature of previous 24 hours
  • Tg [°C] - minimum temperature 5 cm above ground of previous 12 hours
  • PEvap [kg/m2] - evapotranspiration of previous 24 hours
  • SunD [s] - total sunshine duration of previous day


• hour properties
  • time - time based on the timezone attribute
  • TTT [°C] - dry bulb temperature at 2 meter above ground
  • Td [°C] - dew point temperature at 2 meter above ground
  • DD [°] - average wind direction 10 m above ground
  • FF [km/h] - average wind speed 10 m above ground
  • FX1 [km/h] - maximum wind speed in the last hour
  • SunD1 [s] - sunshine duration in the last hour
  • SunD3 [s] - sunshine duration in the last 3 hours
  • RR1c [kg/m2] - precipitation amount in the last hour
  • RR3c [kg/m2] - precipitation amount in the last 3 hours
  • RR6c [kg/m2] - precipitation amount in the last 6 hours
  • R600 [%] - probability of rain in the last 6 hours
  • RRhc [kg/m2] - precipitation amount in the last 12 hours
  • Rh00 [%] - probability of rain in the last 12 hours
  • RRdc [kg/m2] - precipitation amount in the last 24 hours
  • Rd00 [%] - probability of rain in the last 24 hours
  • ww - weather code (see WMO 4680/4677, SYNOP)
  • wwd - German weather code description
  • VV [m] - horizontal visibility
  • Neff [%] - effective cloud cover
  • Nl [%] - lower level cloud cover below 2000 m
  • Nm [%] - medium level cloud cover below 7000 m
  • Nh [%] - high level cloud cover above 7000 m
  • PPPP [hPa] - pressure equivalent at sea level
• extra day properties, not provided by the DWD
  • SunRise - time of sunrise based on the timezone attribute
  • SunSet - time of sunset based on the timezone attribute
• extra hour properties, not provided by the DWD
  • SunAz [°] - sun azimuth
  • SunEl [°] - sun elevation
  • SunUp - sun up (0: night, 1: day)

Additionally there are global forecast readings:
• fc_state - state of the last forecast update, possible values are 'updated' and 'error: ...'
• fc_station - forecast station code (WMO or DWD)
• fc_description - station description
• fc_coordinates - world coordinate and height of station
• fc_time - time the forecast was issued based on the timezone attribute
• fc_copyright - legal information, must be displayed with forecast data, see DWD usage conditions

The alert readings are ordered by onset and are build like this:

a_<index>_<property>


• index - alert index, starting with 0, total a_count, ordered by onset


• alert properties
  • category - 'Met' or 'Health'
  • event - numeric event code, see DWD documentation for details
  • eventDesc - short event description in selected language
  • eventGroup - event group, see DWD documentation for details
  • responseType - 'None' = no instructions, 'Prepare' = instructions, 'AllClear' = alert cleared
  • urgency - 'Immediate' = warning or 'Future' = information
  • severity - 'Minor', 'Moderate', 'Severe' or 'Extreme'
  • areaColor - RGB colour depending on urgency and severity, comma separated decimal triple
  • onset - start time of alert based on the timezone attribute
  • expires - end time of alert based on the timezone attribute
  • headline - headline in selected language, typically a combination of the properties urgency and event
  • description - description of the alert in selected language
  • instruction - safety instructions in selected language
  • area - numeric warncell id
  • areaDesc - description of area, e.g. 'Stadt Berlin'
  • altitude - min. altitude [m]
  • ceiling - max. altitude [m]


Additionally there are some global alert readings:


• a_state - state of the last alerts update, possible values are 'updated' and 'error: ...'
• a_time - time the last alerts update was downloaded, based on the timezone attribute
• a_count - number of alerts available for selected warncell id
• a_copyright - legal information, must be displayed with forecast data, see DWD usage conditions, not available if count is zero

Alerts should be considered active for onset <= now < expires and responseType != 'AllClear' independent of urgency.
Inactive alerts with responseType = 'AllClear' may provide relevant instructions.

Note that all alert readings are completely replaced and reindexed with each update!

Further information regarding the alert properties can be found in the documentation of the CAP DWS Profile.

Performance

Note that depending on your device configuration each forecast consists of quite a lot of readings and each reading update will cause a FHEM event that needs to be processed. Depending on your hardware and your FHEM configuration this will take several hundred milliseconds. If you need to improve overall performance you can limit the number of readings created by setting a) the attribute forecastProperties to the ones you actually use, b) the attribute forecastResolution to the highest value suitable for your purposes and c) the attribute forecastDays to the lowest number suitable for your purposes. To further reduce the event processing overhead you can set the attribute event-on-update-reading to a small list of important reading that really need events (e.g. state,fc_state,a_state). For almost the same reason be selective when creating a log device. If you use wildcards for all readings without filtering either at the source device with readingFnAttributes or at the destination device with a regexp you will get significant extra file IO when the readings are updated and quite a lot of data.

Dashboard

Creates a Dashboard in any group and/or devices can be arranged. The positioning may depend the objects and column width are made arbitrarily by drag'n drop. Also, the width and height of an object can be increased beyond the minimum size.

Note:
A group name in the dashboard respectively the attribute "dashboard_tabXgroups" equates the group name in FHEM and depict the devices which are contained in that group.

Define


• define <name> Dashboard
  
  Example:
  define anyViews Dashboard
  
  Bestpractice beginner configuration:
  define anyViews Dashboard
  attr anyViews dashboard_colcount 2
  attr anyviews dashboard_rowcentercolwidth 30,70
  attr anyViews dashboard_tab1groups <Group1>,<Group2>,<Group3>
  

Set


• set <name> activateTab <TabNo>
  The Tab with the defined number will be activated. If the attribute "dashboard_homeTab" is set, this defined tab will be reactivated at next browser refresh.
  
  
• set <name> lock
  Locks the Dashboard so that no position changes can be made.


• set <name> unlock
  Unlock the Dashboard,
  

Get
• get <name> config
  Delivers the configuration of the dashboard back.
  
  
• get <name> icon <icon name>
  Delivers the path and full name of the denoted icon back.
  
  Example:
  get <name> icon measure_power_meter
  


Attributes


• dashboard_backgroundimage
  Displays a background image for the complete dashboard. The image is not stretched in any way. So the size should match/extend the dashboard height/width. The relative path to "./www/images" has to be used.
  
  Example
  attr dashboard_backgroundimage dashboard/cam_video.PNG
  # File ./www/images/dashboard/cam_video.PNG is shown
  attr dashboard_backgroundimage cam_video.PNG
  # File ./www/images/cam_video.PNG is shown
  


• dashboard_backgroundimage
  Displays a background image for the complete dashboard. The image is not stretched in any way. So the size should match/extend the dashboard height/width. Only the filename has to be set.
  The file must be at any location below the directory "./www/images/".
  Suggestion: Create the directory "./www/images/dashboard" and put the image file into.
  
  Example
  attr dashboard_backgroundimage cam_video.PNG
  


• dashboard_colcount
  Number of columns in which the groups can be displayed. Nevertheless, it is possible to have multiple groups
  to be positioned in a column next to each other. This is depend on the width of columns and groups.
  Default: 1


• dashboard_debug
  Show Hiddenfields. Only for Maintainer's use.
  Default: 0


• dashboard_flexible
  If set to a value > 0, the widgets are not positioned in columns any more but can be moved freely to any position in the tab.
  The value for this parameter also defines the grid, in which the position "snaps in".
  Default: 0


• dashboard_hideGroupHeader
  If set, the header containing the group name and group icon above the pictured FHEM-group (see also dashboard_tab1groups) is hidden.
  Default: 0


• dashboard_homeTab
  Specifies which tab is activated. If it isn't set, the last selected tab will also be the active tab.
  Default: 1


• dashboard_row
  To select which rows are displayed. top only; center only; bottom only; top and center; center and bottom; top,center and bottom.
  Default: center


• dashboard_rowbottomheight
  Height of the bottom row in which the groups may be positioned.
  Default: 250


• dashboard_rowcenterheight
  Height of the center row in which the groups may be positioned.
  Default: 400


• dashboard_rowcentercolwidth
  About this attribute, the width of each column of the middle Dashboardrow can be set. It can be stored for each column a separate value. The values ​​must be separated by a comma (no spaces). Each value determines the column width in%! The first value specifies the width of the first column, the second value of the width of the second column, etc. Is the sum of the width greater than 100 it is reduced. If more columns defined as widths the missing widths are determined by the difference to 100. However, are less columns are defined as the values ​​of ignores the excess values​​.
  Default: 100


• dashboard_rowtopheight
  Height of the top row in which the groups may be positioned.
  Default: 250


• dashboard_showfullsize
  Hide FHEMWEB Roomliste (complete left side) and Page Header if Value is 1.
  Default: 0


• dashboard_showtabs
  Displays the Tabs/Buttonbar on top or bottom, or hides them. If the Buttonbar is hidden lockstate is "lock" is used.
  Default: tabs-and-buttonbar-at-the-top


• dashboard_showtogglebuttons
  Displays a Toogle Button on each Group do collapse.
  Default: 0


• dashboard_tab1backgroundimage
  Shows a background image for the tab. (also valid for further dashboard_tabXbackgroundimage)
  The image is not stretched in any way, it should therefore match the tab size or extend it. Only the filename has to be set.
  The file must be at any location below the directory "./www/images/".
  Suggestion: Create the directory "./www/images/dashboard" and put the image file into.
  
  Example
  attr dashboard_tab1backgroundimage cam_video.PNG
  


• dashboard_tab1colcount
  Number of columns for a specific tab in which the groups can be displayed. (also valid for further dashboard_tabXcolcount)
  Nevertheless, it is possible to have multiple groups to be positioned in a column next to each other. This depends on the width of columns and groups.
  Default: <dashboard_colcount>


• dashboard_tab1devices
  DevSpec list of devices that should appear in the tab. (also valid for further dashboard_tabXdevices)
  The format is:
  
  
  GROUPNAME:devspec1,devspec2,...,devspecX:ICONNAME
  
  
  ICONNAME is optional. Also GROUPNAME is optional. In case of missing GROUPNAME, the matching devices are not grouped, but shown as separate widgets without titles. For further details on the DevSpec format see DevSpec.


• dashboard_tab1groups
  Comma separated list of FHEM groups (see attribute "group" in a device) to be displayed in Tab. (also valid for further dashboard_tabXgroups)
  Each group can be given an icon for this purpose the group name, the following must be completed ":<icon>@<color>"
  
  Example:
  Light:Icon_Fisch@blue,AVIcon_Fisch@red,Single Lights:Icon_Fisch@yellow
  
  Additionally a group can contain a regular expression to show all groups matching a criteria.
  
  Example:
  .*Light.* to show all groups that contain the string "Light"


• dashboard_tab1icon
  Set the icon for a Tab. (also valid for further dashboard_tabXicon)
  There must exist an icon with the name ico.(png|svg) in the modpath directory. If the image is referencing an SVG icon, then you can use the @colorname suffix to color the image.


• dashboard_tab1name
  Title of Tab. (also valid for further dashboard_tabXname)


• dashboard_tab1sorting
  Contains the position of each group in Tab. (also valid for further dashboard_tabXsorting)
  Value is written by the "Set" button. It is not recommended to take manual changes.


• dashboard_noLinks
  No link generation to the detail view of the devices takes place.
  
  Note:
  Some device types deliver the links to their detail view integrated in the device. In such cases you have to deactivate the link generation inside of the device (for example in SMAPortalSPG).


• dashboard_webRefresh
  With this attribute the FHEMWEB-Devices are determined, which:
  
  
  • are activating the tab of a dashboard when the attribute "dashboard_homeTab" will be set
  • are positioning to the tab specified by command "set <name> activateTab"
  
  Default: all
  


• dashboard_width
  To determine the Dashboardwidth. The value can be specified, or an absolute width value (eg 1200) in pixels in% (eg 80%).
  Default: 100%

DbLog

With DbLog events can be stored in a database. SQLite, MySQL/MariaDB and PostgreSQL are supported databases.

Prereqisites

The Perl-modules DBI and DBD::<dbtype> are needed to be installed (use cpan -i <module> if your distribution does not have it).

On a debian based system you may install these modules for instance by:



DBI	: sudo apt-get install libdbi-perl
MySQL	: sudo apt-get install [mysql-server] mysql-client libdbd-mysql libdbd-mysql-perl (mysql-server only if you use a local MySQL-server installation)
SQLite	: sudo apt-get install sqlite3 libdbi-perl libdbd-sqlite3-perl
PostgreSQL	: sudo apt-get install libdbd-pg-perl



Preparations

At first you need to install and setup the database. The installation of database system itself is not described here, please refer to the installation instructions of your database.

Note:
In case of fresh installed MySQL/MariaDB system don't forget deleting the anonymous "Everyone"-User with an admin-tool if existing.

Sample code and Scripts to prepare a MySQL/PostgreSQL/SQLite database you can find in SVN -> contrib/dblog/db_create_<DBType>.sql.
(Caution: The local FHEM-Installation subdirectory ./contrib/dblog doesn't contain the freshest scripts!)

The default installation of the MySQL/MariaDB database provides for the use of the utf8_bin collation. With this setting, characters up to 3 bytes long can be stored, which is generally sufficient. However, if characters with a length of 4 bytes (e.g. emojis) are to be stored in the database, the utf8mb4 character set must be used.
Accordingly, in this case the MySQL/MariaDB database would be created with the following statement:


CREATE DATABASE `fhem` DEFAULT CHARACTER SET utf8mb4 COLLATE utf8mb4_bin;

In the configuration file (see below) utf8 support must be enabled with the key utf8 => 1 if utf8 is to be used.

The database contains two tables: current and history.
The latter contains all events whereas the former only contains the last event for any given reading and device. Please consider the DbLogType implicitly to determine the usage of tables current and history.

The columns have the following meaning:



TIMESTAMP	: timestamp of event, e.g. 2007-12-30 21:45:22
DEVICE	: device name, e.g. Wetterstation
TYPE	: device type, e.g. KS300
EVENT	: event specification as full string, e.g. humidity: 71 (%)
READING	: name of reading extracted from event, e.g. humidity
VALUE	: actual reading extracted from event, e.g. 71
UNIT	: unit extracted from event, e.g. %



create index
Due to reading performance, e.g. on creation of SVG-plots, it is very important that the index "Search_Idx" or a comparable index (e.g. a primary key) is applied. A sample code for creation of that index is also available in mentioned scripts of SVN -> contrib/dblog/db_create_<DBType>.sql.

The index "Search_Idx" can be created, e.g. in database 'fhem', by these statements (also subsequently):



MySQL	: CREATE INDEX Search_Idx ON `fhem`.`history` (DEVICE, READING, TIMESTAMP);
SQLite	: CREATE INDEX Search_Idx ON `history` (DEVICE, READING, TIMESTAMP);
PostgreSQL	: CREATE INDEX "Search_Idx" ON history USING btree (device, reading, "timestamp");


For the connection to the database a configuration file is used. The configuration is stored in a separate file to avoid storing the password in the main configuration file and to have it visible in the output of the list command.

The configuration file should be copied e.g. to /opt/fhem and has the following structure you have to customize suitable to your conditions (decomment the appropriate raws and adjust it):



    ####################################################################################
    # database configuration file
    #
    # NOTE:
    # If you don't use a value for user / password please delete the leading hash mark
    # and write 'user => ""' respectively 'password => ""' instead !
    #
    #
    ## for MySQL
    ####################################################################################
    #%dbconfig= (
    #    connection => "mysql:database=fhem;host=<database host>;port=3306",
    #    user => "fhemuser",
    #    password => "fhempassword",
    #    # optional enable(1) / disable(0) UTF-8 support
    #    # (full UTF-8 support exists from DBD::mysql version 4.032, but installing
    #    # 4.042 is highly suggested)
    #    utf8 => 1
    #);
    ####################################################################################
    #
    ## for PostgreSQL
    ####################################################################################
    #%dbconfig= (
    #    connection => "Pg:database=fhem;host=<database host>",
    #    user => "fhemuser",
    #    password => "fhempassword"
    #);
    ####################################################################################
    #
    ## for SQLite (username and password stay empty for SQLite)
    ####################################################################################
    #%dbconfig= (
    #    connection => "SQLite:dbname=/opt/fhem/fhem.db",
    #    user => "",
    #    password => ""
    #);
    ####################################################################################
    

If configDB is used, the configuration file has to be uploaded into the configDB !

Note about special characters:
If special characters, e.g. @,$ or % which have a meaning in the perl programming language are used in a password, these special characters have to be escaped. That means in this example you have to use: \@,\$ respectively \%.

DbLog specific events

DbLog generates events depending on the initialisation status of the DbLog device:



FRAME_INITIALIZED	- The basic framework is initialised. Blocking (Get) commands can be executed.
SUBPROC_INITIALIZED	- The SupProcess is ready for use. Non-blocking (set) commands and Data logging can be executed.
SUBPROC_DISCONNECTED	- The SupProcess was separated from the DB.
SUBPROC_STOPPED	- The SupProcess has been stopped.




Define


define <name> DbLog <configfilename> <regexp>

<configfilename> is the prepared configuration file.
<regexp> is identical to the specification of regex in the FileLog definition.

Example:
define myDbLog DbLog /etc/fhem/db.conf .*:.*
all events will stored into the database

After you have defined your DbLog-device it is recommended to run the configuration check


get <name> configCheck


This check reports some important settings and gives recommendations back to you if proposals are indentified.

DbLog distinguishes between the synchronous (default) and asynchronous logmode. The logmode is adjustable by the asyncMode. Since version 2.13.5 DbLog is supporting primary key (PK) set in table current or history. If you want use PostgreSQL with PK it has to be at lest version 9.5.

The content of VALUE will be optimized for automated post-processing, e.g. yes is translated to 1

The stored values can be retrieved by the following code like FileLog:

get myDbLog - - 2012-11-10 2012-11-10 KS300:temperature::

transfer FileLog-data to DbLog

There is the special module 98_FileLogConvert.pm available to transfer filelog-data to the DbLog-database.
The module can be downloaded here or from directory ./contrib instead. Further information and help you can find in the corresponding Forumthread .


Reporting and Management of DbLog database content

By using SVG database content can be visualized.
Beyond that the module DbRep can be used to prepare tabular database reports or you can manage the database content with available functions of that module.


Troubleshooting

If after successful definition the DbLog-device doesn't work as expected, the following notes may help:


• Have the preparatory steps as described in commandref been done ? (install software components, create tables and index)
• Was "get <name> configCheck" executed after definition and potential errors fixed or rather the hints implemented ?
• If configDB is used ... has the database configuration file been imported into configDB (e.g. by "configDB fileimport ./db.conf") ?
• When creating a SVG-plot and no drop-down list with proposed values appear -> set attribute "DbLogType" to "Current/History".

If the notes don't lead to success, please increase verbose level of the DbLog-device to 4 or 5 and observe entries in logfile relating to the DbLog-device. For problem analysis please post the output of "list <name>", the result of "get <name> configCheck" and the logfile entries of DbLog-device to the forum thread.



Set


• set <name> addCacheLine YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS|<device>|<type>|<event>|<reading>|<value>|[<unit>]
  
  
  In asynchronous mode a new dataset is inserted to the Cache and will be processed at the next database sync cycle.
  
  Example:
  set <name> addCacheLine 2017-12-05 17:03:59|MaxBathRoom|MAX|valveposition: 95|valveposition|95|%
  
  
  
• set <name> addLog <devspec>:<Reading> [Value] [CN=<caller name>] [!useExcludes]
  
  
  Inserts an additional log entry of a device/reading combination into the database.
  Any readings specified in the "DbLogExclude" attribute (in the source device) will not be logged, unless they are included in the "DbLogInclude" attribute or the addLog call was made with the "!useExcludes" option.
  
  

  <devspec>:<Reading>	The device can be specified as device specification.
  	The specification of "Reading" is evaluated as a regular expression.
  	If the reading does not exist and the value "Value" is specified, the reading
  	will be inserted into the DB if it is not a regular expression and a valid reading name.
  Value	Optionally, "Value" can be specified for the reading value.
  	If Value is not specified, the current value of the reading is inserted into the DB.
  CN=<caller name>	With the key "CN=" (Caller Name) a string, e.g. the name of the calling device,
  	can be added to the addLog call.
  	With the help of the function stored in the attribute valueFn
  	this key can be evaluated via the variable $CN.
  !useExcludes	addLog by default takes into account the readings excluded with the "DbLogExclude" attribute.
  	With the keyword "!useExcludes" the set attribute "DbLogExclude" is ignored.

  
  The database field "EVENT" is automatically filled with "addLog".
  There will be no additional event created in the system!
  
  Examples:
  set <name> addLog SMA_Energymeter:Bezug_Wirkleistung
  set <name> addLog TYPE=SSCam:state
  set <name> addLog MyWetter:(fc10.*|fc8.*)
  set <name> addLog MyWetter:(wind|wind_ch.*) 20 !useExcludes
  set <name> addLog TYPE=CUL_HM:FILTER=model=HM-CC-RT-DN:FILTER=subType!=(virtual|):(measured-temp|desired-temp|actuator)
  
  set <name> addLog USV:state CN=di.cronjob
  
  In the valueFn function the caller "di.cronjob" is evaluated via the variable $CN and depending on this the timestamp of this addLog is corrected:
  
  valueFn = if($CN eq "di.cronjob" and $TIMESTAMP =~ m/\s00:00:[\d:]+/) { $TIMESTAMP =~ s/\s([^\s]+)/ 23:59:59/ }


• set <name> clearReadings
  
  
  This function clears readings which were created by different DbLog-functions.
  
  
• set <name> commitCache
  
  
  In asynchronous mode (asyncMode=1), the cached data in memory will be written into the database and subsequently the cache will be cleared.
  Thereby the internal timer for the asynchronous mode Modus will be set new.
  
  
• set <name> configCheck
  
  
  Checks some important settings and give recommendations back to you if proposals are identified.
  (Note: This command is deprecated and will be removed in next releases. Use "get <name> configCheck" instead.)
  
  
• set <name> count
  
  
  Determines the number of records in the tables current and history and writes the results to the readings countCurrent and countHistory.
  
  Note
  During the runtime of the command, data to be logged are temporarily stored in the memory cache and written to the database written to the database after the command is finished.


• set <name> countNbl
  
  
  The function is identical to "set <name> count" and will be removed soon.


• set <name> deleteOldDays <n>
  
  
  Deletes records older than <n> days in table history. The number of deleted records is logged in Reading lastRowsDeleted.
  
  Note
  During the runtime of the command, data to be logged are temporarily stored in the memory cache and written to the database written to the database after the command is finished.


• set <name> eraseReadings
  
  
  This function deletes all readings except reading "state".
  
  
• set <name> exportCache [nopurge | purgecache]
  
  
  If DbLog is operated in asynchronous mode, the cache can be written to a text file with this command.
  The file is created by default in the directory (global->modpath)/log/. The destination directory can be changed with the expimpdir attribute.
  
  The name of the file is generated automatically and contains the prefix "cache_<name>" followed by the current timestamp.
  
  Example
  cache_LogDB_2017-03-23_22-13-55
  
  The "nopurge" and "purgecache" options determine whether or not the cache contents are to be deleted after the export. With "nopurge" (default) the cache content is preserved.
  The exportCacheAppend attribute determines whether with each export operation a new export file is created (default) or the cache content is appended to the latest existing export file.


• set <name> importCachefile <file>
  
  
  Imports a file written with "exportCache" into the database.
  The available files are searched by default in the directory (global->modpath)/log/ and a drop-down list is generated with the files are found.
  The source directory can be changed with the expimpdir attribute.
  Only the files matching the pattern "cache_<name>" are displayed.
  
  Example
  cache_LogDB_2017-03-23_22-13-55
  if the DbLog device is called "LogDB".
  
  After a successful import the file is prefixed with "impdone_" and no longer appears in the drop-down list. If a cache file is to be imported into a database other than the source database, the name of the DbLog device in the file name can be adjusted so that this file appears in the drop-down list.
  
  Note
  During the runtime of the command, data to be logged are temporarily stored in the memory cache and written to the database after the command is finished.


• set <name> listCache
  
  
  Lists the data cached in the memory cache.
  
  
• set <name> purgeCache
  
  
  In asynchronous mode (asyncMode=1), the in memory cached data will be deleted. With this command data won't be written from cache into the database.
  
  
• set <name> reduceLog <no>[:<nn>] [average[=day]] [exclude=device1:reading1,device2:reading2,...]
  
  
  Reduces historical records older than <no> days and (optionally) newer than <nn> days to one record (the first) per hour per device & reading.
  Inside device/reading SQL wildcards "%" and "_" can be used.
  
  The optional specification of 'average' or 'average=day' not only cleans the database, but also reduces all numerical values of an hour or a day are reduced to a single average value.
  
  Optionally, the last parameter "exclude=device1:reading1,device2:reading2,...." can be specified to exclude device/reading combinations from reduceLog.
  Instead of "exclude", "include=device:reading" can be specified as the last parameter in order to limit the SELECT query executed on the database. This reduces the RAM load and increases performance. The option "include" can only be specified with a device:reading combination.
  
  
  Examples:
  set <name> reduceLog 270 average include=Luftdaten_remote:%
  set <name> reduceLog 100:200 average exclude=SMA_Energymeter:Bezug_Wirkleistung
  
  Note
  During the runtime of the command, data to be logged is temporarily stored in the memory cache and written to the database after the command is finished.


• set <name> reopen [n]
  
  
  Closes the database and then immediately opens it again if no time [n] in seconds has been specified.
  If an optional delay time [n] in seconds has been specified, the connection to the database will be closed and reconnected only after [n] seconds have elapsed.
  During the time of the database closure, events to be logged are stored in the memory cache and written to the database after the reconnect.


• set <name> rereadcfg
  
  
  The configuration file is read in again.
  After reading, an existing database connection is terminated and re-established with the configured connection data.


• set <name> stopSubProcess
  
  
  A running SubProcess is terminated.
  As soon as a new subprocess is required by a Log operation, an automatic reinitialization of a process takes place.
  
  Note
  The re-initialization of the sub-process during runtime causes an increased RAM consumption until to a FHEM restart .


• set <name> userCommand <validSelectStatement>
  
  
  Executes simple SQL Select commands on the database.
  The result of the statement is written to the reading "userCommandResult". The result can be only one line.
  The execution of SQL commands in DbLog is deprecated. The DbRep evaluation module should be used for this purpose.
  
  Note
  During the runtime of the command, data to be logged are temporarily stored in the memory cache and written to the database written to the database after the command is finished.



Get


• get <name> configCheck
  
  
  A number of key settings are reviewed and recommendations are made if potential improvements are identified.


• get <name> ReadingsMaxVal[Timestamp] <Device> <Reading> <default>
  
  Determines the record with the largest value of the specified Device / Reading combination from the history table.
  Only the value or the combination of value and timestamp is returned as string "<Wert> , <Timestamp>".
  <default> specifies a defined return value if no value can be determined.
  
  Note:
  This database retrieval works blocking and influences FHEM if the database does not respond or not responds sufficiently fast. For non-blocking database queries is referred to the module DbRep. .


• get <name> ReadingsMinVal[Timestamp] <Device> <Reading> <default>
  
  
  Determines the record with the smallest value of the specified device / reading combination from the history table.
  Only the value or the combination of value and timestamp is returned as string "<Wert> , <Timestamp>".
  <default> specifies a defined return value if no value can be determined.
  
  Note:
  This database retrieval works blocking and influences FHEM if the database does not respond or not responds sufficiently fast. For non-blocking database queries is referred to the module DbRep.


• get <name> ReadingsAvgVal <Device> <Reading> <default>
  
  
  Determines the average value of the specified Device / Reading combination from the history table.
  The simple arithmetic average value is returned.
  <default> specifies a defined return value if no value can be determined.
  
  Note:
  This database retrieval works blocking and influences FHEM if the database does not respond or not responds sufficiently fast. For non-blocking database queries is referred to the module DbRep.


• get <name> ReadingsVal[Timestamp] <Device> <Reading> <default>
  
  
  Reads the last (newest) record stored in the history table of the specified Device / Reading combination.
  Only the value or the combination of value and timestamp is returned as string "<Wert> , <Timestamp>".
  <default> specifies a defined return value if no value can be determined.
  
  Note:
  This database retrieval works blocking and influences FHEM if the database does not respond or not responds sufficiently fast. For non-blocking database queries is referred to the module DbRep.


• get <name> ReadingsTimestamp <Device> <Reading> <default>
  
  
  Reads the timestamp of the last (newest) record stored in the history table of the specified Device/Reading combination and returns this value.
  <default> specifies a defined return value if no value is found in the database.
  
  Note:
  This database retrieval works blocking and influences FHEM if the database does not respond or not responds sufficiently fast. For non-blocking database queries is referred to the module DbRep.


• get <name> retrieve <querytype> <device|table> <reading> <from> <to> <offset> <limit>
  
  
  Reads data from the database table history and returns the results formatted as JSON.
  The query method or the desired query result is determined by the specified <querytype>.
  Each <querytype> may require additional parameters according to the following table. Parameters not entered must always be entered as "" if another parameter is entered afterwards.
  
  

  alldevices	Determines all devices stored in the database.
  allreadings	Determines all readings stored in the database for a specific device.
  	required parameters: <device>
  count	Returns the number of records of the specified table.
  	required parameters: <table> (history or current)
  fetchrows	Determines the stored records of a certain period.
  	The number of records in the defined period is returned as the "totalcount" key.
  	required parameters: <from>, <to>, <offset>, <limit>
  last	Lists the last 10 saved events.
  	possible parameters: <limit> (overwrites the default 10)
  timerange	Determines the stored data sets of the specified Device / Reading combination.
  	required parameters: <device>, <reading>, <from>, <to>
  hourstats	Calculates the statistics SUM, AVG, MIN, MAX, COUNT for one hour.
  	required parameters: <device>, <reading>, <from>, <to>
  daystats	Calculates the statistics SUM, AVG, MIN, MAX, COUNT for one day.
  	required parameters: <device>, <reading>, <from>, <to>
  weekstats	Calculates the statistics SUM, AVG, MIN, MAX, COUNT for one week.
  	required parameters: <device>, <reading>, <from>, <to>
  monthstats	Calculates the statistics SUM, AVG, MIN, MAX, COUNT for one month.
  	required parameters: <device>, <reading>, <from>, <to>
  yearstats	Calculates the statistics SUM, AVG, MIN, MAX, COUNT for one year.
  	required parameters: <device>, <reading>, <from>, <to>

  
  Note:
  This database retrieval works blocking and influences FHEM if the database does not respond or not responds sufficiently fast. For non-blocking database queries is referred to the module DbRep.
  
  Examples:
  • get LogSQLITE3 retrieve alldevices
  • get LogSQLITE3 retrieve allreadings MySTP_5000
  • get LogSQLITE3 retrieve last "" "" "" "" "" 50
  • get LogSQLITE3 retrieve count history
  • get LogSQLITE3 retrieve timerange MySTP_5000 etotal 2023-01-01_00:00:00 2023-01-25_00:00:00
  • get LogSQLITE3 retrieve fetchrows MySTP_5000 "" 2023-01-01_00:00:00 2023-01-25_00:00:00 0 100
  • get LogSQLITE3 retrieve fetchrows "" etotal 2023-01-01_00:00:00 2023-01-25_00:00:00 0 100
  • get LogSQLITE3 retrieve hourstats MySTP_5000 etotal 2023-01-01_00:00:00 2023-01-25_00:00:00


Get for the use of SVG plots


• get <name> <in> <out> <from> <to> <column_spec>
  
  Read data from the Database used by frontends to plot data without direct access to the Database.
  
  
  • <in>
    A parameter to establish compatibility with Filelog.
    In the definition of an SVG device this parameter corresponds to the specification of :<logfile> at the end of the definition.
    The following characteristics are allowed:
    
    • current: the values are read from the "current" table.
    • history: the values are read from the "history" table.
    • table_<table>: the values are read from the specified alternative table. The table (name) must be created in the database with lowercase letters.
      (example: table_energy, "energy" is the alternative table created in the database)
    • -: identical as "history
  
  
  • <out>
    A dummy parameter for FileLog compatibility. Setting by default to - to check the output for plot-computing.
    Set it to the special keyword all to get all columns from Database.
    • ALL: get all colums from table, including a header
    • Array: get the columns as array of hashes
    • INT: internally used by generating plots
    • -: default
  
  
  • <from> / <to>
    Used to select the data. Please use the following timeformat or an initial substring of it:
    
    YYYY-MM-DD_HH24:MI:SS
  
  
  • <column_spec>
    For each column_spec return a set of data separated by a comment line on the current connection.
    
    Syntax: <device>:<reading>:<default>:<fn>:<regexp>
    
    
    • <device>
      The name of the device. Case sensitive. Using a the joker "%" is supported.
    
    
    • <reading>
      The reading of the given device to select. Case sensitive. Using a the joker "%" is supported.
    
    
    • <default>
      no implemented yet
    
    
    • <fn> One of the following:
      • int
        Extract the integer at the beginning of the string. Used e.g. for constructs like 10%
      
      
      • int<digit>
        Extract the decimal digits including negative character and decimal point at the beginning og the string. Used e.g. for constructs like 15.7°C
      
      
      • delta-h / delta-d
        Return the delta of the values for a given hour or a given day. Used if the column contains a counter, as is the case for the KS300 rain column.
      
      
      • delta-ts
        Replaced the original value with a measured value of seconds since the last and the actual logentry.
      
      
    • <regexp>
      The string is evaluated as a perl expression. The regexp is executed before <fn> parameter.
      Note: The string/perl expression cannot contain spaces, as the part after the space will be considered as the next column_spec.
      
      Keywords
    • $val is the current value returned from the Database.
    • $ts is the current timestamp returned from the Database.
    • This Logentry will not print out if $val contains th keyword "hide".
    • This Logentry will not print out and not used in the following processing if $val contains th keyword "ignore".
  
  
  Examples:
  • get myDbLog - - 2012-11-10 2012-11-20 KS300:temperature
  
  
  • get myDbLog current ALL - - %:temperature
    you will get all actual readings "temperature" from all logged devices. Be careful by using "history" as inputfile because a long execution time will be expected!
  
  
  • get myDbLog - - 2012-11-10_10 2012-11-10_20 KS300:temperature::int1
    like from 10am until 08pm at 10.11.2012
  
  
  • get myDbLog - all 2012-11-10 2012-11-20 KS300:temperature
  
  
  • get myDbLog - - 2012-11-10 2012-11-20 KS300:temperature KS300:rain::delta-h KS300:rain::delta-d
  
  
  • get myDbLog - - 2012-11-10 2012-11-20 MyFS20:data:::$val=~s/(on|off).*/$1eq"on"?1:0/eg
    return 1 for all occurance of on* (on|on-for-timer etc) and 0 for all off*
  
  
  • get myDbLog - - 2012-11-10 2012-11-20 Bodenfeuchte:data:::$val=~s/.*B:\s([-\.\d]+).*/$1/eg
    Example of OWAD: value like this: "A: 49.527 % B: 66.647 % C: 9.797 % D: 0.097 V"
    and output for port B is like this: 2012-11-20_10:23:54 66.647
  
  
  • get DbLog - - 2013-05-26 2013-05-28 Pumpe:data::delta-ts:$val=~s/on/hide/
    Setting up a "Counter of Uptime". The function delta-ts gets the seconds between the last and the actual logentry. The keyword "hide" will hide the logentry of "on" because this time is a "counter of Downtime"

Get when used for webcharts


• get <name> <in> <out> <from> <to> <device> <querytype> <xaxis> <yaxis> <savename> <chartconfig> <pagingstart> <paginglimit>
  
  Query the Database to retrieve JSON-Formatted Data, which is used by the charting frontend (German Wiki: Neues Charting Frontend).
  
  
  • <name>
    The name of the defined DbLog, like it is given in fhem.cfg.
  
  
  • <in>
    Always set to -
  
  
  • <out>
    Is to be set to webchart.
  
  
  • <from> / <to>
    Used to select the data. Please use the following timeformat:
    
    YYYY-MM-DD_HH24:MI:SS
  
  
  • <device>
    A string which represents the device to query.
  
  
  • <querytype>
    A string which represents the method the query should use. Actually supported values are:
    getreadings to retrieve the possible readings for a given device
    getdevices to retrieve all available devices
    timerange to retrieve charting data, which requires a given xaxis, yaxis, device, to and from
    savechart to save a chart configuration in the database. Requires a given xaxis, yaxis, device, to and from, and a 'savename' used to save the chart
    deletechart to delete a saved chart. Requires a given id which was set on save of the chart
    getcharts to get a list of all saved charts.
    getTableData to get jsonformatted data from the database. Uses paging Parameters like start and limit.
    hourstats to get statistics for a given value (yaxis) for an hour.
    daystats to get statistics for a given value (yaxis) for a day.
    weekstats to get statistics for a given value (yaxis) for a week.
    monthstats to get statistics for a given value (yaxis) for a month.
    yearstats to get statistics for a given value (yaxis) for a year.
    
  
  
  • <xaxis>
    A string which represents the xaxis. It must be a valid field name, typically 'TIMESTAMP', of the history table.
  
  
  • <yaxis>
    A string representing the Y-axis to be set to the name of the reading to be evaluated.
  
  
  • <savename>
    A string which represents the name a chart will be saved with.
  
  
  • <chartconfig>
    A jsonstring which represents the chart to save.
  
  
  • <pagingstart>
    An integer used to determine the start for the sql used for query 'getTableData'.
  
  
  • <paginglimit>
    An integer used to set the limit for the sql used for query 'getTableData'.
  
  
  Examples:
  • get logdb - webchart "" "" "" getcharts
    Retrieves all saved charts from the Database
  
  
  • get logdb - webchart "" "" "" getdevices
    Retrieves all available devices from the Database
  
  
  • get logdb - webchart "" "" ESA2000_LED_011e getreadings
    Retrieves all available Readings for a given device from the Database
  
  
  • get logdb - webchart 2013-02-11_00:00:00 2013-02-12_00:00:00 ESA2000_LED_011e timerange TIMESTAMP day_kwh
    Retrieves charting data, which requires a given xaxis, yaxis, device, to and from
    Will ouput a JSON like this: [{'TIMESTAMP':'2013-02-11 00:10:10','VALUE':'0.22431388090756'},{'TIMESTAMP'.....}]
  
  
  • get logdb - webchart 2013-02-11_00:00:00 2013-02-12_00:00:00 ESA2000_LED_011e savechart TIMESTAMP day_kwh tageskwh
    Will save a chart in the database with the given name and the chart configuration parameters
  
  
  • get logdb - webchart "" "" "" deletechart "" "" 7
    Will delete a chart from the database with the given id

Attributes


• addStateEvent [0|1]
  
  
  As you probably know the event associated with the state Reading is special, as the "state: " string is stripped, i.e event is not "state: on" but just "on".
  Mostly it is desireable to get the complete event without "state: " stripped, so it is the default behavior of DbLog. That means you will get state-event complete as "state: xxx".
  In some circumstances, e.g. older or special modules, it is a good idea to set addStateEvent to "0". Try it if you have trouble with the default adjustment.
  


• asyncMode [0|1]
  
  
  This attribute sets the processing procedure according to which the DbLog device writes the data to the database.
  DbLog uses a sub-process to write the log data into the database and processes the data generally not blocking for FHEM.
  Thus, the writing process to the database is generally not blocking and FHEM is not affected in the case the database is not performing or is not available (maintenance, error condition).
  (default: 0)
  
  

  0 -	Synchronous log mode. The data to be logged is only briefly cached and immediately
  	written to the database.
  	Advantages:
  	In principle, the data is immediately available in the database.
  	Very little to no data is lost when FHEM crashes.
  	Disadvantages:
  	An alternative storage in the file system (in case of database problems) is not supported.
  1 -	Asynchroner Log-Modus. The data to be logged is first cached in a memory cache and written to the database
  	depending on a time interval or fill level of the cache.
  	Advantages:
  	The data is cached and will not be lost if the database is unavailable or malfunctions.
  	The alternative storage of data in the file system is supported.
  	Disadvantages:
  	The data is available in the database with a time delay.
  	If FHEM crashes, all data cached in the memory will be lost.



• commitMode [basic_ta:on | basic_ta:off | ac:on_ta:on | ac:on_ta:off | ac:off_ta:on]
  
  
  Change the usage of database autocommit- and/or transaction- behavior.
  If transaction "off" is used, not saved datasets are not returned to cache in asynchronous mode.
  This attribute is an advanced feature and should only be used in a concrete situation or support case.
  
  
  • basic_ta:on - autocommit server basic setting / transaktion on (default)
  • basic_ta:off - autocommit server basic setting / transaktion off
  • ac:on_ta:on - autocommit on / transaktion on
  • ac:on_ta:off - autocommit on / transaktion off
  • ac:off_ta:on - autocommit off / transaktion on (autocommit "off" set transaktion "on" implicitly)


• cacheEvents [2|1|0]
  
  

  0 -	No events are generated for CacheUsage.
  1 -	Events are generated for the Reading CacheUsage when a new record is added to the cache.
  2 -	Events are generated for the Reading CacheUsage when the write cycle to the database starts in
  	asynchronous mode. CacheUsage contains the number of records in the cache at this time.

  (default: 0)
  


• cacheLimit <n>
  
  
  In asynchronous logging mode the content of cache will be written into the database and cleared if the number <n> datasets in cache has reached. Thereby the timer of asynchronous logging mode will be set new to the value of attribute "syncInterval". In case of error the next write attempt will be started at the earliest after syncInterval/2.
  (default: 500)


• cacheOverflowThreshold <n>
  
  
  In asynchronous log mode, sets the threshold of <n> records above which the cache contents are exported to a file instead of writing the data to the database.
  The executed function corresponds to the set command "exportCache purgecache" and uses its settings.
  
  This attribute can be used to prevent an overload of the server memory if the database is not available for a longer period of time (e.g. in case of error or maintenance). If the attribute value is less than or equal to the value of the cacheLimit attribute, the value of cacheLimit is used for cacheOverflowThreshold.
  In this case the cache will always be written to a file instead of to the database if the threshold value has been reached.
  With this setting, the data can be written to one or more files in order to import them into the database at a later time with the set command "importCachefile".


• colEvent <n>
  
  
  The field length of database field EVENT will be adjusted. By this attribute the default value in the DbLog-device can be adjusted if the field length in the databse was changed nanually. If colEvent=0 is set, the database field EVENT won't be filled .
  Note:
  If the attribute is set, all of the field length limits are valid also for SQLite databases as noticed in Internal COLUMNS !
  


• colReading <n>
  
  
  The field length of database field READING will be adjusted. By this attribute the default value in the DbLog-device can be adjusted if the field length in the databse was changed nanually. If colReading=0 is set, the database field READING won't be filled .
  Note:
  If the attribute is set, all of the field length limits are valid also for SQLite databases as noticed in Internal COLUMNS !
  


• colValue <n>
  
  
  The field length of database field VALUE will be adjusted. By this attribute the default value in the DbLog-device can be adjusted if the field length in the databse was changed nanually. If colEvent=0 is set, the database field VALUE won't be filled .
  Note:
  If the attribute is set, all of the field length limits are valid also for SQLite databases as noticed in Internal COLUMNS !
  


• convertTimezone [UTC | none]
  
  
  UTC - the local timestamp of the event will be converted to UTC.
  (default: none)
  
  Note:
  The Perl modules 'DateTime' and 'DateTime::Format::Strptime' must be installed!


• DbLogType [Current|History|Current/History]
  
  
  This attribute determines which table or which tables in the database are wanted to use. If the attribute isn't set, the adjustment history will be used as default.
  The meaning of the adjustments in detail are:
  
  

  Current	Events are only logged into the current-table. The entries of current-table will evaluated with SVG-creation.
  History	Events are only logged into the history-table. No dropdown list with proposals will created with the SVG-creation.
  Current/History	Events will be logged both the current- and the history-table. The entries of current-table will evaluated with SVG-creation.
  SampleFill/History	Events are only logged into the history-table. The entries of current-table will evaluated with SVG-creation and can be filled up with a customizable extract of the history-table by using a DbRep-device command "set <DbRep-name> tableCurrentFillup" (advanced feature).

  
  
  Note:
  The current-table has to be used to get a Device:Reading-DropDown list when a SVG-Plot will be created.
  


• DbLogSelectionMode [Exclude|Include|Exclude/Include]
  
  
  This attribute, specific to DbLog devices, influences how the device-specific attributes DbLogExclude and DbLogInclude are evaluated. DbLogExclude and DbLogInclude are set in the source devices.
  If the DbLogSelectionMode attribute is not set, "Exclude" is the default.
  
  
  • Exclude: Readings are logged if they match the regex specified in the DEF. Excluded are the readings that match the regex in the DbLogExclude attribute.
    The DbLogInclude attribute is not considered in this case.
  
  
  • Include: Only readings are logged which are included via the regex in the attribute DbLogInclude are included.
    The DbLogExclude attribute is not considered in this case, nor is the regex in DEF.
  
  
  • Exclude/Include: Works basically like "Exclude", except that both the attribute DbLogExclude attribute and the DbLogInclude attribute are checked. Readings that were excluded by DbLogExclude, but are included by DbLogInclude are therefore still included in the logging.


• DbLogInclude Regex[:MinInterval][:force],[Regex[:MinInterval][:force]], ...
  
  
  The DbLogInclude attribute defines the readings to be stored in the database.
  The definition of the readings to be stored is done by a regular expression and all readings that match the regular expression are stored in the database.
  The optional <MinInterval> addition specifies that a value is saved when at least <MinInterval> seconds have passed since the last save.
  Regardless of the expiration of the interval, the reading is saved if the value of the reading has changed.
  With the optional modifier "force" the specified interval <MinInterval> can be forced to be kept even if the value of the reading has changed since the last storage.
  
  

          | Modifier |            within interval           | outside interval |
          |          | Value equal        | Value changed   |                  |
          |----------+--------------------+-----------------+------------------|
          | <none>   | ignore             | store           | store            |
          | force    | ignore             | ignore          | store            |
        

  
  Notes:
  The DbLogInclude attribute is propagated in all devices when DbLog is used.
  The DbLogSelectionMode attribute must be set accordingly to enable DbLogInclude.
  With the defaultMinInterval attribute a default for <MinInterval> can be specified.
  
  Example
  attr MyDevice1 DbLogInclude .*
attr MyDevice2 DbLogInclude state,(floorplantext|MyUserReading):300,battery:3600
attr MyDevice2 DbLogInclude state,(floorplantext|MyUserReading):300:force,battery:3600:force


• DbLogExclude Regex[:MinInterval][:force],[regex[:MinInterval][:force]] ...
  
  
  The DbLogExclude attribute defines the readings that should not be stored in the database.
  The definition of the readings to be excluded is done via a regular expression and all readings matching the regular expression are excluded from logging to the database.
  Readings that have not been excluded via the regex are logged in the database. The behavior of the storage is controlled with the following optional specifications.
  The optional <MinInterval> addition specifies that a value is saved when at least <MinInterval> seconds have passed since the last storage.
  Regardless of the expiration of the interval, the reading is saved if the value of the reading has changed.
  With the optional modifier "force" the specified interval <MinInterval> can be forced to be kept even if the value of the reading has changed since the last storage.
  
  

          | Modifier |            within interval           | outside interval |
          |          | Value equal        | Value changed   |                  |
          |----------+--------------------+-----------------+------------------|
          | <none>   | ignore             | store           | store            |
          | force    | ignore             | ignore          | store            |
        

  
  Notes:
  The DbLogExclude attribute is propagated in all devices when DbLog is used.
  The DbLogSelectionMode attribute can be set appropriately to disable DbLogExclude.
  With the defaultMinInterval attribute a default for <MinInterval> can be specified.
  
  Example
  attr MyDevice1 DbLogExclude .*
attr MyDevice2 DbLogExclude state,(floorplantext|MyUserReading):300,battery:3600
attr MyDevice2 DbLogExclude state,(floorplantext|MyUserReading):300:force,battery:3600:force


• DbLogValueFn {}
  
  
  If DbLog is used, the DbLogValueFn attribute is propagated in all devices. This attribute is set in the source devices and allows to change the values before logging or exclude the record from logging.
  
  The variables $TIMESTAMP, $READING, $VALUE (value of the reading) and $UNIT (unit of the reading value) can be accessed and modified before logging to the database.
  Read access is available to $DEVICE (the name of the source device), $EVENT, $LASTTIMESTAMP, and $LASTVALUE.
  
  The variables $LASTTIMESTAMP and $LASTVALUE contain time and value of the last logged record of $DEVICE / $READING.
  If $TIMESTAMP is to be changed, the form "yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss" must be followed. Otherwise the changed $TIMESTAMP variable will not be applied. By setting the variable "$IGNORE=1" the record is excluded from logging.
  
  The device specific function in "DbLogValueFn" is applied to the record before the function in the "valueFn" attribute of the DbLog device.
  
  Example
  

  attr SMA_Energymeter DbLogValueFn
  {
    if ($READING eq "Bezug_WirkP_Kosten_Diff") {
      $UNIT="Diff-W";
    }
    if ($READING =~ /Einspeisung_Wirkleistung_Zaehler/ && $VALUE < 2) {
      $IGNORE=1;
    }
  }
  

• dbSchema <schema>
  
  
  This attribute is available for database types MySQL/MariaDB and PostgreSQL. The table names (current/history) are extended by its database schema. It is an advanced feature and normally not necessary to set.
  


• defaultMinInterval <devspec>::<MinInterval>[::force],[<devspec>::<MinInterval>[::force]] ...
  
  
  With this attribute a default minimum interval for devspec is defined. If a defaultMinInterval is set, the logentry is dropped if the defined interval is not reached and the value vs. lastvalue is equal.
  If the optional parameter "force" is set, the logentry is also dropped even though the value is not equal the last one and the defined interval is not reached.
  Potential set DbLogExclude / DbLogInclude specifications in source devices are having priority over defaultMinInterval and are not overwritten by this attribute.
  This attribute can be specified as multiline input.
  
  Examples
  attr dblog defaultMinInterval .*::120::force
  # Events of all devices are logged only in case of 120 seconds are elapsed to the last log entry (reading specific) independent of a possible value change.
  attr dblog defaultMinInterval (Weather|SMA)::300
  # Events of devices "Weather" and "SMA" are logged only in case of 300 seconds are elapsed to the last log entry (reading specific) and the value is equal to the last logged value.
  attr dblog defaultMinInterval TYPE=CUL_HM::600::force
  # Events of all devices of Type "CUL_HM" are logged only in case of 600 seconds are elapsed to the last log entry (reading specific) independent of a possible value change.


• excludeDevs <devspec1>[#Reading],<devspec2>[#Reading],<devspec...>
  
  
  The device/reading-combinations "devspec1#Reading", "devspec2#Reading" up to "devspec.." are globally excluded from logging into the database.
  The specification of a reading is optional.
  Thereby devices are explicit and consequently excluded from logging without consideration of another excludes or includes (e.g. in DEF). The devices to exclude can be specified as device-specification.
  
  Examples
  attr <device> excludeDevs global,Log.*,Cam.*,TYPE=DbLog
  # The devices global respectively devices starting with "Log" or "Cam" and devices with Type=DbLog are excluded from database logging.
  attr <device> excludeDevs .*#.*Wirkleistung.*
  # All device/reading-combinations which contain "Wirkleistung" in reading are excluded from logging.
  attr <device> excludeDevs SMA_Energymeter#Bezug_WirkP_Zaehler_Diff
  # The event containing device "SMA_Energymeter" and reading "Bezug_WirkP_Zaehler_Diff" are excluded from logging.
  


• expimpdir <directory>
  
  
  If the cache content will be exported by exportCache command, the file will be written into or read from that directory. The default directory is "(global->modpath)/log/". Make sure the specified directory is existing and writable.
  
  Example
  attr <device> expimpdir /opt/fhem/cache/
  


• exportCacheAppend [1|0]
  
  
  If set, the export of cache ("set <device> exportCache") appends the content to the newest available export file. If there is no exististing export file, it will be new created.
  If the attribute not set, every export process creates a new export file . (default)
  


• insertMode [1|0]
  
  
  Toggles the insert mode of the database interface.
  
  

  0 -	The data is passed as an array to the database interface.
  	It is in most cases the most performant way to insert a lot of data into the database at once.
  1 -	The records are passed sequentially to the database interface and inserted into the DB.

  
  (default: 0)


• noSupportPK [1|0]
  
  
  Deactivates the support of a set primary key by the module.
  


• plotInputFieldLength <Ganzzahl>
  
  
  Width of the Plot Editor input fields for Device:Reading and Function.
  If the drop-down list is used as input help for Device:Reading, the width of the field is set automatically.
  (default: 40)


• SQLiteCacheSize <number of memory pages used for caching>
  
  
  The default is about 4MB of RAM to use for caching (page_size=1024bytes, cache_size=4000).
  Embedded devices with scarce amount of RAM can go with 1000 pages or less. This will impact the overall performance of SQLite.
  (default: 4000)


• SQLiteJournalMode [WAL|off]
  
  
  Determines how SQLite databases are opened. Generally the Write-Ahead-Log (WAL) is the best choice for robustness and data integrity.
  Since WAL about doubles the spaces requirements on disk it might not be the best fit for embedded devices using a RAM backed disk. off will turn the journaling off. In case of corruption, the database probably won't be possible to repair and has to be recreated!
  (default: WAL)


• syncEvents [1|0]
  
  
  events of reading syncEvents will be created.
  


• showproctime [1|0]
  
  
  If set, the reading "sql_processing_time" shows the required processing time (in seconds) for the SQL execution of the executed function. This does not consider a single SQL statement, but the sum of all executed SQL commands within the respective function is considered.
  The reading "background_processing_time" shows the time used in the SubProcess.


• showNotifyTime [1|0]
  
  
  If set, the reading "notify_processing_time" shows the required processing time (in seconds) for the processing of the DbLog notify function.
  The attribute is suitable for performance analyses and also helps to determine the differences in the time required for event processing in synchronous or asynchronous mode.
  (default: 0)
  
  Hinweis:
  The reading "notify_processing_time" generates a lot of events and burdens the system. Therefore, when using the the event generation should be limited by setting the attribute "event-min-interval" to e.g. "notify_processing_time:30".


• syncInterval <n>
  
  
  If the asynchronous mode is set in the DbLog device (asyncMode=1), this attribute sets the interval (seconds) for writing data to the database.
  (default: 30)


• suppressAddLogV3 [1|0]
  
  
  If set, verbose 3 Logfileentries done by the addLog-function will be suppressed.
  


• suppressUndef
  
  
  Suppresses all undef values when returning data from the DB via get.


• timeout <n>
  
  
  Sets the timeout value for the operations in the SubProcess in seconds.
  If a started operation (logging, command) is not finished within the timeout value, the running subprocess is terminated and a new process is started.
  (default: 86400)


• traceFlag <ALL|SQL|CON|ENC|DBD|TXN>
  
  
  Trace flags are used to enable tracing of specific activities within the DBI and drivers. The attribute is only used for tracing of errors in case of support.
  
  

  ALL	turn on all DBI and driver flags
  SQL	trace SQL statements executed (Default)
  CON	trace connection process
  ENC	trace encoding (unicode translations etc)
  DBD	trace only DBD messages
  TXN	trace transactions

  
  


• traceLevel <0|1|2|3|4|5|6|7>
  
  
  Switch on the tracing function of the module.
  Caution ! The attribute is only used for tracing errors or in case of support. If switched on very much entries will be written into the FHEM Logfile !
  
  

  0	Trace disabled. (Default)
  1	Trace top-level DBI method calls returning with results or errors.
  2	As above, adding tracing of top-level method entry with parameters.
  3	As above, adding some high-level information from the driver and some internal information from the DBI.
  4	As above, adding more detailed information from the driver.
  5-7	As above but with more and more internal information.

  
  


• useCharfilter [0|1]
  
  
  If set, only ASCII characters from 32 to 126 are accepted in event. That are the characters " A-Za-z0-9!"#$%&'()*+,-.\/:;<=>?@[\\]^_`{|}~" .
  Mutated vowel and "€" are transcribed (e.g. ä to ae). (default: 0).
  


• valueFn {}
  
  
  This attribute is set in the DbLog device and allows to modify the values before logging or exclude the record from logging.
  
  It is possible to access the variables $TIMESTAMP, $DEVICE (source device), $DEVICETYPE, $READING, $VALUE (reading value) and $UNIT (unit of reading value) can be accessed and modified before logging to the database.
  Read access exists to $EVENT, $LASTTIMESTAMP and $LASTVALUE.
  
  The variables $LASTTIMESTAMP and $LASTVALUE contain time and value of the last logged record of $DEVICE / $READING.
  If $TIMESTAMP is to be changed, the form "yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss" must be followed. Otherwise the changed $TIMESTAMP variable will not be applied. By setting the variable "$IGNORE=1" the record is excluded from logging.
  
  Examples
  attr <device> valueFn {if ($DEVICE eq "living_Clima" && $VALUE eq "off" ){$VALUE=0;} elsif ($DEVICE eq "e-power"){$VALUE= sprintf "%.1f", $VALUE;}}
  # change value "off" to "0" of device "living_Clima" and rounds value of e-power to 1f
  
  attr <device> valueFn {if ($DEVICE eq "SMA_Energymeter" && $READING eq "state"){$IGNORE=1;}}
  # don't log the dataset of device "SMA_Energymeter" if the reading is "state"
  
  attr <device> valueFn {if ($DEVICE eq "Dum.Energy" && $READING eq "TotalConsumption"){$UNIT="W";}}
  # set the unit of device "Dum.Energy" to "W" if reading is "TotalConsumption"
  
  


• verbose4Devs <device1>,<device2>,<device..>
  
  
  If verbose level 4/5 is used, only output of devices set in this attribute will be reported in FHEM central logfile. If this attribute isn't set, output of all relevant devices will be reported if using verbose level 4/5. The given devices are evaluated as Regex.
  
  Example
  attr <device> verbose4Devs sys.*,.*5000.*,Cam.*,global
  # The devices starting with "sys", "Cam" respectively devices are containing "5000" in its name and the device "global" will be reported in FHEM central Logfile if verbose=4 is set.
  

DbRep

The purpose of this module is browsing and managing the content of DbLog-databases. The searchresults can be evaluated concerning to various aggregations and the appropriate Readings will be filled. The data selection will been done by declaration of device, reading and the time settings of selection-begin and selection-end.

Almost all database operations are implemented nonblocking. If there are exceptions it will be suggested to. Optional the execution time of SQL-statements in background can also be determined and provided as reading. (refer to attributes).
All existing readings will be deleted when a new operation starts. By attribute "readingPreventFromDel" a comma separated list of readings which are should prevent from deletion can be provided.

Currently the following functions are provided:


• Selection of all datasets within adjustable time limits.
• Exposure of datasets of a Device/Reading-combination within adjustable time limits.
• Selection of datasets by usage of dynamically calclated time limits at execution time.
• Highlighting doublets when select and display datasets (fetchrows)
• Calculation of quantity of datasets of a Device/Reading-combination within adjustable time limits and several aggregations.
• The calculation of summary-, difference-, maximum-, minimum- and averageValues of numeric readings within adjustable time limits and several aggregations.
• write back results of summary-, difference-, maximum-, minimum- and average calculation into the database
• The deletion of datasets. The containment of deletion can be done by Device and/or Reading as well as fix or dynamically calculated time limits at execution time.
• export of datasets to file (CSV-format).
• import of datasets from file (CSV-Format).
• rename of device/readings in datasets
• change of reading values in the database (changeValue)
• automatic rename of device names in datasets and other DbRep-definitions after FHEM "rename" command (see DbRep-Agent)
• Execution of arbitrary user specific SQL-commands (non-blocking)
• Execution of arbitrary user specific SQL-commands (blocking) for usage in user own code (sqlCmdBlocking)
• creation of backups of the database in running state non-blocking (MySQL, SQLite)
• transfer dumpfiles to a FTP server after backup incl. version control
• restore of SQLite- and MySQL-Dumps non-blocking
• optimize the connected database (optimizeTables, vacuum)
• report of existing database processes (MySQL)
• purge content of current-table
• fill up the current-table with a (tunable) extract of the history-table
• delete consecutive datasets with different timestamp but same values (clearing up consecutive doublets)
• Repair of a corrupted SQLite database ("database disk image is malformed")
• transmission of datasets from source database into another (Standby) database (syncStandby)
• reduce the amount of datasets in database (reduceLog)
• delete of duplicate records (delDoublets)
• drop and (re)create of indexes which are needed for DbLog and DbRep (index)

To activate the function Autorename the attribute "role" has to be assigned to a defined DbRep-device. The standard role after DbRep definition is "Client". Please read more in section DbRep-Agent about autorename function.

DbRep provides a UserExit function. With this interface the user can execute own program code dependent from free definable Reading/Value-combinations (Regex). The interface works without respectively independent from event generation. Further informations you can find as described at userExitFn attribute.

Once a DbRep-Device is defined, the Perl function DbReadingsVal provided as well as and the FHEM command dbReadingsVal. With this function you can, similar to the well known ReadingsVal, get a reading value from database.
The function is executed blocking with a standard timeout of 10 seconds to prevent a permanent blocking of FHEM. The timeout is adjustable with the attribute timeout.


The command syntax for the Perl function is:

DbReadingsVal("<name>","<device:reading>","<timestamp>","<default>")

Example:


  $ret = DbReadingsVal("Rep.LogDB1","MyWetter:temperature","2018-01-13_08:00:00","");
  attr <name> userReadings oldtemp {DbReadingsVal("Rep.LogDB1","MyWetter:temperature","2018-04-13_08:00:00","")}
  attr <name> userReadings todayPowerIn
    {
       my ($sec,$min,$hour,$mday,$month,$year,$wday,$yday,$isdst) = localtime(gettimeofday());
       $month++;
       $year+=1900;
       my $today = sprintf('%04d-%02d-%02d', $year,$month,$mday);
       DbReadingsVal("Rep.LogDB1","SMA_Energymeter:Bezug_Wirkleistung_Zaehler",$today."_00:00:00",0)
    }
  

The command syntax for the FHEM command is:

dbReadingsVal <name> <device:reading> <timestamp> <default>

Example:
dbReadingsVal Rep.LogDB1 MyWetter:temperature 2018-01-13_08:00:00 0



<name>	: name of the DbRep-Device to request
<device:reading>	: device:reading whose value is to deliver
<timestamp>	: timestamp of reading whose value is to deliver (*) in format "YYYY-MM-DD_hh:mm:ss"
<default>	: default value if no reading value can be retrieved


(*) If no value can be retrieved at the <timestamp> exactly requested, the chronological most convenient reading value is delivered back.

FHEM-Forum:
Modul 93_DbRep - Reporting and Management of database content (DbLog).

Preparations

The module requires the usage of a DbLog instance and the credentials of the database definition will be used.
Only the content of table "history" will be included if isn't other is explained.

Overview which other Perl-modules DbRep is using:

Net::FTP (only if FTP-Transfer after database dump is used)
Net::FTPSSL (only if FTP-Transfer with encoding after database dump is used)
POSIX
Time::HiRes
Time::Local
Scalar::Util
DBI
Color (FHEM-module)
IO::Compress::Gzip
IO::Uncompress::Gunzip
Blocking (FHEM-module)

Definition

define <name> DbRep <name of DbLog-instance>

(<name of DbLog-instance> - name of the database instance which is wanted to analyze needs to be inserted)

Due to a good operation performance, the database should contain the index "Report_Idx". Please create it after the DbRep device definition by the following set command if it isn't already existing on the database:


set <name> index recreate_Report_Idx

Set

Currently following set-commands are included. They are used to trigger the evaluations and define the evaluation option option itself. The criteria of searching database content and determine aggregation is carried out by setting several attributes.

Note:
If you are in detail view it could be necessary to refresh the browser to see the result of operation as soon in DeviceOverview section "state = done" will be shown.


• adminCredentials <User> <Passwort> - Save a user / password for the privileged respectively administrative database access. The user is required for database operations which has to be executed by a privileged user. Please see also attribute useAdminCredentials.
  (only valid if database type is MYSQL and DbRep-type "Client")


• averageValue [display | writeToDB | writeToDBSingle | writeToDBSingleStart | writeToDBInTime]
  
  Calculates an average value of the database field "VALUE" in the time limits of the possible time.*-attributes.
  
  The reading to be evaluated must be specified in the attribute reading must be specified. With the attribute averageCalcForm the calculation variant is used for Averaging defined.
  
  If none or the option display is specified, the results are only displayed. With the options writeToDB, writeToDBSingle, writeToDBSingleStart or writeToDBInTime the calculation results are written with a new reading name into the database.
  
  

  writeToDB	: writes one value each with the time stamps XX:XX:01 and XX:XX:59 within the respective evaluation period
  writeToDBSingle	: writes only one value with the time stamp XX:XX:59 at the end of an evaluation period
  writeToDBSingleStart	: writes only one value with the time stamp XX:XX:01 at the begin of an evaluation period
  writeToDBInTime	: writes a value at the beginning and end of the time limits of an evaluation period

  
  The new reading name is formed from a prefix and the original reading name, where the original reading name can be replaced by the attribute "readingNameMap". The prefix consists of the educational function and the aggregation.
  The timestamp of the new readings in the database is determined by the set aggregation period if no clear time of the result can be determined. The field "EVENT" is filled with "calculated".
  
  
  Example of building a new reading name from the original reading "totalpac":
  avgam_day_totalpac
  # <creation function>_<aggregation>_<original reading>
  
  
  Summarized the relevant attributes to control this function are:
  
  

  averageCalcForm	: choose the calculation variant for average determination
  device	: include or exclude <device> from selection
  executeBeforeProc	: execution of FHEM command (or Perl-routine) before operation
  executeAfterProc	: execution of FHEM command (or Perl-routine) after operation
  reading	: include or exclude <reading> from selection
  time.*	: a number of attributes to limit selection by time
  valueFilter	: an additional REGEXP to control the record selection. The REGEXP is applied to the database field 'VALUE'.

  
  
  
• cancelDump - stops a running database dump.


• changeValue old="<old String>" new="<new String>"
  
  Changes the stored value of a reading.
  If the selection is limited to certain device/reading combinations by the attributes device or reading, they are taken into account in the same way as set time limits (time.* attributes).
  If these constraints are missing, the entire database is searched and the specified value is is changed.
  
  The "string" can be:
  

  <old String> :	a simple string with/without spaces, e.g. "OL 12"
  	a string with use of SQL wildcard, e.g. "%OL%"
  <new String> :	a simple string with/without spaces, e.g. "12 kWh"
  	Perl code enclosed in {"..."} including quotes, e.g. {"($VALUE,$UNIT) = split(" ",$VALUE)"}
  	The variables $VALUE and $UNIT are passed to the Perl expression. They can be changed
  	within the Perl code. The returned value of $VALUE and $UNIT is stored
  	in the VALUE or UNIT field of the record.

  
  Examples:
  set <name> changeValue old="OL" new="12 OL"
  # the old field value "OL" is changed to "12 OL".
  
  set <name> changeValue old="%OL%" new="12 OL"
  # contains the field VALUE the substring "OL", it is changed to "12 OL".
  
  set <name> changeValue old="12 kWh" new={"($VALUE,$UNIT) = split(" ",$VALUE)"}
  # the old field value "12 kWh" is splitted to VALUE=12 and UNIT=kWh and saved into the database fields
  
  set <name> changeValue old="24%" new={"$VALUE = (split(" ",$VALUE))[0]"}
  # if the old field value begins with "24", it is splitted and VALUE=24 is saved (e.g. "24 kWh")
  
  Summarized the relevant attributes to control function changeValue are:
  
  

  device	: include or exclude <device> from selection
  reading	: include or exclude <reading> from selection
  time.*	: a number of attributes to limit selection by time
  executeBeforeProc	: execute a FHEM command (or Perl-routine) before start of changeValue
  executeAfterProc	: execute a FHEM command (or Perl-routine) after changeValue is finished
  valueFilter	: an additional REGEXP to control the record selection. The REGEXP is applied to the database field 'VALUE'.

  
  
  
• countEntries [history|current] - provides the number of table entries (default: history) between time period set by time.* -attributes if set. If time.* attributes not set, all entries of the table will be count. The device and reading can be used to limit the evaluation.
  By default the summary of all counted datasets, labeled by "ALLREADINGS", will be created. If the attribute "countEntriesDetail" is set, the number of every reading is reported additionally.
  
  The relevant attributes for this function are:
  
  

  aggregation	: aggregatiion/grouping of time intervals
  countEntriesDetail	: detailed report the count of datasets (per reading)
  device	: include or exclude <device> from selection
  reading	: include or exclude <reading> from selection
  executeBeforeProc	: execution of FHEM command (or Perl-routine) before operation
  executeAfterProc	: execution of FHEM command (or Perl-routine) after operation
  time.*	: a number of attributes to limit selection by time
  valueFilter	: an additional REGEXP to control the record selection. The REGEXP is applied to the database field 'VALUE'.

  
  
  
• delDoublets [adviceDelete | delete] - show respectively delete duplicate/multiple datasets. Therefore the fields TIMESTAMP, DEVICE, READING and VALUE of records are compared.
  The attributes to define the scope of aggregation, time period, device and reading are considered. If attribute aggregation is not set or set to "no", it will change to the default aggregation period "day".
  
  

  adviceDelete	: simulates the datasets to delete in database (nothing will be deleted !)
  delete	: deletes the doublets

  
  Due to security reasons the attribute allowDeletion needs to be set for execute the "delete" option.
  The amount of datasets to show by commands "delDoublets adviceDelete" is initially limited and can be adjusted by limit attribute. The adjustment of "limit" has no impact to the "delDoublets delete" function, but affects ONLY the display of the data.
  Before and after this "delDoublets" it is possible to execute a FHEM command or Perl script (please see attributes executeBeforeProc, executeAfterProc).
  
  
  Example:
  
  Output of records to delete included their amount by "delDoublets adviceDelete":
  
  2018-11-07_14-11-38__Dum.Energy__T 260.9_|_2
  2018-11-07_14-12-37__Dum.Energy__T 260.9_|_2
  2018-11-07_14-15-38__Dum.Energy__T 264.0_|_2
  2018-11-07_14-16-37__Dum.Energy__T 264.0_|_2
  
  In the created readings after "_|_" the amount of the appropriate records to delete is shown. The records are deleted by command "delDoublets delete".
  
  Zusammengefasst sind die zur Steuerung dieser Funktion relevanten Attribute:
  
  

  allowDeletion	: needs to be set to execute the delete option
  aggregation	: choose the aggregation period
  limit	: limits ONLY the count of datasets to display
  device	: include or exclude <device> from selection
  reading	: include or exclude <reading> from selection
  executeBeforeProc	: execute a FHEM command (or Perl-routine) before start of the function
  executeAfterProc	: execute a FHEM command (or Perl-routine) after the function is finished
  time.*	: a number of attributes to limit selection by time
  valueFilter	: an additional REGEXP to control the record selection. The REGEXP is applied to the database field 'VALUE'.

  
  
  
• delEntries [<no>[:<nn>]] - deletes all database entries or only the database entries specified by attributes device and/or reading.
  
  The time limits are considered according to the available time.*-attributes:
  
  
  "timestamp_begin" is set -> deletes db entries from this timestamp until current date/time
  "timestamp_end" is set -> deletes db entries until this timestamp
  both Timestamps are set -> deletes db entries between these timestamps
  "timeOlderThan" is set -> delete entries older than current time minus "timeOlderThan"
  "timeDiffToNow" is set -> delete db entries from current time minus "timeDiffToNow" until now
  
  
  Due to security reasons the attribute allowDeletion needs to be set to unlock the delete-function.
  Time limits (days) can be specified as an option. In this case, any time.*-attributes set are overmodulated. Records older than <no> days and (optionally) newer than <nn> days are considered.
  
  The relevant attributes to control function changeValue delEntries are:
  
  

  allowDeletion	: unlock the delete function
  device	: include or exclude <device> from selection
  reading	: include or exclude <reading> from selection
  time.*	: a number of attributes to limit selection by time
  executeBeforeProc	: execute a FHEM command (or Perl-routine) before start of delEntries
  executeAfterProc	: execute a FHEM command (or Perl-routine) after delEntries is finished

  
  
  


• delSeqDoublets [adviceRemain | adviceDelete | delete] - show respectively delete identical sequentially datasets. Therefore Device,Reading and Value of the sequentially datasets are compared. Not deleted are the first und the last dataset of a aggregation period (e.g. hour,day,week and so on) as well as the datasets before or after a value change (database field VALUE).
  The attributes to define the scope of aggregation, time period, device and reading are considered. If attribute aggregation is not set or set to "no", it will change to the default aggregation period "day". For datasets containing numerical values it is possible to determine a variance with attribute seqDoubletsVariance. Up to this value consecutive numerical datasets are handled as identical and should be deleted.
  
  

  adviceRemain	: simulates the remaining datasets in database after delete-operation (nothing will be deleted !)
  adviceDelete	: simulates the datasets to delete in database (nothing will be deleted !)
  delete	: deletes the consecutive doublets (see example)

  
  Due to security reasons the attribute allowDeletion needs to be set for execute the "delete" option.
  The amount of datasets to show by commands "delSeqDoublets adviceDelete", "delSeqDoublets adviceRemain" is initially limited (default: 1000) and can be adjusted by attribute limit. The adjustment of "limit" has no impact to the "delSeqDoublets delete" function, but affects ONLY the display of the data.
  Before and after this "delSeqDoublets" it is possible to execute a FHEM command or Perl-script (please see executeBeforeProc and executeAfterProc).
  
  
  Example - the remaining datasets after executing delete-option are are marked as bold:
  
  
  2017-11-25_00-00-05__eg.az.fridge_Pwr__power 0
  2017-11-25_00-02-26__eg.az.fridge_Pwr__power 0
  2017-11-25_00-04-33__eg.az.fridge_Pwr__power 0
  2017-11-25_01-06-10__eg.az.fridge_Pwr__power 0
  2017-11-25_01-08-21__eg.az.fridge_Pwr__power 0
  2017-11-25_01-08-59__eg.az.fridge_Pwr__power 60.32
  2017-11-25_01-11-21__eg.az.fridge_Pwr__power 56.26
  2017-11-25_01-27-54__eg.az.fridge_Pwr__power 6.19
  2017-11-25_01-28-51__eg.az.fridge_Pwr__power 0
  2017-11-25_01-31-00__eg.az.fridge_Pwr__power 0
  2017-11-25_01-33-59__eg.az.fridge_Pwr__power 0
  2017-11-25_02-39-29__eg.az.fridge_Pwr__power 0
  2017-11-25_02-41-18__eg.az.fridge_Pwr__power 105.28
  2017-11-25_02-41-26__eg.az.fridge_Pwr__power 61.52
  2017-11-25_03-00-06__eg.az.fridge_Pwr__power 47.46
  2017-11-25_03-00-33__eg.az.fridge_Pwr__power 0
  2017-11-25_03-02-07__eg.az.fridge_Pwr__power 0
  2017-11-25_23-37-42__eg.az.fridge_Pwr__power 0
  2017-11-25_23-40-10__eg.az.fridge_Pwr__power 0
  2017-11-25_23-42-24__eg.az.fridge_Pwr__power 1
  2017-11-25_23-42-24__eg.az.fridge_Pwr__power 1
  2017-11-25_23-45-27__eg.az.fridge_Pwr__power 1
  2017-11-25_23-47-07__eg.az.fridge_Pwr__power 0
  2017-11-25_23-55-27__eg.az.fridge_Pwr__power 0
  2017-11-25_23-48-15__eg.az.fridge_Pwr__power 0
  2017-11-25_23-50-21__eg.az.fridge_Pwr__power 59.1
  2017-11-25_23-55-14__eg.az.fridge_Pwr__power 52.31
  2017-11-25_23-58-09__eg.az.fridge_Pwr__power 51.73
  
  
  Summarized the relevant attributes to control this function are:
  
  

  allowDeletion	: needs to be set to execute the delete option
  aggregation	: choose the aggregation period
  limit	: limits ONLY the count of datasets to display
  device	: include or exclude <device> from selection
  reading	: include or exclude <reading> from selection
  executeBeforeProc	: execute a FHEM command (or Perl-routine) before start of the function
  executeAfterProc	: execute a FHEM command (or Perl-routine) after the function is finished
  seqDoubletsVariance	: Up to this value consecutive numerical datasets are handled as identical and should be deleted
  time.*	: a number of attributes to limit selection by time
  valueFilter	: an additional REGEXP to control the record selection. The REGEXP is applied to the database field 'VALUE'.




• deviceRename <old_name>,<new_name> - renames the device name of a device inside the connected database (Internal DATABASE). The devicename will allways be changed in the entire database. Possibly set time limits or restrictions by device and/or reading will not be considered.
  
  
  Example:
  set <name> deviceRename ST_5000,ST5100
  # The amount of renamed device names (datasets) will be displayed in reading "device_renamed".
  # If the device name to be renamed was not found in the database, a WARNUNG will appear in reading "device_not_renamed".
  # Appropriate entries will be written to Logfile if verbose >= 3 is set.
  
  
  Note:
  Even though the function itself is designed non-blocking, make sure the assigned DbLog-device is operating in asynchronous mode to avoid FHEMWEB from blocking.
  
  The relevant attributes to control this function are:
  
  

  executeBeforeProc	: execution of FHEM command (or Perl-routine) before operation
  executeAfterProc	: execution of FHEM command (or Perl-routine) after operation

  
  
  
• diffValue [display | writeToDB] - calculates the difference of database column "VALUE" in the given time period. (see also the several time*-attributes).
  The reading to evaluate must be defined in attribute reading.
  This function is mostly reasonable if values are increasing permanently and don't write value differences into the database. The difference will always be generated between all consecutive datasets (VALUE-Field) and add them together, in doing add carry value of the previous aggregation period to the next aggregation period in case the previous period contains a value.
  A possible counter overrun (restart with value "0") will be considered (compare attribute diffAccept).
  
  If only one dataset will be found within the evalution period, the difference can be calculated only in combination with the balanced difference of the previous aggregation period. In this case a logical inaccuracy according the assignment of the difference to the particular aggregation period can be possible. Hence in warning in "state" will be placed and the reading "less_data_in_period" with a list of periods with only one dataset found in it will be created.
  
  
  Note:
  Within the evaluation respectively aggregation period (day, week, month, etc.) you should make available at least one dataset at the beginning and one dataset at the end of each aggregation period to take the difference calculation as much as possible.
  
  
  Is no or the option "display" specified, the results are only displayed. Using option "writeToDB" the calculation results are stored in the database with a new reading name.
  The new readingname is built of a prefix and the original reading name, in which the original reading name can be partly replaced by the value of attribute readingNameMap. The prefix is made up of the creation function and the aggregation.
  The timestamp of the new stored readings is deviated from aggregation period, unless no unique point of time of the result can be determined. The field "EVENT" will be filled with "calculated".
  
  
  Example of building a new reading name from the original reading "totalpac":
  diff_day_totalpac
  # <creation function>_<aggregation>_<original reading>
  
  
  Summarized the relevant attributes to control this function are:
  
  

  aggregation	: choose the aggregation period
  diffAccept	: the accepted maximum difference between sequential records
  device	: include or exclude <device> from selection
  executeBeforeProc	: execution of FHEM command (or Perl-routine) before operation
  executeAfterProc	: execution of FHEM command (or Perl-routine) after operation
  reading	: include or exclude <reading> from selection
  readingNameMap	: rename the resulted reading name
  time.*	: a number of attributes to limit selection by time
  valueFilter	: an additional REGEXP to control the record selection. The REGEXP is applied to the database field 'VALUE'.

  
  
  


• dumpMySQL [clientSide | serverSide]
  
  Creates a dump of the connected MySQL database.
  Depending from selected option the dump will be created on Client- or on Server-Side.
  The variants differs each other concerning the executing system, the creating location, the usage of attributes, the function result and the needed hardware ressources.
  The option "clientSide" e.g. needs more powerful FHEM-Server hardware, but saves all available tables inclusive possibly created views.
  With attribute "dumpCompress" a compression of dump file after creation can be switched on.
  
  
  Option clientSide
  The dump will be created by client (FHEM-Server) and will be saved in FHEM log-directory ((typical /opt/fhem/log/)) by default. The target directory can be set by attribute dumpDirLocal and has to be writable by the FHEM process.
  Before executing the dump a table optimization can be processed optionally (see attribute "optimizeTablesBeforeDump") as well as a FHEM-command (attribute "executeBeforeProc"). After the dump a FHEM-command can be executed as well (see attribute "executeAfterProc").
  
  Note:
  To avoid FHEM from blocking, you have to operate DbLog in asynchronous mode if the table optimization want to be used !
  
  By the attributes dumpMemlimit and dumpSpeed the run-time behavior of the function can be controlled to optimize the performance and demand of ressources.
  
  The attributes relevant for function "dumpMySQL clientSide" are:
  
  

  dumpComment	: User comment in head of dump file
  dumpCompress	: compress of dump files after creation
  dumpDirLocal	: the local destination directory for dump file creation
  dumpMemlimit	: limits memory usage
  dumpSpeed	: limits CPU utilization
  dumpFilesKeep	: number of dump files to keep
  executeBeforeProc	: execution of FHEM command (or Perl-routine) before dump
  executeAfterProc	: execution of FHEM command (or Perl-routine) after dump
  optimizeTablesBeforeDump	: table optimization before dump

  
  After a successfull finished dump the old dumpfiles are deleted and only the number of files defined by attribute "dumpFilesKeep" (default: 3) remain in the target directory "dumpDirLocal". If "dumpFilesKeep = 0" is set, all dumpfiles (also the current created file), are deleted. This setting can be helpful, if FTP transmission is used and the created dumps are only keep remain in the FTP destination directory.
  
  The naming convention of dump files is: <dbname>_<date>_<time>.sql[.gzip]
  
  To rebuild the database from a dump file the command:
  
  
  set <name> restoreMySQL <filename>
  
  
  can be used.
  
  The created dumpfile (uncompressed) can imported on the MySQL-Server by:
  
  
  mysql -u <user> -p <dbname> < <filename>.sql
  
  
  as well to restore the database from dump file.
  
  
  Option serverSide
  The dump will be created on the MySQL-Server and will be saved in its Home-directory by default.
  The whole history-table (not the current-table) will be exported CSV-formatted without any restrictions.
  Before executing the dump a table optimization can be processed optionally (see attribute "optimizeTablesBeforeDump") as well as a FHEM-command (attribute "executeBeforeProc").
  
  Note:
  To avoid FHEM from blocking, you have to operate DbLog in asynchronous mode if the table optimization is used !
  
  After the dump a FHEM-command can be executed as well (see attribute "executeAfterProc").
  
  The attributes relevant for function "dumpMySQL serverSide" are:
  
  

  dumpDirRemote	: destination directory of dump file on remote server
  dumpCompress	: compress of dump files after creation
  dumpDirLocal	: the local mounted directory dumpDirRemote
  dumpFilesKeep	: number of dump files to keep
  executeBeforeProc	: execution of FHEM command (or Perl-routine) before dump
  executeAfterProc	: execution of FHEM command (or Perl-routine) after dump
  optimizeTablesBeforeDump	: table optimization before dump

  
  The target directory can be set by dumpDirRemote attribute. It must be located on the MySQL-Host and has to be writable by the MySQL-server process.
  The used database user must have the FILE privilege (see Wiki).
  
  Note:
  If the internal version management of DbRep should be used and the size of the created dumpfile be reported, you have to mount the remote MySQL-Server directory "dumpDirRemote" on the client and publish it to the DbRep-device by fill out the dumpDirLocal attribute.
  Same is necessary if ftp transfer after dump is to be used (attribute "ftpUse" respectively "ftpUseSSL").
  
  
  Example:
  attr <name> dumpDirRemote /volume1/ApplicationBackup/dumps_FHEM/
  attr <name> dumpDirLocal /sds1/backup/dumps_FHEM/
  attr <name> dumpFilesKeep 2
  
  # The dump will be created remote on the MySQL-Server in directory '/volume1/ApplicationBackup/dumps_FHEM/'.
  # The internal version management searches in local mounted directory '/sds1/backup/dumps_FHEM/' for present dumpfiles and deletes these files except the last two versions.
  
  
  If the internal version management is used, after a successfull finished dump old dumpfiles will be deleted and only the number of attribute "dumpFilesKeep" (default: 3) would remain in target directory "dumpDirLocal" (the mounted "dumpDirRemote"). In that case FHEM needs write permissions to the directory "dumpDirLocal".
  
  The naming convention of dump files is: <dbname>_<date>_<time>.csv[.gzip]
  
  You can start a restore of table history from serverSide-Backup by command:
  
  
  set <name> <restoreMySQL> <filename>.csv[.gzip]
  
  
  
  
  FTP-Transfer after Dump
  If those possibility is be used, the attribute ftpUse or ftpUseSSL has to be set. The latter if encoding for FTP is to be used. The module also carries the version control of dump files in FTP-destination by attribute "ftpDumpFilesKeep".
  Further attributes are:
  
  

  ftpUse	: FTP Transfer after dump will be switched on (without SSL encoding)
  ftpUser	: User for FTP-server login, default: anonymous
  ftpUseSSL	: FTP Transfer with SSL encoding after dump
  ftpDebug	: debugging of FTP communication for diagnostics
  ftpDir	: directory on FTP-server in which the file will be send into (default: "/")
  ftpDumpFilesKeep	: leave the number of dump files in FTP-destination <ftpDir> (default: 3)
  ftpPassive	: set if passive FTP is to be used
  ftpPort	: FTP-Port, default: 21
  ftpPwd	: password of FTP-User, not set by default
  ftpServer	: name or IP-address of FTP-server. absolutely essential !
  ftpTimeout	: timeout of FTP-connection in seconds (default: 30).

  
  
  


• dumpSQLite - creates a dump of the connected SQLite database.
  This function uses the SQLite Online Backup API and allow to create a consistent backup of the database during the normal operation. The dump will be saved in FHEM log-directory by default. The target directory can be defined by the dumpDirLocal attribute and has to be writable by the FHEM process.
  Before executing the dump a table optimization can be processed optionally (see attribute "optimizeTablesBeforeDump").
  
  Note:
  To avoid FHEM from blocking, you have to operate DbLog in asynchronous mode if the table optimization want to be used !
  
  Before and after the dump a FHEM-command can be executed (see attribute "executeBeforeProc", "executeAfterProc").
  
  The attributes relevant for function "dumpMySQL serverSide" are:
  
  

  dumpCompress	: compress of dump files after creation
  dumpDirLocal	: Target directory of the dumpfiles
  dumpFilesKeep	: number of dump files to keep
  executeBeforeProc	: execution of FHEM command (or Perl-routine) before dump
  executeAfterProc	: execution of FHEM command (or Perl-routine) after dump
  optimizeTablesBeforeDump	: table optimization before dump

  
  After a successfull finished dump the old dumpfiles are deleted and only the number of attribute "dumpFilesKeep" (default: 3) remain in the target directory "dumpDirLocal". If "dumpFilesKeep = 0" is set, all dumpfiles (also the current created file), are deleted. This setting can be helpful, if FTP transmission is used and the created dumps are only keep remain in the FTP destination directory.
  
  The naming convention of dump files is: <dbname>_<date>_<time>.sqlitebkp[.gzip]
  
  The database can be restored by command "set <name> restoreSQLite <filename>"
  The created dump file can be transfered to a FTP-server. Please see explanations about FTP- transfer in topic "dumpMySQL".
  
  


• eraseReadings - deletes all created readings in the device, except reading "state" and readings, which are contained in exception list defined by attribute "readingPreventFromDel".


• exportToFile [</path/file>] [MAXLINES=<lines>] - exports DB-entries to a file in CSV-format of time period specified by time attributes.
  
  The filename can be defined by the expimpfile attribute.
  Optionally a file can be specified as a command option (/path/file) and overloads a possibly defined attribute "expimpfile". The maximum number of datasets which are exported into one file can be specified with the optional parameter "MAXLINES". In this case several files with extensions "_part1", "_part2", "_part3" and so on are created (pls. remember it when you import the files !).
  Limitation of selections can be done by attributes device and/or reading. The filename may contain wildcards as described in attribute section of "expimpfile".
  By setting attribute "aggregation" the export of datasets will be splitted into time slices corresponding to the specified aggregation. If, for example, "aggregation = month" is set, the data are selected in monthly packets and written into the exportfile. Thereby the usage of main memory is optimized if very large amount of data is exported and avoid the "died prematurely" error.
  
  The attributes relevant for this function are:
  
  

  aggregation	: determination of selection time slices
  device	: include or exclude <device> from selection
  reading	: include or exclude <reading> from selection
  time.*	: a number of attributes to limit selection by time
  executeBeforeProc	: execution of FHEM command (or Perl-routine) before export
  executeAfterProc	: execution of FHEM command (or Perl-routine) after export
  expimpfile	: the name of exportfile
  time.*	: a number of attributes to limit selection by time
  valueFilter	: an additional REGEXP to control the record selection. The REGEXP is applied to the database field 'VALUE'.



• fetchrows [history|current] - provides all table entries (default: history) of time period set by time.*-attributes respectively selection conditions by attributes "device" and "reading". An aggregation set will not be considered.
  The direction of data selection can be determined by the fetchRoute attribute.
  
  Every reading of result is composed of the dataset timestring , an index, the device name and the reading name. The function has the capability to reconize multiple occuring datasets (doublets). Such doublets are marked by an index > 1. Optional a Unique-Index is appended if datasets with identical timestamp, device and reading but different value are existing.
  Doublets can be highlighted in terms of color by setting attribut e"fetchMarkDuplicates".
  
  Note:
  Highlighted readings are not displayed again after restart or rereadcfg because of they are not saved in statefile.
  
  This attribute is preallocated with some colors, but can be changed by colorpicker-widget:
  
  
  attr <DbRep-Device> widgetOverride fetchMarkDuplicates:colorpicker
  
  The readings of result are composed like the following sceme:
  
  
  Example:
  2017-10-22_03-04-43__1__SMA_Energymeter__Bezug_WirkP_Kosten_Diff__[1]
  # <date>_<time>__<index>__<device>__<reading>__[Unique-Index]
  
  For a better overview the relevant attributes are listed here in a table:
  
  

  device	: include or exclude <device> from selection
  fetchRoute	: direction of selection read in database
  fetchMarkDuplicates	: Highlighting of found doublets
  fetchValueFn	: the displayed value of the VALUE database field can be changed by a function before the reading is created
  limit	: limits the number of datasets to select and display
  reading	: include or exclude <reading> from selection
  executeBeforeProc	: execution of FHEM command (or Perl-routine) before operation
  executeAfterProc	: execution of FHEM command (or Perl-routine) after operation
  time.*	: A number of attributes to limit selection by time
  valueFilter	: an additional REGEXP to control the record selection. The REGEXP is applied to the database field 'VALUE'.

  
  
  Note:
  Although the module is designed non-blocking, a huge number of selection result (huge number of rows) can overwhelm the browser session respectively FHEMWEB. Due to the sample space can be limited by limit attribute. Of course ths attribute can be increased if your system capabilities allow a higher workload.
  
  


• index <Option> - Reports the existing indexes in the database or creates the index which is needed. If the index is already created, it will be renewed (dropped and new created)
  
  The possible options are:
  
  

  list_all	: reports the existing indexes
  recreate_Search_Idx	: create or renew (if existing) the index Search_Idx in table history (index for DbLog)
  drop_Search_Idx	: delete the index Search_Idx in table history
  recreate_Report_Idx	: create or renew (if existing) the index Report_Idx in table history (index for DbRep)
  drop_Report_Idx	: delete the index Report_Idx in table history

  
  For a better overview the relevant attributes for this operation are listed here:
  
  

  useAdminCredentials

  : use privileged user for the operation

  
  
  Note:
  The MySQL database user used requires the ALTER, CREATE and INDEX privilege.
  These rights can be set with:
  
  
  set <Name> sqlCmd GRANT INDEX, ALTER, CREATE ON `<db>`.* TO '<user>'@'%';
  
  The useAdminCredentials attribute must usually be set to be able to change the rights of the used user.


• insert <Date>,<Time>,<Value>,[<Unit>],[<Device>],[<Reading>] - Manual insertion of a data record into the table "history". Input values for date, time and value are obligatory. The values for the DB fields TYPE and EVENT are filled with "manual".
  If Device, Reading are not set, these values are taken from the corresponding attributes device, reading.
  
  Note:
  Unused fields within the insert command must be enclosed within the string in "," within the string.
  
  
  Examples:
  set <name> insert 2016-08-01,23:00:09,12.03,kW
  set <name> insert 2021-02-02,10:50:00,value with space
  set <name> insert 2022-05-16,10:55:00,1800,,SMA_Wechselrichter,etotal
  set <name> insert 2022-05-16,10:55:00,1800,,,etotal
  
  
  The relevant attributes to control this function are:
  
  

  executeBeforeProc	: execution of FHEM command (or Perl-routine) before operation
  executeAfterProc	: execution of FHEM command (or Perl-routine) after operation

  
  
  
• importFromFile [<file>] - imports data in CSV format from file into database.
  The filename can be defined by attribute expimpfile.
  Optionally a file can be specified as a command option (/path/file) and overloads a possibly defined attribute "expimpfile". The filename may contain wildcards as described in attribute section of "expimpfile".
  
  
  dataset format:
  "TIMESTAMP","DEVICE","TYPE","EVENT","READING","VALUE","UNIT"
  
  # The fields "TIMESTAMP","DEVICE","TYPE","EVENT","READING" and "VALUE" have to be set. The field "UNIT" is optional. The file content will be imported transactional. That means all of the content will be imported or, in case of error, nothing of it. If an extensive file will be used, DON'T set verbose = 5 because of a lot of datas would be written to the logfile in this case. It could lead to blocking or overload FHEM !
  
  Example for a source dataset:
  "2016-09-25 08:53:56","STP_5000","SMAUTILS","etotal: 11859.573","etotal","11859.573",""
  
  The attributes relevant for this function are:
  
  

  executeBeforeProc	: execution of FHEM command (or Perl-routine) before import
  executeAfterProc	: execution of FHEM command (or Perl-routine) after import
  expimpfile	: the name of exportfile

  
  
  
  
• maxValue [display | writeToDB | deleteOther]
  br> Calculates the maximum value of database column "VALUE" between period given by attributes timestamp_begin, "timestamp_end" / "timeDiffToNow / timeOlderThan" and so on. The reading to evaluate must be defined using attribute reading. The evaluation contains the timestamp of the last appearing of the identified maximum value within the given period.
  
  If no option or the option display is specified, the results are only displayed. Using option writeToDB the calculated results are stored in the database with a new reading name.
  The new readingname is built of a prefix and the original reading name, in which the original reading name can be replaced by the value of attribute readingNameMap. The prefix is made up of the creation function and the aggregation.
  The timestamp of the new stored readings is deviated from aggregation period, unless no unique point of time of the result can be determined. The field "EVENT" will be filled with "calculated".
  
  With option deleteOther all datasets except the dataset with the maximum value are deleted.
  
  
  Example of building a new reading name from the original reading "totalpac":
  max_day_totalpac
  # <creation function>_<aggregation>_<original reading>
  
  
  Summarized the relevant attributes to control this function are:
  
  aggregation, device, reading, readingNameMap, executeBeforeProc, executeAfterProc, valueFilter, userExitFn, time.*-attributes
  
  


• migrateCollation <Collation>
  
  Migrates the used character set/collation of the database and the tables current and history to the specified format.
  
  Relevant attributes are:
  
  executeBeforeProc, executeAfterProc, useAdminCredentials, userExitFn
  
  


• minValue [display | writeToDB | deleteOther]
  
  Calculates the minimum value of database column "VALUE" between period given by attributes timestamp_begin, "timestamp_end" / "timeDiffToNow / timeOlderThan" and so on. The reading to evaluate must be defined using attribute reading. The evaluation contains the timestamp of the first appearing of the identified minimum value within the given period.
  
  If no option or the option display is specified, the results are only displayed. Using option writeToDB the calculated results are stored in the database with a new reading name.
  The new readingname is built of a prefix and the original reading name, in which the original reading name can be replaced by the value of attribute readingNameMap. The prefix is made up of the creation function and the aggregation.
  The timestamp of the new stored readings is deviated from aggregation period, unless no unique point of time of the result can be determined. The field "EVENT" will be filled with "calculated".
  
  With option deleteOther all datasets except the dataset with the maximum value are deleted.
  
  
  Example of building a new reading name from the original reading "totalpac":
  min_day_totalpac
  # <creation function>_<aggregation>_<original reading>
  
  
  Relevant attributes are:
  
  aggregation, device, executeBeforeProc, executeAfterProc, reading, readingNameMap, valueFilter, userExitFn, time.*-Attribute
  
  


• optimizeTables [showInfo | execute]
  
  Optimize tables in the connected database (MySQL).
  
  

  showInfo	: shows information about the used / free space within the database
  execute	: performs optimization of all tables in the database

  
  Relevant attributes are:
  
  executeBeforeProc, executeAfterProc, userExitFn
  
  
• readingRename <[device:]oldreadingname>,<newreadingname>
  
  Renames the reading name of a device inside the connected database (see Internal DATABASE). The readingname will allways be changed in the entire database. Possibly set time limits or restrictions by attributes device and/or reading will not be considered.
  As an option a device can be specified. In this case only the old readings of this device will be renamed.
  
  
  Examples:
  set <name> readingRename TotalConsumtion,L1_TotalConsumtion
  set <name> readingRename Dum.Energy:TotalConsumtion,L1_TotalConsumtion
  
  
  The amount of renamed reading names (datasets) will be displayed in reading "reading_renamed".
  If the reading name to be renamed was not found in the database, a WARNING will appear in reading "reading_not_renamed".
  Appropriate entries will be written to Logfile if verbose >= 3 is set.
  
  Relevant attributes are:
  
  executeBeforeProc, executeAfterProc, userExitFn
  
  
  
• reduceLog [<no>[:<nn>]] [mode] [EXCLUDE=device1:reading1,device2:reading2,...] [INCLUDE=device:reading]
  
  Reduces historical data sets.
  
  Operation without specifying command line operators
  
  The data is cleaned within the time limits defined by the time.*-attributes. At least one of the time.* attributes must be set (see table below). The respective missing time accrual is determined by the module in this case.
  The working mode is determined by the optional specification of mode:
  
  

  without specification of mode	: the data is reduced to the first entry per hour per device & reading
  average	: numerical values are reduced to an average value per hour per device & reading, otherwise as without mode
  average=day	: numeric values are reduced to one mean value per day per device & reading, otherwise as without mode
  	The FullDay option (full days are always selected) is used implicitly.
  max	: numeric values are reduced to the maximum value per hour per device & reading, otherwise as without mode
  max=day	: numeric values are reduced to the maximum value per day per device & reading, otherwise as without mode
  	The FullDay option (full days are always selected) is used implicitly.
  min	: numeric values are reduced to the minimum value per hour per device & reading, otherwise as without mode
  min=day	: numeric values are reduced to the minimum value per day per device & reading, otherwise as without mode
  	The FullDay option (full days are always selected) is used implicitly.
  sum	: numeric values are reduced to the sum per hour per Device & Reading, otherwise as without mode
  sum=day	: numeric values are reduced to the sum per day per Device & Reading, otherwise as without mode
  	The FullDay option (full days are always selected) is used implicitly.

  
  With the attributes device and reading the data records to be considered can be included or be excluded. Both restrictions reduce the selected data and reduce the resource requirements. The read "reduceLogState" contains the execution result of the last reduceLog command.
  
  Relevant attributes are:
  
  executeBeforeProc, executeAfterProc, device, reading, numDecimalPlaces, timeOlderThan, timeDiffToNow, timestamp_begin, timestamp_end, valueFilter, userExitFn
  
  Examples:
  
  
  attr <name> timeOlderThan d:200
  set <name> reduceLog
  # Records older than 200 days are written to the first entry per hour per Device & Reading.
  
  attr <name> timeDiffToNow d:200
  set <name> reduceLog average=day
  # Records newer than 200 days are limited to one entry per day per Device & Reading.
  
  attr <name> timeDiffToNow d:30
  attr <name> device TYPE=SONOSPLAYER EXCLUDE=Sonos_Kueche
  attr <name> reading room% EXCLUDE=roomNameAlias
  set <name> reduceLog
  # Records newer than 30 days that are devices of type SONOSPLAYER (except Device "Sonos_Kitchen") and the readings start with "room" (except "roomNameAlias") are reduced to the first entry per hour per Device & Reading.
  
  attr <name> timeDiffToNow d:10
  attr <name> timeOlderThan d:5
  attr <name> device Luftdaten_remote
  set <name> reduceLog average
  # Records older than 5 and newer than 10 days and containing DEVICE "Luftdaten_remote are adjusted. Numerical values of an hour are reduced to an average value
  
  
  
  Operation with specification of command line operators
  
  Es werden Datensätze berücksichtigt die älter sind als <no> Tage und (optional) neuer sind als <nn> Tage. Records are considered that are older than <no> days and (optionally) newer than <nn> days. The working mode is determined by the optional specification of mode as described above.
  
  The additions "EXCLUDE" or "INCLUDE" can be added to exclude or include device/reading combinations in reduceLog and override the "device" and "reading" attributes, which are ignored in this case.
  The specification in "EXCLUDE" is evaluated as a regex. Inside "INCLUDE", SQL wildcards can be used. (for more information on SQL wildcards, see with get <name> versionNotes 6)
  
  Examples:
  
  
  set <name> reduceLog 174:180 average EXCLUDE=SMA_Energymeter:Bezug_Wirkleistung INCLUDE=SMA_Energymeter:%
  # Records older than 174 and newer than 180 days are reduced to average per hour.
  # All readings from the device "SMA_Energymeter" except "Bezug_Wirkleistung" are taken reduced.
  
  
  Note:
  Although the function itself is designed non-blocking, the assigned DbLog device should be operated in asynchronous mode to avoid blocking FHEMWEB (table lock).
  Furthermore it is strongly recommended to create the standard INDEX 'Search_Idx' in the table 'history' !
  The processing of this command may take an extremely long time (without INDEX).
  
  


• repairSQLite [sec]
  
  Repairs a corrupted SQLite database.
  
  A corruption is usally existent when the error message "database disk image is malformed" appears in reading "state" of the connected DbLog-device. If the command was started, the connected DbLog-device will firstly disconnected from the database for 10 hours (36000 seconds) automatically (breakup time). After the repair is finished, the DbLog-device will be connected to the (repaired) database immediately.
  As an argument the command can be completed by a differing breakup time (in seconds).
  The corrupted database is saved as <database>.corrupt in same directory.
  
  Relevant attributes are:
  
  executeBeforeProc, executeAfterProc, userExitFn
  
  Example:
  
  set <name> repairSQLite
  # the database is trying to repair, breakup time is 10 hours
  set <name> repairSQLite 600
  # the database is trying to repair, breakup time is 10 minutes
  
  
  Note:
  It can't be guaranteed, that the repair attempt proceed successfully and no data loss will result. Depending from corruption severity data loss may occur or the repair will fail even though no error appears during the repair process. Please make sure a valid backup took place !
  
  


• restoreMySQL <File> - restore a database from serverSide- or clientSide-Dump.
  
  The function provides a drop-down-list of files which can be used for restore.
  
  Usage of serverSide-Dumps
  The content of history-table will be restored from a serverSide-Dump. Therefore the remote directory "dumpDirRemote" of the MySQL-Server has to be mounted on the Client and make it usable to the DbRep device by setting attribute dumpDirLocal to the appropriate value.
  All files with extension "csv[.gzip]" and if the filename is beginning with the name of the connected database (see Internal DATABASE) are listed.
  
  Usage of clientSide-Dumps
  The used database user needs the FILE privilege (see Wiki).
  All tables and views (if present) are restored. The directory which contains the dump files has to be set by attribute dumpDirLocal to make it usable by the DbRep device.
  All files with extension "sql[.gzip]" and if the filename is beginning with the name of the connected database (see Internal DATABASE) are listed.
  The restore speed depends of the server variable "max_allowed_packet". You can change this variable in file my.cnf to adapt the speed. Please consider the need of sufficient ressources (especially RAM).
  
  The database user needs rights for database management, e.g.:
  CREATE, ALTER, INDEX, DROP, SHOW VIEW, CREATE VIEW
  
  Relevant attributes are:
  
  executeBeforeProc, executeAfterProc, dumpDirLocal, userExitFn
  
  


• restoreSQLite <File>.sqlitebkp[.gzip]
  
  Restores a backup of SQLite database.
  The function provides a drop-down-list of files which can be used for restore. The data stored in the current database are deleted respectively overwritten. All files with extension "sqlitebkp[.gzip]" and if the filename is beginning with the name of the connected database will are listed.
  
  Relevant attributes are:
  
  executeBeforeProc, executeAfterProc, userExitFn
  
  


• sqlCmd
  
  Executes any user-specific command.
  If this command contains a delete operation, for safety reasons the attribute allowDeletion has to be set.
  sqlCmd also accepts the setting of SQL session variables such as. "SET @open:=NULL, @closed:=NULL;" or the use of SQLite PRAGMA prior to the execution of the SQL statement. If the session variable or PRAGMA has to be set every time before executing a SQL statement, the attribute sqlCmdVars can be set.
  
  If the attributes device, reading, timestamp_begin respectively timestamp_end set in the module are to be taken into account in the statement, the placeholders §device§, §reading§, §timestamp_begin§ respectively §timestamp_end§ can be used for this purpose.
  It should be noted that the placeholders §device§ and §reading§ complex are resolved and should be applied accordingly as in the example below.
  
  If you want update a dataset, you have to add "TIMESTAMP=TIMESTAMP" to the update-statement to avoid changing the original timestamp.
  
  Examples of SQL-statements:
  
  
  • set <name> sqlCmd select DEVICE, count(*) from history where TIMESTAMP >= "2017-01-06 00:00:00" group by DEVICE having count(*) > 800
  • set <name> sqlCmd select DEVICE, count(*) from history where TIMESTAMP >= "2017-05-06 00:00:00" group by DEVICE
  • set <name> sqlCmd select DEVICE, count(*) from history where TIMESTAMP >= §timestamp_begin§ group by DEVICE
  • set <name> sqlCmd select * from history where DEVICE like "Te%t" order by `TIMESTAMP` desc
  • set <name> sqlCmd select * from history where `TIMESTAMP` > "2017-05-09 18:03:00" order by `TIMESTAMP` desc
  • set <name> sqlCmd select * from current order by `TIMESTAMP` desc
  • set <name> sqlCmd select sum(VALUE) as 'Einspeisung am 04.05.2017', count(*) as 'Anzahl' FROM history where `READING` = "Einspeisung_WirkP_Zaehler_Diff" and TIMESTAMP between '2017-05-04' AND '2017-05-05'
  • set <name> sqlCmd delete from current
  • set <name> sqlCmd delete from history where TIMESTAMP < "2016-05-06 00:00:00"
  • set <name> sqlCmd update history set TIMESTAMP=TIMESTAMP,VALUE='Val' WHERE VALUE='TestValue'
  • set <name> sqlCmd select * from history where DEVICE = "Test"
  • set <name> sqlCmd insert into history (TIMESTAMP, DEVICE, TYPE, EVENT, READING, VALUE, UNIT) VALUES ('2017-05-09 17:00:14','Test','manuell','manuell','Tes§e','TestValue','°C')
  • set <name> sqlCmd select DEVICE, count(*) from history where §device§ AND TIMESTAMP >= §timestamp_begin§ group by DEVICE
  • set <name> sqlCmd select DEVICE, READING, count(*) from history where §device§ AND §reading§ AND TIMESTAMP >= §timestamp_begin§ group by DEVICE, READING
  
  Here you can see examples of a more complex statement (MySQL) with setting SQL session variables and the SQLite PRAGMA usage:
  
  
  • set <name> sqlCmd SET @open:=NULL, @closed:=NULL; SELECT TIMESTAMP, VALUE,DEVICE, @open AS open, @open := IF(VALUE = 'open', TIMESTAMP, NULL) AS curr_open, @closed := IF(VALUE = 'closed', TIMESTAMP, NULL) AS closed FROM history WHERE DATE(TIMESTAMP) = CURDATE() AND DEVICE = "HT_Fensterkontakt" AND READING = "state" AND (VALUE = "open" OR VALUE = "closed") ORDER BY TIMESTAMP;
  • set <name> sqlCmd PRAGMA temp_store=MEMORY; PRAGMA synchronous=FULL; PRAGMA journal_mode=WAL; PRAGMA cache_size=4000; select count(*) from history;
  • set <name> sqlCmd PRAGMA temp_store=FILE; PRAGMA temp_store_directory = '/opt/fhem/'; VACUUM;
  
  The formatting of result can be choosen by attribute sqlResultFormat, as well as the used field separator can be determined by attribute sqlResultFieldSep.
  
  The module provides a command history once a sqlCmd command was executed successfully. To use this option, activate the attribute sqlCmdHistoryLength with list lenght you want.
  If the command history is enabled, an indexed list of stored SQL statements is available with ___list_sqlhistory___ within the sqlCmdHistory command.
  
  An SQL statement can be executed by specifying its index in this form:
  
  
  set <name> sqlCmd ckey:<Index>      (e.g. ckey:4)
  
  Relevant attributes are:
  
  executeBeforeProc, executeAfterProc, allowDeletion, sqlResultFormat, sqlResultFieldSep, sqlCmdHistoryLength, sqlCmdVars, sqlFormatService, useAdminCredentials, userExitFn
  
  Note:
  Even though the module works non-blocking regarding to database operations, a huge sample space (number of rows/readings) could block the browser session respectively FHEMWEB.
  If you are unsure about the result of the statement, you should preventively add a limit to the statement.
  
  


• sqlCmdHistory
  
  If activated with the attribute sqlCmdHistoryLength, a stored SQL statement can be selected from a list and executed.
  The SQL cache is automatically saved when FHEM is closed and restored when the system is started.
  The following entries execute special functions:
  
  
  

  ___purge_sqlhistory___	: deletes the history cache
  ___list_sqlhistory___	: shows the SQL statements currently in the cache, including their cache key (ckey)
  ___save_sqlhistory___	: backs up the history cache manually
  ___restore_sqlhistory___	: restores the last backup of the history cache

  
  Relevant attributes are:
  
  executeBeforeProc, executeAfterProc, allowDeletion, sqlResultFormat, sqlResultFieldSep, sqlCmdHistoryLength, sqlCmdVars, sqlFormatService, useAdminCredentials, userExitFn
  
  


• sqlSpecial
  
  This function provides a drop-down list with a selection of prepared reportings.
  The statements result is depicted in reading "SqlResult". The result can be formatted by attribute sqlResultFormat a well as the used field separator by attribute sqlResultFieldSep.
  
  

  50mostFreqLogsLast2days	reports the 50 most occuring log entries of the last 2 days
  allDevCount	all devices occuring in database and their quantity
  allDevReadCount	all device/reading combinations occuring in database and their quantity
  50DevReadCount	the 50 most frequently included device/reading combinations in the database
  recentReadingsOfDevice	determines the newest records of a device available in the database. The
  	device must be defined in attribute device
  readingsDifferenceByTimeDelta	determines the value difference of successive data records of a reading. The
  	device and reading must be defined in the attribute device or reading.
  	The time limits of the evaluation are defined by the time.*-attributes.

  
  Relevant attributes are:
  
  executeBeforeProc, executeAfterProc, allowDeletion, sqlResultFormat, sqlResultFieldSep, sqlFormatService, device, reading, userExitFn
  
  
  


• sumValue [display | writeToDB | writeToDBSingle | writeToDBInTime]
  
  Calculates the total values of the database field "VALUE" in the time limits of the possible time.*-attributes.
  
  The reading to be evaluated must be specified in the attribute reading. This function is useful if continuous value differences of a reading are written into the database.
  
  If none or the option display is specified, the results are only displayed. With the options writeToDB, writeToDBSingle or writeToDBInTime the calculation results are written with a new reading name into the database.
  
  

  writeToDB	: writes one value each with the time stamps XX:XX:01 and XX:XX:59 within the respective aggregation period
  writeToDBSingle	: writes only one value with the time stamp XX:XX:59 at the end of an aggregation period
  writeToDBInTime	: writes a value at the beginning and end of the time limits of an aggregation period

  
  The new reading name is formed from a prefix and the original reading name, where the original reading name can be replaced by the attribute "readingNameMap". The prefix consists of the educational function and the aggregation.
  The timestamp of the new reading in the database is determined by the set aggregation period if no clear time of the result can be determined. The field "EVENT" is filled with "calculated".
  
  
  Example of building a new reading name from the original reading "totalpac":
  sum_day_totalpac
  # <creation function>_<aggregation>_<original reading>
  
  
  Relevant attributes are:
  
  executeBeforeProc, executeAfterProc, aggregation, device, reading, readingNameMap, valueFilter, userExitFn, time.*-attributes
  
  
  


• syncStandby <DbLog-Device Standby>
  
  Datasets of the connected database (source) are transmitted into another database (Standby-database).
  Here the "<DbLog-Device Standby>" is the DbLog-Device what is connected to the Standby-database.
  
  All the datasets which are determined by timestamp_begin attribute or respectively the attributes "device", "reading" are transmitted.
  The datasets are transmitted in time slices accordingly to the adjusted aggregation. If the attribute "aggregation" has value "no" or "month", the datasets are transmitted automatically in daily time slices into standby-database. Source- and Standby-database can be of different types.
  
  Relevant attributes are:
  
  executeBeforeProc, executeAfterProc, aggregation, device, reading, readingNameMap, valueFilter, userExitFn, time.*-attributes
  
  
  


• tableCurrentFillup
  
  The current-table will be filled u with an extract of the history-table.
  The attributes for limiting time and device, reading are considered.
  Thereby the content of the extract can be affected.
  In the associated DbLog-device the attribute "DbLogType" should be set to "SampleFill/History".
  
  Relevant attributes are:
  
  executeBeforeProc, executeAfterProc, device, reading, valueFilter, userExitFn, time.*-attributes
  
  
  
• tableCurrentPurge
  
  Deletes the content of current-table.
  There are no limits, e.g. by attributes timestamp_begin, timestamp_end, device or reading considered.
  
  Relevant attributes are:
  
  executeBeforeProc, executeAfterProc, userExitFn
  
  
  
• vacuum
  
  Optimizes the tables in the connected database (SQLite, PostgreSQL).
  Especially for SQLite databases it is strongly recommended to temporarily close the connection of the relevant DbLog device to the database (see DbLog reopen command).
  
  Relevant attributes are:
  
  executeBeforeProc, executeAfterProc, userExitFn
  
  Note:
  When the vacuum command is executed, the PRAGMA auto_vacuum = FULL is automatically applied to SQLite databases.
  The vacuum command requires additional temporary memory. If there is not enough space in the default TMPDIR directory, SQLite can be assigned a sufficiently large directory by setting the environment variable SQLITE_TMPDIR.
  (see also: www.sqlite.org/tempfiles)

Get

The get-commands of DbRep provide to retrieve some metadata of the used database instance. Those are for example adjusted server parameter, server variables, datadasestatus- and table informations. THe available get-functions depending of the used database type. So for SQLite curently only "get svrinfo" is usable. The functions nativ are delivering a lot of outpit values. They can be limited by function specific attributes. The filter has to be setup by a comma separated list. SQL-Wildcard (%) can be used to setup the list arguments.

Note:
After executing a get-funktion in detail view please make a browser refresh to see the results !


• blockinginfo - list the current system wide running background processes (BlockingCalls) together with their informations. If character string is too long (e.g. arguments) it is reported shortened.



• dbstatus - lists global information about MySQL server status (e.g. informations related to cache, threads, bufferpools, etc. ). Initially all available informations are reported. Using the attribute showStatus the quantity of results can be limited to show only the desired values. Further detailed informations of items meaning are explained here.
  
  
  Example
  attr <name> showStatus %uptime%,%qcache%
  get <name> dbstatus
  # Only readings containing "uptime" and "qcache" in name will be created



• dbvars - lists global informations about MySQL system variables. Included are e.g. readings related to InnoDB-Home, datafile path, memory- or cache-parameter and so on. The Output reports initially all available informations. Using the attribute showVariables the quantity of results can be limited to show only the desired values. Further detailed informations of items meaning are explained here.
  
  
  Example
  attr <name> showVariables %version%,%query_cache%
  get <name> dbvars
  # Only readings containing "version" and "query_cache" in name will be created



• initData - Determines some database properties relevant for the module function. The command is executed implicitly at the first database connection.



• minTimestamp - Identifies the oldest timestamp in the database (will be executed implicitely at FHEM start). The timestamp is used as begin of data selection if no time attribut is set to determine the start date.



• procinfo - Reports the existing database processes in a summary table (only MySQL).
  Typically only the own processes of the connection user (set in DbLog configuration file) will be reported. If all precesses have to be reported, the global "PROCESS" right has to be granted to the user.
  As of MariaDB 5.3 for particular SQL-Statements a progress reporting will be provided (table row "PROGRESS"). So you can track, for instance, the degree of processing during an index creation.
  Further informations can be found here.
  



• sqlCmdBlocking <SQL-statement>
  
  Executes the specified SQL statement blocking with a default timeout of 10 seconds. The timeout can be set with the attribute timeout.
  
  
  Examples:
  { fhem("get <name> sqlCmdBlocking select device,count(*) from history where timestamp > '2018-04-01' group by device") }
  { CommandGet(undef,"Rep.LogDB1 sqlCmdBlocking select device,count(*) from history where timestamp > '2018-04-01' group by device") }
  get <name> sqlCmdBlocking select device,count(*) from history where timestamp > '2018-04-01' group by device
  

Because of its mode of operation this function is particular convenient for user own perl scripts.
The input accepts multi line commands and delivers multi line results as well. This command also accept the setting of SQL session variables like "SET @open:=NULL, @closed:=NULL;" or PRAGMA for SQLite.
If several fields are selected and passed back, the fieds are separated by the separator defined by attribute sqlResultFieldSep (default "|"). Several result lines are separated by newline ("\n").
This function only set/update status readings, the userExitFn function isn't called.

If you create a little routine in 99_myUtils, for example:


sub dbval {
  my $name = shift;
  my $cmd) = shift;
  my $ret = CommandGet(undef,"$name sqlCmdBlocking $cmd");
  return $ret;
}
    

it can be accessed with e.g. those calls:


Examples:
{ dbval("<name>","select count(*) from history") }
$ret = dbval("<name>","select count(*) from history");




• storedCredentials - Reports the users / passwords stored for database access by the device.
  (only valid if database type is MYSQL)



• svrinfo - Common database server informations, e.g. DBMS-version, server address and port and so on. The quantity of elements to get depends on the database type. Using the attribute showSvrInfo the quantity of results can be limited to show only the desired values. Further detailed informations of items meaning are explained here.
  
  
  Example
  attr <name> showSvrInfo %SQL_CATALOG_TERM%,%NAME%
  get <name> svrinfo
  # Only readings containing "SQL_CATALOG_TERM" and "NAME" in name will be created



• tableinfo - Access detailed informations about tables in MySQL database which is connected by the DbRep-device. All available tables in the connected database will be selected by default. Using the attribute showTableInfo the results can be limited to tables you want to show. Further detailed informations of items meaning are explained here.
  
  
  Example
  attr <name> showTableInfo current,history
  get <name> tableinfo
  # Only informations related to tables "current" and "history" are going to be created



• versionNotes [hints | rel | <key>] - Shows realease informations and/or hints about the module.
  
  

  rel	: shows only release information
  hints	: shows only hints
  <key>	: the note with the specified number is displayed


It contains only main release informations for module users.
If no options are specified, both release informations and hints will be shown. "rel" shows only release informations and "hints" shows only hints. By the <key>-specification only the hint with the specified number is shown.

Attributes

Using the module specific attributes you are able to define the scope of evaluation and the aggregation.
The listed attrbutes are not completely relevant for every function of the module. The help of set/get-commands contain explicitly which attributes are relevant for the specific command.

Note for SQL-Wildcard Usage:
Within the attribute values of "device" and "reading" you may use SQL-Wildcard "%", Character "_" is not supported as a wildcard. The character "%" stands for any characters.
This rule is valid to all functions except "insert", "importFromFile" and "deviceRename".
The function "insert" doesn't allow setting the mentioned attributes containing the wildcard "%".
In readings the wildcard character "%" will be replaced by "/" to meet the rules of allowed characters in readings.


• aggregation - Aggregation of Device/Reading-selections. Possible values are hour, day, week, month, year and "no". Delivers e.g. the count of database entries for a day (countEntries), Summation of difference values of a reading (sumValue) and so on. Using aggregation "no" (default) an aggregation don't happens but the output contains all values of Device/Reading in the selected time period.


• allowDeletion - unlocks the delete-function


• autoForward - if activated, the result threads of a function are transferred to one or more devices.
  The definition takes the form:
  

  {
    "<source-reading> => "<dest.device> [=> <dest.-reading>]",
    "<source-reading> => "<dest.device> [=> <dest.-reading>]",
    ...
  }
                                

  Wildcards (.*) are permitted in the specification <source-reading>.
  
  
  Example:

  {
    ".*"        => "Dum.Rep.All",
    ".*AVGAM.*" => "Dum.Rep     => average",
    ".*SUM.*"   => "Dum.Rep.Sum => summary",
  }
  # all readings are transferred to device "Dum.Rep.All", reading name remains in the target
  # readings with "AVGAM" in the name are transferred to the "Dum.Rep" device in the reading "average"
  # readings with "SUM" in the name are transferred to the device "Dum.Rep.Sum" in the reading "summary"
                                



• averageCalcForm
  
  Defines the calculation variant for determining the average value with "averageValue".
  
  Currently the following variants are implemented:
  
  

  avgArithmeticMean:	The arithmetic average is calculated. (default)
  avgDailyMeanGWS:	Calculates the daily medium temperature according the
  	specifications of german weather service. (see also "get <name> versionNotes 2")
  	This variant uses aggregation "day" automatically.
  avgDailyMeanGWSwithGTS:	Same as "avgDailyMeanGWS" and additionally calculates the grassland temperature sum.
  	If the value 200 is reached, the reading "reachedGTSthreshold" is created with the
  	date of the first time this threshold value is reached.
  	Note: the attribute timestamp_begin must be set to the beginning of a year !
  	Note: The attribute timestamp_begin must be set to the beginning of a year!
  	(see also "get <name> versionNotes 5")
  avgTimeWeightMean:	Calculates the time-weighted average.
  	Note: There must be at least two data points per aggregation period.



• countEntriesDetail - If set, the function countEntries creates a detailed report of counted datasets of every reading. By default only the summary of counted datasets is reported.


• device - Selection of particular or several devices.
  You can specify a list of devices separated by "," or use device specifications (devspec).
  In that case the device names are derived from the device specification and the existing devices in FHEM before carry out the SQL selection.
  If the the device, list or device specification is prepended by "EXCLUDE=", the devices are excluded from database selection.
  The database selection is executed as a logical AND operation of "device" and the attribute reading.
  
  
  Examples:
  attr <name> device TYPE=DbRep
attr <name> device MySTP_5000
attr <name> device SMA.*,MySTP.*
attr <name> device SMA_Energymeter,MySTP_5000
attr <name> device %5000
attr <name> device TYPE=SSCam EXCLUDE=SDS1_SVS
attr <name> device TYPE=SSCam,TYPE=ESPEasy EXCLUDE=SDS1_SVS
attr <name> device EXCLUDE=SDS1_SVS
attr <name> device EXCLUDE=TYPE=SSCam
  
  
  If you need more information about device specifications, execute "get <name> versionNotes 3".
  
  
• diffAccept - valid for function diffValue. diffAccept determines the threshold, up to that a calaculated difference between two straight sequently datasets should be commenly accepted (default = 20).
  Hence faulty DB entries with a disproportional high difference value will be eliminated and don't tamper the result. If a threshold overrun happens, the reading "diff_overrun_limit_<diffLimit>" will be generated (<diffLimit> will be substituted with the present prest attribute value).
  The reading contains a list of relevant pair of values. Using verbose=3 this list will also be reported in the FHEM logfile.
  
  
  Example report in logfile if threshold of diffAccept=10 overruns:
  
  DbRep Rep.STP5000.etotal -> data ignored while calc diffValue due to threshold overrun (diffAccept = 10):
  2016-04-09 08:50:50 0.0340 -> 2016-04-09 12:42:01 13.3440
  
  # The first dataset with a value of 0.0340 is untypical low compared to the next value of 13.3440 and results a untypical high difference value.
  # Now you have to decide if the (second) dataset should be deleted, ignored of the attribute diffAccept should be adjusted.
  
  
• dumpComment - User-comment. It will be included in the header of the created dumpfile by command "dumpMySQL clientSide".


• dumpCompress - if set, the dump files are compressed after operation of "dumpMySQL" bzw. "dumpSQLite"


• dumpDirLocal
  
  
  Destination directory for creating dumps with "dumpMySQL clientSide" or "dumpSQLite".
  Setting this attribute activates the internal version management. In this directory backup files are searched and deleted if the found number exceeds the attribute value "dumpFilesKeep". The attribute is also used to make a locally mounted directory "dumpDirRemote" (for dumpMySQL serverSide) known to DbRep.
  (default: "{global}{modpath}/log/")
  
  Example:
  attr <Name> dumpDirLocal /sds1/backup/dumps_FHEM/
  
  
• dumpDirRemote - Target directory of database dumps by command "dumpMySQL serverSide" (default: the Home-directory of MySQL-Server on the MySQL-Host).


• dumpMemlimit - tolerable memory consumption for the SQL-script during generation period (default: 100000 characters). Please adjust this parameter if you may notice memory bottlenecks and performance problems based on it on your specific hardware.


• dumpSpeed - Number of Lines which will be selected in source database with one select by dump-command "dumpMySQL ClientSide" (default: 10000). This parameter impacts the run-time and consumption of resources directly.


• dumpFilesKeep
  
  
  The integrated version management leaves the specified number of backup files in the backup directory.
  Version management must be enabled by setting the "dumpDirLocal" attribute.
  If there are more (older) backup files, they will be deleted after a new backup has been successfully created. The global attribute "archivesort" is taken into account.
  (default: 3)
  
  
• executeAfterProc
  
  You can specify a FHEM command or Perl code that should be executed after the command is processed.
  Perl code is to be enclosed in {...}. The variables $hash (hash of the DbRep device) and $name (name of the DbRep device) are available.
  
  
  Example:
  
  attr <name> executeAfterProc set og_gz_westfenster off;
  attr <name> executeAfterProc {adump ($name)}
  
  # "adump" is a function defined in 99_myUtils.
  

  sub adump {
      my ($name) = @_;
      my $hash   = $defs{$name};
      # the own function, e.g.
      Log3($name, 3, "DbRep $name -> Dump is finished");
  
      return;
  }
  

• executeBeforeProc
  
  A FHEM command or Perl code can be specified which is to be executed before the command is processed.
  Perl code is to be enclosed in {...}. The variables $hash (hash of the DbRep device) and $name (name of the DbRep device) are available.
  
  
  Example:
  
  attr <name> executeBeforeProc set og_gz_westfenster on;
  attr <name> executeBeforeProc {bdump ($name)}
  
  # "bdump" is a function defined in 99_myUtils.
  

  sub bdump {
      my ($name) = @_;
      my $hash   = $defs{$name};
      # the own function, e.g.
      Log3($name, 3, "DbRep $name -> Dump starts");
  
      return;
  }
  

• expimpfile </path/file> [MAXLINES=<lines>] - Path/filename for data export/import.
  
  The maximum number of datasets which are exported into one file can be specified with the optional parameter "MAXLINES". In this case several files with extensions "_part1", "_part2", "_part3" and so on are created.
  The filename may contain wildcards which are replaced by corresponding values (see subsequent table). Furthermore filename can contain %-wildcards of the POSIX strftime function of the underlying OS (see your strftime manual).
  
  

  %L	: is replaced by the value of global logdir attribute
  %TSB	: is replaced by the (calculated) value of the start timestamp of the data selection
  	Common used POSIX-wildcards are:
  %d	: day of month (01..31)
  %m	: month (01..12)
  %Y	: year (1970...)
  %w	: day of week (0..6); 0 represents Sunday
  %j	: day of year (001..366)
  %U	: week number of year with Sunday as first day of week (00..53)
  %W	: week number of year with Monday as first day of week (00..53)

  
  
  Examples:
  attr <name> expimpfile /sds1/backup/exptest_%TSB.csv
attr <name> expimpfile /sds1/backup/exptest_%Y-%m-%d.csv
  
  
  About POSIX wildcard usage please see also explanations in Filelog.
  
  
  
• fastStart - Usually every DbRep device is making a short connect to its database when FHEM is started to retrieve some important informations and the reading "state" switches to "connected" on success. If this attrbute is set, the initial database connection is executed not till then the DbRep device is processing its first command.
  While the reading "state" is remaining in state "initialized" after FHEM-start.
  (default: 1 for TYPE Client)


• fetchMarkDuplicates - Highlighting of multiple occuring datasets in result of "fetchrows" command


• fetchRoute [descent | ascent] - specify the direction of data selection of the fetchrows-command.
  
  
  descent - the data are read descent (default). If amount of datasets specified by attribut "limit" is exceeded, the newest x datasets are shown.
  
  ascent - the data are read ascent . If amount of datasets specified by attribut "limit" is exceeded, the oldest x datasets are shown.
  



• fetchValueFn - When fetching the database content, you are able to manipulate the value fetched from the VALUE database field before create the appropriate reading. You have to insert a Perl function which is enclosed in {} .
  The value of the database field VALUE is provided in variable $VALUE.
  
  
  Example:
  attr <name> fetchValueFn { $VALUE =~ s/^.*Used:\s(.*)\sMB,.*/$1." MB"/e }
  # From a long line a specific pattern is extracted and will be displayed als VALUE instead the whole line



• ftpUse - FTP Transfer after dump will be switched on (without SSL encoding). The created database backup file will be transfered non-blocking to the FTP-Server (Attribut "ftpServer").


• ftpUseSSL - FTP Transfer with SSL encoding after dump. The created database backup file will be transfered non-blocking to the FTP-Server (Attribut "ftpServer").


• ftpUser - User for FTP-server login, default: "anonymous".


• ftpDebug - debugging of FTP communication for diagnostics.


• ftpDir - directory on FTP-server in which the file will be send into (default: "/").


• ftpDumpFilesKeep - leave the number of dump files in FTP-destination <ftpDir> (default: 3). Are there more (older) dump files present, these files are deleted after a new dump was transfered successfully.


• ftpPassive - set if passive FTP is to be used


• ftpPort - FTP-Port, default: 21


• ftpPwd - password of FTP-User, is not set by default


• ftpServer - name or IP-address of FTP-server. absolutely essential !


• ftpTimeout - timeout of FTP-connection in seconds (default: 30).


• limit - limits the number of selected datasets by the "fetchrows", or the shown datasets of "delSeqDoublets adviceDelete", "delSeqDoublets adviceRemain" commands (default: 1000). This limitation should prevent the browser session from overload and avoids FHEMWEB from blocking. Please change the attribut according your requirements or change the selection criteria (decrease evaluation period).


• numDecimalPlaces - Sets the number of decimal places for readings with numeric results.
  Excludes results from user-specific queries (sqlCmd).
  (default: 4)


• optimizeTablesBeforeDump - if set to "1", the database tables will be optimized before executing the dump (default: 0). Thereby the backup run-time time will be extended.
  
  
  Note
  The table optimizing cause locking the tables and therefore to blocking of FHEM if DbLog isn't working in asynchronous mode (DbLog-attribute "asyncMode") !
  


• reading - Selection of particular or several readings. More than one reading can be specified by a comma separated list.
  SQL wildcard (%) can be used.
  If the reading or the reading list is prepended by "EXCLUDE=", those readings are not included.
  The database selection is executed as a logical AND operation of "reading" and the attribute device.
  
  
  Examples:
  attr <name> reading etotal
attr <name> reading et%
attr <name> reading etotal,etoday
attr <name> reading eto%,Einspeisung EXCLUDE=etoday
attr <name> reading etotal,etoday,Ein% EXCLUDE=%Wirkleistung
  
  
  
  
• readingNameMap - A part of the created reading name will be replaced by the specified string


• role - the role of the DbRep-device. Standard role is "Client".
  The role "Agent" is described in section DbRep-Agent.


• readingPreventFromDel - comma separated list of readings which are should prevent from deletion when a new operation starts


• seqDoubletsVariance <positive variance [negative variance] [EDGE=negative|positive]>
  
  Accepted variance for the command "set <name> delSeqDoublets".
  The value of this attribute describes the variance up to consecutive numeric values (VALUE) of datasets are handled as identical. If only one numeric value is declared, it is used as postive as well as negative variance and both form the "deletion corridor". Optional a second numeric value for a negative variance, separated by blank,can be declared. Always absolute, i.e. positive numeric values, have to be declared.
  If the supplement "EDGE=negative" is declared, values at a negative edge (e.g. when value is changed from 4.0 -> 1.0) are not deleted although they are in the "deletion corridor". Equivalent is valid with "EDGE=positive" for the positive edge (e.g. the change from 1.2 -> 2.8).
  
  
  Examples:
  attr <name> seqDoubletsVariance 0.0014
attr <name> seqDoubletsVariance 1.45
attr <name> seqDoubletsVariance 3.0 2.0
attr <name> seqDoubletsVariance 1.5 EDGE=negative
  
  
  
  
• showproctime - if set, the reading "sql_processing_time" shows the required execution time (in seconds) for the sql-requests. This is not calculated for a single sql-statement, but the summary of all sql-statements necessara for within an executed DbRep-function in background.


• showStatus - limits the sample space of command "get <name> dbstatus". SQL-Wildcard (%) can be used.
  
  
  Example:
  attr <name> showStatus %uptime%,%qcache%
  # Only readings with containing "uptime" and "qcache" in name will be shown
  
  
  
• showVariables - limits the sample space of command "get <name> dbvars". SQL-Wildcard (%) can be used.
  
  
  Example:
  attr <name> showVariables %version%,%query_cache%
  # Only readings with containing "version" and "query_cache" in name will be shown
  
  
  
• showSvrInfo - limits the sample space of command "get <name> svrinfo". SQL-Wildcard (%) can be used.
  
  
  Example:
  attr <name> showSvrInfo %SQL_CATALOG_TERM%,%NAME%
  # Only readings with containing "SQL_CATALOG_TERM" and "NAME" in name will be shown
  
  
  
• showTableInfo
  
  Limits the result set of the command "get <name> tableinfo". SQL wildcard (%) can be used.
  
  
  Example:
  attr <name> showTableInfo current,history
  # Only information from the "current" and "history" tables is displayed.
  
  
  
• sqlCmdHistoryLength
  
  Activates the command history of "sqlCmd" with a value > 0 and defines the number of SQL statements to be stored.
  (default: 0)


• sqlCmdVars
  
  Sets the specified SQL session variable(s) or PRAGMA before each SQL statement executed with sqlCmd. SQL statement.
  
  
  Example:
  attr <name> sqlCmdVars SET @open:=NULL, @closed:=NULL;
  attr <name> sqlCmdVars PRAGMA temp_store=MEMORY;PRAGMA synchronous=FULL;PRAGMA journal_mode=WAL;
  
  
  


• sqlFormatService
  
  Automated formatting of SQL statements can be activated via an online service.
  This option is especially useful for complex SQL statements of the setters sqlCmd, sqlCmdHistory, and sqlSpecial to improve structuring and readability.
  An internet connection is required and the global attribute dnsServer should be set.
  (default: none)


• sqlResultFieldSep
  
  Sets the used field separator in the result of the command "set ... sqlCmd".
  (default: "|")


• sqlResultFormat - determines the formatting of the "set <name> sqlCmd" command result. Possible options are:
  
  
  separated - every line of the result will be generated sequentially in a single reading. (default)
  
  mline - the result will be generated as multiline in Reading SqlResult.
  
  sline - the result will be generated as singleline in Reading SqlResult. Datasets are separated by "]|[".
  
  table - the result will be generated as an table in Reading SqlResult.
  
  json - creates the Reading SqlResult as a JSON coded hash. Every hash-element consists of the serial number of the dataset (key) and its value.
  
  To process the result, you may use a userExitFn in 99_myUtils for example:
  

          sub resfromjson {
            my ($name,$reading,$value) = @_;
            my $hash   = $defs{$name};
  
            if ($reading eq "SqlResult") {
              # only reading SqlResult contains JSON encoded data
              my $data = decode_json($value);
  
              foreach my $k (keys(%$data)) {
  
                # use your own processing from here for every hash-element
                # e.g. output of every element that contains "Cam"
                my $ke = $data->{$k};
                if($ke =~ m/Cam/i) {
                  my ($res1,$res2) = split("\\|", $ke);
                  Log3($name, 1, "$name - extract element $k by userExitFn: ".$res1." ".$res2);
                }
              }
            }
          return;
          }
          

  
  
• timeYearPeriod - By this attribute an annual time period will be determined for database data selection. The time limits are calculated dynamically during execution time. Every time an annual period is determined. Periods of less than a year are not possible to set.
  This attribute is particularly intended to make reports synchronous to an account period, e.g. of an energy- or gas provider.
  
  
  Example:
  
  attr <name> timeYearPeriod 06-25 06-24
  
  # evaluates the database within the time limits 25. june AAAA and 24. june BBBB.
  # The year AAAA respectively year BBBB is calculated dynamically depending of the current date.
  # If the current date >= 25. june and =< 31. december, than AAAA = current year and BBBB = current year+1
  # If the current date >= 01. january und =< 24. june, than AAAA = current year-1 and BBBB = current year
  
  
  
• timestamp_begin - begin of data selection
  The format of timestamp is as used with DbLog "YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS". For the attributes "timestamp_begin", "timestamp_end" you can also use one of the following entries. The timestamp-attribute will be dynamically set to:
  
  
  current_year_begin : matches "<current year>-01-01 00:00:00"
  current_year_end : matches "<current year>-12-31 23:59:59"
  previous_year_begin : matches "<previous year>-01-01 00:00:00"
  previous_year_end : matches "<previous year>-12-31 23:59:59"
  current_month_begin : matches "<current month first day> 00:00:00"
  current_month_end : matches "<current month last day> 23:59:59"
  previous_month_begin : matches "<previous month first day> 00:00:00"
  previous_month_end : matches "<previous month last day> 23:59:59"
  current_week_begin : matches "<first day of current week> 00:00:00"
  current_week_end : matches "<last day of current week> 23:59:59"
  previous_week_begin : matches "<first day of previous week> 00:00:00"
  previous_week_end : matches "<last day of previous week> 23:59:59"
  current_day_begin : matches "<current day> 00:00:00"
  current_day_end : matches "<current day> 23:59:59"
  previous_day_begin : matches "<previous day> 00:00:00"
  previous_day_end : matches "<previous day> 23:59:59"
  next_day_begin : matches "<next day> 00:00:00"
  next_day_end : matches "<next day> 23:59:59"
  current_hour_begin : matches "<current hour>:00:00"
  current_hour_end : matches "<current hour>:59:59"
  previous_hour_begin : matches "<previous hour>:00:00"
  previous_hour_end : matches "<previous hour>:59:59"
  
  
  
  
• timestamp_end - end of data selection. If not set the current date/time combination will be used.
  The format of timestamp is as used with DbLog "YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS". For the attributes "timestamp_begin", "timestamp_end" you can also use one of the following entries. The timestamp-attribute will be dynamically set to:
  
  
  current_year_begin : matches "<current year>-01-01 00:00:00"
  current_year_end : matches "<current year>-12-31 23:59:59"
  previous_year_begin : matches "<previous year>-01-01 00:00:00"
  previous_year_end : matches "<previous year>-12-31 23:59:59"
  current_month_begin : matches "<current month first day> 00:00:00"
  current_month_end : matches "<current month last day> 23:59:59"
  previous_month_begin : matches "<previous month first day> 00:00:00"
  previous_month_end : matches "<previous month last day> 23:59:59"
  current_week_begin : matches "<first day of current week> 00:00:00"
  current_week_end : matches "<last day of current week> 23:59:59"
  previous_week_begin : matches "<first day of previous week> 00:00:00"
  previous_week_end : matches "<last day of previous week> 23:59:59"
  current_day_begin : matches "<current day> 00:00:00"
  current_day_end : matches "<current day> 23:59:59"
  previous_day_begin : matches "<previous day> 00:00:00"
  previous_day_end : matches "<previous day> 23:59:59"
  next_day_begin : matches "<next day> 00:00:00"
  next_day_end : matches "<next day> 23:59:59"
  current_hour_begin : matches "<current hour>:00:00"
  current_hour_end : matches "<current hour>:59:59"
  previous_hour_begin : matches "<previous hour>:00:00"
  previous_hour_end : matches "<previous hour>:59:59"
  
  
  Make sure that "timestamp_begin" < "timestamp_end" is fulfilled.
  
  
  Example:
  
  attr <name> timestamp_begin current_year_begin
  attr <name> timestamp_end current_year_end
  
  # Analyzes the database between the time limits of the current year.
  
  
  
  Note
  If the attribute "timeDiffToNow" will be set, the attributes "timestamp_begin" respectively "timestamp_end" will be deleted if they were set before. The setting of "timestamp_begin" respectively "timestamp_end" causes the deletion of attribute "timeDiffToNow" if it was set before as well.
  
  
• timeDiffToNow - the begin time of data selection will be set to the timestamp "<current time> - <timeDiffToNow>" dynamically. The time period will be calculated dynamically at execution time. Optional can with the additional entry "FullDay" the selection start time and the selection end time be expanded to the begin / end of the involved days (take only effect if adjusted time difference is >= 1 day).
  
  
  Examples for input format:
  attr <name> timeDiffToNow 86400
  # the start time is set to "current time - 86400 seconds"
  attr <name> timeDiffToNow d:2 h:3 m:2 s:10
  # the start time is set to "current time - 2 days 3 hours 2 minutes 10 seconds"
  attr <name> timeDiffToNow m:600
  # the start time is set to "current time - 600 minutes" gesetzt
  attr <name> timeDiffToNow h:2.5
  # the start time is set to "current time - 2,5 hours"
  attr <name> timeDiffToNow y:1 h:2.5
  # the start time is set to "current time - 1 year and 2,5 hours"
  attr <name> timeDiffToNow y:1.5
  # the start time is set to "current time - 1.5 years"
  attr <name> timeDiffToNow d:8 FullDay
  # the start time is set to "current time - 8 days", the selection time period is expanded to the begin / end of the involved days
  
  
  If both attributes "timeDiffToNow" and "timeOlderThan" are set, the selection period will be calculated between of these timestamps dynamically.
  
  
• timeOlderThan - the end time of data selection will be set to the timestamp "<aktuelle Zeit> - <timeOlderThan>" dynamically. Always the datasets up to timestamp "<current time> - <timeOlderThan>" will be considered. The time period will be calculated dynamically at execution time. Optional can with the additional entry "FullDay" the selection start time and the selection end time be expanded to the begin / end of the involved days (take only effect if adjusted time difference is >= 1 day).
  
  
  Examples for input format:
  attr <name> timeOlderThan 86400
  # the selection end time is set to "current time - 86400 seconds"
  attr <name> timeOlderThan d:2 h:3 m:2 s:10
  # the selection end time is set to "current time - 2 days 3 hours 2 minutes 10 seconds"
  attr <name> timeOlderThan m:600
  # the selection end time is set to "current time - 600 minutes" gesetzt
  attr <name> timeOlderThan h:2.5
  # the selection end time is set to "current time - 2,5 hours"
  attr <name> timeOlderThan y:1 h:2.5
  # the selection end time is set to "current time - 1 year and 2,5 hours"
  attr <name> timeOlderThan y:1.5
  # the selection end time is set to "current time - 1.5 years"
  attr <name> timeOlderThan d:8 FullDay
  # the end time is set to "current time - 8 days", the selection time period is expanded to the begin / end of the involved days
  
  
  If both attributes "timeDiffToNow" and "timeOlderThan" are set, the selection period will be calculated between of these timestamps dynamically.
  
  
• timeout - set the timeout-value for Blocking-Call Routines in background in seconds (default 86400)


• useAdminCredentials - If set, a before with "set <aame> adminCredentials" saved privileged user is used for particular database operations.
  (only valid if database type is MYSQL and DbRep-type "Client")


• userExitFn - provides an interface for executing custom user code.
  Basically, the interface works without event generation or does not require an event to function. The interface can be used with the following variants.
  
  
  1. call a subroutine, e.g. in 99_myUtils.pm
  
  . The subroutine to be called is created in 99_myUtils.pm according to the following pattern:
  

  sub UserFunction {
    my $name    = shift;         # the name of the DbRep device.
    my $reading = shift;         # the name of the reading to create
    my $value   = shift;         # the value of the reading
    my $hash    = $defs{$name};
    ...
    # e.g. log passed data
    Log3 $name, 1, "UserExitFn $name called - transfer parameters are Reading: $reading, Value: $value " ;
    ...
  return;
  }
  

  In the attribute the subroutine and optionally a Reading:Value regex must be specified as an argument. Without this specification all Reading:Value combinations are evaluated as "true" and passed to the subroutine (equivalent to .*:.*).
  
  
  Example:
  attr userExitFn UserFunction Meter:Energy.*
  # "UserFunction" is the subroutine in 99_myUtils.pm.
  
  The regex is checked after the creation of each reading. If the check is true, the specified function is called.
  
  2. Direct input of custom code
  
  . The custom code is enclosed in curly braces. The code is called after the creation of each reading. In the code, the following variables are available for evaluation:
  
  
  • $NAME - the name of the DbRep device
  • $READING - the name of the reading created
  • $VALUE - the value of the reading
  
  
  Example:
  

  {
    if ($READING =~ /PrEnergySumHwc1_0_value__DIFF/) {
      my $mpk  = AttrVal($NAME, 'multiplier', '0');
      my $tarf = AttrVal($NAME, 'Tariff', '0');                                      # cost €/kWh
      my $m3   = sprintf "%.3f", $VALUE/10000 * $mpk;                                # consumed m3
      my $kwh  = sprintf "%.3f", $m3 * AttrVal($NAME, 'Calorific_kWh/m3', '0');      # conversion m3 -> kWh
      my $cost = sprintf "%.2f", $kwh * $tarf;
  
      my $hash = $defs{$NAME};
  
      readingsBulkUpdate ($hash, 'gas_consumption_m3', $m3);
      readingsBulkUpdate ($hash, 'gas_consumption_kwh', $kwh);
      readingsBulkUpdate ($hash, 'gas_costs_euro', $cost);
    }
  }
  

  # The readings gas_consumption_m3, gas_consumption_kwh and gas_costs_euro are calculated And generated in the DbRep device.



• valueFilter - Regular expression (REGEXP) to filter datasets within particular functions. The REGEXP is applied to a particular field or to the whole selected dataset (inclusive Device, Reading and so on). Please consider the explanations within the set-commands. Further information is available with command "get <name> versionNotes 4".

Readings

Regarding to the selected operation the reasults will be shown as readings. At the beginning of a new operation all old readings will be deleted to avoid that unsuitable or invalid readings would remain.

In addition the following readings will be created:


• state - contains the current state of evaluation. If warnings are occured (state = Warning) compare Readings "diff_overrun_limit_<diffLimit>" and "less_data_in_period"


• errortext - description about the reason of an error state


• background_processing_time - the processing time spent for operations in background/forked operation


• sql_processing_time - the processing time wasted for all sql-statements used for an operation


• diff_overrun_limit_<diffLimit> - contains a list of pairs of datasets which have overrun the threshold (<diffLimit>) of calculated difference each other determined by attribute "diffAccept" (default=20).


• less_data_in_period - contains a list of time periods within only one dataset was found. The difference calculation considers the last value of the aggregation period before the current one. Valid for function "diffValue".


• SqlResult - result of the last executed sqlCmd-command. The formatting can be specified by attribute sqlResultFormat


• sqlCmd - contains the last executed sqlCmd-command

DbRep Agent - automatic change of device names in databases and DbRep-definitions after FHEM "rename" command

By the attribute "role" the role of DbRep-device will be configured. The standard role is "Client". If the role has changed to "Agent", the DbRep device react automatically on renaming devices in your FHEM installation. The DbRep device is now called DbRep-Agent.

By the DbRep-Agent the following features are activated when a FHEM-device has being renamed:


• in the database connected to the DbRep-Agent (Internal Database) dataset containing the old device name will be searched and renamed to the to the new device name in all affected datasets.


• in the DbLog-Device assigned to the DbRep-Agent the definition will be changed to substitute the old device name by the new one. Thereby the logging of the renamed device will be going on in the database.


• in other existing DbRep-definitions with Type "Client" a possibly set attribute "device = old device name" will be changed to "device = new device name". Because of that, reporting definitions will be kept consistent automatically if devices are renamed in FHEM.


The following restrictions take place if a DbRep device was changed to an Agent by setting attribute "role" to "Agent". These conditions will be activated and checked:


• within a FHEM installation only one DbRep-Agent can be configured for every defined DbLog-database. That means, if more than one DbLog-database is present, you could define same numbers of DbRep-Agents as well as DbLog-devices are defined.


• after changing to DbRep-Agent role only the set-command "renameDevice" will be available and as well as a reduced set of module specific attributes will be permitted. If a DbRep-device of privious type "Client" has changed an Agent, furthermore not permitted attributes will be deleted if set.


All activities like database changes and changes of other DbRep-definitions will be logged in FHEM Logfile with verbose=3. In order that the renameDevice function don't running into timeout set the timeout attribute to an appropriate value, especially if there are databases with huge datasets to evaluate. As well as all the other database operations of this module, the autorename operation will be executed nonblocking.


Example of definition of a DbRep-device as an Agent:

define Rep.Agent DbRep LogDB
attr Rep.Agent devStateIcon connected:10px-kreis-gelb .*disconnect:10px-kreis-rot .*done:10px-kreis-gruen
attr Rep.Agent icon security
attr Rep.Agent role Agent
attr Rep.Agent room DbLog
attr Rep.Agent showproctime 1
attr Rep.Agent stateFormat { ReadingsVal($name, 'state', '') eq 'running' ? 'renaming' : ReadingsVal($name, 'state', ''). ' »; ProcTime: '.ReadingsVal($name, 'sql_processing_time', '').' sec'}
attr Rep.Agent timeout 86400


Note:
Even though the function itself is designed non-blocking, make sure the assigned DbLog-device is operating in asynchronous mode to avoid FHEMWEB from blocking.

DoorBird

The DoorBird module establishes the communication between the DoorBird - door intercommunication unit and the fhem home automation based on the official API, published by the manufacturer. Please make sure, that the user has been enabled the API-Operator button in the DoorBird Android/iPhone APP under "Administration -> User -> Edit -> Permission -> API-Operator". The following packet - installations are pre-requisite if not already installed by other modules (Examples below tested on Raspbian): sudo apt-get install sox sudo apt-get install libsox-fmt-all sudo apt-get install libsodium-dev sudo apt-get install gstreamer1.0-tools sudo cpan Crypt::Argon2 sudo cpan Alien::Base::ModuleBuild sudo cpan Alien::Sodium sudo cpan Crypt::NaCl::Sodium




Define

define <name> DoorBird <IPv4-address> <Username> <Password>

<name> : The name of the device. Recommendation: "myDoorBird".

<IPv4-address> : A valid IPv4 address of the KMxxx. You might look into your router which DHCP address has been given to the DoorBird unit.

<Username> : The username which is required to sign on the DoorBird.

<Password> : The password which is required to sign on the DoorBird.




Set

The set function is able to change or activate the following features as follows:

set Light_On : Activates the IR lights of the DoorBird unit. The IR - light deactivates automatically by the default time within the Doorbird unit

set Live_Audio <on:off> : Activate/Deactivate the Live Audio Stream of the DoorBird on or off and toggles the direct link in the hidden Reading .AudioURL

set Live_Video <on:off> : Activate/Deactivate the Live Video Stream of the DoorBird on or off and toggles the direct link in the hidden Reading .VideoURL

set Open_Door <Value> : Activates the Relay of the DoorBird unit with the given address. The list of installed relay addresses are imported with the initialization of parameters.

set Restart : Sends the command to restart (reboot) the Doorbird unit

set Transmit_Audio <Path> : Converts a given audio file and transmits the stream to the DoorBird speaker. Requires a datapath to audio file to be converted and send. The user "fhem" needs to have write access to this directory.




Get

The get function is able to obtain the following information from the DoorBird unit:

get History_Request : Downloads the pictures of the last events of the doorbell and motion sensor. (Refer to attribute MaxHistory)

get Image_Request : Downloads the current Image of the camera of DoorBird unit.

get Video_Request <Value> : Downloads the current Video of the camera of DoorBird unit for th etime in seconds given.

get Info_Request : Downloads the current internal setup such as relay configuration, firmware version etc. of the DoorBird unit. The obtained relay adresses will be used as options for the Open_Door command.




Attributes

The following user attributes can be used with the DoorBird module in addition to the global ones e.g. room.

disable : Stops the device from further reacting on UDP datagrams sent by the DoorBird unit. The default value is 0 = activated

KeepAliveTimeout : Timeout in seconds without still-alive UDP datagrams before state of device will be set to "disconnected". The default value is 30s

MaxHistory : Number of pictures to be downloaded from history for both - doorbell and motion sensor events. The default value is "50" which is the maximum possible.

PollingTimeout : Timeout in seconds before download requests are terminated in cause of no reaction by DoorBird unit. Might be required to be adjusted due to network speed. The default value is 10s.

UdpPort : Port number to be used to receice UDP datagrams. Ports are pre-defined by firmware. The default value is port 6524

SessionIdSec : Time in seconds for how long the session Id shall be valid, which is required for secure Video and Audio transmission. The DoorBird kills the session Id after 10min = 600s automatically. In case of use with CCTV recording units, this function must be disabled by setting to 0. The default value is 540s = 9min.

AudioFileDir : The relative (e.g. "audio") or absolute (e.g. "/mnt/NAS/audio") with or without trailing "/" directory path to which the audio files supposed to be stored. The default value is "" = disabled

AudioFileDirmaxSize : The maximum size of the AudioFileDir in Megabyte [MB]. If the maximum Size has been reached with audio files, the oldest files are deleted automatically The default value is 50 = 50MB

ImageFileDir : The relative (e.g. "images") or absolute (e.g. "/mnt/NAS/images") with or without trailing "/" directory path to which the image files supposed to be stored. The default value is "" = disabled

ImageFileDirmaxSize : The maximum size of the ImageFileDir in Megabyte [MB]. If the maximum Size has been reached with Image files, the oldest files are deleted automatically The default value is 50 = 50MB

VideoFileDir : The relative (e.g. "images") or absolute (e.g. "/mnt/NAS/images") with or without trailing "/" directory path to which the video files supposed to be stored. The default value is "" = disabled

VideoFileDirmaxSize : The maximum size of the VideoFileDir in Megabyte [MB]. If the maximum Size has been reached with Video files, the oldest files are deleted automatically The default value is 50 = 50MB

VideoFileFormat : The file format for the video file to be stored The default value is "mpeg"

VideoDurationDoorbell : Time in seconds for how long the video shall be recorded in case of an doorbbell event. The default value is 0 = disabled

VideoDurationMotion : Time in seconds for how long the video shall be recorded in case of an motion sensor event. The default value is 0 = disabled

EventReset : Time in seconds after wich the Readings for the Events Events (e.g. "doorbell_button", "motions sensor", "keypad") shal be reset to "idle". The default value is 5s

WaitForHistory : Time in seconds after wich the module shall wait for an history image triggered by an event is ready for download. Might be adjusted if fhem-Server and Doorbird unit have large differences in system time. The default value is 7s

OpsModeList : A space separated list of names for operational modes (e.g. "Normal Party Fire") on which the DoorBird reacts automatically on events. The default value is "" = disabled

HistoryFilePath : Creates relative datapaths to the last pictures, and videos in order to indicate them directly (e.g. fhem ftui widget "image") The default value is "0" = disabled

Dooya protocol

The Dooya protocol is used by a wide range of devices, which are either senders or receivers/actuators. The RECIVING and SENDING of Dooya commands is implemented in the SIGNALduino, so this module currently supports devices like blinds and shutters. The Dooya protocol is used from a lot of different shutter companies in Germanyr. Examples are Rohrmotor24 or Nobily.



  4: sduino/msg READ: MU;P0=4717;P1=-1577;P2=284;P3=-786;P4=649;P5=-423;D=01232345[......]445232;CP=2; 
  4: sduino: Fingerprint for MU Protocol id 16 -> Dooya shutter matches, trying to demodulate  
  4: sduino: decoded matched MU Protocol id 16 dmsg u16#370658E133 length 40  
  4: SIGNALduino_unknown Protocol: 16 
  4: SIGNALduino_unknown converted to bits: 0011011100000110010110001110000100110011  
  4: SIGNALduino_unknown / shutter Dooya 0011011100000110010110001110000100110011 received  
  4: 00110111000001100101100 1110 0001 0011 0011  
  4: SIGNALduino_unknown found shutter from Dooya. id=3606104, remotetype=14,  channel=1, direction=down, all_shutters=false  
  


a SIGNALduino device (must be defined first)



Define

define <name> Dooya <id>_<channel>

The id is a 28-digit binar code, that uniquely identifies a single remote control.
Pairing is done by setting the shutter in programming mode, either by disconnecting/reconnecting the power, and by pressing the program button on an already associated remote.
Once the shutter is in programming mode, send the "prog" command from within FHEM to complete the pairing. The shutter will peep shortly to indicate completion.
You are now able to control this blind from FHEM, the receiver thinks it is just another remote control or the real exist remote. For the shutter it´s the same.
• <id> is a 28 digit binar number that uniquely identifies FHEM as a new remote control.
  You can use a different one for each device definition, and group them using a structure. You can use the same ID for a couple of shutters and you can give every one an other channel. (0 to 15, 0 ist the MASTER and conrols all other channels.) If you set one of them, you need to pick the same address as an existing remote. You can create the Device with autocreate with a real remote or manuel without remote control.

Examples:
define Rollo_Master Dooya 0011011100000110010110001110_0
Rollo_Master channel 0 controls all shutters (channel 1 - 15) with the same ID, in this case Rollo_1 and Rollo_2

define Rollo_1 Dooya 0011011100000110010110001110_1
Rollo_1 channel 1
define Rollo_2 Dooya 0011011100000110010110101110_2
Rollo_2 channel 2


Set
set <name> <value> [<time>]

where value is one of:


    on
    off
    stop
    pos value (0..100) # see note
    prog  # Special, see note
    

Examples:
set rollo_1 on
set rollo_1 on,sleep 1,rollo_2 on,sleep 1,rollo_3 on
set rollo_1 off
set rollo_1 pos 50


Notes:
• prog is a special command used to pair the receiver to FHEM: Set the receiver in programming mode and send the "prog" command from FHEM to finish pairing.
  The shutter will peep shortly to indicate success.
• pos value
  The position is variying between 0 completely open and 100 for covering the full window. The position must be between 0 and 100 and the appropriate attributes drive-down-time-to-100, drive-down-time-to-close, drive-up-time-to-100 and drive-up-time-to-open must be set.
  
The position reading distinuishes between multiple cases
• Without timing values set only generic values are used for status and position:

  open, closed, moving

  are used
• With timing values set but drive-down-time-to-close equal to drive-down-time-to-100 and drive-up-time-to-100 equal 0 the device is considered to only vary between 0 and 100 (100 being completely closed)
• With full timing values set the device is considerd a window shutter (Rolladen) with a difference between covering the full window (position 100) and being completely closed (position 200)

Get
N/A

Attributes
• IODev
  Set the IO or physical device which should be used for sending signals for this "logical" device. It must be the SIGNALduino.
  Note: The IODev has to be set, otherwise no commands will be sent!
  


• channel
  Set the channel of the remote. You can use 0 (MASTER) to 15.
  Note: The MASTER conrols all remotes with the same ID!!!
  


• SignalRepeats
  Set the repeats for sending signal. You can use 5, 10, 15 and 20.


• additionalPosReading
  Position of the shutter will be stored in the reading pos as numeric value. Additionally this attribute might specify a name for an additional reading to be updated with the same value than the pos.


• eventMap
  Replace event names and set arguments. The value of this attribute consists of a list of space separated values, each value is a colon separated pair. The first part specifies the "old" value, the second the new/desired value. If the first character is slash(/) or comma(,) then split not by space but by this character, enabling to embed spaces. Examples:
  attr store eventMap on:open off:closed
attr store eventMap /on-for-timer 10:open/off:closed/
set store open


• do_not_notify


• dummy
  Set the device attribute dummy to define devices which should not output any radio signals. Associated notifys will be executed if the signal is received. Used e.g. to react to a code from a sender, but it will not emit radio signal if triggered in the web frontend.


• loglevel


• showtime


• ignore
  Ignore this device, e.g. if it belongs to your neighbour. The device won't trigger any FileLogs/notifys, issued commands will silently ignored (no RF signal will be sent out, just like for the dummy attribute). The device won't appear in the list command (only if it is explicitely asked for it), nor will it appear in commands which use some wildcard/attribute as name specifiers (see devspec). You still get them with the "ignored=1" special devspec.


• drive-down-time-to-100
  The time the blind needs to drive down from "open" (pos 0) to pos 100.
  In this position, the lower edge touches the window frame, but it is not completely shut.
  For a mid-size window this time is about 12 to 15 seconds.


• drive-down-time-to-close
  The time the blind needs to drive down from "open" (pos 0) to "close", the end position of the blind.
  This is about 3 to 5 seonds more than the "drive-down-time-to-100" value.


• drive-up-time-to-100
  The time the blind needs to drive up from "close" (endposition) to "pos 100".
  This usually takes about 3 to 5 seconds.


• drive-up-time-to-open
  The time the blind needs drive up from "close" (endposition) to "open" (upper endposition).
  This value is usually a bit higher than "drive-down-time-to-close", due to the blind's weight.



Generated events:
From a Dooya device you can receive one of the following events.
• on
• off
• stop
Which event is sent is device dependent and can sometimes be configured on the device.

EC3000

The Energy Count 3000 is a AC mains plug with integrated power meter functionality from CONRAD.

It can be integrated in to FHEM via a JeeLink as the IODevice.

Define
define <name> EC3000 <addr>

addr is a 4 digit hex number to identify the EC3000 device. Note: devices are autocreated on reception of the first message.


Set

Get

Readings
• consumption
• consumptionMax
• consumptionNow

Attributes
• offLevel
  a power level less or equal offLevel is considered to be off

ECMD

Any physical device with request/response-like communication capabilities over a serial line or TCP connection can be defined as ECMD device. A practical example of such a device is the AVR microcontroller board AVR-NET-IO from Pollin with ECMD-enabled Ethersex firmware. The original NetServer firmware from Pollin works as well. There is a plenitude of use cases.

A physical ECMD device can host any number of logical ECMD devices. Logical devices are defined as ECMDDevices in fhem. ADC 0 to 3 and I/O port 0 to 3 of the above mentioned board are examples of such logical devices. ADC 0 to 3 all belong to the same device class ADC (analog/digital converter). I/O port 0 to 3 belong to the device class I/O port. By means of extension boards you can make your physical device drive as many logical devices as you can imagine, e.g. IR receivers, LC displays, RF receivers/transmitters, 1-wire devices, etc.

Defining one fhem module for any device class would create an unmanageable number of modules. Thus, an abstraction layer is used. You create a device class on the fly and assign it to a logical ECMD device. The class definition names the parameters of the logical device, e.g. a placeholder for the number of the ADC or port, as well as the get and set capabilities. Worked examples are to be found in the documentation of the ECMDDevice device.

Note: this module requires the Device::SerialPort or Win32::SerialPort module if the module is connected via serial Port or USB.

Character coding

ECMD is suited to process any character including non-printable and control characters. User input for raw data, e.g. for setting attributes, and the display of raw data, e.g. in the log, is perl-encoded according to the following table (ooo stands for a three-digit octal number):


character	octal	code
Bell	007	\a
Backspace	008	\008
Escape	033	\e
Formfeed	014	\f
Newline	012	\n
Return	015	\r
Tab	011	\t
backslash	134	\134 or \\
any	ooo	\ooo


In user input, use \134 for backslash to avoid conflicts with the way FHEM handles continuation lines.

Define


define <name> ECMD telnet <IPAddress:Port>

or

define <name> ECMD serial <SerialDevice>[<@BaudRate>]

Defines a physical ECMD device. The keywords telnet or serial are fixed.

Examples:
define AVRNETIO ECMD telnet 192.168.0.91:2701
define AVRNETIO ECMD serial /dev/ttyS0
define AVRNETIO ECMD serial /dev/ttyUSB0@38400



Set


set <name> classdef <classname> <filename>

Creates a new device class <classname> for logical devices. The class definition is in the file <filename>. You must create the device class before you create a logical device that adheres to that definition.

Example:
set AVRNETIO classdef /etc/fhem/ADC.classdef


set <name> reopen

Closes and reopens the device. Could be handy if connection is lost and cannot be reestablished automatically.


Get


get <name> raw <command>

Sends the command <command> to the physical ECMD device <name> and reads the response. In the likely case that the command needs to be terminated by a newline character, you have to resort to a <perl special>.

Example:
get AVRNETIO raw { "ip\n" }



Attributes


• classdefs
  A colon-separated list of <classname>=<filename>. The list is automatically updated if a class definition is added. You can directly set the attribute. Example: attr myECMD classdefs ADC=/etc/fhem/ADC.classdef:GPIO=/etc/fhem/AllInOne.classdef
• split <separator>
  Some devices send several readings in one transmission. The split attribute defines the separator to split such transmissions into separate messages. The regular expression for matching a reading is then applied to each message in turn. After splitting, the separator is still part of the single messages. Separator can be a single- or multi-character string, e.g. \n or \r\n. Example: attr myECMD split \n splits foo 12\nbar off\n into foo 12\n and bar off\n.
• logTraffic <loglevel>
  Enables logging of sent and received datagrams with the given loglevel. Control characters in the logged datagrams are escaped, i.e. a double backslash is shown for a single backslash, \n is shown for a line feed character, etc.
• timeout <seconds>
  Time in seconds to wait for a response from the physical ECMD device before FHEM assumes that something has gone wrong. The default is 3 seconds if this attribute is not set.
• partial <seconds>
  Some physical ECMD devices split responses into several transmissions. If the partial attribute is set, this behavior is accounted for as follows: (a) If a response is expected for a get or set command, FHEM collects transmissions from the physical ECMD device until either the response matches the expected response (reading ... match ... in the class definition) or the time in seconds given with the partial attribute has expired. (b) If a spontaneous transmission does not match the regular expression for any reading, the transmission is recorded and prepended to the next transmission. If the line is quiet for longer than the time in seconds given with the partial attribute, the recorded transmission is discarded. Use regular expressions that produce exact matches of the complete response (after combining partials and splitting).
• requestSeparator <separator>
  A single command from FHEM to the device might need to be broken down into several requests. A command string is split at all occurrences of the request separator. The request separator itself is removed from the command string and thus is not part of the request. The default is to have no request separator. Use a request separator that does not occur in the actual request.
• responseSeparator <separator>
  In order to identify the single responses from the device for each part of the command broken down by request separators, a response separator can be appended to the response to each single request. The response separator is only appended to commands split by means of a request separator. The default is to have no response separator, i.e. responses are simply concatenated. Use a response separator that does not occur in the actual response.
• autoReopen <timeout>,<delay>
  If this attribute is set, the device is automatically reopened if no bytes were written for <timeout> seconds or more. After reopening FHEM waits <delay> seconds before writing to the device. Use the delay with care because it stalls FHEM completely.
• stop
  Disables read/write access to the device if set to 1. No data is written to the physical ECMD device. A read request always returns an undefined result. This attribute can be used to temporarily disable a device that is not available.
• verbose


Separators

When to use the split and partial attributes?

Set the partial attribute in combination with reading ... match ... in the class definition, if you receive datagrams with responses which are broken into several transmissions, like resp followed by onse\r\n.

Set the split attribute if you receive several responses in one transmission, like reply1\r\nreply2\r\n.

When to use the requestSeparator and responseSeparator attributes?

Set the requestSeparator attribute, if you want to send several requests in one command, with one transmission per request. The strings sent to the device for set and get commands as defined in the class definition are broken down into several request/response interactions with the physical device. The request separator is not sent to the physical device.

Set the responseSeparator attribute to separate the responses received for a command broken down into several requests by means of a request separator. This is useful for easier postprocessing.

Example: you want to send the requests request1 and request2 in one command. The physical device would respond with response1 and response2 respectively for each of the requests. You set the request separator to \000 and the response separator to \001 and you define the command as request1\000request2\000. The command is broken down into request1 and request2. request1 is sent to the physical device and response1 is received, followed by sending request2 and receiving response2. The final result is response1\001response2\001.

You can think of this feature as of a macro. Splitting and partial matching is still done per single request/response within the macro.

Datagram monitoring and matching

Data to and from the physical device is processed as is. In particular, if you need to send a line feed you have to explicitely send a \n control character. On the other hand, control characters like line feeds are not stripped from the data received. This needs to be considered when defining a class definition.

For debugging purposes, especially when designing a class definition, it is advisable to turn traffic logging on. Use attr myECMD logTraffic 3 to log all data to and from the physical device at level 3.

Datagrams and attribute values are logged with non-printable and control characters encoded as here followed by the octal representation in parantheses. Example: #!foo\r\n (\043\041\146\157\157\015\012).

Data received from the physical device is processed as it comes in chunks. If for some reason a datagram from the device is split in transit, pattern matching and processing will most likely fail. You can use the partial attribute to make FHEM collect and recombine the chunks.

Connection error handling

This modules handles unexpected disconnects of devices as follows (on Windows only for TCP connections):

Disconnects are detected if and only if data from the device in reply to data sent to the device cannot be received with at most two attempts. FHEM waits at most 3 seconds (or the time specified in the timeout attribute, see Attributes). After the first failed attempt, the connection to the device is closed and reopened again. The state of the device is failed. Then the data is sent again to the device. If still no reply is received, the state of the device is disconnected, otherwise opened. You will have to fix the problem and then use set myECMD reopen to reconnect to the device.

Please design your class definitions in such a way that the double sending of data does not bite you in any case.

Class definition

The class definition for a logical ECMD device class is contained in a text file. The text file is made up of single lines. Empty lines and text beginning with # (hash) are ignored. Therefore make sure not to use hashes in commands.
The following commands are recognized in the device class definition:



• params <parameter1> [<parameter2> [<parameter3> ... ]]
  
  Declares the names of the named parameters that must be present in the definition of the logical ECMD device.
  
  
• state <reading>
  
  Normally, the state reading is set to the latest command or reading name followed by the value, if any. This command sets the state reading to the value of the named reading if and only if the reading is updated.
  
  
• set <commandname> cmd { <perl special> }
get <commandname> cmd { <perl special> }
  
  Declares a new set or get command <commandname>. If the user invokes the set or get command <commandname>, the string that results from the execution of the <perl special> is sent to the physical device.

  A request separator (see Attributes) can be used to split the command into chunks. This is required for sending multiple Ethersex commands for one command in the class definition. The result string for the command is the concatenation of all responses received from the physical device, optionally with response separators (see Attributes) in between.
  
  

• set <commandname> expect "<regex>"
get <commandname> expect "<regex>"
  
  Declares what FHEM expects to receive after the execution of the get or set command <commandname>. <regex> is a Perl regular expression. The double quotes around the regular expression are mandatory and they are not part of the regular expression itself. <regex> must match the entire reply, as in m/^<regex>$/. Particularly, broken connections can only be detected if something is expected (see Connection error handling).
  
  
• set <commandname> postproc { <perl special> }
get <commandname> postproc { <perl special> }
  
  Declares a postprocessor for the command <commandname>. The data received from the physical device in reply to the get or set command <commandname> is processed by the Perl code <perl command>. The perl code operates on $_. Make sure to return the result in $_ as well. The result of the perl command is shown as the result of the get or set command.
  
  
• set <commandname> params <parameter1> [<parameter2> [<parameter3> ... ]]
get <commandname> params <parameter1> [<parameter2> [<parameter3> ... ]]
  
  Declares the names of the named parameters that must be present in the set or get command <commandname>. Be careful not to use a parameter name that is already used in the device definition (see params above).
  
  
• reading <reading> match "<regex>"
  
  Declares a new reading named <reading>. A spontaneous data transmission from the physical device that matches the Perl regular expression <regex> is evaluated to become the value of the named reading. All ECMDDevice devices belonging to the ECMD device with readings with matching regular expressions will receive an update of the said readings. <regex> must match the entire reply, as in m/^<regex>$/.
  
  
• reading <reading> postproc { <perl special> }
  
  Declares a postprocessor for the reading <reading>. The data received for the named reading is processed by the Perl code <perl command>. This works analogously to the postproc spec for set and get commands.
  
  
The perl specials in the definitions above can contain macros:


• The macro %NAME will expand to the device name.
• The macro %TYPE will expand to the device type.
• The macro %<parameter> will expand to the current value of the named parameter. This can be either a parameter from the device definition or a parameter from the set or get command.
• The macro substitution occurs before perl evaluates the expression. It is a plain text substitution. Be careful not to use parameters with overlapping names like %pin and %pin1.
• If in doubt what happens, run the commands with loglevel 5 and inspect the log file.


The rules outlined in the documentation of perl specials for the <perl command> in the postprocessor definitions apply. Note: Beware of undesired side effects from e.g. doubling of semicolons!

ECMDDevice

Define
define <name> ECMDDevice [<classname> [<parameter1> [<parameter2> [<parameter3> ... ]]]]

Defines a logical ECMD device. The number of given parameters must match those given in the class definition of the device class <classname>.

Normally, the logical ECMDDevice is attached to the latest previously defined physical ECMD device for I/O. Use the IODev attribute of the logical ECMDDevice to attach to any physical ECMD device, e.g. attr myRelais2 IODev myAVRNETIO. In such a case the correct reference to the class cannot be made at the time of definition of the device. Thus, you need to omit the <classname> and <parameter> references in the definition of the device and use the class attribute instead.

Examples:

define myADC ECMDDevice ADC
define myRelais1 ECMDDevice relais 8
define myRelais2 ECMDDevice
attr myRelais2 IODev myAVRNETIO
attr myRelais2 class relais 8


Set
set <name> <commandname> [<parameter1> [<parameter2> [<parameter3> ... ]]]

The number of given parameters must match those given for the set command <commandname> definition in the class definition.

If set <commandname> is invoked the perl special in curly brackets from the command definition is evaluated and the result is sent to the physical ECMD device.

Example:
set myRelais1 on
set myDisplay text This\x20text\x20has\x20blanks!



Get
get <name> <commandname> [<parameter1> [<parameter2> [<parameter3> ... ]]]

The number of given parameters must match those given for the get command <commandname> definition in the class definition.

If get <commandname> is invoked the perl special in curly brackets from the command definition is evaluated and the result is sent to the physical ECMD device. The response from the physical ECMD device is returned and the state of the logical ECMD device is updated accordingly.

Example:
get myADC value 3



Attributes
• class
  If you omit the <classname> and <parameter> references in the definition of the device, you have to add them separately as an attribute. Example: attr myRelais2 class relais 8.
• noState
  Changes of readings do not change the state reading if this attribute is set to a non-zero value. For example, this is desirable if you need to avoid the second event created by changing the state reading. Previously created state readings can be deleted by means of deletereading. The user can define the value shown in the state of the device by means of the stateFormat attribute.
• verbose
• eventMap
• IODev
• readingFnAttributes


Example 1


The following example shows how to access the ADC of the AVR-NET-IO board from Pollin with ECMD-enabled Ethersex firmware.

The class definition file /etc/fhem/ADC.classdef looks as follows:

get value cmd {"adc get %channel\n"}
get value params channel
get value expect "\d+\n"
get value postproc { s/^(\d+)\n$/$1/;; $_ }

In the fhem configuration file or on the fhem command line we do the following:

define AVRNETIO ECMD telnet 192.168.0.91:2701 # define the physical device
attr AVRNETIO classdefs ADC=/etc/fhem/ADC.classdef # define the device class ADC
define myADC ECDMDevice ADC # define the logical device myADC with device class ADC
get myADC value 1 # retrieve the value of analog/digital converter number 1

The get command is evaluated as follows: get value has one named parameter channel. In the example the literal 1 is given and thus %channel is replaced by 1 to yield "adc get 1\n" after macro substitution. Perl evaluates this to a literal string which is send as a plain ethersex command to the AVR-NET-IO. The board returns something like 024\n for the current value of analog/digital converter number 1. The postprocessor keeps only the digits.


Example 2


The following example shows how to switch a relais driven by pin 3 (bit mask 0x08) of I/O port 2 on for one second and then off again.

The class definition file /etc/fhem/relais.classdef looks as follows:

params pinmask
set on cmd {"io set ddr 2 ff\n\000ioset port 2 0%pinmask\n\000wait 1000\n\000io set port 2 00\n"}
set on expect ".*"
set on postproc {s/^OK\nOK\nOK\nOK\n$/success/; "$_" eq "success" ? "ok" : "error"; }

In the fhem configuration file or on the fhem command line we do the following:

define AVRNETIO ECMD telnet 192.168.0.91:2701 # define the physical device
attr AVRNETIO classdefs relais=/etc/fhem/relais.classdef # define the device class relais
attr AVRNETIO requestSeparator \000
define myRelais ECMDDevice 8 # define the logical device myRelais with pin mask 8
set myRelais on # execute the "on" command

The set command is evaluated as follows: %pinmask is replaced by 8 to yield "io set ddr 2 ff\n\000io set port 2 08\n\000wait 1000\n\000io set port 2 00\n\000" after macro substitution. Perl evaluates this to a literal string. This string is split into lines (with trailing newline characters)
• io set ddr 2 ff\n
• ioset port 2 08\n
• wait 1000\n
• io set port 2 00\n
These lines are sent as a plain ethersex commands to the AVR-NET-IO one by one. After each line the answer from the physical device is read back. They are concatenated and returned for further processing by the postproc command. For any of the four plain ethersex commands, the AVR-NET-IO returns the string OK\n. They are concatenated. The postprocessor takes the result from $_, substitutes it by the string success if it is OK\nOK\nOK\nOK\n, and then either returns the string ok or the string error. If the responseSeparator was set to \000, the result string would be OK\n\000OK\n\000OK\n\000OK\n\000 instead of OK\nOK\nOK\nOK\n.


Example 3


The following example shows how to implement a sandbox.

The class definition file /etc/fhem/DummyServer.classdef looks as follows:

reading foo match "\d+\n"
reading foo postproc { s/^(\d+).*$/$1/;; $_ }

In the fhem configuration file or on the fhem command line we do the following:

define myDummyServer ECMD telnet localhost:9999 # define the physical device
set myDummyServer classdef DummyServer /etc/fhem/DummyServer.classdef # define the device class DummyServer
define myDummyClient ECDMDevice DummyServer # define a logical device with device class DummyServer


On a Unix command line, run netcat -l 9999. This makes netcat listening on port 9999. Data received on that port are printed on stdout. Data input from stdin is sent to the other end of an incoming connection.

Start FHEM.

Then enter the number 4711 at the stdin of the running netcat server.

FHEM sees 4711\n coming in from the netcat dummy server. The incoming string matches the regular expression of the foo reading. The postprocessor is used to strip any trailing garbage from the digits. The result 4711 is used to update the foo reading.

EGPM Socket

Defines a Socket from EGPM2LAN Module. If the global Module AUTOCREATE is enabled, this device will be created automatically. For manual Setup, pls. see the description of EGPM2LAN.

Define
define <name> EGPM <device> <socket-nr>


Set
set <name> <[on|off|toggle]>
Switches the socket on or of.
set <name> <[on-for-timer|off-for-timer|on-till|off-till|blink|intervals]>
Switches the socket for a specified time+duration or n-times. For Details see set extensions

Example:
define lamp1 EGPM mainswitch 1
set lamp1 on


Get
N/A

Attributes
• readingFnAttributes

Generated events
• EGPM <name> <[on|off]>

EGPM2LAN

Define
define <name> EGPM2LAN <IP-Address>

Creates a Gembird ® Energenie EG-PM2-LAN device to switch up to 4 sockets over the network. If you have more than one device, it is helpful to connect and set names for your sockets over the web-interface first. The name settings will be adopted to FHEM and helps you to identify the sockets. Please make sure that you´re logged off from the Energenie web-interface otherwise you can´t control it with FHEM at the same time.
Create a EGPM-Module to control a single socket with additional features.
EG-PMS2-LAN with surge protector feature was not tested until now.

Set
set <name> password [<one-word>]
Encrypt and store device-password in FHEM. Leave empty to remove the password.
Before 04/2017, the password was stored in clear-text using the DEFINE-Command, but it should not be stored in the config-file.

set <name> <[on|off|toggle]> <socketnr.>
Switch the socket on or off.

set <name> <[on|off]> <all>
Switch all available sockets on or off.

set <name> <staterequest>
Update the device information and the state of all sockets.
If autocreate is enabled, an EGPM device will be created for each socket.

set <name> <clearreadings>
Removes all readings from the list to get rid of old socketnames.

Get
get <name> state
Returns a text like this: "1: off 2: on 3: off 4: off" or the last error-message if something went wrong.


Attributes
• stateDisplay
Default: socketNumer changes between socketNumer and socketName in front of the current state. Call set statusrequest to update all states.
• autocreate
Default: on EGPM-devices will be created automatically with a set-command. Change this attribute to value off to avoid that mechanism.
• loglevel
• readingFnAttributes



Example:
define mainswitch EGPM2LAN 10.192.192.20
set mainswitch password SecretGarden
set mainswitch on 1

EM

Define
define <name> EM <em1010pc-device>

Define a EM1010PC USB device. As the EM1010PC was not designed to be used with a PC attached to it all the time, it won't transmit received signals automatically, fhem has to poll it every 5 minutes.
Currently there is no way to read the internal log of the EM1010PC with fhem, use the program em1010.pl in the contrib directory for this purpose.

Examples:
define em EM /dev/elv_em1010pc


Set
set EM <value>

where value is either time or reset.
If time has arguments of the form YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS, then the specified time will be set, else the time from the host.
Note: after reset you should set the time.

Get
get EM <value>

where value is either version or time.
Attributes
• model (em1010pc)
• dummy

EMEM

Define
define <name> EMEM <device-number>

Define up to 4 EM1000EM attached to the EM1010PC. The device number must be between 5 and 8. Defining an EMEM will schedule an internal task, which reads the status of the device every 5 minutes, and triggers notify/filelog commands.
Note: Currently this device does not support a "set" function.

Example:
define emem EMEM 5


Set
N/A

Get
get EMEM status

This is the same command which is scheduled every 5 minutes internally.

Attributes
• model (EM1000EM)
• dummy
• IODev

EMGZ

Define
define <name> EMGZ <device-number>

Define up to 4 EM1000GZ attached to the EM1010PC. The device number must be between 9 and 12. Defining an EMGZ will schedule an internal task, which reads the status of the device every 5 minutes, and triggers notify/filelog commands.

Example:
define emgz EMGZ 9

Set
set EMGZdevice <param> <value>

where param is:
• price
  The price of one KW in EURO (use e.g. 0.20 for 20 Cents). It is used only on the EM1010PC display, it is of no interest for FHEM.

Get
get EMGZ status

This is the same command which is scheduled every 5 minutes internally.

Attributes
• model (EM1000GZ)
• dummy
• IODev

EMT7110

The EMT7110 is a plug with integrated power meter functionality.
It can be integrated into FHEM via a JeeLink as the IODevice.

The EMT7110 sends with 9.579 kbit/s. Therefore it is necessary to set the JeeLink to a mode where it recieves this data rate.
This can be done using the initCommands attribute of the JeeLink.

If you have only 9.579 kbit/s sensors use this setting:
attr myJeeLink initCommands 1r v

If you have also 17.241 kbit/s sensors (like TX29...) use this setting:
attr myJeeLink initCommands 30t v
30t means that the JeeLink toggles the data rate every 30 Seconds.

Define define <name> EMT7110 <addr>
addr is a 4 digit hex number to identify the EMT7110 device.
To enable autocreate for a certain time you must set LaCrossePairForSec in the JeeLink IODevice device.

Set
• resetAccumulatedPower
  Sets the accumulatedPowerOffset attribute to the current value of accumulatedPowerMeasured. Don't forget to call save to write the new value to fhem.cfg

Get

Readings
• accumulatedPowerMeasured
  The accumulated power sent by the EMT7110. The EMT7110 accumulates the power even if it was removed and reconnected to the power outlet. The only way to reset it is to remove and reinsert the batteries in the EMT7110.


• accumulatedPower
  Is accumulatedPowerMeasured minus the value of the accumulatedPowerOffset attribute value This reading is used for the A: part of state


• costs
  Is accumulatedPower * pricePerKWH attribute value


• current
  The measured current in mA


• power
  The measured power in Watt


• voltage
  The measured voltage in Volt


Attributes
• accumulatedPowerOffset
  See accumulatedPower reading


• pricePerKWH
  See costs reading

EMWZ

Define
define <name> EMWZ <device-number>

Define up to 4 EM1000WZ attached to the EM1010PC. The device number must be between 1 and 4. Defining an EMWZ will schedule an internal task, which reads the status of the device every 5 minutes, and triggers notify/filelog commands.

Example:
define emwz EMWZ 1


Set
set EMWZdevice <param> <value>

where param is one of:
• rperkw
  Number of rotations for a KiloWatt of the EM1000WZ device (actually of the device where the EM1000WZ is attached to). Without setting this correctly, all other readings will be incorrect.
• alarm
  Alarm in WATT. if you forget to set it, the default value is rediculously low (random), and if a value above this threshold is received, the EM1010PC will start beeping once every minute. It can be very annoying.
• price
  The price of one KW in EURO (use e.g. 0.20 for 20 Cents). It is used only on the EM1010PC display, it is of no interest for FHEM.

Get
get EMWZ status

This is the same command which is scheduled every 5 minutes internally.

Attributes
• model (EM1000WZ)
• dummy
• IODev

ENECSYSGW

Module to access the ENECSYS gateway (http://www.ENECSYS.com/products/gateway/).

The actual micro-inverter devices are defined as ENECSYSINV devices.

All newly found inverter devices are autocreated and added to the room ENECSYSINV.

Define
define <name> ENECSYSGW [<host>] [<interval>]

Defines an ENECSYSGW device with address <host>.

The gateway will be polled every <interval> seconds. The default is 10 and minimum is 5.

Examples:
define gateway ENECSYSGW 10.0.1.1

ENECSYSINV

Define
define <name> ENECSYSINV <id> [<interval>]

Defines an micro-inverter device connected to an ENECSYSGW.

Examples:
define SolarPanel1 ENECSYSINV 100123456


Readings
• acfrequency
  the alternating current frequency reported from the device. Should be around 50 Hz in Europe.
• acpower
  the alternating current power
• acvolt
  the alternating current voltage
• dccurrent
  the direct current
• dcpower
  the direct current power
• dcvolt
  the direct current voltage
• efficiency
  the efficiency of the inverter
• lifetime
  the sum of collected energy of the inverter
• temperature
  the temperature of the inverter
• state
  the current state (equal to dcpower)

ENIGMA2

Define
define <name> ENIGMA2 <ip-address-or-hostname> [[[[<port>] [<poll-interval>]] [<http-user>]] [<http-password>]]

This module controls ENIGMA2 based devices like Dreambox or VUplus receiver via network connection.

Defining an ENIGMA2 device will schedule an internal task (interval can be set with optional parameter <poll-interval> in seconds, if not set, the value is 45 seconds), which periodically reads the status of the device and triggers notify/filelog commands.

Example:

define SATReceiver ENIGMA2 192.168.0.10

# With custom port
define SATReceiver ENIGMA2 192.168.0.10 8080

# With custom interval of 20 seconds
define SATReceiver ENIGMA2 192.168.0.10 80 20

# With HTTP user credentials
define SATReceiver ENIGMA2 192.168.0.10 80 20 root secret


Set
set <name> <command> [<parameter>]

Currently, the following commands are defined.

• on   -   powers on the device and send a WoL magic package if needed
• off   -   turns the device in standby mode
• toggle   -   switch between on and off
• shutdown   -   turns the device in deepstandby mode
• reboot   -  reboots the device
• restartGui   -  restarts the GUI / ENIGMA2 process
• channel channel,0...999,sRef   -   zap to specific channel or service reference
• channelUp   -   zap to next channel
• channelDown   -   zap to previous channel
• volume 0...100   -   set the volume level in percentage
• volumeUp   -   increases the volume level
• volumeDown   -   decreases the volume level
• mute on,off,toggle   -   controls volume mute
• play   -   starts/resumes playback
• pause   -   pauses current playback or enables timeshift
• stop   -   stops current playback
• record   -   starts recording of current channel
• input tv,radio   -   switches between tv and radio mode
• statusRequest   -   requests the current status of the device
• remoteControl UP,DOWN,...   -   sends remote control commands; see 'remoteControl ?' for full command list
  Note: You may add the word "long" after the command to simulate a long key press.
• showText text   -   sends info message to screen to be displayed for 8 seconds
• msg yesno,info...   -   allows more complex messages as showText, see commands as listed below
Note: If you would like to restrict access to admin set-commands (-> statusRequest, reboot, restartGui, shutdown) you may set your FHEMWEB instance's attribute allowedCommands like 'set,set-user'. The string 'set-user' will ensure only non-admin set-commands can be executed when accessing FHEM using this FHEMWEB instance.



Messaging


showText has predefined settings. If you would like to send more individual messages to your TV screen, the function msg can be used. For this application the following commands are available:

Type Selection:

msg yesno
msg info
msg message
msg attention



The following parameter are essentially needed after type specification:
msg <TYPE> <TIMEOUT> <YOUR MESSAGETEXT>



Get
get <name> <what>

Currently, the following commands are defined:


channel
currentMedia
currentTitle
mute
nextTitle
power
providername
servicevideosize
input
streamUrl
volume



Attributes

• bouquet-tv - service reference address where the favorite television bouquet can be found (initially set automatically during define)
• bouquet-radio - service reference address where the favorite radio bouquet can be found (initially set automatically during define)
• disable - Disable polling (true/false)
• http-method - HTTP access method to be used; e.g. a FritzBox might need to use POST instead of GET (GET/POST)
• http-noshutdown - Set FHEM-internal HttpUtils connection close behaviour (defaults=1)
• https - Access box via secure HTTP (true/false)
• ignoreState - Do not check for available device before sending commands to it (true/false)
• lightMode - reduces regular queries (resulting in less functionality), e.g. for low performance devices. (true/false)
• macaddr - manually set specific MAC address for device; overwrites value from reading "lanmac". (true/false)
• remotecontrol - Explicitly set specific remote control unit format. This will only be considered for set-command remoteControl as of now.
• remotecontrolChannel - Switch between remote control commands used for set-commands channelUp and channelDown.
• timeout - Set different polling timeout in seconds (default=6)
• wakeupCmd - Set a command to be executed when turning on an absent device. Can be an FHEM command or Perl command in {}. Available variables: ENIGMA2 device name -> $DEVICE, ENIGMA2 device MAC address -> $MACADDR (default=Wake-on-LAN)



Generated Readings/Events:

• acg - Shows Automatic Gain Control value in percent; reflects overall signal quality strength
• apid - Shows the audio process ID for current channel
• ber - Shows Bit Error Rate for current channel
• channel - Shows the service name of current channel or media file name; part of FHEM-4-AV-Devices compatibility
• currentMedia - The service reference ID of current channel; part of FHEM-4-AV-Devices compatibility
• currentTitle - Shows the title of the running event; part of FHEM-4-AV-Devices compatibility
• enigmaversion - Shows the installed version of ENIGMA2
• eventcurrenttime - Shows the current time of running event as UNIX timestamp
• eventcurrenttime_hr - Shows the current time of running event in human-readable format
• eventcurrenttime_next - Shows the current time of next event as UNIX timestamp
• eventcurrenttime_next_hr - Shows the current time of next event in human-readable format
• eventdescription - Shows the description of running event
• eventdescriptionextended - Shows the extended description of running event
• eventdescriptionextended_next - Shows the extended description of next event
• eventdescription_next - Shows the description of next event
• evenduration - Shows the total duration time of running event in seconds
• evenduration_hr - Shows the total duration time of running event in human-readable format
• evenduration_next - Shows the total duration time of next event in seconds
• evenduration_next_hr - Shows the total duration time of next event in human-readable format
• eventname - Shows the name of running event
• eventname_next - Shows the name of next event
• eventremaining - Shows the remaining duration time of running event in seconds
• eventremaining_hr - Shows the remaining duration time of running event in human-readable format
• eventremaining_next - Shows the remaining duration time of next event in seconds
• eventremaining_next_hr - Shows the remaining duration time of next event in human-readable format
• eventstart - Shows the starting time of running event as UNIX timestamp
• eventstart_hr - Shows the starting time of running event in human readable format
• eventstart_next - Shows the starting time of next event as UNIX timestamp
• eventstart_next_hr - Shows the starting time of next event in human readable format
• eventtitle - Shows the title of the running event
• eventtitle_next - Shows the title of the next event
• fpversion - Shows the firmware version for the front processor
• hddX_capacity - Shows the total capacity of the installed hard drive in GB
• hddX_free - Shows the free capacity of the installed hard drive in GB
• hddX_model - Shows hardware details for the installed hard drive
• imageversion - Shows the version for the installed software image
• input - Shows currently used input; part of FHEM-4-AV-Devices compatibility
• iswidescreen - Indicates widescreen format - 0=off 1=on
• lanmac - Shows the device MAC address
• model - Shows details about the device hardware
• mute - Reports the mute status of the device (can be "on" or "off")
• nextTitle - Shows the title of the next event; part of FHEM-4-AV-Devices compatibility
• onid - The ON ID
• pcrpid - The PCR process ID
• pmtpid - The PMT process ID
• power - Reports the power status of the device (can be "on" or "off")
• presence - Reports the presence status of the receiver (can be "absent" or "present"). In case of an absent device, control is basically limited to turn it on again. This will only work if the device supports Wake-On-LAN packages, otherwise command "on" will have no effect.
• providername - Service provider of current channel
• recordings - Number of active recordings
• recordingsX_name - name of active recording no. X
• recordingsX_servicename - servicename of active recording no. X
• recordings_next - Shows the time of next recording as UNIX timestamp
• recordings_next_hr - Shows the time of next recording as human-readable format
• recordings_next_counter - Shows the time until next recording starts in seconds
• recordings_next_counter_hr - Shows the time until next recording starts human-readable format
• recordings_next_name - name of next recording
• recordings_next_servicename - servicename of next recording
• recordings_error - counter for failed recordings in timerlist
• recordings_finished - counter for finished recordings in timerlist
• servicename - Name for current channel
• servicereference - The service reference ID of current channel
• servicevideosize - Video resolution for current channel
• sid - The S-ID
• snr - Shows Signal to Noise for current channel in percent
• snrdb - Shows Signal to Noise in dB
• state - Reports current power state and an absence of the device (can be "on", "off" or "absent")
• tsid - The TS ID
• tuner_X - Details about the used tuner hardware
• txtpid - The TXT process ID
• videoheight - Height of the video resolution for current channel
• videowidth - Width of the video resolution for current channel
• volume - Reports current volume level of the receiver in percentage values (between 0 and 100 %)
• vpid - The Video process ID
• webifversion - Type and version of the used web interface

EQ3BT

EQ3BT is used to control a EQ3 Bluetooth Smart Radiator Thermostat

Note: The bluez package is required to run this module. Please check if gatttool executable is available on your system.

Define
define <name> EQ3BT <mac address>

Example:
define livingroom.thermostat EQ3BT 00:33:44:33:22:11


Set
set <name> <command> [<parameter>]
The following commands are defined:


• desiredTemperature [4.5...29.5]   -   set the temperature
• boost on/off   -   activate boost command
• mode manual/automatic   -   set manual/automatic mode
• updateStatus   -   read current thermostat state and update readings
• eco   -   set eco temperature
• comfort   -   set comfort temperature


Get
n/a

attr
• sshHost - FQD-Name or IP of ssh remote system / you must configure your ssh system for certificate authentication. For better handling you can config ssh Client with .ssh/config file

ESA2000

The ESA2000 module interprets ESA1000 or ESA2000 type of messages received by the CUL.

Define
define <name> ESA2000 <code> [base1 base2]

<code> is the 4 digit HEX code identifying the devices.

base1/2 is added to the total kwh as a base (Hoch- und Niedertarifzählerstand).

Set
N/A

Get
N/A

Attributes
• ignore


• do_not_notify


• showtime


• model (esa2000-led, esa2000-wz, esa2000-s0, esa1000wz-ir, esa1000wz-s0, esa1000wz-led, esa1000gas)


• IODev


• readingFnAttributes

ESCVP21net

ESCVP21net implements Epson VP21 control via (W)LAN, uses VP.net.
Attention: To be able to switch the projector power on via (W)LAN, you have to enable wireless/LAN standby mode (or whatever it is called in your projector menu), so that the projector does NOT deactivate the (W)LAN in standby mode!

Define
define <name> ESCVP21net <IP_Address> [<port>] [<model>]

This module controls Epson Seiko Devices via TCP, using VP.net and ESC/VP21 commands.
For the time being, only Epson initilization is implemented (needs a special initialization string "ESC/VP.net").


• IP_Address - the IP Address of the projector
• port - ... guess? Yes, the port. If not given, Epson standard port 3629 is used.
• model - defines your type of projector. It is used for loading a suitable pre-defined command set.
  No parameter or default will provide you with a limit "set" (PWR, MUTE, LAMP, KEY, GetAll, GetStatus).
  You can try TW5650 to get a typical set of implemented commands. Providing the maintainer with a suitable set for your projector will extend the module's capabilities ;-)
  Individually supported by now: TW5650, EB2250U, TW6100, TW7400, TW9400, LS12000, HC2150
  "Hidden Feature:" Type Scotty will give you everything (as he does always ;) ). Not every command will work for you. You are the Captain, so decide wisely what to choose...
• Example: define EPSON ESCVP21net 10.10.0.1 3629 TW5650


The first Define (or defmod) will configure
• a standard icon (it will use "it_camera", since I am not really a good designer)
• webCmds for on, off, GetStatus, GetAll
• cmdIcons for the webCmds
• stateFormat as PWR

Set


Available set commands depend on your model, see above.
For the predefined commands, "nice" names will be shown in the readings, e.g. for PWR: Standby (Net on) instead of the boring PWR=04 (which is the device's answer if the projector is in Standby with LAN on).
Default set commands are


• GetAll
  This is a little bit special - it does not send just one command to the projector, but will select every command defined which has a get option, send it to the projector and update the corresponding reading. If a command gives no result or an error, this will be suppressed, the old value is silently kept.
  The status of GetAll is shown in the GetAll reading. It will either show the read commands, or inform if an error was received.


• GetStatus
  Also special - also does not send just one command to the projector, but will select every command you defined in attr "statusCheckCmd" which has a get option, send it to the projector and update the corresponding reading. If a command gives no result or an error, this will be suppressed, the old value is silently kept.
  The status of GetStatus is shown in the GetStatus reading. It will either show the read commands, or inform if an error was received.


• LAMP
  get to query lamp hours.


• MUTE
  on or off to mute video signal (i.e. blank screen), get to query current state.


• KEY
  sends the value you enter to the projector.
  E.g.KEY 03 or KEY 3C should open the OSD menu, KEY 05 or or KEY 3D should close it.
  Feel free to define your own KEY sets via the attribute "AdditionalSettings".


• PWR
  on or off to switch power, get to query current value.


• on
  Hm, what could that mean ... OK, shortcut to switch your projector on - give it a try!


• off
  Wohoo ... want to switch it off again? Then use this command.


• ASPECT
  set/get aspect ratio. Values depend on your model.


• AUTOHOME
  set/get auto display of home screen.


• AUTOKEYSTONE
  set/get auto keystone correction.


• BRIGHT
  get brightness value.


• BRIGHTset
  Set brightness value.


• BTAUDIO
  set/get bluetooth audio (on/off).


• CMODE
  set/get color mode.


• CONTRAST
  get contrast enhancement value.


• CONTRASTset
  set contrast enhancement value.


• DENSITY
  get density value.


• DENSITYset
  set density value.


• ERASEMEM
  Erase picture setting memory slot (1...10), related to PUSHMEM, POPMEM.


• GAMMA
  set/get gamma value (-2...2)


• HREVERSE
  set/get horizontal reverse setting.


• ILLUM
  set/get illumination setting of on-device control lights.


• IMGPROC
  undocumented setting for image processing (fine/fast). Might not be available on some devices.


• IRIS
  undocumented setting for iris setting. Might not be available on some devices.


• LIRIS
  undocumented setting for L-iris setting (whatever that means...). Might not be available on some devices.


• LUMINANCE
  set/get luminance setting (high/low).


• MCFI
  set/get frame interpolation setting.


• MSEL
  set/get background color for A/V mute screen.


• OVSCAN
  set/get overscan ratio.


• POPMEM
  restore image setting from memory slot (1...10), related to PUSHMEM, ERASEMEM.


• PUSHMEM
  save current image setting to memory slot (1...10), related to POPMEM, ERASEMEM.


• PWSTATUS
  undocumented. Gets pwer status (see PWR).


• SHARP
  get sharpness value.


• SHARPset
  set sharpness value.


• SIGNAL
  set/get signal state (e.g 2D/3D).


• SNO
  get serial number of device.


• SOURCE
  set/get current source of video input.


• TINT
  get tint value.


• TINTset
  set tint value.


• VOL
  get volume setting. Normally a multiple of 12 (whyever...).


• VOLset
  set volume. Range is 1...20, since epson wants a multiple of 12 to be set (whyever...).


• VREVERSE
  set/get vertical reverse setting.



The following commands are only available if debug is set to 1. They are not meant for normal operation.
Use at your own risk, might crash fhem if used in the "wrong" situation.
But stay calm - restart always helps (at least I hope so...)


• cleanup
  debug option. Deletes timers, closes connection, kills nonblocking function. Handle with care!


• closeDevice
  debug option. Closes connection to device.


• connect
  debug option. Closes active connection to device and forces reconnect.


• decode
  debug option. Decodes stored json values for set.


• deleteNextOpen
  debug option. Deletes timer for next device open command.


• encode
  debug option. Force new json encoding of set values.


• isOpen
  debug option. Query if connection to device is open and logs result in logfile (verbose 5 required).


• openDevice
  debug option. Force new connection to device. Handle with care.


• reRead
  debug option. Force update of set commands, useful if you changed e.g "AdditionalSettings".


• removeTimer
  debug option. Removes all timers for connection check.



Attributes

• Manufacturer
  Epson|default - is not used currently.


• AdditionalSettings
  cmd1:val_1,...,val_n cmd2:val_1,...,val_n
  You can specify own set commands here, they will be added to the set list.
  Multiple own sets can be specified, separated by a blank.
  command and values are separated by ":", values are separated by ",".
  Example: ASPECT:get,10,20,30 SN:noArg
  Each command with get will we queried when unsing set <name> GetAll
  Might need a restart to be recognized, or use "reRead" setting.


• connectionCheck
  off|(value in seconds)
  value defines the intervall in seconds to perform an connection check. This is useful, since the standard connection handling of fhem (DevIo) will not detect an broken TCP connection, so the state disconnected will only trigger after TCP timeout (60-90 minutes). If you are ok with this, just set it to off.
  Default value is 60 seconds.


• statusCheckInterval
  off|(value in seconds)
  value defines the intervall in seconds to perform an status check. Each interval the projector is queried with the command defined by statusCheckCmd (default: PWR to get power status).
  Default value is 60 seconds.


• statusCheckCmd
  (any command(s) you set)
  Defines the command(s) used by statusCheckInterval. Multiple commands can specified, e.g. PWR LAMP. Default: PWR to get power status.
  Wrong commands or commands without a get will be ignored.


• statusOfflineMsg
  (any message text you set)
  Defines the message to set in the Reading related to statusCheckCmd when the device goes offline. Status of device will be checked after each statusCheckInterval (default: 60s), querying the statusCheckCmd command (default: PWR), and if STATE is disconnected the Reading of statusCheckCmd will be set to this message. Default: offline.


• cyclicConnect
  off|(value in seconds)
  value defines the intervall in seconds to perform an periodic reconnect. Each interval we try to re-open the TCP connectionto the projector. Implemented to work around DevIo not recognizing a server-side broken connection, which can lead to a unnecessary, however non-blocking, system load.
  Default value is 3600 seconds.


• debug
  You won't need it. But ok, if you insist...
  debug will reveal some more set commands, namely encode, decode, reread. They will store the currents sets and results in json format to hidden readings (encode) or restore them (decode). reread will just restore the available set commands for your projector type in case they got "lost". Don't use the other debug commands - unnless you know what you do...
  Default is 0, of course.

ESPEInk

ESPEInk This module implements the possibility to send pictures generated in FHEM to an raw eInk paper connected to an ESP8266 or ESP32 eInk WLAN driver board from waveshare (see details about the board at Wiki ESP8266 Waveshare Driver Board and Wiki ESP32 Waveshare Driver Board).
The module consists of 2 parts. One is the preparation of the picture to be send to the board. Here a template picture can be defined and additional texts can be added. Furthermore it can be specified how the conversion should be done (e.g. if size of template picture should be automatically fit to eInk size, dithering, color mode or monochrome) The second part converts the picture to the right format and sends it to the board and thus changes the display on the eInk paper.

Prerequisites

This module requires an eInk paper raw module from Waveshare (exisiting in different sizes, number of colors and resolutions) and a WLAN driver board (Wiki Waveshare Driver Board). The driver board needs the installation of an adruino sketch as described in the Wiki (see link before). After this the module together with the eInk display only needs power supply. The data exchange between FHEM and the display is done via WLAN. The module further needs installation of the GD library for perl (see installation instructions at GD for Perl and at Image::LibRSVG for Perl).

Define
define <name> ESPEInk <picturefile> [url] [interval] [colormode] [convertmode]

Example: define myEInk ESPEInk /opt/fhem/www/images/test.png

The picturefile parameter must be path to a readable file in the filesystem of FHEM.
[url] is the url of the WLAN driver board (typically an IP address but could also be a Web-URL). This parameter is optional but needed as soon as you want to not only generate the picture but also upload it to the eInk display. For upload it is also necessary to specify the correct device type (default is 1.54inch_e-Paper_Module see also attribute devicetype, for a list of all available device types use get devices).
[interval] is a time interval for regular updates of the information to the eInk display. It automatically converts the inputs and uploads the result to the eInk display and defaults to 300 seconds.
[colormode] can be either color or monochrome and specifies if the inputs should be converted to a fitting color picture or if the conversion should be done in monochrome format.
[convertmode] can be either level or dithering. If level is specified, the conversion transforms the given colors to the ones to the closest color the display is capable of (depending on the display type this can be black, red or yellow). When dithering is specified, the conversion performs a Floyd Steinberg dithering to fit the input picture better to the capabilities of the eInk display.

Set

set <name> <option> <value>

Options:
• addtext
  This option allows to specify a text that should be added to the template picture at any position.
  The value must be given in the form: text#x#y#size#angle#color#font#linegap#blockwidth
  where:
  text is the text that should be added. This is the only mandatory part of the value.
  x is the x-position of the lower left corner of the text relative to the lower left corner of the display area
  y is the y-position of the lower left corner of the text relative to the lower left corner of the display area
  size is the size of the text in pixels. This parameter is only used if a TTF font type is specified (see below)
  angle is the rotation angle (counterclockwise) that should be used when drawing the text. In case of not using TTF fonts (see below), the resulting rotation can be only 0 or 90 degrees.
  color is an RGB hex string that specifies the RGB values of the color respectively (e.g. 00FF00 for green)
  font is either one of small medium large giant or a path to a valid TTF font file in the FHEM file system.
  linegap The distance between consecutive lines if blocksetting is used (see blockwidth below) positive values increase the distance negative values reduce the distance.
  blockwidth The width in pixels of the text block generated by the text string. If the string width on the display is higher than the given width in pixels, an automatic linebreak will be added.
  For each of the specified texts a list of readings and attributes is added to the device. The readings are holding the parameters finally taken for the generation of the output picture. The attributes allow an easy change of the readings (see details in the description below). Once at least one text is specified, the set option removeobject is added.
  
• addicon
  This option allows to specify an icon that should be added to the template picture at any position.
  The value must be given in the form: icon#x#y#size#angle#color
  where:
  icon is the name of the icon that should be added. This is the only mandatory part of the value. Icons can either be specified as fhem icon names (any installed fhem icons are supported), or as url links to web icons
  x is the x-position of the lower left corner of the icon relative to the lower left corner of the display area
  y is the y-position of the lower left corner of the icon relative to the lower left corner of the display area
  size is the size of the icon in pixels. This parameter is only used if a TTF font type is specified (see below)
  angle is the rotation angle (counterclockwise) that should be used when drawing the icon. In case of not using TTF fonts (see below), the resulting rotation can be only 0 or 90 degrees.
  color is an RGB hex string that specifies the RGB values of the color respectively (e.g. 00FF00 for green)
  For each of the specified icons a list of readings and attributes is added to the device. The readings are holding the parameters finally taken for the generation of the output picture. The attributes allow an easy change of the readings (see details in the description below). Once at least one icon is specified, the set option removeobject is added.
  
• addsymbol
  This option allows to specify an symbols (lines, ellipses, rectangles, arcs) that should be added to the template picture at any position.
  The value must be given in the form: symbol#x#y#thickness#angle#color#width#height#segment
  where:
  symbol is specifying which symbol should be drawn. Possible values are line or rectangle or ellipse or arc. If -filled is added, the symbol is filled, if -dotted or -dashed is added, the line is drawn dotted or dashed. For example a symbol value given as 'line-dotted' will draw a dotted line, 'rectangle-filled' will draw a filled rectangle.
  x is the x-position of the lower left corner of the symbol relative to the lower left corner of the display area
  y is the y-position of the lower left corner of the symbol relative to the lower left corner of the display area
  thickness is the thickness of lines or outlines of the symbols drawn.
  angle is the rotation angle (counterclockwise) that should be used when drawing the symbol.
  color is an RGB hex string that specifies the RGB values of the color respectively (e.g. 00FF00 for green)
  width is the width of the symbol (in case of lines, the line is drawn width pixels in x direction and height pixels in y direction).
  height is the width of the symbol (in case of lines, the line is drawn width pixels in x direction and height pixels in y direction).
  segment is only used for arc type symbols. In this case angle (see above) specifies the start of the arc and segment specifices the width of the arc.
  For each of the specified symbols a list of readings and attributes is added to the device. The readings are holding the parameters finally taken for the generation of the output picture. The attributes allow an easy change of the readings (see details in the description below). Once at least one symbol is specified, the set option removeobject is added.
  
• textreading
  This option allows to specify a device:reading as trigger for adding texts to the template picture at any position.
  The value must be given in the form: device:reading#x#y#size#angle#color#font#linegap#blockwidth
  where:
  device:reading specifies a device (and potentially a reading otherwise state will be taken as reading) that should contain the text. This is the only mandatory part of the value. When the internal parameter INTERVAL ist set to 0 (at definition time or through the attribute interval) the change of the reading will directly trigger an update of the result picture and an upload to the device.
  x is the x-position of the lower left corner of the text relative to the lower left corner of the display area
  y is the y-position of the lower left corner of the text relative to the lower left corner of the display area
  size is the size of the text in pixels. This parameter is only used if a TTF font type is specified (see below)
  angle is the rotation angle (counterclockwise) that should be used when drawing the text. In case of not using TTF fonts (see below), the resulting rotation can be only 0 or 90 degrees.
  color is an RGB hex string that specifies the RGB values of the color respectively (e.g. 00FF00 for green)
  font is either one of small medium large giant or a path to a valid TTF font file in the FHEM file system.
  linegap The distance between consecutive lines if blocksetting is used (see blockwidth below) positive values increase the distance negative values reduce the distance.
  blockwidth The width in pixels of the text block generated by the text string. If the string width on the display is higher than the given width in pixels, an automatic linebreak will be added.
  For each of the specified texts a list of readings and attributes is added to the device. The readings are holding the parameters finally taken for the generation of the output picture. The attributes allow an easy change of the readings (see details in the description below). Once at least one text is specified, the set option removeobject is added.
• iconreading
  This option allows to specify a device:reading as trigger for adding icons to the template picture at any position.
  The value must be given in the form: device:reading#x#y#size#angle#color
  where:
  device:reading specifies a device (and potentially a reading otherwise state will be taken as reading) that should contain the icons names (see possible icon names at "addicon" option). This is the only mandatory part of the value. When the internal parameter INTERVAL ist set to 0 (at definition time or through the attribute interval) the change of the reading will directly trigger an update of the result picture and an upload to the device.
  x is the x-position of the lower left corner of the icon relative to the lower left corner of the display area
  y is the y-position of the lower left corner of the icon relative to the lower left corner of the display area
  size is the size of the icon in pixels. This parameter is only used if a TTF font type is specified (see below)
  angle is the rotation angle (counterclockwise) that should be used when drawing the icon. In case of not using TTF fonts (see below), the resulting rotation can be only 0 or 90 degrees.
  color is an RGB hex string that specifies the RGB values of the color respectively (e.g. 00FF00 for green)
  font is either one of small medium large giant or a path to a valid TTF font file in the FHEM file system.
  For each of the specified icons a list of readings and attributes is added to the device. The readings are holding the parameters finally taken for the generation of the output picture. The attributes allow an easy change of the readings (see details in the description below). Once at least one icon is specified, the set option removeobject is added.
• convert
  With this option the conversion can be triggered. Whenever a conversion is triggered, the resulting picture is added as reading result_picture to the device (or an existing reading is changed). Conversion is done "non-blocking" in the backround so that FHEM remains accessible.
• removeobject
  With this option existing text definitions can be removed. The value for this option is a comma separated list of integer numbers refering to the index of the respective texts to be deleted. This option is only available if at least one text has been added to the device with set addtext or set addicon.
• opload
  Uploads the current version of the result picture (result from most recent conversion step) to the eInk display device for display.

Get

get <name> <option>

Currently the only supported get option is get devices. This will display a list of all available device types in a popup window. the get command.

Readings
The following readings are generated by the module:

Readings:
• source_picture
  Displays the given picture template specified at the definition of a device or given by attribute picturefile.
• result_picture
  Displays the result of the most recent conversion once set convert has been issued the first time.
• deftexts
  The number of text attributes defined to be added to the template picture when doing the conversion.
• [0-n]-text
  The text specified for a given text object. [0-n] is an integer number and refers to the index of the text.
• [0-n]-icon
  The icon specified for a given icon object. [0-n] is an integer number and refers to the index of the icon.
• [0-n]-x
  The x-position of the lower left corner of the text relative to the lower left corner of the display area.
• [0-n]-y
  The y-position of the lower left corner of the text relative to the lower left corner of the display area.
• [0-n]-size
  The size of the text in pixels. This parameter is only used if a TTF font type is specified (see below).
• [0-n]-angle
  The rotation angle (degrees counterclockwise) that will be used when drawing the text. In case of not using TTF fonts (see below), the resulting rotation can be only 0 or 90 degrees.
• [0-n]-color
  An RGB hex string that tells the respective RGB values of the color used for displaying the text (e.g. 00FF00 for green).
• [0-n]-font
  Either one of small medium large giant or a path to a valid TTF font file in the FHEM file system specifying the font to be used when displaying the text.
• [0-n]-linegap
  The distance between consecutive lines if blocksetting is used (see blockwidth below) positive values increase the distance negative values reduce the distance
• [0-n]-blockwidth
  The width in pixels of the text block generated by the text string. If the string width on the display is higher than the given width in pixels, an automatic linebreak will be added
• [0-n]-trigger
  The triggering condition of the object if the object is related to areading (see set textreading and set iconreading).
• [0-n]-def
  The initial definition of the object. This is used to reset to inital settings for color, font etc. when attributes are removed.
• [0-n]-isIcon
  Internal setting for marking entry as icon or text.

Attributes
attr <name> <attribute> <value>

See commandref#attr for more info about the attr command. In addition to the standard attributes the following device specific attributes are existing.

Attributes:
• picturefile
  Set the picture template. This parameter must be a path to a readable file in the filesystem of FHEM
• url
  The url of the WLAN driver board the eInk display is connected to (typically an IP address but could also be a Web-URL)
• definition
  This is an alternative to using the set addtext/addicon/addsymbol/textreadin/iconreading command. The attribute contains a list of defintions separated by newline. The syntax of the defintion is the same as in the reading [0-n]-def. It contains the command (addtext or addicon or addsymbol or textreading or iconreading) followed by '#' and then the same defintion values as statet in set (addtext ...) above. Lines starting with a # are ignored and treated as comment lines. Example: addtext#Hello#10#10#12#0#000000#giant
• definitionFile
  This is another alternative to using the set addtext/addicon/addsymbol/textreadin/iconreading command. The attribute holdes the name of a text file containing a list of defintions separated by newline. The syntax of the defintion is the same as in the reading [0-n]-def. It contains the command (addtext or addicon or addsymbol or textreading or iconreading) followed by '#' and then the same defintion values as statet in set (addtext ...) above. Lines starting with a # are ignored and treated as comment lines. Example: addtext#Hello#10#10#12#0#000000#giant
• interval
  The time interval for regular updates of the information to the eInk display. The device automatically converts the inputs and uploads the result to the eInk display in this interval. If this value is set to 0 there will be automatical updates in case a triggering device is specified (see set textreading). Otherwise 0 means no automatic updates.
• mininterval
  The time interval that shall at least be elapsed since the last upload. If the interval since last upload is smaller than this value, not uploads will be performed.
• boardtype
  The type of driver board to be used. Currently ESP8266 and ESP32 driver boards are supported.
• devicetype
  The device type to be used. Refer to get devices for a list of available devices.
• colomode
  Can be either color or monochrome and specifies if the inputs should be converted to a fitting color picture or if the conversion should be done in monochrome format.
• convertmode
  Can be either level or dithering. If level is specified, the conversion transforms the given colors to the ones to the closest color the display is capable of (depending on the display type this can be black, red or yellow). When dithering is specified, the conversion performs a Floyd Steinberg dithering to fit the input picture better to the capabilities of the eInk display.
• width
  The width of the result picture. Is normally taken from the devicetype default settings. Should be only used for non predefined devices.
• height
  The height of the result picture. Is normally taken from the devicetype default settings. Should be only used for non predefined devices.
• x0
  An x-offset for the placement of the source picture into the result picture during conversion. Reference is the lower left corner of the result.
• y0
  An y-offset for the placement of the source picture into the result picture during conversion. Reference is the lower left corner of the result.
• placement
  Tells the conversion algorithm where to place the source picture in the result picture if there are different widths and heights. Can be one of top-left top-right bottom-left bottom-right.
• scale2fit
  If set to 1 the source picture is scaled to fit into the result picture in x and y directions.
• coloroffset
  Provides a possibility for changing the mapping of source colors to result colors. Given in the form r;g;b.
• maxretries
  Set the maximum number of retries for sending data to the WLAN display driver of the eInk display. Whenever the sending of a certain data package is not successful, sending is repeated until succes or number of maxretries is reached. Default is 3.

The following attributes are only available for the defined text objects to be added to the result picture. There is one set of attributes for each defined texts starting with the respective text index before the -


• [0-n]-text
  The text specified for a given text object. [0-n] is an integer number and refers to the index of the text.
• [0-n]-icon
  The icon name or url specified for a given icon object. [0-n] is an integer number and refers to the index of the text.
• [0-n]-x
  The x-position of the lower left corner of the text relative to the lower left corner of the display area.
• [0-n]-y
  The y-position of the lower left corner of the text relative to the lower left corner of the display area.
• [0-n]-size
  The size of the text in pixels. This parameter is only used if a TTF font type is specified (see below).
• [0-n]-angle
  The rotation angle (degrees counterclockwise) that will be used when drawing the text. In case of not using TTF fonts (see below), the resulting rotation can be only 0 or 90 degrees.
• [0-n]-color
  An RGB hex string that tells the respective RGB values of the color used for displaying the text (e.g. 00FF00 for green).
• [0-n]-font
  Either one of small medium large giant or a path to a valid TTF font file in the FHEM file system specifying the font to be used when displaying the text.
• [0-n]-linegap
  The distance between consecutive lines if blocksetting is used (see blockwidth below) positive values increase the distance negative values reduce the distance
• [0-n]-blockwidth
  The width in pixels of the text block generated by the text string. If the string width on the display is higher than the given width in pixels, an automatic linebreak will be added

ESPEasy

Provides access and control to Espressif ESP8266/ESP32 WLAN-SoC w/ ESPEasy

Notes:
• You have to define a bridge device before any logical device can be (automatically) defined.
• You have to configure your ESP to use "FHEM HTTP" controller protocol. Furthermore ESP Easy controller IP must match FHEM's IP address. ESP controller port and the FHEM ESPEasy bridge port must be the same.
• Max. 2 ESPEasy bridges can be defined in the same FHEM instance: 1 for IPv4 and 1 for IPv6
• Further information about this module is available here: Forum #55728 or in this wiki article.
• For security reasons: if one or more of your ESPEasy device uses a public IP address then you have to enable this explicitly or the device(s) will be ignored/rejected:
• Enable all ESPEasy device IP addresses/subnets/regexs with the help of bridge attributes allowedIPs / deniedIPs.
• Enable authentication: see attribute authentication and bridge set user / pass commands.


Requirements:
• ESPEasy build >= R128 (self compiled) or an ESPEasy precompiled image >= R140_RC3
  
• ESPEasy Mega with option to set sleep awake time (Config -> Sleep Mode -> Sleep awake time) is required to control ESP Easy nodes in deep sleep. Receiving sensor values works with all other supported versions.
  
• Perl module JSON. Use "cpan install JSON" or operating system's package manager to install Perl JSON Modul. Depending on your os the required package is named: libjson-perl or perl-JSON.

ESPEasy Bridge

Define (bridge)


define <name> ESPEasy bridge <[IPV6:]port>


• <name>
  Specifies a device name of your choise.
  example: ESPBridge


• <port>
  Specifies TCP port for incoming ESPEasy http requests. This port must not be used by any other application or daemon on your system and must be in the range 1024..65535 unless you run your FHEM installation with root permissions (not recommanded).
  If you want to define an IPv4 and an IPv6 bridge on the same TCP port (recommanded) then it might be necessary on (some?) Linux distributions to activate IPV6_V6ONLY socket option. Use "echo 1>/proc/sys/net/ipv6/bindv6only" or systemctl for that purpose.
  eg. 8383
  eg. IPV6:8383
  Example:
  define ESPBridge ESPEasy bridge 8383



Get (bridge)


• <reading>
  returns the value of the specified reading


• queueSize
  returns number of entries for currently used queue.


• queueContent
  returns queues content.
  • arguments: IP address (can be a regex or omitted to display all queues)


• user
  returns username used by basic authentication for incoming requests.


• pass
  returns password used by basic authentication for incoming requests.



Set (bridge)


• active
  Activates the current device if it was set inactive before. Set active/inactive will be mostly used in scripts without the side effect that the 'red question mark' will be displayed in FHEMWEB that indicates unsaved configuration changes. If attribute disabled is enabled (set to '1') then this set command will be ignored.


• inactive
  Opposite of set command activate


• clearQueue
  Used to erase all command queues.
  required value: <none>
  eg. : set ESPBridge clearQueue


• help
  Shows set command usage
  required values: help|pass|user|clearQueue


• pass
  Specifies password used by basic authentication for incoming requests.
  Note that attribute authentication must be set to enable basic authentication, too.
  required value: <password>
  eg. : set ESPBridge pass secretpass


• reopen
  Reopen TCP/IP server port for incoming connections from ESPs.


• user
  Specifies username used by basic authentication for incoming requests.
  Note that attribute authentication must be set to enable basic authentication, too.
  required value: <username>
  eg. : set ESPBridge user itsme



Attributes (bridge)


• allowedIPs
  Used to limit IPs or IP ranges of ESPs which are allowed to commit data.
  Specify IP, IP/netmask, regexp or a comma separated list of these values. Netmask can be written as bitmask or dotted decimal. Domain names for dns lookups are not supported.
  Possible values: IPv64 address, IPv64/netmask, regexp
  Default: 127.0.0.0/8, 10.0.0.0/8, 172.16.0.0/12, 192.168.0.0/16, fe80::/10, fc00::/7, ::1
  
  Examles:
  

  10.68.30.147	=> IPv4 single address
  10.68.30.0/25	=> IPv4 CIDR network 192.168.30.0-127
  10.68.30.8/255.255.248.0	=> IPv4 CIDR network 192.168.30.8-15
  192.168.30.1([0-4][0-9]|50)	=> IPv4 range w/ regexp: 192.168.30.100-150
  2001:1a59:50a9::aaaa	=> IPv6 single address
  2001:1a59:50a9::/48	=> IPv6 network 2001:1a59:50a9::/48
  2001:1a59:50a9::01[0-4][0-9]	=> IPv6 range w/ regexp: 2001:1a59:50a9::0100-0149

  Note that short IPv6 notation (::) must be used in conjunction with regexps.


• authentication
  Used to enable basic authentication for incoming requests.
  Note that user, pass and authentication attribute must be set to activate basic authentication
  Possible values: 0,1
  Default: 0


• autocreate
  Used to overwrite global autocreate setting.
  Global autocreate setting will be detected by global attribut 'autoload_undefined_devices'
  Possible values: 0,1
  Default: 0 (disabled)


• autosave
  Used to overwrite global autosave setting.
  Global autosave setting w